-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
_ _ _ _ _
_ __ ___ ___ (_) __| | ___ _ __ | |_ ___ __ __(_)| |
| '__|/ _ / __|| | / _` | / _ | '_ | __| / _ / /| || |
| | | __/__ | || (_| || __/| | | || | | __/ V / | || |
| | ___||___/|_| __,_| ___||_| |_|| | ___| _/ |_|| |
/______________________________________/____________________/
** T H E U M B R E L L A C H R O N I C L E S **
---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ----
---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ----
Resident Evil: The Umbrella Chronicles
FAQ/Walkthrough
Version 1.8
Last updated: 1/28/08
Authored by: Berserker
Email: berserker_kev(at)yahoo.com
Homepage: http://www.berserkersblog.blogspot.com
This document Copyright 2007 - 2008 Kevin Hall (Berserker)
Resident Evil: The Umbrella Chronicles Copyright 2007 Capcom Ltd.
---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ----
---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ----
*******************************************************************************
TABLE OF CONTENTS
*******************************************************************************
Section I: Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . [IN00]
Section II: Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . [BS00]
Section III: Walkthrough . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . [WT00]
- Scenario 1: Train Derailment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . [SC01]
-- Train Derailment: Chapter 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . [TD01]
-- Train Derailment: Chapter 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . [TD02]
-- Train Derailment: Chapter 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . [TD03]
- Subscenario 1: Beginnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . [SB01]
-- Beginnings: Chapter 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . [BG01]
-- Beginnings: Chapter 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . [BG02]
- Scenario 2: The Mansion Incident . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . [SC02]
-- The Mansion Incident: Chapter 1 . . . . . . . . . . . [MI01]
-- The Mansion Incident: Chapter 2 . . . . . . . . . . . [MI02]
-- The Mansion Incident: Chapter 3 . . . . . . . . . . . [MI03]
- Subscenario 2: Nightmare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . [SB02]
-- Nightmare: Chapter 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . [NI01]
-- Nightmare: Chapter 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . [NI02]
- Subscenario 3: Rebirth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . [SB03]
-- Rebirth: Chapter 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . [RE01]
-- Rebirth: Chapter 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . [RE02]
- Scenario 3: Raccoon's Destruction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . [SC03]
-- Raccoon's Destruction: Chapter 1 . . . . . . . . . . [RD01]
-- Raccoon's Destruction: Chapter 2 . . . . . . . . . . [RD02]
-- Raccoon's Destruction: Chapter 3 . . . . . . . . . . [RD03]
- Subscenario 4: Death's Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . [SB04]
-- Death's Door: Chapter 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . [DD01]
- Subscenario 5: Fourth Survivor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . [SB05]
-- Fourth Survivor: Chapter 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . [FS01]
- Scenario 4: Umbrella's End . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . [SC04]
-- Umbrella's End: Chapter 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . [UE01]
-- Umbrella's End: Chapter 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . [UE02]
- Subscenario 6: Dark Legacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . [SB06]
-- Dark Legacy: Chapter 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . [DL01]
-- Dark Legacy: Chapter 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . [DL02]
Section IV: Characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . [CS00]
Section V: Enemies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . [EN00]
Section VI: Weapons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . [WE00]
Section VII: File and Item Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . [FI00]
Section VIII: Breakable Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . [BD00]
Section IX: Special Stage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . [SP00]
Section X: Unlockables & Extras . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . [UN00]
Section XI: Frequently Asked Questions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . [FA00]
Section XII: Resident Evil Extra Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . [EI00]
Section XIII: Everything Else . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . [EE00]
- Copyright . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . [CO00]
- Special Thanks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . [ST00]
- Version History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . [VH00]
- Contact Info . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . [CI00]
- About Me . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . [AM00]
- Cheat Happens Featured Guides . . . . . . . . . . . . . . [CH00]
[IN00]
===============================================================================
_____ __ _____ __ ___
_ / /__ /__ /___
/ // / / / // // // //
// /_/ / / / / / _ / _//
____/_ / / / _/___/
I N T R O D U C T I O N
===============================================================================
=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=
Welcome to my Umbrella Chronicles guide, fellow RE fan! - Berserker
=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=
- J U L Y 1 9 9 8 -
The first known incident of the viral outbreak occurred in the Summer of 1998.
It all started on the outskirts of the American Midwestern Town of Raccoon
City, in the Arklay Mountains. The virus eventually spread into the peaceful
community and caused a widespread of panic and chaos as the inhabitants of the
city were transformed into the walking dead through the mutation effects of the
T-virus.
- O C T O B E R 1 9 9 8 -
The President of the United States declared Raccoon City a disaster and ordered
a missile to be launched in order to sterilize the city and keep the virus from
spreading. On the morning of October 1, 1998, Raccoon City was literally wiped
off the map with a destructive blast. Umbrella, the worldwide pharmaceutical
enterprise lead by Ozwell E. Spencer, was to blame for the release of the T-
virus upon the unsuspecting public but little evidence lead to Umbrella
Corporation's involvement. Only a select few knew the full truth as to
Umbrella's guilt but there was no proof.
- - S I X Y E A R S H A V E P A S S E D S I N C E T H A T - -
- H O R R E N D O U S I N C I D E N T -
Fast forward to the year 2004 and Umbrella has been disbanded after an
indefinite suspension of business decree ordered by the President resulting
from new evidence found that proved Umbrella's involvement in the Raccoon City
Incident. The full truth behind the fall of Umbrella is a secret to which only
a select few are aware of. What exactly happened to cause their downfall and
by whom?
- U M B R E L L A C H R O N I C L E S -
Resident Evil: The Umbrella Chronicles answers that question and takes us on a
journey through the untold events that helped to lead to the downfall of the
Umbrella Corporation. Reboard the Ecliptic Express, reenter the Spencer
Estate, relive Raccoon's Destruction, all leading to the epic fight at a secret
Russian Umbrella base that will cause Umbrella to lie in ruin at the hands of a
select few. There are two sides to every story and this tale shares both of
them allowing you to play as the people behind Umbrella and those that pursue
them.
Within this guide, you will find a full detailed walkthrough of all the
Scenarios and Subscenarios of the game along with a full File and Item list
that will help you to complete each stage in its entirety all typed up by an
obsessed Resident Evil fan. Together, we will find the truth behind the rise
and fall of the Umbrella Corporation starting in the Arklay Mountains of
Raccoon City...
If you have any comments, questions, or enjoy what I have done here then send
me an email and tell me about it!
[BS00]
===============================================================================
___ _ __ _____ ___ __
/ __ /_ / _ _ / __/ _
/__// //_ / // /
/ / / _ _ // /_/ /___ _
_____/_/ _/__/____/____/ __/
G E T T I N G S T A R T E D
===============================================================================
=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=
This section contains all the basic information that one must know in order to
survive the horrors of the outbreak in Raccoon City and move forth to Russia to
end Spencer's company once and for all.
=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=
*******************************************************************************
CONTROL SETUPS
*******************************************************************************
--------------------- WII REMOTE (WII-MOTE) AND NUNCHUK ---------------------
>> Remote >> Nunchuk
A = Interact/Collect item C = Switch weapons forward
B = Fire Z = N/A
1 = N/A Analog = Move camera
2 = N/A
- = N/A
+ = Pause menu
Home = Wii Home Menu
D-pad up = Switch weapons forward
D-pad down = Switch weapons backward
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------- ZAPPER/PERFECT SHOT/GUN AND NUNCHUK --------------------
>> Zapper >> Nunchuk
B = Fire C = Switch weapons forward
+ = Pause menu Z = Interact/Collect item
Home = Wii Home Menu Analog = Move camera
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
================
Targeting Cursor
================
The targeting cursor will allow you to get a pinpoint shot on enemies. The bar
on the left side of the cursor shows how much ammo that the currently equipped
weapon carries.
The cursor will change to a plus-shaped icon when highlighting a destroyable
object and the cursor will change to a red dot when it falls over an enemy's
weak point.
=========
Reloading
=========
To reload the currently equipped weapon, swipe/shake the Wii-mote. This can be
changed over to where the Nunchuk must be swiped/shaken if you prefer Zapper
controls.
=======================
Slashing with the Knife
=======================
Hold the A button to make the knife icon display on the upper left hand side of
the screen. The targeting cursor will also appear differently. While holding
the A button, swipe the Wii-mote in any direction to slash with the knife.
Release the A button to reequip the current firearm.
Notice that the on-screen knife slash changed depending on which way you swipe
the remote. This can help since flying enemies will sometimes fly toward
different portions of the screen - just slash at whatever portion of the screen
an enemy is flying toward to hit them.
=================
Tossing a Grenade
=================
Hold the A button then press the B button in order to toss a grenade. The
current number of grenades available is displayed in the upper right hand
corner of the screen during gameplay. Grenades can be collected throughout the
chapter.
==================
On-screen Commands
==================
During action sequence cutscenes, input the command displayed on the screen in
order to dodge an oncoming attack. If the command is not entered in an action
sequence then the character(s) will suffer damage or sometimes die.
While fighting boss creatures, on-screen commands will pop up as the boss
attacks, giving you the option to dodge the attack by inputting the current
command. Be sure to react fast!
While fighting bosses that only require button tap commands, both buttons can
be pressed no matter what button icon appears to insure that you always dodge
the attack. This trick CANNOT be used for action cutscenes however.
==============
Critical Shots
==============
Aim toward an enemy's weak spot and wait for the targeting cursor to change
into a small blinking red light. Shoot at that time to deliver a one-hit kill
to any zombie or severely damage any normal enemy while the handgun is
equipped.
-- Weak Spots
Zombie - Forehead
Crimson Head - Forehead
Eliminator - Head
Cerberus - Head
Ivy - *Inside mouth
Hunter - Head (face)
Chimera - Head
Neptune - Above the mouth (nose)
Crow - Head
Bat - Head
Web Spinner - Front of head above fangs, basically the eyes
Black Tiger - Front of head above fangs, basically the eyes
Licker - Head
Adder - Head
* Shoot the front of the head to make an Ivy open its mouth then shoot the
inside of the mouth.
-- Tips for Gaining Critical Shots:
- Aim at the zombie's forehead directly between its eyes
- Shots in any other portion of their face may cause a zombie's head to turn,
limiting your chances for a critical hit.
- A zombie will remain still for a few seconds after shooting one in the knee
or after throwing off a biting zombie.
- Whenever a zombie must get up from the ground, it will remain still for a few
brief seconds before it begins to move toward the screen.
- While a zombie is nearby or directly in front of the camera, shoot them with
a rapid fire weapon (Submachine Gun) to make them stagger and stand still for
a few seconds then quickly switch to a Handgun and aim for its forehead.
This works just as well on Crimson Heads.
- Blast a zombie with a shotgun then switch to the Handgun and wait until it
gets up. When it stands it will stay still for a few seconds so blast it in
the forehead.
- A Shotgun blast can also knock a zombie into other zombies, which will make
the others fall or stagger them.
- Slash a zombie with the knife whenever it tries to lunge at you then hit it
with the Handgun while it remains still for a few brief seconds.
================
Counterattacking
================
Once a zombie grabs a character, wiggle the Wii-mote to perform a counter
attack. Counter attacks are always a one hit kill on any zombie once a
counterattack sequence is entered correctly. It will even defeat a Crimson
once the command is executed. Counter attacks are character specific.
-- Character Counter Attacks
Billy - Push + Jump Kick
Rebecca - Push + Grenade
Chris - Stab to the Head + Straight Kick
Jill - Taser + Kick
Carlos - 3 Hit Combo with Back End of Submachine Gun
Wesker (Beginnings chapter) - Push + Jump Kick
Wesker (Rebirth chapter +) - Jump Kick + Super Punch (Chikyo Chagi)
Ada - Somersault Kick + Fan Kick
HUNK - Cold Shoulder + Neck Break
NOTE: "Rebirth chapter +" means Rebirth and onwards for Wesker (aka. Dark
Legacy also).
=======
Ranking
=======
At the end of each chapter, you will be ranked based on five categories and how
well you did in each one. Here is the list of categories along with a brief
description of each:
Clear Time - Time taken on a chapter.
Enemy Hits - Number of enemies defeated on a chapter.
Critical Hits - Number of zombie critical shots/headshots on a chapter.
Objects Destroyed - Number of environmental objects destroyed on a chapter.
Files Obtained - Number of hidden files collected on a chapter.
To go into further detail, Clear Time is the total amount of time taken per
chapter - basically defeat every enemy quickly so the character(s) will move
on. Enemy Hits are the total sum of all enemies defeated (regardless of size)
per chapter. Critical Hits represent zombie critical shots which can only be
obtained from a headshot on any normal zombie or a Crimson Head. Objects
Destroyed represents any breakable object found in a chapter that can be shot
(windows, lamps, tables, chairs, etc.). Files Obtained represents the number
of hidden files that were collected in a chapter. Files do not need to be
collected again on a second playthrough once a stage has been finished with a
particular file - the game keeps track of the ones that have been collected.
You will receive a letter rank per category at the end of each stage as
follows:
S - Excellent
A - Very Good
B - Good
C - Poor
The higher the rank, the more stars will be gained at the end of each chapter.
Stars will be given out based on the total summed up rank at the end of each
chapter as follows:
S - 4 stars
A - 3 stars
B - 2 stars
C - 1 star
Stars may be used to upgrade weapons under the "Customize" menu found on the
scenario screen. You can also view your current rank on each difficulty per
stage by clicking on the "Results" menu found on the scenario screen.
Also, you will unlock extra items under the "Archives" menu for each "A" rank
that is received on a chapter in Normal mode and each "S" rank that is received
on a chapter in Hard mode.
===============
Weapon Upgrades
===============
In between chapters, weapons may be upgraded from the "Customize" menu up above
the scenario list. Collect points (displayed as stars) in order to upgrade a
weapon for a certain amount depending on the weapons current level. By using
the "Customize" option, each weapon can be upgraded to Level 4. Level 5
upgrades require an "S" rank on all chapters of hard mode.
=====================
Environmental Objects
=====================
Some objects in the environments can be shot in order to damage nearby enemies
such as red barrels and chandeliers. Red barrels can be extremely useful while
taking on a group of enemies. Chandeliers take a bit more effort (more shots
to destroy) to damage an enemy with them but they're still worth a try. All of
these will increase your "Objects Destroyed" rank once they have been
destroyed.
=====
Items
=====
Throughout the chapters, items will be lying around or possibly hidden in
objects. Some of them will replenish health while others will unlock extras.
Green Herb - restores half of health
First Aid Spray - revives from death one time
File - unlocks hidden file that can be viewed under the "Archives"
menu in between chapters
=====================
Secondary Weapon Ammo
=====================
In each chapter there is a certain weapon that will appear throughout the
chapter no matter what weapon your character currently has equipped. It is
usually best to bring a weapon that is not common on that particular stage,
since you will be able to find a few pickups for it and enjoy having three
(possibly four) weapons instead of two. There are always a few pickups that
will give your characters ammo for whatever secondary weapon that you have, no
matter what it is. These pickups are labeled as "Secondary Weapon Ammo" on the
item lists in the walkthrough.
===============
Two-Player Mode
===============
Any of the main scenarios may be played with two-players. In order to unlock
multiplayer for a Subscenario, all chapters in the game must be completed.
Here is how to configure the game for two-players:
1) Press the "Home" button on the Wii-mote (at the title screen).
2) Select "Wii Remote Settings".
3) Select "Reconnect" under Connection.
4) Press and hold "1" and "2" on each Wii-mote.
First time activation for Wii-motes:
1) Open the slot on the front of Wii where the SD card fits.
2) Press the red "Sync" button inside.
3) Open the battery pack on the controller.
4) Press the red "Sync" button below the batteries.
5) Follow the steps above for setting up two-player mode.
[WT00]
===============================================================================
__ __ _ __ _____ __ ___ ___
/ / / /_ / / / //__ / //__ /___/ / / _ / /
/ / //_ / / / //_/ / // /_/ / // // // / / /_// /_/ /
/ / _ / /___/ __ / / / __ / _ / _// _/ / /_/ __ /
/ /_/ _/____// / / / /_// _/___/ ___/____// /_/
S C E N A R I O & S U B S C E N A R I O G U I D E
===============================================================================
=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=
This walkthrough was wrote while playing on normal mode with default unenhanced
weapons. The only time that I switch from default weapons is when I recommend
a weapon - basically when the default secondary weapon will cause you to get
hit in some parts of a chapter.
File and Item locations are listed throughout the walkthrough in the exact area
where they are obtainable - these are not discussed in the actual writing since
I feel that a reader should know to horde everything much like a Capcom fanboy
at an E3 Capcom booth. Each chapter displays the default weapons for each
character along with many details about that particular chapter. All enemy
names are surrounded in brackets ([]) to help emphasize their appearance.
=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=
----------------------------- S C E N A R I O 1 ------------------------------
J U L Y 2 3, 1 9 9 8
_____ _
|_ _|_ __ __ _ (_) _ __
| | | '__|/ _` || || '_
| | | | | (_| || || | | |
| | |_| __,_||_||_| | |
/ /
____ _ _ _
REBECCA | _ ___ _ __ __ _ (_)| | _ __ ___ ___ _ __ | |_ BILLY
| | | | / _ | '__|/ _` || || || '_ ` _ / _ | '_ | __|
CHAMBERS | |_| || __/| | | (_| || || || | | | | || __/| | | || |_ COEN
|____/ ___||_| __,_||_||_||_| |_| |_| ___||_| |_| __|
[SC01]
|******************* Resident Evil Ø - The Ecliptic Express ******************|
|- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -|
| T R A I N D E R A I L M E N T 1 [TD01] |
|- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -|
| "To uncover the truth, we must delve deeper into the events which |
| transpired in the beginning before the mansion incident." |
|*****************************************************************************|
= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = CHAPTER INFO = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
Rebecca: Samurai Edge 2, Submachine Gun (Lv.1)
Billy : Handgun, Shotgun (Lv.1)
Recommended Secondary Weapon: --
A Rank Item on Normal Mode: Mixing Set
S Rank Item on Hard Mode : Briefcase
Unlockable Weapon: Submachine Gun, Shotgun
Unlockable Scenario/Chapter: "Train Derailment" Chapter 2
= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
== PASSENGER CART 1 ==
Rebecca and Billy will be facing FOUR [ZOMBIES] as control is given to the
player - the fourth zombie will get up from a seat to the left. Press B to
fire and swipe (or shake) the remote to reload. Try to aim for a zombie's
forehead to make the cursor blink red then shoot to get a critical shot (one-
shot kill). Zombies can also be shot in their legs which will make them fall
to their knees and expose their head (without) movement for a few seconds. Use
that time to get a critical headshot.
Try to shoot environmental objects around the area since destroying objects
will help to increase your overall ranking at the end of each scenario. Put
the aiming cursor over an object and watch for the white lines forming a plus
to appear in the middle of the cursor - this means that the object can be
destroyed. You can mainly only shoots lights and chandeliers for the time
being.
The characters will turn and fight ONE [ZOMBIE] then ANOTHER [ZOMBIE]. All
will seem quiet then a GROUP OF [ZOMBIES] will appear from behind the
characters. The characters will take some shots at the zombies then run toward
the door of the train cart. ONE [ZOMBIE] will appear to the left, but the
characters dash right by him.
== STAIRCASE ==
The two characters will walk toward the door below the staircase. Grab the
Green Herb if needed.
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Green Herb - Near the beginning, by a door that zombies move through, in
the room with the staircase that leads up to the second floor.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
As the door slides open, THREE [ZOMBIES] will move through it. The characters
will move toward the stairs and start to walk up to the Dining Room.
/ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
| / [ ] |
| ) o ( F I L E 1 --> Court Order for Transportation |
| / |
| |
| When moving up the stairs for the first time, a zombie will meet the |
| characters at the top and stand still. Don't shoot him just yet! Look |
| directly up and to the left then shoot the furthest light on the left wall. |
| If you miss, then while stepping away from the many leeches in the dining |
| cart, shoot the light above the staircase from the other side of the room - |
| it's very far back but still shootable. |
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - /
A [ZOMBIE] will stand at the top of the stairs. Now is the best time to see
exactly where their critical shot area is. Aim for his forehead while he
stands still and blast him for a one-hit kill!
== DINING ROOM ==
The two characters will look back down the stairs and a total of FOUR [ZOMBIES]
will appear below the stairs before the characters turn. Pick up the ammo on
the left and right table while moving across the middle of the room and check
for the files labeled above and below.
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Grenade - On the first table to the left while getting off the staircase
and entering the dining room.
[ ] Submachine Gun Ammo - On the second table to the right while stepping into
the dining room.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
/ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
| / [ ] |
| ) o ( F I L E 2 --> Memo on the Founding of Umbrella |
| / |
| |
| Shoot the far chair at the second right table once both characters enter |
| the second floor dining cart. |
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - /
[LEECHES] will start to move out from under the tables and attack in the center
of the room. Shoot at them with the handgun and hold the A button then perform
a slashing motion with the Wii-mote in order to slash any leeches that stick to
the screen. Rebecca and Billy will eventually turn to find a wall full of
leeches and they will start to back up as leeches begin to overflow the room.
Shoot at the [LEECHES] with the handgun then hold A and tap the B button to
toss a grenade into the middle of the room once the two characters move to the
other side to nearly clear the room of leeches and rack up some major kills for
this chapter. The leeches will start to form into a humanoid shape known as
Leech Man. Shoot the [LEECH MAN] when he forms completely - the handgun works
just fine while fighting one Leech Man or you can use the shotgun. Rebecca and
Billy will climb outside eventually and get on top of the train.
== ON TOP OF THE FIRST CART ==
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] First Aid Spray - Right after climbing the ladder to the top of the train
this will be to the right.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
[LEECHES] will be crawling along the top of the cart so shoot at them with the
handgun then slash at them if they stick to the screen. Remember that each
leech counts as a kill, so always keep shooting if there are any leeches left.
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Green Herb - When Rebecca and Billy move by the second set of leeches on
top of the first train cart, look into the hole in the middle of the train to
quickly catch a glimpse of this in the room through the hole.
[ ] Secondary Weapon Ammo - At the end of the first cart before Rebecca and
Billy jump to the second cart. This can be noticed from very far away.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
== ON TOP OF THE SECOND CART ==
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Grenade - While fighting the two crawling zombies on top of the second
train cart, this will be lying behind the left zombie.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Billy and Rebecca will jump to the second cart and move forward then TWO
[ZOMBIES] will crawl forward, so be sure to look down and shoot them. They
kind of blend in with the current storm. The characters will jump to the next
cart afterward.
== ON TOP OF THE THIRD CART ==
Shoot and slash the swarm of [LEECHES] at the end of the third cart until the
two characters decide to jump into the room below.
== Room ==
*********************** C H E C K P O I N T **************************
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Submachine Gun Ammo - After the checkpoint, destroy the door to the outside
corridor before the characters open the door and this will be lying on the
floor to the right when the characters look to the right.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Both characters will exit the room then a choice of paths will be given when
they look out into the corridor. Always choose to move to the right when
prompted (unless you are playing this stage for better time). Take too long
with this decision and the [ZOMBIE] in the room behind both characters will
awaken and attack then the characters will be forced to turn left.
== Train Corridor ==
While taking the right path, Rebecca and Billy will stand at the edge of a
corridor leading to the next cart and a total of FOUR [DOGS] will start to
attack.
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Green Herb - Choose to turn to the right after stepping out of the room
that both characters drop to after maneuvering along the outside and this will
be at the end of the corridor that they stare down. Dogs will attack from the
other side of the corridor. (NOT ON HARD MODE)
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
/ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
| / [ ] |
| ) o ( F I L E 3 --> Rebecca Chambers Profile |
| / |
| |
| Use the on-screen command to turn right after exiting the room that is |
| jumped to from the top of the train and shoot the light near the door at |
| the end of the corridor. Dogs will attack here and Billy and Rebecca will |
| not go down the corridor so you must hit it from a distance. |
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - /
Try to shoot each dog in the head for an instant kill. Always shoot them if
they ever start to dash toward the characters. Both characters will eventually
back off from the corridor as the fourth dog approaches - they will turn and go
back the other way. The [ZOMBIE] that was lying in the room from before will
attack on their way back. The characters will pass by the door of the room
where they jumped in from then continue down the corridor ahead.
/ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
| / [ ] |
| ) o ( F I L E 4 --> Billy Coen Profile |
| / |
| |
| Blast the cabinet on the left before moving down the stairs of the corridor |
| where you have a choice of paths to find this. Shooting the chandelier |
| right before getting to the stairs will expose this also. |
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - /
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Shotgun Ammo - In front of the staircase that both characters take down to
the first floor.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
The characters will begin to move down the staircase to the first floor once
again.
== PASSENGER CART 2 ==
This room is full of zombies, but they are all hidden for the moment. Blast
the chandeliers found around the room to make them fall on enemies. It pays to
start shooting some of the chandeliers before the characters even get to them
in order to make them fall quicker when needed.
After Rebecca's attempt at smartmouthing, ONE [ZOMBIE] will crawl toward the
characters. ANOTHER [ZOMBIE] will get up from the characters' left once the
crawling one has been taken car of. Headshot him since he stands still and is
rather close. ONE MORE [ZOMBIE] will appear from the right.
The two characters will move forward again toward some dead bodies in the
middle of the car, but they will be interrupted from some moans from behind.
They will turn to face TWO [ZOMBIES] that step through the doorway behind them.
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Secondary Weapon Ammo - After walking downstairs, when the two characters
start to move down the train corridor then suddenly turn their backs as a group
of zombies move through the door behind them, shoot the light on the left to
find this item.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Once the two zombies have been taken care of, the characters will turn back
around and THREE [ZOMBIES] will get up from the floor. Shoot the chandelier to
get rid of about two of them.
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Green Herb - While the zombies get up in the middle of the corridor of
Passenger Cart 2, this will be lying next to the pair of zombies on the left.
(NOT ON NORMAL OR HARD MODE)
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
/ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
| / [ ] |
| ) o ( F I L E 5 --> Ecliptic Express Notes |
| / |
| |
| After moving downstairs, blast the small light above the exit door. This |
| is the room where many zombies will pop one at a time near the end - the |
| two characters will turn and face each of them individually. |
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - /
The characters will walk toward the door but [ZOMBIES] will appear from the
left, right, right, and left all in sequence. The characters will exit the
cart then enter the next cart.
== LEECH HALLWAY ==
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Shotgun Ammo - As the two characters step into the room with the leech
corridor, they will look to the right. This ammo will be on a table as they
look to the right. This train cart is right after the train cart where the two
characters turn in many directions to face zombies that get up from around the
passenger seats.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Pick up the ammo from the right as the characters enter the room. They will
look down the leech-infested corridor ahead and decide to make a run for it.
Slash at the [LEECHES] on the right wall to get plenty of kills while dashing
through the corridor.
/ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
| / [ ] |
| ) o ( F I L E 6 --> Stinger Notes |
| / |
| |
| Shoot the pile of boxes after the two characters run through the corridor |
| of leeches. They automatically make a run through this corridor, so just |
| shoot the boxes once they stop running. |
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - /
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Green Herb - Right after the two move down the leech corridor, this will be
next to the corner of the hall on the right.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
All will be silent as the characters move down the corridor ahead. The dead
body lying against the wall below the broken window will remain motionless as
the two pass by it and go outside.
== FRONT OF THE TRAIN ==
The characters will step outside then ONE [ZOMBIE] will attack from the right,
followed by TWO [ZOMBIES] from up ahead as the duo presses forward. The
characters will move toward the door up ahead. A cutscene that requires a
button push will play.
* Input the on-screen command to dodge the Stinger's claw.
As Rebecca states the obvious, both characters will quickly run back to the
previous cart. The [ZOMBIE] lying against the wall to the right will attack.
TWO MORE [ZOMBIES] will suddenly appear from the left corridor after the first
one is defeated. The characters progress will be interrupted by several
[LEECHES] and a [LEECH MAN] from the corridor up ahead, so they will hurry into
the room to the right.
/ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
| / [ ] |
| ) o ( F I L E 7 --> Raccoon Forest Notes |
| / |
| |
| In the room that both characters duck into after running into a Leech Man, |
| shoot the books on the left on the top shelf of the bookcase. The |
| characters will look to the left but move the analog to the left as well |
| since they will turn. |
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - /
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Green Herb - Once the two characters duck into the small room to evade the
Leech Man, this will be lying on a table to the left.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
The characters will quickly climb the ladder to the cart above.
== FIRST CLASS ROOM ==
The characters will look around the room then turn and a cutscene will play.
===============================================================================
---------------------------- B O S S B A T T L E -----------------------------
Boss - Stinger
Recommended Weapon: Submachine Gun
Weapon Point: Head and Tail
--> GO FOR THE TAIL
Equip the Submachine Gun at the beginning of the battle and begin to shoot at
the Stinger's tail. Aim for the stinger portion at the top of his tail and
keep laying down firepower.
--> SHOOT THE HEAD ONCE THE TAIL IS DAMAGED
His tail will eventually fall to the left and he will move his front arms back
and forth at that time. Use this time to blast the front of it's head.
--> WHEN HE COVERS HIS HEAD
While he covers his head, aim at his tail (either in the back of him or on the
floor) and fire at the tail to take more damage from him instead of hitting his
armored claws.
--> WHEN HE BACKS UP AND PREPARES TO LUNGE
He will eventually back up and try to lunge forward and sting the group with
his tail. Aim up at his tail and keep the cursor in the center top portion of
the screen then keep blasting at his tail as he comes toward the screen. This
will cancel the attack the stinging attack.
--> WHEN HE SNAPS
Whenever he raises either arm back to attack, you will have to dodge his
snapping attack by performing the on-screen command that will display. These
commands are quite fast, so watch for them and try to enter them as quickly as
possible.
--> THE BOTTOM LINE
Shoot him with the Submachine Gun from a distance then shoot him with the
shotgun when he gets up close. You mainly want to switch to the Shotgun only
when his head is not covered (the moment his tail falls).
/ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
| / [ ] |
| ) o ( F I L E 7 --> Leech Notes |
| / |
| |
| Shoot the far chair near the right wall while fighting the Scorpion boss. |
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - /
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Green Herb - On the right floor.
[ ] Submachine Gun Ammo - Shoot the chair on the back right side.
[ ] Shotgun Ammo - Shoot the table lamp on the right table.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
===============================================================================
|****************** Resident Evil Ø - The Training Facility ******************|
| T R A I N D E R A I L M E N T 2 [TD02] |
|- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -|
| "Obedience breeds discipline, discipline breeds unity, unity breeds power, |
| power is life." |
|- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -|
|*****************************************************************************|
= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = CHAPTER INFO = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
Rebecca: Samurai Edge 2, Submachine Gun (Lv.1)
Billy : Handgun, Shotgun (Lv.1)
Recommended Secondary Weapon: --
A Rank Item on Normal Mode: Statue of Evil/Good
S Rank Item on Hard Mode : Relief of Discipline/Obedience/Unity
Unlockable Weapon: --
Unlockable Scenario/Chapter: "Train Derailment" Chapter 3
= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
== TRAIN WRECKAGE ==
Both characters will be standing near the burning train wreckage as this
chapter begins. Soon a GROUP OF [ZOMBIES] will move out from behind the train.
Try for headshots or throw a grenade. The characters will turn to the right
shortly while facing the door and TWO [ZOMBIES] will attack from the side.
== SEWER TUNNEL ==
Once the characters step through the door they will enter a sewage tunnel.
They will cautiously look around both ways after jumping into the sewage then
walk to the left.
/ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
| / [ ] |
| ) o ( F I L E 1 --> Memo about Billy's Past |
| / |
| |
| Once the characters enter the sewer, they will look right then left. Shoot |
| the light in the top corner near the ceiling when they look to the left. |
| The pair will turn to the right to notice zombies further down the waterway |
| so it can be shot then as well - look for the closest light on the left |
| wall at that time. |
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - /
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Secondary Weapon Ammo - After the characters walk through the sewers, they
will look toward the ladder and this will be next to the ladder.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
While looking at the ladder they will be interrupted by THREE [ZOMBIES] that
will lurch toward them from the side of the sewers that they just came from as
the characters turn to the right. Once the zombies are defeated, the
characters will climb up the ladder.
/ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
| / [ ] |
| ) o ( F I L E 2 --> James Marcus Profile |
| / |
| |
| At the top of the ladder, shoot the candle on the wall to the right of the |
| front door. |
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - /
== TRAINING FACILITY MAIN HALL ==
Be sure to blast anything that you can see while the characters help each other
up and look around - blast the candles, vases, tables, chairs, etc. They will
approach the middle staircase and start to move up it as they look toward the
picture of Marcus.
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Grenade - On the left side of the statue in front of the second floor
double doors leading to the lecture room (above the picture of Marcus).
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
/ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
| / [ ] |
| ) o ( F I L E 3 --> Mimicry Marcus Notes |
| / |
| |
| Above the picture of Dr. Marcus, two large statues lie against the wall on |
| the sides of the double doors - shoot the statue on the right and make it |
| break to reveal this. |
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - /
A recording of Dr. Marcus will begin to play as the characters view a portrait
of the late doctor. Both characters will walk up the staircase to the right.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
[ ] Submachine Gun Ammo - While moving up the staircase to the right after
looking at Marcus' portrait, this will be hanging on the second floor wall to
the left.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
All is silent until the characters look upwards then all hell breaks loose as a
swarm of [LEECHES] begin to drop from the ceiling and some of them will form a
[LEECH MAN]. The leeches can be shot away fast enough to where you won't have
to fight as many Leech Men on this floor, so keep that in mind when they start
to gather. Once they start to drop from the ceiling and the characters start
to back up, you may want to switch over to the Submachine Gun to shoot the
Leeches and the Leech Man since the Leeches will try to latch onto the screen
as the Leech Man approaches. Slash at the Leeches then quickly shoot the Leech
Man. [LEECHES] will drive the characters to the other side of the second
floor.
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Green Herb - Right before moving to the second floor double doors, this
will be on the floor to the left. (NOT ON HARD MODE)
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
When the characters approach the double doors on the second floor, the doors
will swing open and a [LEECH MAN] will attack. TWO [LEECH MEN] will step
through the doorway once the first one has been defeated. Have a grenade ready
to throw once the two Leech Men appear or shoot them with a Submachine Gun or
Shotgun. Don't worry about conserving grenades in this chapter - use them
whenever you feel the need.
== LECTURE ROOM ==
Once again all is silent as the characters look toward the seating area and
work their way toward a small table with a typewrit... er, a lamp.
/ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
| / [ ] |
| ) o ( F I L E 4 --> Eliminator Notes |
| / |
| |
| After stepping through the double doors and into the lecture room, shoot |
| the small lamp on the table with the green herb. |
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - /
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Green Herb - The characters will walk toward a small table in the Lecture
Room with this item on it.
[ ] Shotgun Ammo - Destroy the potted plant to the right of the small table
that the characters approach in the Lecture Room.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
The characters will be interrupted by sudden moans from the back of them. They
will turn around to find TWO [ZOMBIES] behind them. Not taking any chances,
the characters will hop over the railing and move to the other side of the
lecture room as MORE [ZOMBIES] start to rise from the seating area.
Be sure to try for as many headshots as you can get since this will be your
last encounter with zombies for this level. You can shoot the middle
chandelier in order to take out a few but headshots would be the best way to
go. The one zombie to the immediate right in the group can get too close for
comfort sometimes, so take care of him right away. For an easy headshot, aim
at the forehead of the CRAWLING [ZOMBIE] as the characters move across the
seating area.
The characters will stare at the zombies for a few seconds then turn and run
out the door. Throw a grenade into the middle of the seating area to rack up
some kills if there are any zombies left once the characters begin to leave.
== OUTSIDE BALCONY ==
The characters will walk to the end of the balcony then a cutscene will play
eventually.
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Submachine Gun Ammo - At the end of the outside second floor balcony.
[ ] Green Herb (<--NOT ON NORMAL OR HARD MODE)
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
After the cutscene, equip the Submachine Gun since Eliminators are about to
appear. ONE [ELIMINATOR] will appear once the characters turn then TWO MORE
[ELIMINATORS] will appear as the characters turn again. These things can be
killed by shooting them directly in the head with a handgun shot, but it takes
some good aiming since they move around a lot. Using a handgun isn't really
all that hard once you get used to it. Use the Submachine Gun and try to aim
for the head if this is your first time playing. If any of them ever jump
toward the screen then aim upward and shoot that Eliminator down to stop its
jump attack.
The characters will walk toward the dead end then AN [ELIMINATOR] will appear
from behind the right column - try to headshot this one with the handgun since
he will walk for a few seconds. While the team leaves, ONE [ELIMINATOR] will
race around the corner from the left and dash after them then TWO [BATS] will
fly toward them from behind as they turn to the left. The bats can always be
killed with one shot from any weapon, but it pays to slash with the knife as
they get close to the characters most of the time. Rebecca and Billy will walk
back into the Lecture Room then a check point will occur in front of the door
to the corridor.
*********************** C H E C K P O I N T **************************
== CORRIDOR ==
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Shotgun Ammo - While the first set of Leeches chase the characters, point
to the right and destroy the double doors that lead to the Library. The
Shotgun Ammo will be inside the Library. Destroying the doors will cause the
characters to immediately move into the Library if done early and limit your
chances for collecting the file in this area if you didn't get it while
fighting the Leech Man.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
A [LEECH MAN] will appear from the far side of the hall once the characters
move down the corridor. [LEECHES] will begin to gather behind the group as
they turn around. The double doors to the right can be destroyed with a
secondary weapon as the first group of leeches cause the characters to move
down the hall, but this will limit your chances for obtaining the next file and
also limit your kills for this chapter, but you'll gain some extra shotgun ammo
in the process.
/ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
| / [ ] |
| ) o ( F I L E 5 --> Bat Notes |
| / |
| |
| After the checkpoint, when the characters enter the small corridor, shoot |
| the bust on the left at the end of the corridor. It's best to wait until |
| the leeches attack from below the side with the bust. |
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - /
When they move to the other end of the hall more [LEECHES] will appear from the
right side making the characters run back to the middle of the hall and open
the door to the middle room.
== LIBRARY ==
The [LEECHES] from outside will continue their pursuit and possibly form a
[LEECH MAN] if they are not killed quickly enough.
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Grenade - On the desk to the right after entering the Library.
[ ] Green Herb - Next to the elevator in the Library.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
/ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
| / [ ] |
| ) o ( F I L E 5 --> Bat Notes |
| / |
| |
| Once both characters finish the Leech Man/Leeches at the door of the study |
| they will turn and look at the elevator - shoot the table with the pen |
| stand while looking down and to the right. Basically, aim and shoot |
| downward then to the right while the characters look toward the elevator. |
| The desk is extremely close to the characters. |
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - /
Both characters will get on the elevator and FOUR [ELIMINATORS] will appear as
they step toward it so take out the Submachine Gun and shoot at them to keep
them away.
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Secondary Weapon Ammo - Shoot the chair in front of the computers while the
characters are on the elevator. The Eliminators will be attacking at this
time.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
== GEAR ROOM ==
When the characters turn at the top of the elevator a [LEECH MAN] will attack
on the top floor.
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] First Aid Spray - While the characters back away from the elevator on the
floor above the study, shoot the plaque on the wall. This plaque can also be
seen if you look to the right while the Leech Man attacks.
[ ] Submachine Gun Ammo - After moving up the elevator, shoot the middle row
item on the right shelf while the characters back up.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Once the characters move to the other side of the room, [LEECHES] will crawl
out from underneath a shelf and begin to jump at the team.
== FOUNTAIN COURTYARD ==
A total of THREE [ELIMINATORS] will attack from the left after the characters
look off the side of the balcony. As they approach the lift off to the side,
they will turn as TWO [BATS] attack from the right followed by AN [ELIMINATOR]
that will hop over the elevator to the right.
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Green Herb - Near the fountain in the outside area. (NOT ON NORMAL OR HARD
MODE)
[ ] Submachine Gun Ammo - When the Eliminators attack in the outside area after
the elevator, this will be against the left side of the back railing.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
== CAGE ROOM ==
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Shotgun Ammo - On a cage to the right as the characters back into the cage
room.
[ ] Green Herb - After defeating the first set of Eliminators, this will be on
the ground to the right as the characters back up and prepare for the second
wave. It can be seen from across the room when the characters first enter the
cage room also.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
An action sequence will occur where some Eliminators will jump at the group
once they step further into the room.
* Input the on-screen command to dodge the Eliminator's attack.
After the action sequence, throw a grenade or equip the Submachine Gun and
shoot the THREE [ELIMINATORS] in front of the team. Both characters will step
to the other side of the room. TWO [ELIMINATORS] will step out from behind the
fence to the right then THREE [ELIMINATORS] will hop out from the left. Throw
a grenade at the group of three Eliminators as they jump to get rid of them
then keep them at bay with a Submachine Gun.
Use the handgun to shoot the two suits of armor that block the door in order to
enter the Observatory.
== OBSERVATORY ==
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Green Herb - While moving through the doors of the observatory, after
shooting both armors, shoot the left set of boxes - it's in the far right box.
[ ] Grenade - On top of the boxes on the bottom floor of the observatory.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
As the characters look up, a SWARM OF [LEECHES] will attack the them. Slash at
them as they jump toward the screen and shoot them with the handgun or
Submachine Gun while they are on the ground. A total of FOUR [LEECH MEN] will
appear as the characters step away from the gathering leeches, so equip the
Submachine Gun and get ready. Slash at the leeches that jump toward the screen
to clear the view in order to shoot the Leech Men. Toss grenades when two of
them are almost formed in order to instantly defeat them.
Shoot the [LEECHES] off of the double doors completely and the characters will
open the doors and step outside.
===============================================================================
---------------------------- B O S S B A T T L E -----------------------------
Boss - Infected Bat
Recommended Weapon: Submachine Gun
Weak Point: Head
--> SHOOT IT CONSTANTLY
Whenever the Infected Bat is flying around anywhere in the area, shoot at it
with the Submachine Gun or the Handgun.
--> SHOOT IT IN THE HEAD WHENEVER POSSIBLE
It's best to hit this boss in the head if you're aiming is good, but while it
flies in the background, hitting it anywhere on its body with the Submachine
Gun or the Handgun does decent damage.
--> WHEN IT ATTACKS BY DASHING
Each time the bat shows itself, it will eventually fly toward both characters
and try to claw them. When it dashes toward the screen, hit it in the head to
cancel this dash attack. Hit it with either the Submachine Gun or the Handgun
while it flies toward the screen. If you really want to take off some good
damage then blast it with a Shotgun blast to the head right before it hits both
characters then keep blasting it while it flies in place for a brief seconds.
--> AN OVERVIEW OF THE FIGHT
Begin to shoot the bat with either the Submachine Gun or the Handgun as it
flies around in the background while both characters are on the bridge. It
will eventually fly toward both characters and try to attack, so shoot it in
the head to make it stop.
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Green Herb - In front of the church doors and to the right.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Both characters will race toward the front of the church once the bat retreats.
SOME SMALLER [BATS] will show up, so prepare to slash them as they get close to
the screen or equip the handgun or Submachine Gun and blast them. Slashing the
bats does not always work, so try to hit them with a gun from a distance. The
Infected Bat will show up once more after the smaller bats are defeated and
will attempt to attack with another dash attack. Get a few hits on it to drive
it off.
The characters will move to the back of the church. THREE SMALLER [BATS] will
appear from the side then ONE MORE SMALLER [BAT] will attack from the left.
While in the back courtyard, TWO SMALLER [BATS] will appear then the Infected
Bat will appear once again and try to attack. Shoot it in the head then fill
it full of Submachine Gun blasts as it retreats. TWO SMALLER [BATS] will
charge the characters after the Infected Bat retreats.
The characters will climb the ladder and the Infected Bat will try to attack
while they are on the ladder. When both characters make it to the top, collect
the items.
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Green Herb - On the roof of the church.
[ ] Shotgun Ammo
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
The characters will look around for the bat and it will finally appear directly
above them.
--> IT WILL SEND SMALLER BATS TOWARD THE CHARACTERS TO ATTACK
For it's first attack at the top of the church, the Infected Bat will send SIX
SMALLER [BATS] out from its wings while it hovers in the air. Equip the
Submachine Gun and blast the sides of the Infected Bats wings to kill the
smaller bats. Stray bullets will hit the Infected Bat.
--> WEARING DOWN THE INFECTED BAT
The fight becomes much easier while the Infected Bat hovers around the church
roof. Just keep constant firepower on it no matter what weapon you currently
have equipped and it will fall shortly. It always switches between its attacks
every other turn - small bat attack, dash attack, small bat attack, dash
attack, etc. Show no mercy and keep your mind on all those missed flame
grenade rounds this bastard took from your characters in Resident Evil Ø.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
===============================================================================
|******************* Resident Evil Ø - The Underground Labs ******************|
|- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -|
| T R A I N D E R A I L M E N T 3 [TD03] |
|- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -|
| "Dr. Marcus?" |
|*****************************************************************************|
= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = CHAPTER INFO = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
Rebecca: Samurai Edge 2, Submachine Gun (Lv.1)
Billy : Handgun, Shotgun (Lv.1)
Recommended Secondary Weapon: --
A Rank Item on Normal Mode: Blue/Green Leech Charm
S Rank Item on Hard Mode : Sterilizing Agent
Unlockable Weapon : Grenade Launcher AT
Unlockable Chapter: "Beginnings" Chapter 1, "Mansion Incident" Chapter 1
= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
== TRAIN WRECKAGE ==
The characters will start next to a railcart. They will turn and approach the
stairs up ahead.
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Grenade - Shoot the standing red cone to the right as the characters walk
toward the first set of steps.
[ ] First Aid Spray - At the top of the first set of stairs at the beginning.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
/ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
| / [ ] |
| ) o ( F I L E 1 --> Resident Evil 0 Digest |
| / |
| |
| While the first crawling zombie crawls toward the characters, look to the |
| right and shoot the big light by the railing. |
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - /
While walking toward the next set of stairs a CRAWLING [ZOMBIE] will move
toward the team. Blast him then the characters will walk up the stairs and
head for the outside turntable.
== TURNTABLE AREA ==
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Shotgun Ammo - While fighting the first two zombies in the area with the
turntable, this will be next to the back right wall.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Blast the TWO [ZOMBIES] that appear. While stepping further into the room, an
[ELIMINATOR] will jump down from the ceiling.
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Grenade Launcher Ammo - While looking out toward the turntable, shoot the
set of lights on the back left in the background.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
While moving out to the turntable, ANOTHER [ELIMINATOR] will jump down from the
ceiling making the characters turn to face it. FOUR [ZOMBIES] will appear from
the right. Quickly equip the Submachine Gun after finishing the zombies since
TWO [ELIMINATORS] will jump from the ceiling and chase the characters onto the
turntable. TWO MORE [ELIMINATORS] will hop out from the left side once the
first two are taken care of.
On the characters' journey back to the front of the turntable, THREE
[ELIMINATORS] will hop down from the ceiling and chase the team to the middle
of the turntable. It's actually easy to hit them all with a handgun directly
in the head since they don't attack for quite a while.
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Secondary Weapon Ammo - On a crate right near the light where the Grenade
Launcher Ammo is located.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
The characters will move around the edge of the turntable and activate it via
the control panel while keeping an eye on those dead bodies to the side.
== TURNTABLE ==
ONE [ZOMBIE] will get up then the other TWO [ZOMBIES] will follow as the lift
descends. The characters will back up then turn around to face ONE [ZOMBIE]
followed by THREE [ZOMBIES].
Equip a Submachine Gun since [LEECHES] will fall in front of the characters and
a [LEECH MAN] will form. After disposing of the first Leech Man, the
characters will move away then a [LEECH MAN] will appear from their right.
While running away from the Leeches the group will turn to face another [LEECH
MAN] and group of [LEECHES]. Once the characters look up toward the wall of
lights, the fight on the turntable is over.
== BOTTOM TURNTABLE AREA ==
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Green Herb - Once the turntable gets to the bottom, this will be on the
floor behind the left pair of zombies.
[ ] Shotgun Ammo - While facing the group of six zombies mentioned above, shoot
the green light above the right door.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
/ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
| / [ ] |
| ) o ( F I L E 2 --> Resident Evil 0 Digest 2 |
| / |
| |
| After the turntable stops, zombies will appear from the side of the room as |
| the characters look on. Shoot the light on the ceiling of the elevator |
| corridor where two zombies lurch. This light is to the left of the green |
| light. |
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - /
A total of SIX [ZOMBIES] will be lurking about in the open area up ahead. The
characters will consider their options then decide to take on the THREE CLOSER
[ZOMBIES] behind them and move by them on their way to the elevator.
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Shotgun Ammo - Once the turntable is at the bottom, when the characters
face the three zombies behind them this will be on the back left.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
A cutscene will play after the characters press the elevator button.
===============================================================================
---------------------------- B O S S B A T T L E -----------------------------
Boss - Prototype Tyrant
Recommended Weapon: Handgun
Weak Point: Exposed Heart
--> SHOOT THE HEART
When the Tyrant starts to walk toward the characters, aim at his outside heart
and begin to blast it. A handgun works just fine - don't even switch to
another weapon unless you're in a hurry.
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Green Herb - While fighting the Prototype Tyrant look to the right to find
this on the floor, or when stepping behind his back look to the left. (NOT ON
HARD MODE)
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
The Tyrant will begin to stagger as his heart is blasted and this is when you
should reload. Don't wait until the handgun is completely out of ammo to
reload! He will hit both characters if he is not stunned every few seconds.
He will stagger after just about every 3 shots.
The characters will eventually move behind the Tyrant. Wait for him to turn
then keep laying down fire on his heart. He will fall shortly. While in the
back of him, you may want to switch to the Submachine Gun since he will attack
more often from his closer range. Stun him by shooting him in the heart like
before to keep him from attacking. Oh, how the less mighty can still have
their ass handed to them just like in REØ!
Equip a Submachine Gun unless you have some really good aiming because once the
elevator doors open, a group of FOUR [ZOMBIES] will attack. Shoot any of them
that try to take a swing at the characters in the hope of stunning it. The
characters will step into the elevator after the fight then take it down.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
===============================================================================
*********************** C H E C K P O I N T **************************
== ELEVATOR ==
[LEECHES] will start to drop from the ceiling as the characters look up so
start blasting them with a handgun and use the knife to keep them off the
screen. Thankfully the doors to the elevator will open shortly.
== PIPE ROOM ==
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Grenade - When the characters back up then swing around to the left after
getting out of the elevator, look to the left and grab this from the pipes to
the side. You can see this better by looking to the left while fighting the
second Leech Man.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
The characters will step out of the elevator and make sure that the [LEECHES]
inside do not get the best of them as they back up. They will turn around to
find a spawning [LEECH MAN] along with a wall of [LEECHES] to its back then
turn back around to find yet another [LEECH MAN] once the first one is
defeated. You can use the Grenade Launcher in here to instantly kill the Leech
Men and defeat plenty of Leeches in the process but make sure to save at least
five grenades the battles ahead. Both Leech Men can be taken down with a
handgun but be sure to equip the Submachine Gun as TWO [ELIMINATORS] attack
while the characters move to the other side of the pipes. One more [LEECH MAN]
will spawn in front of the door before the characters can exit. After blasting
it, the characters will finally move outside.
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Green Herb - After fighting the two Eliminators in the Pipe Room this will
be against the left wall of the other side of the room.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
== CORRIDOR TO EMERGENCY EXIT ==
An action sequence will play while moving down the corridor.
* Input the on-screen command in order to outrun the exploding pipes.
A cutscene will play after the action sequence.
===============================================================================
---------------------------- B O S S B A T T L E -----------------------------
Boss - Mimicry Marcus/Dr. Marcus/Leech Queen
Recommended Weapon: Handgun or Shotgun
Weak Point: None
--> NO WEAK POINT!?
Basically you have to hit this boss until he is defeated. He has no weak
point, so shoot him anywhere on his body. This battle has a set pattern in the
way that the characters will move and the battle will carry on more quickly
depending on how fast Marcus is damaged. Use the shotgun to hit him most of
the time and MAKE SURE to save at least five grenades with the Grenade Launcher
for the next battle. Save all normal grenades the battle after the next one
also.
Marcus will approach both characters at the beginning of the battle and they
will start to back away. Fire at Marcus constantly with the Shotgun and this
will stop him from attacking. Each shot will stagger him. Try not to fire too
rapidly. Fire so that he is staggered just about every two hits.
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Green Herb - To the left as Marcus walks toward the characters.
[ ] Shotgun Ammo - To the right as Marcus walks toward the characters.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
The characters will eventually turn and run to the corridor on the right side -
use this time to reload. Marcus will appear at the other end of the corridor
that the characters eventually face. Shoot him from a distance with the
handgun - don't waste Shotgun ammo while he is at a distance.
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Grenade Launcher Ammo - Look down and grab this as the characters turn away
from Marcus and enter the corridor. This can also be seen when they turn to
the right to face Marcus from the corridor - look down.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
--> RELOAD ONLY WHILE HE STAGGERS OR YELLS
While Marcus moves down the corridor fire at him. When he gets close, switch
to the Shotgun and fire but don't fire too often. You need to make sure that
you do not have to reload when he is about to attack since constant firepower
is needed to stop his attack at that time. Only reload when he staggers or
yells. It is very hard to tell when he is about to attack so you kind of have
to guess in a way.
Both characters will step away once again then Marcus will seem to disappear as
the characters turn to search for him.
--> THE FINAL STAND
Marcus will appear next to the characters and some tentacles will move out from
his back side. Keep constant firepower on Marcus at that time with the shotgun
until he falls over. Switch to another weapon instead of reloading and this
will keep you from getting hit. For the most part, do not reload at all during
this phase while he is close or he will hit you - reloading early may save you
from taking damage but be careful while doing so.
His tentacle attacks can be cancelled but it's hard to tell when he is about to
attack with them. If you want to cancel them, then shoot him whenever they
appear from behind his back shortly before he swings them toward the
characters. He usually falls fast during this final fight, so you won't have
to worry about his attacks for long
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
===============================================================================
== EMERGENCY LIFT ROOM ==
The characters will enter through the emergency doorway as the doors begin to
open once Marcus falls.
/ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
| / [ ] |
| ) o ( F I L E 3 --> Queen Leech Notes |
| / |
| |
| Directly after fighting Marcus (big leech man) the characters will walk |
| through a doorway and this will be inside of a box on the back left shelf. |
| Throw a grenade to the left while entering or, while staring at both |
| shelves with both characters on the elevator, shoot the left box on the |
| right shelf, middle row. This box is the only one on the middle row. |
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - /
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Green Herb - On the ground to the left as soon as the characters step
through the door after the Marcus battle.
[ ] Shotgun Ammo - In a box on the shelf across from the lift directly after
the Marcus battle. While facing the shelves from the lift this is on the left
shelf, middle row, left box
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
TWO [ZOMBIES] will appear to the right after stepping through the emergency
doorway then TWO MORE [ZOMBIES] will rise up from the side with the shelves as
the characters step onto the lift after the triggering system becomes active.
The lift will be activated and it will start to rise.
===============================================================================
---------------------------- B O S S B A T T L E -----------------------------
Boss - Leech Queen 1
Recommended Weapon: Grenade Launcher
Weak Point: Mouth
--> FIND THE MOUTH THEN SHOOT IT
While the lift rises, the Leech Queen will chase after both characters from the
railings of the tunnel below. Shoot the Leech Queen in the mouth in order to
stun it for a few seconds. Use the Grenade Launcher and hit it in the mouth
five times. Do not let the Leech Queen catch up with the lift or it will hit
the characters. Wait until the Leech Queen is a little over halfway up the
rails before firing or the grenade will miss. It can be hit from almost the
very back if you aim all the way at the top middle of the screen then fire.
You can also toss grenades at it, but I would highly recommend saving the
grenades for the next fight.
Boss - Leech Queen 2
Recommended Weapon: Shotgun [and Grenades (when in the light)]
Weak Point: Mouth
--> BACK IT UP INTO THE LIGHT
The main objective during this fight is to shoot the Leech Queen in the mouth
to make it step back into the light that is pouring in from the opening in the
back of the building. Like before, aim for the Leech Queen's mouth and fire.
Shoot it in the mouth with the Shotgun. It's sometimes hard to find the mouth,
so just aim until the cursor changes. For every few hits in the mouth, the
Leech Queen will back up a few steps. A direct Shotgun blast to the mouth will
cause it to back up twice as much when compared to a Submachine Gun or Handgun
hit. The Grenade Launcher AT can work well for hitting it in the mouth also
and send it moving back a good distance much like the Shotgun. For every few
seconds that the Leech Queen receives no damage in its mouth, it will attempt
to lunge at the characters or tail whip them. An on-screen command will appear
shortly before a lunge attack.
--> WATCH FOR THE ON-SCREEN COMMANDS
Whenever the Leech Queen is about to attack make sure to enter the on-screen
command to avoid its attack. This will cause the characters to back up
allowing the Leech Queen room to move forward. Fire at the creature's mouth
some more to make it back up once again. Always wait until the Leech Queen
stops moving (stepping forward) before you fire at its mouth. An on-screen
command will appear once the Leech Queen backs off that will allow the
characters to move up, so point at the icon then press the A button to move
toward the Leech Queen and continue the fight. Always move forward when given
the chance.
--> THE DIFFERENT BATTLE GROUNDS OF THE FIGHT
The fight will start on the left side of the room then the characters will
eventually climb the stairs. While the characters stand on the stairs, the
Leech Queen will try to spit acid from its back up onto the stair platform, so
keep firing at the mouth at that time to make it retreat. I believe you can
also hit it on its back at this point to drive it off as well - it's hard to
tell. Once the characters move off of the stairs, the fight will switch over
to the right side of the room.
--> WHILE QUEENIE IS BATHED IN THE LIGHT
Once the Leech Queen has been driven into the light it will take double damage
from every hit delivered. At that time, throw a grenade then take out the
Shotgun and blast away! Don't use the Grenade Launcher AT unless you do not
have Shotgun ammo because the grenades from the launcher take too long. The
Leech Queen will suffer extreme damage if heavy firepower is used while it is
stuck in the sun. Only throw one grenade since the Leech Queen will attack
before a second one will explode. Also, don't get too trigger happy since an
on-screen dodge command will appear as it attacks in order to push the
characters back.
--> ONE MAJOR TIP
At the beginning of the battle, the Leech Queen starts out under the sun's
rays, so right at the start, equip the Shotgun and blow the hell out of it.
It's possible to take about 35% of its life right then and there.
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Shotgun Ammo - Look to the left when first fighting the Leech Queen to see
this on a metal drum.
[ ] Secondary Weapon Ammo - On top of the forklift to the left after moving
away from the Leech Queen.
[ ] Green Herb - On the floor to the left after moving away from the Leech
Queen. (NOT ON NORMAL OR HARD MODE)
[ ] Shotgun Ammo - On the floor to the right after moving away from the Leech
Queen.
[ ] Green Herb - On the stairs to the right side of the room. Look to the
right of the roof opening where sunlight pours in.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
===============================================================================
-------------------------- S U B S C E N A R I O 1 ---------------------------
____ _ _
ALBERT | __ ) ___ __ _ (_) _ __ _ __ (_) _ __ __ _ ___
| _ / _ / _` || || '_ | '_ | || '_ / _` |/ __|
WESKER | |_) || __/| (_| || || | | || | | || || | | || (_| |__
|____/ ___| __, ||_||_| |_||_| |_||_||_| |_| __, ||___/
|___/ |___/
[SB01]
|******************* Resident Evil Ø - The Underground Labs ******************|
|- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -|
| B E G I N N I N G S 1 [BE01] |
|- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -|
| "I will simply say goodbye to Umbrella." |
|*****************************************************************************|
= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = CHAPTER INFO = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
Wesker: Samurai Edge 2, Submachine Gun (Lv.1)
Recommended Secondary Weapon: --
A Rank Item on Normal Mode: Motherboard
S Rank Item on Hard Mode : Valve Handle
Unlockable Weapon : Magnum AT
Unlockable Scenario/Chapter: "Beginnings" Chapter 2
= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
== TURNTABLE AREA ==
While content with his decision to leave Umbrella as they begin to crumble,
Wesker walks toward the entrance of the Railcart Room.
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] First Aid Spray - On the drums to the left at the very beginning.
[ ] Submachine Gun Ammo
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
== RAILCART ROOM ==
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Secondary Weapon Ammo - Right as Wesker steps through the door this will be
on the wall to the left.
[ ] Magnum Ammo - While walking down the stairs pick this up on the structure
to the left as Wesker approaches the dead bodies.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
/ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
| / [ ] |
| ) o ( F I L E 1 --> Leech Growth Records |
| / |
| |
| While Wesker walks down the steps toward the railcart, shoot the red cone |
| that is standing in between the wall and the side of the bottom staircase. |
| This can be obtained at the very end of this mission as well. |
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - /
Watching the dead bodies below, Wesker walks down the stairs and prepares to
blast the ONE [ZOMBIE] on the floor since he knows without a doubt that one
will eventually get up. With a slight smirk of amusement, he moves over to the
railcart and tries to activate it but he finds that the power is out as he
looks around the dark area.
Wesker climbs back up the stairs and shoots a [ZOMBIE] along the way. While
walking further up the stairs, TWO [ZOMBIES] will move through the door
awaiting a headshot from Wesker's trusty Samurai Edge.
== TURNTABLE AREA ==
[ELIMINATORS] will run around the corner as Wesker steps toward the turtable.
He will look up toward the ceiling and see FOUR [WEB SPINNERS] - don't shoot
them yet. Arm the Magnum and shoot the [WEB SPINNER] on the wall to the left
then shoot each of the FOUR [WEB SPINNERS] when they fall from the ceiling.
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Green Herb - Lying on the floor to the right as Wesker first steps out onto
the turntable. Eliminators appear above this. (NOT ON NORMAL OR HARD MODE)
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Wesker will walk out onto the turntable. Equip the Submachine Gun and prepare
to do battle with the FOUR [ELIMINATORS] that jump out from the right side.
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Green Herb - While Wesker runs to the control panel for the turntable, this
will be next to the light up ahead. (NOT ON HARD MODE)
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Wesker will walk toward the turntable and use the control panel to take it
down.
== TURNTABLE ==
Equip the Submachine Gun since an [ELIMINATOR] will jump down to Wesker's left.
Once the first is gone, Wesker will begin to move away as THREE MORE
[ELIMINATORS] drop. He quickly sprints to the other side but TWO [ELIMINATORS]
block that way also, so he runs to the middle. TWO [ELIMINATORS] drop in front
of his path but they are quickly shot down (depending on you). Throw a grenade
right when Wesker turns to the FOUR [ELIMINATORS] behind him and fire at them
with the Submachine Gun to keep them at bay. TWO MORE [ELIMINATORS] will fall
from above as the four are defeated.
== BOTTOM OF THE TURNTABLE ==
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Green Herb - Right when Wesker starts on the turntable after its descent,
this will be on a metal drum in the right portion of the room ahead. Wesker
will eventually move in the direction of this item.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
FOUR [ZOMBIES] will begin to approach Wesker as he turns. They are far away so
try for headshots. MORE [ZOMBIES] will begin to appear in the back, but after
four, they no longer amuse Wesker, so he will turn once again and move toward
the elevator.
Wesker will notice a dead body along the way, but he will turn away from it and
press the button to open the elevator doors. Once the doors open, Wesker will
turn to a group of FOUR [ZOMBIES] and attempt to headshot them all.
== IN FRONT OF THE POWER ROOM ==
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Magnum Ammo - Once Wesker gets out of the elevator, these will be above the
[ ] Green Herb door and in front of the door respectively.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Wesker will exit the elevator and walk toward the door ahead then enter the
corridor that leads to the Power Room.
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Grenade - On the floor in front of the entrance to the Power Room.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
While on the catwalk, Wesker will look up and notice falling [LEECHES] that
drop from the ceiling and begin to form a swarm along the way to the Power
Room. Shoot them while they gather and while Wesker moves over them.
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Submachine Gun Ammo - While Wesker moves past the leeches, look on the
bottom floor to the right and pick up the glimmering object on the floor below.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
== POWER ROOM ==
Wesker will move by the leeches and enter the Power Room.
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Secondary Weapon Ammo - On the top monitor of the first row of monitors to
the left in the Power Room.
[ ] Green Herb - Lying on the counter below the monitors.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
/ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
| / [ ] |
| ) o ( F I L E 2 --> William Birkin Profile |
| / |
| |
| Shoot the computer monitor of the computer that points toward the green |
| herb pickup in the Power Room - use the Submachine Gun. |
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - /
Wesker will walk over to the main controls and activate the power.
*********************** C H E C K P O I N T **************************
As Wesker walks out of the Power Room, a [LEECH MAN] will attack. Wesker will
walk over toward the [LEECHES] on the catwalk and observe them. He will turn
to look at the ones on the elevator then turn back to find TWO [LEECH MEN]
forming on the catwalk that will go down easily with his Submachine Gun. Once
they are gone, another [LEECH MAN] will form on the elevator. Wesker will
begin to move away from the Leech Man then move back toward the elevator.
On his way back, a [LEECH MAN] will form and attack from the [LEECHES] on the
floor followed by TWO [BATS] to his left and FIVE [BATS] to his right. Wesker
will take the elevator back up to the floor above.
== TURNTABLE AREA ==
While watching the same dead body from before, TWO [ZOMBIES] will get up as
Wesker turns and walks toward the turntable. He will back up and see TWO
[ZOMBIES] to his left then ANOTHER [ZOMBIE] will move out from the right as he
continues to back up onto the turntable. MORE [ZOMBIES] will begin to appear
on the turntable as he continues to back up.
/ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
| / [ ] |
| ) o ( F I L E 3 --> Reclamation Project Notes |
| / |
| |
| When Wesker returns to the turntable, he will begin to sprint while backing |
| up to avoid the group of surrounding zombies. Look up on the left wall |
| and shoot the lower right light. |
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - /
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Green Herb - While back on the turntable, Wesker will turn to face
[ ] Submachine Gun Ammo a Crimson Head and these will be on the floor and on
the door behind it respectively.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Equip a Submachine Gun or the Magnum as he turns to the right while backing up
since a [CRIMSON HEAD] will be near the door. Blast it as soon as you see it
since these things are very aggressive. Headshots are still possible with the
handgun just like with a normal zombie. Stagger the Crimson Head in place with
a Submachine Gun then quickly switch over to the handgun and headshot him.
Wesker will turn back to his left to face the rest of the zombies - all FIVE
[ZOMBIES] maybe SIX - then turn around and shoot the THREE [ZOMBIES] near the
elevator entrance to his back. Wesker will walk back over to the control panel
for the turntable and start it up.
== TURNTABLE ==
===============================================================================
---------------------------- B O S S B A T T L E -----------------------------
Boss - Prototype Tyrant
Recommended Weapon: Magnum, Submachine Gun
Weak Point: Exposed Heart
--> GO FOR THE HEART ONCE AGAIN!
Aim for his heart whenever it is in view. Always wait for his heart to appear
in your view before shooting with any weapon.
--> A DEADLY GAME OF CAT AND MOUSE
We can now officially call the Prototype Tyrant a boss since he is actually
slightly troublesome this time. He will start out very close to Wesker, so
just shoot him in the heart with whatever weapon of your choosing, preferably
the Magnum. Wesker will eventually sprint away.
From then on, the Proto Tyrant will stand at one end of the railings and then
suddenly dash at Wesker to hit Wesker with his claw or walk toward him then hit
him. Follow the on-screen command in order to make Wesker move under the
railing and dodge the dash attack. The Tyrant can be shot from the other side
but his weak heart is not exposed right after a dash attack.
Wesker will always work his way away from the Proto Tyrant then the Tyrant will
attempt an attack when he gets closer. When the Proto Tyrant follows Wesker to
the side with the control panel, the Proto Tyrant will always walk toward
Wesker and attempt to hit him - you'll have to hit him in the heart to stop him
from attacking. While he approaches Wesker in the middle and on the other side
of the turntable, he will always dash.
The Tyrant still isn't that big of a deal really. He will begin to grab at his
heart once he is almost defeated then he will suddenly fall over after
receiving more shots. What a failed attempt at a bioweapon!
--> NOT DEAD YET!
Wesker will walk to the door of the Railcart Room and try to continue to the
railcart but he will hear the Proto Tyrant get up and turn to look. Slightly
amused at the T-virus' recovery ability, Wesker will watch the Proto Tyrant
stand back up. There's still some fight left in this one!
The Proto Tyrant will rush toward Wesker, so equip a Submachine Gun and blast
him. Blast him anywhere, just as long as you hit him and this will stop his
dash attack. The boss' life gauge will appear this time. Blast him in the
heart with whatever weapon of your choosing and watch as his life dwindles very
quickly in the gauge above. Just like with Billy and Rebecca, hit him to
stagger him then reload while he staggers - if not then he may hit Wesker.
Once that annoyance is taken care of, Wesker will open the door and head for
the railcart while complaining about the failures of Umbrella's creations. He
will move down the stairs shooting objects such as lights and red cones to show
off his marksmanship (and you should too) then enter the railcart.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
===============================================================================
|******************* Resident Evil Ø - The Training Facility *****************|
|- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -|
| B E G I N N I N G S 2 [BE02] |
|- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -|
| "I will follow my initial plan and lure the S.T.A.R.S. members into the |
| mansion." |
|*****************************************************************************|
= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = CHAPTER INFO = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
Wesker: Samurai Edge 2, Submachine Gun (Lv.1)
Recommended Secondary Weapon: Shotgun
A Rank Item on Normal Mode: Fire/Water Key
S Rank Item on Hard Mode : Microfilm A/B
Unlockable Weapon : Rocket Launcher
Unlockable Scenario/Chapter: --
= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
== OUTSIDE THE CHURCH ==
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Secondary Weapon Ammo - Near the wall to the left when starting.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Wesker will move down the path up ahead and an [ELIMINATOR] will jump out from
the left. Wesker will turn then step around the corner and turn to the right
then AN [ELIMINATOR] followed by ANOTHER [ELIMINATOR] will quickly jump into
view.
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] First Aid Spray - Inside the belltower.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Wesker will walk across the bridge toward the Observatory.
/ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
| / [ ] |
| ) o ( F I L E 1 --> Regulations for the Trainees |
| / |
| |
| While on the bridge that leads to the Training Facility, shoot the last |
| non-lit light on the left. When Wesker turns around near the Training |
| Facility entrance, the light will be on the right. |
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - /
He will turn and TWO [ELIMINATORS] will run toward him one right after the
other, then THREE [ELIMINATORS] will follow. Toss a grenade or use the Shotgun
here unless you have some good aiming with the Handgun. Once they are defeated
TWO MORE [ELIMINATORS] will step out, but Wesker will turn his back to them,
much like he did with Umbrella, and enter the Observatory.
== OBSERVATORY ==
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Grenade - On the stack of boxes on the first floor of the Observatory.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
TWO [ZOMBIES] will step toward Wesker from the right then TWO MORE [ZOMBIES]
will stand up behind them. Wesker will look to his left at TWO [ZOMBIES] as he
walks away then stare at ONE [ZOMBIE] on the bottom floor but quickly turn to
his left as TWO [ZOMBIES] attack.
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Submachine Gun Ammo - Near the boxes on the other side of the Observatory.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
While moving and looking at the TWO [ZOMBIES] behind the boxes, he will step
toward the door then face off against the two zombies before exiting, but their
petty attempt at amusement fails to grab Wesker's attention for long so he will
continue into the next room.
== CAGE ROOM ==
Wesker will step into the Cage Room then turn to the left to blast an
[ELIMINATOR].
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Green Herb - In a cage while Wesker fights the first Eliminator in the Cage
Room.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
He will step to the side as ANOTHER [ELIMINATOR] appears followed by ANOTHER
[ELIMINATOR] from the bottom of the staircase. THREE [ELIMINATORS] will appear
to his left so use the Submachine Gun for these. He will turn to the right and
spot ONE [WEB SPINNER] crawling on the ceiling preparing to attack followed by
ANOTHER [WEB SPINNER] on the ceiling. Use the Submachine Gun on both.
The pit up ahead that Wesker looks into will contain THREE [WEB SPINNERS] that
can be killed by throwing a grenade, but keep in mind that they will not
attack. You can also shoot them with the Rocket Launcher by grabbing the
pickup from the light to their left.
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Rocket Launcher - Shoot the light on the left side of the pit with Web
Spinners.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Wesker will turn as FOUR [ELIMINATORS] charge him, but he will quickly dash
through the door. These Eliminators cannot be killed when Wesker turns to face
them so don't waste a grenade here!
== FOUNTAIN AREA ==
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Green Herb - Right when Wesker exits the Cage Room after being chased out
by the Eliminators, this will be next to the outside left as he opens the door.
(NOT ON NORMAL OR HARD MODE)
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
/ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
| / [ ] |
| ) o ( F I L E 2 --> Marcus's Diary 1 |
| / |
| |
| In the outside portion with the fountain, shoot the light above the door on |
| the opposite side of the area. Eliminators will attack here. |
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - /
THREE [ELIMINATORS] out of the four will hop through the windows one at a time
then ANOTHER [ELIMINATOR] will jump from the roof followed by TWO MORE
[ELIMINATORS]. Don't be afraid to use the Rocket Launcher here - you'll get
your Rocket Launcher ammo replenished up ahead in the Library. While Wesker
walks toward the next door he will notice a bat flutter by up above then turn
around in time to shoot the SIX [BATS] that will fly toward him - knife them.
== GEAR ROOM ==
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Green Herb - Lying in the chair in the Gear Room.
[ ] Submachine Gun Ammo - Shoot the plaque on the wall right beside the
elevator in the Gear Room.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Upon entering the Gear Room, Wesker will take time to look at the dusty window
to the right for whatever reason then turn to the left to find that TWO
[ZOMBIES] have magically appeared beside him.
Wesker will walk to the elevator opening up ahead then sudden moans will cause
him to stare downward in order to get the drop on TWO [ZOMBIES] and he better
shoot them before he jumps below or they will be right up in front of him.
== LIBRARY ==
Upon landing in the Library, Wesker may have to face off against the zombies
mentioned above.
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Grenade - Shoot the table lamp by the computer on the large desk across
from the elevator while stepping off the elevator in the Library.
[ ] Rocket Launcher - Shoot the middle desk with the pen stand in the Library.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
If not, then he will move further to the left then turn to face TWO CRAWLING
[ZOMBIES] and turn again to the TWO [ZOMBIES] to his right.
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Submachine Gun Ammo - Shoot the left set of books on the desk near the door
(not on the side with the elevator).
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
He will quickly open the doors only to find ANOTHER TWO [ZOMBIES]. After
defeating the two in the corridor, Wesker will turn back around to find that
ONE MORE [ZOMBIE] has joined the other two. Once they are defeated, he will
step out into the corridor.
== CORRIDOR ==
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Green Herb - Down the outside corridor, below the two busts.
[ ] Submachine Gun Ammo - On the wall at the checkpoint in the corridor.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Wesker will look to the left then suddenly recall the Sewer Tunnel in the Main
Hall past the room to the right, so he will turn right and head in that
direction.
*********************** C H E C K P O I N T **************************
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Submachine Gun Ammo - Destroy the door leading out of the corridor right
after the checkpoint.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
== LECTURE ROOM ==
All will be silent until Wesker moves close to the double doors then ONE
[CRIMSON HEADS] will rise up from the right. Use the Submachine Gun in this
area. TWO [CRIMSON HEADS] will rise from the seating area and attack. THREE
MORE [CRIMSON HEADS] will rise and chase Wesker out into the Main Hall.
== MAIN HALL ==
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Secondary Weapon Ammo - Shoot the statue right when Wesker opens the double
doors to the Main Hall.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Turn and blast the TWO close Crimson Heads of the FOUR [CRIMSON HEADS] that are
at the doors. Wesker will turn to MANY [ZOMBIES] to his right but will decide
to move down the other side of the stairs. Throw a grenade on the other side
to get rid of those zombies for extra kills.
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Grenade - Inside the torch to the left while moving down the first set of
stairs.
[ ] Green Herb - In front of the picture of Marcus. (NOT ON HARD MODE)
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
ONE [ZOMBIE] will fall down the railing then get up and attack Wesker as he
tries to move down the stairs. Wesker will look up toward the middle railing
and spot TWO [ZOMBIES] then walk to the bottom. He will turn to the left and
blast the TWO [CRIMSON HEADS] that dash at him. The Crimson Head on the right
will not stagger from rapid fire, so spam him with constant Submachine Gun fire
to take him down quickly before he gets close to Wesker.
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Submachine Gun Ammo - Facing the bottom of the main staircase, this is near
the wall to the right of it. A Crimson Head will be near it.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Upon turning around, TWO [CRIMSON HEADS] will attack - one on each side - so
take turns blasting them both to keep them staggering. While walking to the
Sewer Tunnel ladder ONE MORE [CRIMSON HEAD] will get up and attack.
== SEWER TUNNEL ==
After the complete rush he has just gone through, Wesker decides to peak down
both corridors because he could have sworn he heard a moan while climbing down
that ladder. After smirking at that thought, he decides to the turn to the
left and move down the empty corridor.
/ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
| / [ ] |
| ) o ( F I L E 3 --> Zombie Notes |
| / |
| |
| Shoot the last light near the ceiling on the left in the Sewage Tunnel. |
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - /
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Green Herb - When the zombie attacks in the sewer, this will be in front of
the door behind him. (NOT ON HARD MODE)
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Wesker will walk to the end of the tunnel but look back cautiously to make sure
that those Crimson pests are not following. Wouldn't you know it, ONE MORE
[ZOMBIE] will appear in front of the door at the end when Wesker turns around.
Be sure to get a headshot even if you have to let him hit you since there is a
green herb right behind him (on easy and normal) - well, don't go for a
headshot if you are about to get killed...
===============================================================================
---------------------------- B O S S B A T T L E -----------------------------
Boss - Ivan
Recommended Weapon: Submachine Gun, Rocket Launcher
Weak Point: Head
I'm going to be blunt with you here, if you don't have the Shotgun or some
other strong blasting weapon this boss can be a total ass. He can also be hard
to a beginner that is not used to fast action boss fights yet, but once you
learn his pattern and know how to deal with each attack, he isn't as bad. You
have to be ready for each of his attacks and know when to stun him and where to
hit him, so let's break this bad boy down.
--> HE WILL START WITH A DASH
Wesker will speak at the beginning of the battle then Ivan will dash toward
Wesker. Take out the Submachine Gun (preferred) or Shotgun and blast him to
make him stop. Hit him in the head and he will stop faster, hit him elsewhere
and he will eventually stop. He will then walk toward Wesker. If this dash is
not stopped, then he will go directly into the three hit punch below.
--> BLAST HIS HEAD AS HE WALKS FORWARD AND PREPARES TO SWING
Blast him in the head with the Shotgun to make him miss his first punch right
when he swings. His head will tilt to the side and he will stagger as he tries
to punch, letting you know that you have cancelled the attack. If the attack
is not canceled then he will hit Wesker with a three hit punch combo. The
second hit may be dodged with the on-screen icon but the first and third hit
must be canceled by shooting him in the head. It's possible to get hit by the
first, dodge the second, then shoot him in the head to cancel the third.
If the third hit of this move is not dodged or canceled then he will
automatically latch onto Wesker when Wesker falls from the punch and he will
skip the next step - he will always skip the extra dodgeable punch if he hits
Wesker three time or hits him with the third punch.
--> DODGE HIS NEXT PUNCH
After he has been stunned, he will try to punch once more. Follow the on-
screen command to dodge the punch and Wesker will dodge to the side. Sometimes
you may have to actually dodge two punches since his first will be part of his
three hit punch combo then the second dodgeable punch will be this one that I
am referring to.
--> BLAST HIM IN THE HEAD WHEN HE LATCHES ONTO WESKER
Ivan will jump and latch onto Wesker then ready a punch. Aim for his head
while he is on Wesker then blast him in the head with either the Submachine
Gun, Rocket Launcher, or Shotgun. His head will tilt to the side as he raises
his arm back, so adjust your aiming to the right a bit. He will punch Wesker
until Wesker dies if he is not blasted off and he will finish off his pummeling
with a double overhead that will instantly kill Wesker!
--> SHOOT HIM AS HE DASHES AGAIN
Just like with the last dash, shoot him preferably with the Submachine Gun.
--> BLAST HIS HEAD AS HE WALKS FORWARD AND PREPARES TO SWING ONCE AGAIN
Blast him in the head with the Shotgun right as he swings.
--> DODGE HIS NEXT PUNCH
Use the on-screen command to dodge it.
--> BLAST HIM AS HE LATCHES ON ONCE AGAIN
Shoot him in head and he will fall off then Wesker will run behind the wrecked
train cart.
--> SHOOT HIM WHILE HE FALLS
Wesker will look up while behind the train cart then Ivan will appear and jump
then try to fall overhead and punch Wesker on the way down. Quickly switch to
the Rocket Launcher and hit him with one rocket as he falls. This move can be
stopped with the Submachine Gun as well but it takes some really good aiming
since you have to hit his head.
--> BLAST HIM AS HE PREPARES TO SWING THEN DODGE HIS NEXT PUNCH
Shoot him in the head with the Shotgun to make him stagger as he swings in
order to dodge his punch and make Wesker move to the side.
--> SHOOT HIM AS HE LATCHES ONTO WESKER AGAIN
Blast him in the head to get him off then Wesker will run out from behind the
wrecked cart and turn. **Make sure to have the Submachine or Rocket Launcher
equipped after knocking him off in preparation for his next attack!**
--> BLAST HIM TO STOP HIS DASHING PUNCH AS WESKER TURNS
Once Wesker turns, Ivan will already be dashing, so you need to have the
Submachine Gun or Rocket Launcher equipped as Wesker turns then start to blast
Ivan (preferably in the head) with rapid fire or a shotgun blast in order to
stagger him. Keep your targeting cursor in the middle of the screen while
Wesker turns and it will be right on his head. Wesker will run to the other
side of the room.
--> BLAST HIM ONCE AGAIN TO STOP HIS PUNCHES THEN DODGE THE SINGLE PUNCH AND
BLAST HIM IN THE HEAD AS HE LATCHES ON
Wesker will escape to the other side then the entire pattern will start over
once again! His next dash that starts the combination is much faster than last
time - this is the only difference in the pattern.
Here is the whole pattern once again (this is IF you can blast him to cancel
his attack and use the on-screen commands to dodge his other attacks):
01) Dash punch (must cancel by rapid fire or shotgun blast)
02) Punch (must cancel by shotgun blast)
03) Punch (must dodge by on-screen command)
04) Latching punch (must cancel by rapid fire, shotgun blast, or rocket to head
to head)
05) Dash punch (must cancel by rapid fire or shotgun blast)
06) Punch (must cancel by shotgun blast)
07) Punch (must dodge by on-screen command)
08) Latching punch (must cancel by rapid fire, shotgun blast, or rocket to head
to head)
09) Jumping Punch (cancel with rocket)
10) Punch (must cancel by shotgun blast)
11) Punch (must dodge by on-screen command)
12) Latching punch (must cancel by rapid fire, shotgun blast, or rocket to head
to head)
13) Dash punch (must cancel by rapid fire or shotgun blast **extremely fast!**)
14) Punch (must cancel by shotgun blast)
15) Punch (must dodge by on-screen command)
16) Latching punch (must cancel by rapid fire, shotgun blast, or rocket to
head)
17) repeat starting from 1 - his next ram is much like #13, but not as fast
--> THE ROCKET LAUNCHER WILL OWN HIM QUICKLY
The Rocket Launcher takes tons of damage from him, and it can be used to cancel
some of his attacks - dashing punch and jumping attack. Make sure that you
keep in mind it's ammo is very limited however. One good thing to keep in mind
is that rocket blast from up close will take more than rocket blast from a
distance.
Also, if you still have some Rocket Launcher Ammo left over from the Training
Facility, then don't waste the Rocket Launcher pickup to the side by grabbing
it when you still have some ammo left. Each pickup will give Wesker 3 rockets
and that is the maximum number of rockets that can be stocked at level 1, so
don't grab the pickup behind the train cart until Wesker is completely out of
rockets.
--> THE BOTTOM LINE
If you can memorize this boss' attacks, he won't be as much of a problem. It's
best to concentrate on canceling his attacks and dodging them instead of
focusing on damaging him greatly if this is your first time through the game.
Learn his attacks and cancel them with a Shotgun, Submachine Gun, or Rocket
Launcher blast. It is so very important that you bring the Shotgun (or other
type of shotgun) as a secondary weapon for this battle no matter what level
your weapons are on there, hotshot! Shooting him with only the Submachine Gun
will not always cancel his punch.
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Green Herb - On a structure behind Ivan.
[ ] Submachine Gun Ammo - On the wall when Wesker turns.
[ ] Rocket Launcher - Behind the fallen train cart that Wesker runs behind.
Grab it fast when Wesker moves behind it!
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
===============================================================================
----------------------------- S C E N A R I O 2 ------------------------------
J U L Y 2 4, 1 9 9 8
_____ _ __ __ _
|_ _|| |__ ___ | / | __ _ _ __ ___ (_) ___ _ __
| | | '_ / _ | |/| | / _` || '_ / __|| | / _ | '_
| | | | | || __/ | | | || (_| || | | |__ | || (_) || | | |
| | |_| |_| ___| |_| |_| __,_||_| |_||___/|_| ___/ |_| | |
/ /
___ _ _ _
CHRIS |_ _| _ __ ___ (_) __| | ___ _ __ | |_ JILL
| | | '_ / __|| | / _` | / _ | '_ | __|
REDFIELD | | | | | || (__ | || (_| || __/| | | || |_ VALENTINE
|___||_| |_| ___||_| __,_| ___||_| |_| __|
[SC02]
|*********** Resident Evil (Remake) - Arrival at the Spencer Estate **********|
|- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -|
| M A N S I O N I N C I D E N T 1 [MI01] |
|- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -|
| "They have escaped into the mansion, where they thought it was safe, |
| yet..." |
|*****************************************************************************|
= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = CHAPTER INFO = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
Chris: Samurai Edge 2, Shotgun (Lv.1)
Jill : Samurai Edge 2, Submachine Gun (Lv.1)
Recommended Secondary Weapon: --
A Rank Item on Normal Mode: Lighter/Lockpick
S Rank Item on Hard Mode : Great Eagle/Wolf Medal
Unlockable Weapon: --
Unlockable Scenario/Chapter: "Nightmare" Chapter 1, "Mansion Incident"
Chapter 2
= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
== KENNETH'S CORRIDOR ==
The first zombie that started all the horror from the remake of Resident Evil
will get up and approach Chris and Jill after the beginning cutscenes. Go for
a headshot since you will have a good chance at one here. The characters will
turn and open the door to the Dining Room. The door can also be destroyed with
a secondary weapon.
== DINING ROOM ==
A [ZOMBIE] will appear to the left as the characters step into the Dining Room
then TWO MORE [ZOMBIES] will walk through the open doorway from the corridor
they just exited from.
/ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
| / [ ] |
| ) o ( F I L E 1 --> Keeper's Diary |
| / |
| |
| Once both characters enter the Dining Room, two zombies will attack from |
| the doorway. When the characters look to the right to face a third zombie, |
| shoot the vase on the small table behind the zombie for a First Aid Spray |
| then shoot the table for this file. A really good way to get this is to |
| play with Chris and allow the zombie to grab him then shake it off - Chris |
| will kick the zombie back into the vase and table breaking both of them. |
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - /
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] First Aid Spray - Shoot the vase behind the third zombie to the right in
the Dining Room.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
After shooting a few of the zombies, the characters will turn to the right and
shoot the ONE [ZOMBIE] from that side. They will turn back to see if the
previous zombies have gotten closer then walk toward the exit of the Dining
Room as they look up to spot THREE [ZOMBIES] on the second floor above.
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Grenade - While the crawling zombie moves toward the characters, this is
lying on a small table near the typewriter as the characters walk toward the
exit doors for the Dining Room.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
While staring at the three zombies on the second floor, they will be stopped by
a CRAWLING [ZOMBIE] on their way to the door then TWO MORE [ZOMBIES] will get
up and attack at the end of the dining table near the doors. The double doors
at the end of the Dining Room can be destroyed with a secondary weapon.
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Green Herb - At the opposite end of the dining table just before exiting
the Dining Room. (NOT ON NORMAL OR HARD MODE)
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
The characters will open the double doors and get back to...
== FIRST FLOOR MAIN HALL ==
Wesker!? The characters will look around for their great leader, but it seems
that he has, uhhhh... gone off to secure another area? Surely so.
/ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
| / [ ] |
| ) o ( F I L E 2 --> Jill Valentine Profile |
| / |
| |
| As the characters enter the main hall from the Dining Room, shoot the vase |
| on the small table near the stairs as they look for Wesker. |
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - /
TWO [ZOMBIES] will walk up the steps to the left as Jill calls attention to
Chris. The characters will turn and shoot the zombies then move toward the
front door, but it is locked! Upon turning around THREE [ZOMBIES] will be
shambling toward both characters. As the characters open the double doors to
the Gallery ONE [ZOMBIE] will move toward them from inside.
== GALLERY ==
/ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
| / [ ] |
| ) o ( F I L E 3 --> Chris Redfield Profile |
| / |
| |
| When the characters first enter The Gallery, shoot the picture below the |
| small light on the opposite side next to the door. |
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - /
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Shotgun Ammo - Shoot the middle statue in The Gallery.
[ ] Secondary Weapon Ammo - As the characters turn to face the group of zombies
in The Gallery, shoot the picture below the light in the direction that they
face. This is on the left side of the Gallery.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
ONE [ZOMBIE] will get up off the floor and move toward the characters then
after he is shot the other dead bodies will start to get up and the characters
will turn to the left as these THREE [ZOMBIES] move toward them. The left
zombie in the back likes to dash, so shoot him before the right one. Before
leaving, ONE [ZOMBIE] will step through the doorway with the draperies on the
side of the room and the two characters feel inclined to stay until they pop
him, so blast him then they will open the next door. The door to the First
Floor Corridor can also be destroyed if shot enough times.
== FIRST FLOOR CORRIDOR ==
/ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
| / [ ] |
| ) o ( F I L E 4 --> Kenneth J. Sullivan Profile |
| / |
| |
| As the characters dash into the corridor after exiting The Gallery, shoot |
| the painting before they turn down the left hall. |
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - /
The characters will run down the corridor ahead.
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Green Herb - While the characters peak around the corner of the first floor
corridor, shoot the cabinet against the left wall.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
They will peak around the corner to the left then continue to the door up
ahead. An action cutscene will play as they move toward the door.
* Follow the on-screen command as the dog (Cerberus) approaches the characters.
After the cutscene, the characters will move toward the door up ahead but they
will turn around as a [DOG] appears in the back of them. The next door can be
destroyed or you can simply allow the characters to open it.
== DARK CORRIDOR ==
A SINGLE [ZOMBIE] will attack from the side of the room. The characters will
stop and allow you to blast the door to the side as Jill's spider sense for
hidden ammo goes off, so do so and the door will bust open. Point toward the
doorway with the cursor and press A to move inside to find some extra items.
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Submachine Gun Ammo - Shoot the first door in the Dark Corridor then move
[ ] Shotgun Ammo inside that restroom and collect these items from
near the tub.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
The characters will continue around the corner and notice some zombies beating
on the outside windows. TWO of the [ZOMBIES] will bust through the windows and
get up then attack. While the characters move around the left corner they will
notice a zombie hitting on the other window to the side but turn quickly as a
[ZOMBIE] steps out from the side corridor then the [ZOMBIE] at the window will
busts through it to the right. The characters will back up and shoot them.
ONE MORE [ZOMBIE] will attack while the characters move around the corner but
they will shoot it then enter the next room.
*********************** C H E C K P O I N T **************************
== CORRIDOR TO COURTYARD ==
A sudden moan of a zombie that has escaped their rampage will attract their
attention to the door nearby and the characters will open the door and move
down the corridor ahead. This door can be destroyed - the zombie in the
corridor behind the door will attack immediately if that is the case.
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Shotgun Ammo - Destroy the door to the Stair Room right when the characters
turn to open it after the checkpoint.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
== STAIR ROOM ==
A SINGLE [ZOMBIE] will be standing behind the corner below the staircase, so
get ready to make a headshot.
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Green Herb - Behind the first zombie that appears after the checkpoint.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
The characters will climb the stairs. Throw a grenade if you want to destroy
all the pictures on the wall or they can be all shot off with some Wii-mote
skills. At the very top of the stairs, both characters will look on as a dead
body rises from the floor below. This [CRIMSON HEAD] will run up the stairs.
Shoot him with the Handgun as he runs up the stairs then switch to the
Submachine Gun or Shotgun as he moves to the top and begins to chase the
characters down the hall.
Once the first Crimson Head is dead, the characters will turn around (or to the
left) as ANOTHER [CRIMSON HEAD] dashes out from the end of the corridor. They
will run back down the corridor while being chased. The characters will move
down the second floor corridor then peek around the corner and finally decide
to open the door at the end and step into the next room. This door can be
destroyed.
== CORRIDOR OUTSIDE ARMOR ROOM ==
The characters will move down the hall and hear a sound coming from the Armor
Room. It is up to you whether they enter the room or not. Point to the door
and press the A button to go inside.
== ARMOR ROOM ==
/ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
| / [ ] |
| ) o ( F I L E 5 --> S.T.A.R.S. Notes |
| / |
| |
| Looking at the suits of armor on the left when first entering the armor |
| room, shoot the third armor near the back. |
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - /
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Grenade - In the back of the armor room.
[ ] Shotgun Ammo
[ ] Green Herb
[ ] Submachine Gun Ammo - Shoot the first suit of armor to the right. This is
actually the second suit of armor, but it's the first one that you can see from
the door.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
TWO [ZOMBIES] and a [DOG] will attack from the middle of the room. Find the
dog to the left of the right zombie and blast it first then take down the
zombies. ANOTHER [ZOMBIE] will get up from the back of the room as the others
fall. While the characters move to the back of this room they will turn around
as TWO [ZOMBIES] begin to enter through the doorway. Once the room is clear
the characters will move back out into the corridor.
== CORRIDOR OUTSIDE ARMOR ROOM ==
/ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
| / [ ] |
| ) o ( F I L E 6 --> Forest Speyer Profile |
| / |
| |
| While fighting the dogs in the corridor outside the armor room, shoot the |
| very back cabinet on the right wall near the door. It is hard to see |
| because the hall is dark near the end. |
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - /
After rounding the corner to the right, TWO [DOGS] will attack from the other
side. The characters will walk toward the door and an action cutscene will
occur.
* Follow the on-screen command as the Crimson Head busts through the door.
== SECOND FLOOR MAIN HALL ==
The characters will step out into the main hall and THREE [ZOMBIES] will appear
in front of them. THREE [CROWS] will bash through the windows and attack from
the left as the characters move toward the middle portion of the second floor.
Both characters will look down on the first floor to find that some of the
fallen zombies that they finished earlier are now getting up.
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Secondary Weapon Ammo - When the characters race to the other side of the
second floor after spotting the Crimson Heads below, shoot the painting on the
wall in the direction that they run.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
The characters will run to the right side of the room then turn around (equip
the Shotgun or Submachine Gun) and blast the TWO [CRIMSON HEADS].
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Green Herb - After fighting the two Crimson Heads on the Second Floor Main
Hall, destroy the door leading to the Outside Corridor before the characters
open it. (NOT ON NORMAL OR HARD MODE)
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
The characters will turn around and open the door to the Outside Walkway. This
door can also be destroyed.
== OUTSIDE WALKWAY ==
While moving past the open area to the left, FOUR [CROWS] will fly toward the
characters and attack. Directly after the crows have fallen, the characters
will turn as a [DOG] runs at them. Equip the Shotgun after shooting the dog
since the characters will turn yet again and a [CRIMSON HEAD] will attack.
The characters will take a slight breather while moving down the corridor ahead
but a moan will let them know what is around the corner. The lurching figure
will move out of the shadows to reveal that it is the [FORREST ZOMBIE]. Go for
a headshot on this particular zombie since he will not fall fast to normal hits
like the other zombies - he truly is One Dangerous Zombie. Chris will
reminisce on those target practice sessions with his buddy then the characters
will continue.
/ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
| / [ ] |
| ) o ( F I L E 7 --> Arklay Research Facility "Mansion" Notes |
| / |
| |
| Right after shooting Forest, dogs will attack as the characters turn the |
| corner that he came from. Shoot the light on the wall in the back of the |
| dogs. |
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - /
While rounding the right corner, TWO [DOGS] will dash at the characters. The
characters will move toward the back door then open it after defeating the
dogs.
== UPSTAIRS CORRIDOR ==
/ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
| / [ ] |
| ) o ( F I L E 8 --> Cerberus Notes |
| / |
| |
| After fighting the dogs mentioned for the "Arklay Research Facility |
| 'Mansion' Notes", the characters will bust through the door and three crows |
| will attack in the room ahead. Look on the right wall and shoot the vase |
| lying in the back while the first crow attacks. |
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - /
Upon stepping through the door, the characters will be attacked by a [CROW]
then TWO MORE [CROWS] after the first has been taken down. The characters will
turn and leave the room through the door around the corner.
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Shotgun Ammo - Shortly after fighting Forest, these items will be lying on
[ ] Green Herb the floor after fighting three crows.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
== SECOND FLOOR DINING ROOM ==
THREE [ZOMBIES] will be to the left as the characters enter this area. The
characters will walk to the other side of the walkway. TWO [CROWS] will break
through the window on the left behind them and ONE [ZOMBIE] will attack from up
ahead. The crows can easily be shot with a Handgun before they attack since
the camera remains focused on them.
While moving down the second floor walkway, the characters will see a dead body
ahead. Equip the Shotgun since they will turn as a [CRIMSON HEAD] and [CROW]
dash at them. When they turn back around TWO [ZOMBIES] will be walking toward
the screen. Both characters will walk around the other side and a [CRIMSON
HEAD] will burst through the door up ahead then ANOTHER [CRIMSON HEAD] will
rise from the left. They will attack from the left and right, so equip a
Submachine Gun or Shotgun and blast them each individually as they get closer.
The characters will move through the door up ahead
== LONG CORRIDOR ==
ONE [ZOMBIE] will move out from the corridor up ahead. A [ZOMBIE] will get up
from the right followed by ANOTHER [ZOMBIE] from the left. ONE MORE [ZOMBIE]
will dash out of the corridor directly ahead and try to grab the characters.
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Green Herb - Destroy the door leading to the Corridor Outside Library
before Chris and Jill open it. They will fight some zombies in the Long
Corridor then finally turn and open it.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Both characters will turn around and open the door. The door can also be
destroyed for a Green Herb.
== CORRIDOR OUTSIDE LIBRARY ==
They will move toward a large statue then hear a cry from a young woman in the
Library room ahead.
/ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
| / [ ] |
| ) o ( F I L E 9 --> Crimson Head Notes |
| / |
| |
| When the characters enter the corridor outside of the Library, they will |
| hear a woman yell out "Nooo!" When they are about to go around the corner |
| near the windows, throw a grenade and it will bust a small statue hanging |
| on the side wall on the left wall as they turn the corner that will contain |
| this file. The statue that contains the file is in an extremely dark |
| portion of the wall near the top just before the left alcove and the |
| characters move by it rather fast so a grenade is highly recommended here. |
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - /
The characters will quickly round the corner and enter the Library.
===============================================================================
---------------------------- B O S S B A T T L E -----------------------------
Boss - Yawn
Recommended Weapon: Shotgun, Submachine Gun (for easy attack canceling)
Weak Point: Mouth
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Green Herb - To the right when the battle with Yawn begins.
[ ] Submachine Gun
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
--> SHOOT HIM IN THE MOUTH
After the characters back up and turn around, Yawn will always start the battle
by opening his mouth and hissing at both characters, so shoot him in the mouth.
The Shotgun isn't as effective while he is on the other side of the room, so
it's your choice as to what weapon to use here.
--> YAWN'S SIDEBITE
He will move toward the two characters then, starting from the left, he will
begin to move his head to the side. Equip the shotgun and keep the cursor near
the top middle portion of the screen and blast him as his head moves to the
right to bite the characters.
--> PREPARE TO BLAST HIM IN THE MOUTH AS HE STRIKES
Yawn will move around the bookcase then slither out from the other side. He
will move to the right side of the room and raise his head up. Aim at the top
of his head and keep the cursor there while the Shotgun is equipped. When he
moves his head back wait for him to strike forward then blast him in the mouth
the second he tries to lunge forward with a bite.
--> ANOTHER SIDEBITE FROM THE OTHER SIDE
Yawn will slither around the bookcase then move out on the other side of the
room. He will move his head to the right and strike with a quick bite attack.
Move the cursor to the right middle portion of the screen and blast him in the
mouth with the Shotgun as he tries to bite. This canceling shot has to be
performed much quicker than the last sidebite.
--> WHY IS HE STARING AT US LIKE THAT?
He will play a slight guessing game with the characters on when he will open
his mouth by moving his head to left, right, and middle portion of the screen.
Follow his head with the cursor while the Shotgun is equipped and prepare to
blast him in the mouth whenever he moves his head back and prepares to strike.
He will always open his mouth and hiss directly after this attack (only if it
is canceled), so shoot him in the mouth with the Shotgun at that time.
--> UP THE LADDER
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Green Herb - Choose to go up the ladder while fighting Yawn and this will
be on the walkway at the top. It has to be taken either while climbing the
ladder or while climbing down, not while the characters stand on the walkway.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
After shooting him again, Chris will tell Jill to climb the ladder. If you
climb it (via the action command) then both characters will stand at the top
while Yawn slithers below. Wait for him to move below the chandelier then shoot
it (six times with a Handgun) as Chris tells Jill to shoot it. The chandelier
will crash down on Yawn's head and make him expose his mouth. Yawn will
slither up the walls then get up on the walkway right next to both characters.
He will open his mouth, but don't shoot him just yet unless you have the
Submachine Gun. Aim at the top middle of the screen then after he moves his
head back, shoot him with the Shotgun when he dives forward to bite.
Once the characters are back on the floor, Yawn will jump into the air and come
down on them with his mouth open, so aim at his mouth while he falls and shoot
him with the Shotgun. The entire pattern will start over from here, or it will
start over automatically if you don't climb the ladder. Climbing the ladder a
second time is basically useless once the chandelier is gone.
--> THE BOTTOM LINE
Shoot him in the mouth with the Submachine Gun simply for canceling his attacks
then switch over to the Shotgun for big damage while he is close. It's pretty
easy to cancel his attacks with just the Shotgun but you need to learn the
timing for each attack first. They can all be canceled with a single blast -
even from the handgun - if timed correctly. Throw grenades at his body
whenever he slithers out from behind the bookcase for extra damage.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
===============================================================================
|********* Resident Evil (Remake) - The Horrors of the Spencer Estate ********|
|- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -|
| M A N S I O N I N C I D E N T 2 [MI02] |
|- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -|
| "We continued our search for the other members... and it turned into... |
| a nightmare... |
|*****************************************************************************|
= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = CHAPTER INFO = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
Chris: Samurai Edge 2, Shotgun (Lv.1)
Jill : Samurai Edge 2, Submachine Gun (Lv.1)
Recommended Secondary Weapon: --
A Rank Item on Normal Mode: Sun/Star/Moon Crest
S Rank Item on Hard Mode : V-Jolt
Unlockable Weapon: --
Unlockable Scenario/Chapter: "Mansion Incident" Chapter 3
NOTE: This chapter must be played through twice in order to collect all files
since some are along the Guardhouse Path and one is along the Cave Path.
= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
== COURTYARD ==
The characters will turn the corner while in a conversation about Rebecca and
Richard. TWO [DOGS] will dash at them from the left as they move around the
wall. They will continue their discussion while on their way to the gates up
the steps ahead.
== FLOODGATE AREA ==
/ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
| / [ ] |
| ) o ( F I L E 1 --> Hunter Notes |
| / |
| |
| After moving through the gate and into the floodgate area, shoot the light |
| on the other side of the pool. This can be hit after moving across the |
| drained pool. |
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - /
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] First Aid Spray - When the characters turn to the left and face off against
the crawling zombie and standing zombie in the Floodgate Area, shoot the light
to the left in the background. This can also be shot when the characters first
enter the Floodgate Area if you look to the left.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
The characters will walk up ahead and notice the pool of water blocking their
path. They will turn to the left and a CRAWLING [ZOMBIE] will attack along
with ANOTHER [ZOMBIE] in the back of him. Be sure to shoot the light in the
background while fighting them to get the First Aid Spray - you don't get too
many chances and it can be hard to hit at times.
The characters will pass by the dead body to the side and walk over to the
crank handle. Point toward the handle and use the command to have Chris
activate the crank. As the characters turn around, a [ZOMBIE] will be standing
very close behind them. The characters will descend the ladder and start to
move down the walkway in the pool area then they will hear hisses behind them.
They will turn around and FOUR [ADDERS] (snakes) will fall from the top walkway
and begin to slither toward them. Try to shoot them with the Handgun as they
move. They will stand still right before they attack giving you a perfect shot
at them. Use the knife if they ever begin to dive at the characters -
sometimes this will not hit them however.
The characters will turn and approach a dead body. FOUR [ADDERS] will drop
from up ahead and the CRAWLING [ZOMBIE] will wake up and move toward them.
Shoot the zombie first of all then shoot the Adders. The Adders seem to attack
a bit sooner this time, so watch for them to stand still then quickly shoot
them before they lunge.
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Green Herb - Near the ladder on the walkway across from the pool in the
Floodgate Area. (NOT ON NORMAL OR HARD MODE)
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
After climbing the ladder at the other end of the pool, TWO [DOGS] will dash at
the characters. The characters will continue further ahead but they'll
eventually turn and THREE [ADDERS] will fall then attack. When they turn back
around, THREE [ADDERS] will fall then a [ZOMBIE] will get up from behind a
small wall. Shoot the Adders first then shoot the zombie. The characters will
get on the elevator at the end of the walkway and take it down.
== WATERFALL AREA ==
While stepping toward the waterfall, the character will turn toward the roaring
stream and see a CRAWLING [ZOMBIE] along with ANOTHER [ZOMBIE] to the right as
they lurch toward the characters.
/ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
| / [ ] |
| ) o ( F I L E 2 --> Neptune Notes |
| / |
| |
| While walking out to the area across from the waterfall shoot the urn in |
| front of the waterfall while fighting the crawling zombie and other zombie. |
| This is in the left urn. |
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - /
/ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
| / [ ] |
| ) o ( F I L E 3 --> Wasp Notes |
| / |
| |
| While fighting the zombies in front of the waterfall, shoot the right crow |
| statue in the background on the side of the gates to the guardhouse. |
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - /
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Grenade - While fighting the zombie in front of the waterfall this will be
lying on a background platform.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Once the zombies are shot down, a [ZOMBIE] will get up from the very back but
he is merely a distraction at the moment for a [ZOMBIE] that walks toward the
group from the left - turn the camera and shoot him then shoot the other.
Now a choice of paths is given to the characters. Point toward a path then
press the A button to choose a path. The Guardhouse path (with the gates) is
longer than the Cave but both of them have about the same difficulty. Both
paths meet up in the Guardhouse. From a story perspective, I would choose the
Guardhouse on my first time through since it will include the first meeting
with a Hunter.
************************ G U A R D H O U S E P A T H *************************
== WATERFALL AREA ==
When the characters move toward the gate, an action sequence will occur. It
pays to equip a Shotgun before this sequence activates.
* Follow the on-screen command to dodge the Hunter's attack.
Chris you were supposed to kill the damn thing! The [HUNTER] from the cutscene
will be in front of the group directly after the cutscene, so equip a Shotgun
and blow him away with it. The characters will turn around and open the gate
to the path ahead.
== PATH TO THE GUARDHOUSE ==
The characters will move along the stone wall then jump out from the side of
the corner to make sure that nothing gets the drop on them like that last
Hunter. TWO [ZOMBIES] will crawl out from openings at the bottom of the
surrounding walls and attack the characters. The characters will move forward
under the overhead bridge but eventually turn around as a [ZOMBIE] falls from
the overhead bridge then gets up to attack. While rounding the corner up ahead
to the left, THREE [DOGS] will dash at the characters.
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Submachine Gun Ammo - On a broken portion of the right wall while moving to
the front door of the guardhouse.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
The characters will march toward the entrance of the guardhouse. Suddenly,
EIGHT [ADDERS] will fall from the top wall and attempt to strike the
characters. It might pay you to throw a grenade as they start to fall or use
the Submachine Gun to shoot them because they can overwhelm the characters and
a knife doesn't always keep you from getting hit.
== GUARDHOUSE FRONT CORRIDOR ==
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Shotgun Ammo - Directly in front of the characters after entering the
[ ] Grenade Guardhouse.
[ ] Green Herb - Shoot the small box under the Shotgun mentioned above. It's
in the dark right corner of the alcove.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Collect the items from up ahead.
/ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
| / [ ] |
| ) o ( F I L E 4 --> Web Spinner Notes |
| / |
| |
| When first entering the guardhouse, grab the ammo directly ahead then shoot |
| the first hanging light while the characters move down the right hall. |
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - /
The characters will turn the corner and walk down the hall to the right. They
will notice a door next to a pile of boxes and a dead body off to the left.
They will open the double doors at the end of the hall.
== GAME ROOM ==
Equip a Shotgun or Submachine Gun for this room. The characters will quickly
turn after entering as a [WEB SPINNER] attacks from the back of them. TWO
[ZOMBIES] will walk around the left corner down the hall. The characters will
back up as a Web Spinner appears to the right of the door. They will look up
at the [WEB SPINNER] on the ceiling then quickly fight off the [WEB SPINNER] on
the floor. The web spinner on the ceiling will drop and after shooting it.
The characters will eventually turn and deal with a [WEB SPINNER] on the
ceiling behind them.
The characters will look back toward the zombies that approach the door and
also notice ANOTHER [WEB SPINNER] on the ceiling. Once the zombies and Web
Spinners are gone, TWO [CRIMSON HEADS] will appear in the outside corridor and
dash toward the characters. The characters will duck further into the room as
the Crimson Heads dash inside then fight them off.
/ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
| / [ ] |
| ) o ( F I L E 5 --> Black Tiger Notes |
| / |
| |
| Shoot the coat rack across from the double doors entrance to the Game Room. |
| The best time to shoot it is after the Crimson Head enters the room - look |
| to the left at that time to see it. |
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - /
Yet ANOTHER [WEB SPINNER] will attack from the right directly following the two
Crimson Heads. The characters will turn around and walk toward the stairs up
ahead. Decide which path the characters will take by pointing to a path and
selecting it.
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Green Herb - On the second floor of the Game Room next to the pool table.
This can be collected while fighting the first few Web Spinners in this room -
watch for it to shine in the background.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
The top path really is the worst path of the two. The characters will fight
off SEVERAL [SMALL SPIDERS] after reaching the top and they will only have
access to a healing item that they could have gotten from below. Shoot the
small spiders with a handgun and slash them when they leap at the screen. One
[WEB SPINNER] will attack from the wall behind them as they turn after dealing
with the smaller spiders.
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Shotgun Ammo - Down the steps behind the railing near some folded chairs in
front of the bar.
[ ] Secondary Weapon Ammo - After walking further down the steps in front of
the bar, this will be behind the middle column.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
SEVERAL [SMALL SPIDERS] will attack down below also, but there will be two
weapons to pick up down as here as well. There are no other enemies for this
portion.
Whichever path they take, they will eventually walk back toward the exit and
leave the room.
== FRONT GUARDHOUSE CORRIDOR ==
The characters will move back down the hall and open the door down the left
path with the boxes this time.
== GUARDHOUSE CORRIDOR ==
The characters will begin to dash down the corridor but they will stop once a
[HUNTER] jumps out from around the left corner. A little shaken up, the
characters will peak around the corner then start to move down the corridor.
(Press Ctrl + F and type "[MNIC2]" to continue with the Guardhouse path)
******************* G U A R D H O U S E P A T H E N D ***********************
**************************** C A V E P A T H *********************************
== CAVE ENTRANCE ==
The characters will walk down the dark and creepy tunnel behind the waterfall.
The only source of light is a single candle at the end next to a ladder that
leads downward.
== CAVE TUNNEL ==
Both characters will climb down into a cave tunnel then turn and around and
move ahead.
/ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
| / [ ] |
| ) o ( F I L E 6 --> Adder Notes |
| / |
| |
| Shoot the light above the typewriter as the characters turn to the left for |
| the first time in the caves. |
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - /
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Shotgun Ammo - Near the typewriter to the left after the first left
[ ] Grenade turn.
[ ] Submachine Gun Ammo
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
There are a bunch of pickups near the typewriter so be sure to grab all three
of them.
Upon stepping around the right corner, TWO [HUNTERS] will dash at the
characters. Shoot them with the Shotgun (preferably) or the Submachine Gun.
You can also kill them with the handgun by shooting them directly in the face.
== BOULDER TUNNEL ==
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Green Herb - On the metal flamethrower hangar to the right after stepping
through the first door in the caves.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
In the next tunnel, the characters will notice a hangar for a flamethrower to
the right side, but where did the flamethrower go? While stepping out toward
the path split ahead an action sequence will occur.
* Follow the on-screen command to move out of the boulder's path.
The characters will turn around after escaping the boulder and open the double
doors behind them.
== BLACK TIGER NEST ==
Upon opening the doors equip the Shotgun and shoot the BIG [BLACK TIGER] spider
that attacks at the entrance. The Submachine Gun works just as well really. A
total of FOUR MORE SMALLER [BLACK TIGERS] will drop from the sides of the room
around where the bigger spider was. Once the spiders have been defeated, the
characters will look around the room while trying to find a way out. They will
decide to climb the boxes and head deeper into the tunnel.
== FRONT GUARDHOUSE CORRIDOR ==
Wouldn't you know that the hole next to the crates in the Guardhouse would lead
to a cave. At least there are no vines in the hole.
The characters will climb out of the hole then open the door to the side of
them.
== GUARDHOUSE CORRIDOR ==
A zombie that knocks on the window to the right will catch the characters'
attention as they walk by. They will watch as the [ZOMBIE] busts through the
glass. After defeating it, ANOTHER [ZOMBIE] will bust through the glass behind
them then ONE MORE [ZOMBIE] will walk out from the left corridor up ahead.
Both paths will get back on the same track from here.
************************* C A V E P A T H E N D *****************************
== GUARDHOUSE CORRIDOR (continued from either path) == [MNIC2]
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Green Herb - Lying in the floor across from a door in the corridor right
before getting to the door of the Guest Room. (NOT ON NORMAL OR HARD MODE)
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
The characters will walk to the end of the corridor then they will begin to
open the door at the end but a [ZOMBIE] will quickly fly through the door and
lunge straight at the characters as they jump back. After blowing it away, the
characters will enter the Guest Room.
== GUEST ROOM ==
/ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
| / [ ] |
| ) o ( F I L E 7 --> Plant 42 Notes |
| / |
| |
| While in the Guest Room, where the dead body lies on the bed, shoot the |
| lamp to the left. This is in the room where the zombie flies through the |
| door shortly before entering. |
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - /
A dead body is on the bed up ahead, but thankfully it won't attack any time
soon.
*********************** C H E C K P O I N T **************************
The characters will move down a secret ladder below a trapdoor to the side of
the bed after the checkpoint.
== PATH TO AQUA RING ==
They will enter a dim corridor with only a few lights. It's best not to shoot
the lights down here or you will be in total darkness just like in the
Guardhouse. As the characters round the first corner to the left, arm a
Shotgun as a [HUNTER] leaps right at the characters then ANOTHER [HUNTER]
approaches from behind the first.
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Shotgun Ammo - On the Path to the Aqua Ring, these will be along the wall
[ ] Green Herb right before reaching a dead body. (GREEN HERB IS NOT ON
HARD MODE)
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
While rounding the next corner, the characters will notice a dead body up
ahead. While approaching the dead body, a [HUNTER] will dash out from behind
the right corner and attack followed by ANOTHER [HUNTER] then ANOTHER [HUNTER]
and then finally the [ZOMBIE] will get up along with the final Hunter.
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Submachine Gun Ammo - After fighting the three Hunters and the zombie along
the Path to the Aqua Ring, this will be on the floor around the right corner.
The characters will step into the waist deep pool up ahead then open the doors
to the Aqua Ring.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
== AQUA RING ==
A fish, no not a fish, a shark, no, not just any ordinary shark... a Neptune
shark will quickly swim by the characters and head to the left as they survey
the Aqua Ring. The [NEPTUNE] shark will circle back around as the characters
look on and dash straight at the characters, so equip the Submachine Gun or
Shotgun and shoot it as it approaches to make it swim away. You can also hit
it in the nose area with the Handgun to stop it as well. The characters will
begin to move ahead then an action sequence will occur shortly after they stop
near the catwalk bridge.
* Follow the on-screen command in order to dodge the Neptune's lunge.
The characters will narrowly miss getting turned into fish food as they move
down the catwalk and look around for the shark. While looking to the right
they will see an oncoming [NEPTUNE] shark swimming straight at them. After
that one, they will turn around just in time to spot another [NEPTUNE]. The
characters will turn back around and exit the Aqua Ring by stepping through the
door up ahead.
== CONTROL ROOM ==
The plant's roots have demolished this control room. Once the characters have
stepped inside, a cutscene will occur eventually.
== LIVING ROOM ==
===============================================================================
---------------------------- B O S S B A T T L E -----------------------------
Boss - Plant 42
Recommended Weapon: Shotgun, Handgun/Submachine Gun (for attack canceling)
Weak Point: Exposed Bulb (Flower)
--> SHOOT THE VINE ARMS
Plant 42 will start the battle with both its main vines (arms) outstretched in
an attempt to spray acid on both characters. Shoot the portion of them that is
closest to Plant 42's middle portion as they flail to its sides to make the
vines stop moving. The Handgun works fine. Only switch to the Submachine Gun
if it starts to drop acid from the end of either vine.
--> EXPOSE THE CENTER BULB (FLOWER)
Aim upward and shoot the center bulb to make it open up and reveal the flower
inside (the reddish/pink portion).
--> SHOOT THE ACID BALLS
It will shoot out balls of acid from its center bulb once the flower is
revealed. Aim at center of each acid ball and shoot it to destroy it. Use the
Handgun, but switch over to the Submachine Gun if the acid balls start to get
too close. Make sure to move the camera when a ball of acid moves out of view
because it can still hit the characters even then. You will have to shoot five
acid balls before the characters will move.
--> UP THE RIGHT SET OF STAIRS
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Shotgun Ammo - On the middle of the right staircase as the characters run
up them.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
The characters will race up the right staircase. Take out the Shotgun and
begin to shoot the center flower as the characters reach the top railing.
While moving up this right set of stairs, the Plant will always swing a vine at
both characters and you will have to dodge by inputting the on-screen command -
always be ready for this attack while moving up the right set of stairs.
--> BLAST IT UNTIL IT THROWS THE CHARACTERS OFF THE TOP FLOOR
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Shotgun Ammo - All on the second floor walkway.
[ ] Secondary Weapon Ammo
[ ] Green Herb
[ ] Green Herb
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
With Shotgun in hand, blast it in the center flower while the characters are on
the second floor walkway. It may attempt to spray acid at the characters but
if you keep blasting it in the flower then it most likely won't spray acid - if
it does then shoot that vine to make it stop.
It will grab the characters and hold them in the air. Rapidly perform the on-
screen command to break free from his grip. The grip will be broken depending
on how many button pushes or how fast you wiggle the Wii-remote. Button pushes
can be failed easily if you are not ready.
--> EXPOSE THE CENTER BULB (FLOWER) AGAIN
The fight will continue just like before while the characters were on the
ground - shoot the vines, shoot the bulb to expose the flower, and shoot the
balls of acid.
--> UP THE LEFT SET OF STAIRS
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Shotgun Ammo - On the left staircase.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
The characters will run up the left set of stairs when they head to the top
floor for the second time. Plant 42 will not try to slap the characters while
they run up this staircase, so you don't have to worry about an action command
while moving up this left staircase. Blast it in the flower once the view is
clear.
--> FACE TO FACE ONCE AGAIN
While at the top, the characters will move to the side of the walkway once
again - only this time, they will be on the other side. There is no difference
here. Keep blasting it in the center flower with the Shotgun and it will
eventually throw the characters off once again and you'll have to struggle with
an on-screen command.
--> THE BOTTOM LINE
The fight doesn't get any more complicated than this. There is a certain level
of randomness to Plant 42's vine attacks. Sometimes it will attack with one
vine and sometimes both, sometimes it will spray acid while the characters are
on the top floor. From what I've seen, its top floor attacks depend on how
aggressive your team is. If you bombard it with shots every chance you get
then it will not attack with its vines as much. Be sure to take advantage of
the extra time while running up the stairs by reloading your weapons at that
moment.
Also, while shooting its balls of acid the bulb can be hit at that time, so if
you are playing with two players, have one person shoot the acid balls while
the other shoots the bulb. This will take down Plant 42 very quickly. If you
are playing solo then you could just take the hits while firing at its bulb or
fire at the acid balls with a Submachine Gun while spraying the bulb every once
in a while with rapid fire.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
===============================================================================
|*************** Resident Evil (Remake) - The Underground Labs ***************|
|- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -|
| M A N S I O N I N C I D E N T 3 [MI03] |
|- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -|
| "The ultimate lifeform... Tyrant!" |
|*****************************************************************************|
= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = CHAPTER INFO = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
Chris: Samurai Edge 2, Shotgun (Lv.1)
Jill : Samurai Edge 2, Submachine Gun (Lv.1)
Recommended Secondary Weapon: Magnum AT or Magnum Revolver
A Rank Item on Normal Mode: MO Disc
S Rank Item on Hard Mode : Fuel Canteen
Unlockable Weapon: MRL
Unlockable Scenario/Chapter: "Rebirth" Chapter 1, "Raccoon's Destruction"
Chapter 1
Be sure to bring the Magnum AT or Magnum Revolver with you for this mission.
There are some areas where enemies will almost always hit you unless you have a
more powerful weapon than the Shotgun. Try to conserve Shotgun Ammo as much as
you can for this stage. Blast Chimeras and Crimson Heads with the Shotgun then
shoot them on the ground with the Handgun to conserve ammo. It really helps to
have Shotgun ammo in reserve for the final boss fight.
NOTE: File 3 and File 8 can be collected in a different order depending on if
you choose the Straight Path or Dark Corridor path in the Main Basement
Corridor. It is much easier to choose the Straight Path (aka. do nothing when
the "Enter" icon pops up).
= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
== CORRIDOR OUTSIDE EMERGENCY EXIT ==
Chris and Jill will step out of the elevator then move down the corridor. A
[ZOMBIE] will get up from the floor in front of them. While moving past the
zombie once it is defeated, THREE [ZOMBIES] will get up from the floor up
ahead.
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] First Aid Spray - Shoot the light above the ladder after fighting the first
group of zombies
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
The characters will climb down the ladder.
== LADDER ROOM ==
[TWO] ZOMBIES will attack as soon as the characters turn around.
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Shotgun Ammo - On a pipe along the left wall after climbing down the
ladder.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
/ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
| / [ ] |
| ) o ( F I L E 1 --> Wesker Report Extract on the Tyrant Plan |
| / |
| |
| After climbing down the ladder, the characters face two zombies, shoot the |
| light on the ceiling. |
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - /
== FIRST FLOOR CORRIDOR ==
/ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
| / [ ] |
| ) o ( F I L E 2 --> Mail to the Chief of Security |
| / |
| |
| Look to the left and shoot the wooden stepper on the left side of the |
| stretchers once the characters move through the double door after |
| descending the ladder. This can also be shot while fighting the Crimson |
| Head in this area. He can actually be knocked back into it. |
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - /
The characters will stare at a dead body once they enter the room. They will
turn to the right to find THREE [ZOMBIES] approaching them. After shooting the
zombies, the characters will turn as a [CRIMSON HEAD] gets up from behind them.
The characters will run down the corridor to the left of the stairs then peak
around the corner by the staircase.
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Secondary Weapon Ammo - As the characters look around the corner near the
[ ] Grenade staircase in the First Floor Corridor these will be
on the floor.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
The characters will quickly look down the corridor but they will turn as a
[CRIMSON HEAD] races up the stairs after them. The characters will move down
the stairs. Once they get near the gate they will turn and a [VOMITING ZOMBIE]
will appear at the top of the stairs. These type of zombies will shoot vomit
balls from their mouth directly at the characters. The vomit balls can be
destroyed with a single blast from the Handgun, so shoot any that the zombie
fires then blast him in the head. The characters will finally open the gate at
the bottom once the zombie has been disposed of.
== MAIN BASEMENT CORRIDOR ==
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Shotgun Ammo - Near the left wall down the dark corridor in the Basement
Main Corridor. You don't have to go down the corridor to get it, just look to
the left while passing by it and grab it.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
From here, a choice of two paths can be chosen. This will affect the enemies
that you fight up until the characters reach the next door and it will affect
the enemies that are fought and paths taken when the characters return here.
Choosing the corridor straight ahead is the best option since you'll get an
extra item that way and the files are easier to grab down that path as well.
******************* S T R A I G H T A H E A D P A T H ***********************
The characters will continue down the corridor and they will face off against
FOUR [ZOMBIES] when they reach the turn to the left.
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Shotgun Ammo - Near the set of shelves around the corner in the Basement
[ ] Green Herb Main Corridor.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
/ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
| / [ ] |
| ) o ( F I L E 3 --> Researcher's Letter |
| / |
| |
| When the characters enter the Main Basement Corridor, do not move down the |
| dark corridor. Let the characters move around the corner ahead. Shoot the |
| top small wooden stepper by the left wall near the stretcher once they pass |
| by the left set of shelves. |
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - /
While moving toward the door at the end of the corridor, equip a Shotgun
because the characters will turn to a dashing [CRIMSON HEAD]. A familiar
looking enemy will appear off to the left as the characters look down the
corridor - was that a Chimera?
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Green Herb - Look down the left corridor right before exiting Basement Main
Corridor and collect this as the Chimera moves beside it.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
**************** S T R A I G H T A H E A D P A T H E N D *******************
********************* D A R K C O R R I D O R P A T H ***********************
While following the dark corridor to the end, the characters will be attacked
by a [CHIMERA] at the very end. Equip a Shotgun and shoot it. The characters
will move on ahead then they will turn as TWO MORE [CHIMERAS] attacks from
behind. The characters will take a peak down the hallway to the left.
****************** D A R K C O R R I D O R P A T H E N D *******************
Both paths meet up at the door to the Corridor to Engine Room. The characters
will move through the door and into the next corridor.
== CORRIDOR TO ENGINE ROOM ==
The characters will move ahead and take a left. They will approach an elevator
at the end and find that it is without power. Equip the Shotgun since the
characters will turn to the right as a [CHIMERA] runs down the hall after them.
While moving back down the corridor, they will turn to the left and fight a
[CRIMSON HEAD] that dashes toward them. TWO [CHIMERAS] will attack from the
corridor up ahead as the characters back off. The characters will continue
into the Engine Room.
== ENGINE ROOM: FRONT ==
Both characters will walk by the steaming pipes straight ahead then turn the
corner as THREE [CHIMERAS] attack followed by a [CRIMSON HEAD]. They will
continue into the next room via the door to the right.
== ENGINE ROOM: MIDDLE ==
While moving up ahead, the characters will quickly turn as a [CHIMERA] jumps
out of a vent behind them. Another [CHIMERA] will move out from the left side
while the characters move behind the fenced area followed by a [CHIMERA] that
crawls along the ceiling. Blast the ceiling Chimera off with a Shotgun -
always aim for their head while they are on the ceiling, so they'll fall after
the first blast. These things like to fall down then attack instantly while
they are on the ceiling. The characters will move around the pipes and enter
the Engine Control Room.
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Shotgun Ammo - In the reddish colored Engine Room, these will be on the
[ ] Grenade fence near the door and on a pipe across from the door
respectively. These will respawn if the characters die and
return to the checkpoint in the Engine Room ahead.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
*********************** C H E C K P O I N T **************************
== ENGINE CONTROL ROOM ==
/ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
| / [ ] |
| ) o ( F I L E 4 --> Chimera Notes |
| / |
| |
| Fully destroy the computer monitor to the right while on the way to the |
| power switch controls. |
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - /
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Shotgun Ammo - Lying on the floor across from the elevator switch controls.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
The characters will walk along the left side of the Control Room and find the
Elevator Control Switch on the middle monitor. They will activate the elevator
then walk out of the room by heading across the other side of the walkway. As
they get near the door, FOUR [CHIMERAS] will attack (two from the left vent and
one from the door) - the fourth Chimera will run along the ceiling. The
characters will walk toward the next room then turn to find TWO [HUNTERS] in
the Control Room, which will make the characters run into the next room.
== ENGINE ROOM: MIDDLE ==
Take out a Magnum and shoot the first [HUNTER] as it enters the room then shoot
the next [HUNTER] as it dashes through the doorway. If you use the Shotgun or
Submachine Gun here, you'll most likely get hit. Switch to the Shotgun very
quickly after dispatching the Hunters since TWO [ZOMBIES] will attack from the
characters' left. Make sure to blast the left one since he will run up and hit
the characters while the other will only grab.
Right in front of the doorway, the characters will turn as a [CHIMERA] races
along the ceiling behind them followed by TWO MORE [CHIMERAS]. The characters
will take a slight breather then walk through the next doorway.
== ENGINE ROOM: FRONT ==
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Green Herb - When the characters reenter the first Engine Room this will be
directly across from them before they turn. (NOT ON NORMAL OR HARD MODE)
[ ] Shotgun Ammo - When the character turn to face the zombies followed by the
vomiting zombie in the first Engine Room, this will be on the wall above where
the vomiting zombie appear.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Use a Handgun to blast both of the [ZOMBIES] down the hall to the left then be
sure to ready yourself for the [VOMITING ZOMBIE] that will show up on the right
side in the back. This zombie is very close, so he can hit the group easy -
take him down quickly or be prepared to blast his vomit ball.
As the characters reach the next corner, they will turn as a [CHIMERA] crawls
along the ceiling toward them and ANOTHER [CHIMERA] and a [ZOMBIE] appear in
the back. Be sure to try for a headshot on the zombie - it's very easy to get
since he only walks most of the time.
/ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
| / [ ] |
| ) o ( F I L E 5 --> Brad Vickers Profile |
| / |
| |
| Before leaving the engine room, shoot the light above the double doors - |
| this can be hard to hit, so keep shooting. |
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - /
The characters will exit the Engine Room after the fight.
== CORRIDOR TO ENGINE ROOM ==
While cautiously moving down the corridor, the characters will finally get back
to the elevator. Be sure to equip the Magnum here since the characters will
turn as TWO [CRIMSON HEADS] approach them from behind. Keep the targeting
cursor in about the middle (down a bit) portion of the screen and keep pressing
the B button to hit the first Crimson Head - for some reason the first Crimson
Head can be an ass at times (this is one that does not stagger to gunfire).
Another way to handle him is to time a grenade by throwing it right as the
characters turn so it will blow up as the first Crimson Head gets to the
characters.
The characters will enter the elevator and take it up to the top floor floor.
== CORRIDOR OUTSIDE OF LAB ==
Be sure to collect the items at the corner because a big fight is up ahead -
well, sort of.
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Secondary Weapon Ammo - In the right corner of the Corridor Outside Lab
[ ] Green Herb after stepping off of the elevator.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
/ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
| / [ ] |
| ) o ( F I L E 6 --> Tyrant (T-002) Notes |
| / |
| |
| Shoot the light on the ceiling in the Corridor Outside Lab after getting |
| off the elevator. |
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - /
== LAB ==
/ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
| / [ ] |
| ) o ( F I L E 7 --> B.O.W. Notes |
| / |
| |
| When the characters enter the lab, quickly shoot the big CPU to the right |
| and this will appear on the side of the destroyed monitor. This is all |
| directly in front of the characters and to the right a bit as they enter. |
| A cutscene plays shortly after this is in view. |
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - /
A cutscene will play once the characters step far enough into the room - have
the Magnum AT equipped to use after the cutscenes. An action sequence will
occur directly after the cutscene.
* Follow the on-screen command to dodge the Tyrant's claw.
===============================================================================
---------------------------- B O S S B A T T L E -----------------------------
Boss - Tyrant
Recommended Weapon: Magnum AT
Weak Point: Exposed Heart
This boss is extremely easy if you brought the Magnum with you. The characters
will start out a little ways from him and then he will get close and prepare to
attack. Simply hit him in the heart three times with the Magnum and it will
make him fall. Shoot him before he gets too close and it will kill him before
he even has the chance to attack. You may even kill him before Chris says, "We
have to take this thing down!"
If you didn't bring the Magnum then blast him with the Shotgun right before he
swings his arm and that blast will stagger him. Only shoot whenever he moves
since he will remain close to both characters.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
===============================================================================
Be sure to destroy tons of computer equipment with a Handgun while the
characters leave. You may even want to toss a grenade if you're going for a
high rank in objects destroyed.
== CORRIDOR OUTSIDE LAB ==
While moving back toward the elevator, blast the [HUNTER] that appears around
the corner with a Shotgun. The characters will get back in the elevator and
take it back to the basement.
== CORRIDOR TO ENGINE ROOM ==
Brad will contact Chris and Jill once they step out of the elevator. A
different tune will begin to play as both characters run toward the exit door.
Have a Shotgun ready for the next few parts. A [CHIMERA] will crawl along the
ceiling toward the characters when they face the right corridor then TWO
[ZOMBIES] will get up from the floor as the Chimera dies.
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Green Herb - In the left corner of the Corridor to Engine Room when the
Chimera and two zombies attack on the way back.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
The characters will move through the next door.
== MAIN BASEMENT CORRIDOR ==
The enemy setup in this area and the path the characters will take depends on
which path that you chose earlier.
******************* IF YOU CHOSE THE STRAIGHT PATH EARLIER ********************
TWO [CHIMERAS] will attack from the corridor to the right as the characters
step through the door. The characters will move to the dark corridor at the
end. They will turn to face the dark corridor as a [CHIMERA] crawls along the
wall toward them and ONE [VOMITING ZOMBIE] followed by ANOTHER [VOMITING
ZOMBIE] begin to attack from the inside of the corridor.
/ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
| / [ ] |
| ) o ( F I L E 8 --> Resident Evil Digest 1 |
| / |
| |
| When the characters enter the dark corridor down the right hall, shoot the |
| light at the bottom of the left wall while fighting the Chimera and |
| zombies. |
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - /
The characters will race to the end and step through the gate.
**************** IF YOU CHOSE THE STRAIGHT PATH EARLIER (END) *****************
**************** IF YOU CHOSE THE DARK CORRIDOR PATH EARLIER ******************
The characters will look down the right corridor as a single zombie gets up
from the floor at the end and walks down the dark corridor. They will be
interrupted as a [CRIMSON HEAD] dashes toward them from the left when they
turn. The characters will turn around only to find the same [VOMITING ZOMBIE]
from earlier behind them and a [HUNTER] will dash out from the left corridor as
well. The characters will turn and run down the corridor - and check the dark
corridor just in case - then head for the open gate.
************* IF YOU CHOSE THE DARK CORRIDOR PATH EARLIER: (END) **************
== FIRST FLOOR CORRIDOR ==
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Green Herb - At the top of the stairs in the First Floor Corridor while
leaving the Main Basement Corridor. (NOT ON NORMAL OR HARD MODE)
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
The characters will move around the railing at the top then a [ZOMBIE] and a
[VOMITING ZOMBIE] will get up from the floor. Try to kill both of them at
about the same time since a [CRIMSON HEAD] will get up off the ground once the
first zombie dies.
The characters will run to the end of the corridor and stand at the doors to
the next room. TWO [ZOMBIES] will attack immediately then another FOUR
[ZOMBIES] will move around the side of the walls in the back. The characters
will climb back up the ladder.
== CORRIDOR OUTSIDE OF EMERGENCY EXIT ==
The characters will finally reach the top of the ladder then open the emergency
exit doors to the left.
== CORRIDOR TO EMERGENCY ELEVATOR ==
/ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
| / [ ] |
| ) o ( F I L E 9 --> Resident Evil Digest 2 |
| / |
| |
| Right as the characters step through the doors of the corridor that lead to |
| the emergency elevator, shoot the second light up above them as they run. |
| The first light cannot be destroyed. The characters will turn back around |
| and fight two Hunters afterward. It can still be shot then, but I would |
| advise throwing a grenade at that point. |
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - /
While they race forward, the characters will suddenly stop as they hear a
screech from behind then turn to face the TWO [HUNTERS] with a Shotgun or
Magnum equipped. ONE MORE [HUNTER] will appear directly in front of them as
the characters turn back around but he falls victim to a few Shotgun blasts
easily.
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Shotgun Ammo - After defeating the single Hunter in the Corridor to
[ ] Green Herb Emergency Elevator these will be behind the railing on the
left and right side respectively as the characters move
around the left corridor ahead. They both blend in with the
pipes and you'll have to turn the camera a bit to the left
to see the Green Herb. (GREEN HERB IS NOT ON HARD MODE)
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
The characters will race to the end then look down the corridor for some more
enemies. Once they see that the coast is clear, they will run down the empty
corridor then a cutscene will trigger.
Now joined with Rebecca, the characters will enter the emergency elevator and
take it to the top.
===============================================================================
---------------------------- B O S S B A T T L E -----------------------------
Boss - Tyrant
Recommended Weapon: Shotgun or Magnum, Handgun (long distance), Grenades
Weak Point: Exposed Heart
--> GO BERSERK
At the beginning of the battle, the characters will back away as the Tyrant
looks on. Wait until he starts to walk or shortly before he starts to walk
then toss any left over grenades toward him and hit him directly in the heart
with the Handgun. Fire, fire, grenade, fire, fire, fire, grenade. Shoot him
until you have to reload the second time then switch over the Magnum or
Shotgun. Nearly 25% of his life should be gone by the time he reaches the
characters. Don't toss a grenade while the characters back up or it will miss
since he has a small window of invincibility while he remains still at the
beginning of the fight.
--> HE WILL ATTEMPT AN ARM SWING
Right when he prepares to swing, shoot him directly in the heart with the
Magnum or Shotgun - really the Shotgun works the best for canceling his
attacks. He will stagger backward and approach the characters once again.
--> HE SWINGS BUT MISSES... HOPEFULLY
Right when he swings again, shoot him in the heart once again with the Shotgun.
He will miss the characters with the first swing but then quickly try another
swing. Use the on-screen command to quickly dodge up under his arm as he tries
for the next swing and the characters will duck up under it then run. The
characters will run to the other side then turn around and face him again.
--> HOW WILL HE PURSUE THEM?
He will do one of two things once the characters turn: Either he will walk
toward them - equip the handgun and shoot him in the heart rapidly if he does
this - or he will dash at the characters. If he dashes, equip the Shotgun and
shoot him in the heart just before he moves his claw to the side to slash the
characters. This will stagger him and make him move back.
--> MORE SWING CANCELING
As he approaches once again, shoot him with the Shotgun right before he swings
and he will miss. Use the on-screen command to dodge his second swing then the
characters will run to the other side.
--> THE THIRD (DODGEABLE) SWING INTO THE GRAB
Sometimes (randomly) right after dodging the Tyrant's swing via the action
command, he will take another swing as the characters move beside him. Another
action command will appear then you'll have to follow it to dodge the third
swing. He will walk up to the characters at that time then grab them and hold
them up in the air.
Equip the Shotgun or Magnum then blast his head while he holds both of the
characters. Sometimes you might accidentally hit his hand if you shoot too
early. He will drop the characters after about two shots - sometimes three -
then the characters will run away and face him again. If this move is not
escaped then he will slash the characters and eventually impale them for a one
hit kill then throw them to the ground.
--> THE THIRD (UNDODGEABLE) SWING FROM NOWHERE
This usually happens toward the end of the fight or if you allow the second
swing of his two-hit attack to hit the characters. The characters will
sometimes not run after dodging the second swing. At that time, the Tyrant
will pause and charge a third swing. Shoot him in the heart at that time to
cancel the third swing then he will stagger and the characters will eventually
run. It's kind of easy to see this coming since the characters will not run
and the Tyrant will pause, so watch for it!
--> THE RARE JUMP ATTACK
When the characters run away from the Tyrant, he may stop for a moment then
jump into the air. He will fall down with his claw and attempt to stab both
characters. While he flies down, equip the Shotgun and shoot him directly in
the heart to make him fly back down to the ground on his back. He will always
walk toward the characters after this attack is canceled, so shoot him with the
Handgun at that time.
--> CHICKHEART TO THE RESCUE
Once the Tyrant reaches his last 25% of life and while he is at a distance from
the team (they have to run from him while the Tyrant is low in life), Brad will
drop an MRL (Mini Rocket Launcher) from the helicopter up above. Pick up the
MRL then shoot the Tyrant with it to possibly kill him. It may take about two
shots. I wouldn't advise shooting him during a dash (his first attack after
getting the MRL) - shoot him after canceling an attack with the Shotgun.
--> THE BOTTOM LINE
Use either the Shotgun (preferred) or Magnum to cancel the Tyrants attacks and
blast the hell out of that heart of his whenever the characters dodge an attack
through an on-screen command to whittle his life down very quickly! This boss
can be your little plaything as long as you get the timing down for canceling
each of his attacks.
There is a certain level of randomness involved in his swings but just watch
the bottom of the screen to see the action commands or the way the Tyrant acts
and you shouldn't have any problems dodging and canceling. Reload after
dodging his attacks or while he staggers. You may want to switch over to the
Handgun when he staggers back at times to get in a few extra hits but be
careful when doing that. Never constantly blast him with any weapon while he
is next to the group or you will likely fail to cancel his attacks - only use
timed shots while he is in close range.
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Green Herb - All lying around the Heliport during the fight with the
[ ] Green Herb Tyrant.
[ ] Green Herb
[ ] MRL Ammo - When the Tyrant reaches its last 25% of life AND it is at a
distance from the characters, Brad will throw this out from the helicopter.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
And as good ole' Brad would say... Kill it... Whatever it is!
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
===============================================================================
-------------------------- S U B S C E N A R I O 2 ---------------------------
J U L Y 2 4, 1 9 9 8
_ _ _ _ _
REBECCA | | |(_) __ _ | |__ | |_ _ __ ___ __ _ _ __ ___ RICHARD
| | || | / _` || '_ | __|| '_ ` _ / _` || '__|/ _
CHAMBERS | | || || (_| || | | || |_ | | | | | || (_| || | | __/ AIKEN
| | _||_| __, ||_| |_| __||_| |_| |_| __,_||_| __ |
/ |___/ /
[SB02]
|*********** Resident Evil (Remake) - The Survivors of Bravo Team ************|
|- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -|
| N I G H T M A R E 1 [NI01] |
|- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -|
| "Demons... everywhere..." |
|*****************************************************************************|
= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = CHAPTER INFO = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
Rebecca: Submachine Gun HP (Lv.1)
Recommended Secondary Weapon: --
A Rank Item on Normal Mode: Cylinder Shaft
S Rank Item on Hard Mode : Hex Crank
Unlockable Weapon: Assault Shotgun, Submachine Gun HP
Unlockable Scenario/Chapter: "Nightmare" Chapter 2
(^requires "A" rank on Nightmare 1)
= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
== GUEST ROOM ==
Rebecca and Richard start off in the Guest Room next to the bed.
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Grenade - Look to the right while starting in the Guest Room to see it on
some drawers.
[ ] First Aid Spray - Shoot the light on the left wall while heading toward the
door of the Guest Room.
[ ] Assault Shotgun - Destroy the first door in the Guest Room with the
Submachine Gun HP.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Shoot down the door ahead for an extra item then shoot the [ZOMBIE] behind the
door.
== GUARDOUHSE CORRIDOR ==
Both characters will turn to the right and notice FIVE [WASPS] flying around
the area beside them. Shoot the Wasps with the Handgun as they buzz around.
Only slash as a last resort when they fly toward the screen with their stingers
exposed.
The characters will hear a moan then look down the hall behind them and see a
[ZOMBIE]. A [DOG] will race down the corridor after the zombie has been
defeated. The characters will move to the end and notice a zombie beating on
the outside window to the right.
/ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
| / [ ] |
| ) o ( F I L E 1 --> Richard Aiken |
| / |
| |
| At the end of the hall after fighting the first dog, shoot the right stack |
| of books on the desk while the characters stare at the zombie outside the |
| window. |
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - /
They will stare at the zombie as they move by then the [ZOMBIE] will busts
through the window and attack.
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Submachine Gun HP Ammo - After the zombie breaks through the window, shoot
the bottom left picture on the row of shelves by the door at the end of the
corridor.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
The characters will continue down the corridor and enter the next corridor
through the room at the end of the hall.
== FRONT GUARDHOUSE CORRIDOR ==
As the characters walk toward the exit door, a [WEB SPINNER] will drop from the
ceiling in front of the door. They will turn around to notice SEVERAL [SMALL
SPIDERS] crowding around the storage area. Toss a grenade at the small spiders
to quickly get rid of them all. ANOTHER [WEB SPINNER] will chase the
characters back down the hall. The characters will quickly move back down the
corridor and enter the Game Room through the double doors at the end.
== GAME ROOM ==
Upon stepping inside, the characters will turn to the right and notice a [BLACK
TIGER] spider - blast him with the Assault Shotgun. Once he is defeated, they
will turn to the left and face a [WEB SPINNER] and TWO [WASPS]. Shoot the Web
Spinner first with the Assault Shotgun. The characters will move around the
corner as they hear moans and fight off TWO [ZOMBIES]. While walking to the
stairs they will quickly turn as a [CRIMSON HEAD] dashes at them - have the
Assault Shotgun or Submachine Gun HP ready for him. They will walk toward the
stairs and have to fight off TWO [WEB SPINNERS] - one on the stairs ahead and
one on the wall.
A choice of paths will then be given to the two characters. It is best to
choose the top path since the items from the top path are the only ones that
cannot be retrieved without taking that route. The top path has two items and
no enemies. The bottom path has one hidden item and a [ZOMBIE] will attack as
the characters turn around.
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Secondary Weapon Ammo - Shoot the middle glass bottles on the right table
in front of the bar table below the steps.
[ ] Green Herb - At the far end of the pool table up the stairs.
[ ] Assault Shotgun - On top of the pool table up the stairs.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
After moving up or down either path, the characters will return to the front
double doors of the Game Room. Right as they open the doors have an Assault
Shotgun or Submachine Gun HP ready since a [CRIMSON HEAD] will attack
immediately after opening the doors. The characters will back up from the
Crimson Head and move into the corner but be sure to focus your aim on the [WEB
SPINNER] that drops from the ceiling to the left since it will attack before
the Crimson Head will. Take out the Crimson Head afterward then switch to the
Handgun to defeat the THREE [WASPS] that fly through the open doors. The
characters will move back out into the corridor and try to leave the Guardhouse
once again.
== FRONT GUARDHOUSE CORRIDOR ==
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Green Herb - After exiting the Game Room, this will be in the left
corridor. (NOT ON HARD MODE)
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
While stepping toward the door a [WEB SPINNER] will crawl out from around the
right corner followed by another [WEB SPINNER] and a [ZOMBIE] from the left
corner. The characters will slowly back up as the creatures follow them and
[SMALL SPIDERS] begin to collect on the wall to the right. Throw a grenade for
some extra kills here since the characters will keep backing up and they will
drop into the hole next to the boxes back in the middle corridor.
== BLACK TIGER NEST ==
They will land in the middle of the Black Tiger nest.
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Green Herb - While fighting the Black Tigers in their nest, look to the
right to see this.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Begin shooting either of the TWO [BLACK TIGERS] with the Assault Shotgun or
Submachine Gun HP as the characters raise up. TWO [ZOMBIES] will eventually
get up from both sides of the room and attack. Rebecca's fear of spiders will
make her afraid of going back up into the Guardhouse, so both characters will
move through the double doors to the right.
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Submachine Gun HP Ammo - On the back right wall after stepping out of the
Black Tiger nest - at the checkpoint.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
*********************** C H E C K P O I N T **************************
== BOULDER TUNNEL ==
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Green Herb - In the Boulder Tunnel, this will be further down the tunnel as
the characters turn to the right. Zombies will attack as they turn, making
them stop. (NOT ON HARD MODE)
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
The characters will move by the corridor up ahead and move toward the door on
the right, but they will turn back around and fight off the THREE ZOMBIES and
TWO [VOMITING ZOMBIES] in the back of the corridor eventually. Use the
Submachine Gun HP on the two vomiting zombies in the back. Be sure to save the
Green Herb in the back for after the fight. The characters will exit the area
through the door on the right.
== CAVE TUNNEL ==
All will be silent as the characters move down the tunnel and turn to the right
up ahead. A SINGLE [BAT] will fly toward them from the corridor in front of
them then they will turn as a total of FOUR [BATS] dash toward them from
behind.
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Green Herb - In the alcove with the typewriter.
[ ] Grenade
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
/ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
| / [ ] |
| ) o ( F I L E 2 --> Edward Dewey Profile |
| / |
| |
| Shoot the last light on the left as the characters step toward the ladder |
| at the end of the Cave Tunnel. |
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - /
The characters will continue down the rest of the tunnel then climb the ladder
at the end.
== PATH TO CAVE ==
The characters will move directly ahead then walk up underneath the waterfall
to the outside area. And hear I thought that characters couldn't move under
the roaring water all this time...
== WATERFALL AREA ==
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Assault Shotgun - On a bench to the left after stepping out from under the
waterfall.
[ ] Grenade - On the back right bench after stepping out from the waterfall.
[ ] Green Herb - Near the bench with the grenade pickup. It comes into view
after fighting a few enemies.
[ ] Secondary Weapon Ammo - Destroy the bench that the grenade was on.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
A wave of birds will fly by up above. FIVE [ADDERS] will fall in the area in
front of the characters then attack. Once the snakes are defeated, the
characters will look up as THREE [CROWS] dash toward them. TWO [ZOMBIES] will
attack as the characters turn around. A [CROW] will fly at the characters as
the zombies attack. When the characters turn yet again, TWO [DOGS] and TWO
[CROWS] will attack.
/ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
| / [ ] |
| ) o ( F I L E 3 --> Crow Notes |
| / |
| |
| While the characters move toward the lift at the Waterfall Area, look to |
| the left to find two pots on the ground. Shoot the back pot for this. |
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - /
The characters will finally move toward the small lift up ahead then take it to
the top.
== COURTYARD ==
Throw a grenade once the [SMALL SPIDERS] are finished collecting on the walls
around the corridor while on the lift. As the characters move down the
corridor, a flock of crows will fly by up ahead then FOUR [CROWS] will dash at
the characters.
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Green Herb - Lying near the exit door in the Courtyard. Where all the
small spiders and wasps attack. This can be seen shining up ahead while
fighting the first set of crows. (NOT ON NORMAL OR HARD MODE)
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
The characters will move up ahead then here some banging coming from the gate
on the other side of the courtyard. They will look up to see a Queen Wasp fly
by with a swarm of wasps with her as the characters move by the middle
structure.
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Green Herb - While fighting the first set of dogs in the courtyard, this
will be at the top of the steps near the gate.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
As the characters move ahead, THREE [DOGS] will attack from the stairs up
ahead. The characters will turn back around and a total of FOUR [DOGS] will
attack from behind. Once the characters move up ahead, they will see that it
was only TWO [ZOMBIES] that were banging on the locked front gate of the
Courtyard.
As the characters step away from the gate, TWO [ADDERS] will attack from the
area in front of them and FIVE MORE [ADDERS] will drop from the wall behind the
characters as they turn - the first Adders in each group attack quick, so be
prepared to shoot them as they drop. While the characters move back around the
middle structure from the opposite side, they will look up to see a flock of
crows fly by. The characters will start to move ahead then turn to fight a
wave of [CROWS] and [DOGS] - use the Submachine Gun HP here.
They will turn once again and Rebecca will begin to panic as [WASPS] along with
the [QUEEN WASP] and [SMALL SPIDERS] begin to gather up ahead. Throw a grenade
once all of the creatures have appeared to get rid of most of them. The Queen
Wasp will appear very close to the group, so shoot her with the Submachine Gun
HP. She take a few more hits than the standard Wasps. Once all the insects
are dead, Richard will recommend that they should take cover inside of the
mansion and they will move toward the door then the chapter will end.
|********** Resident Evil (Remake) - Surviving the Spencer Mansion ***********|
|- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -|
| N I G H T M A R E 2 [NI02] |
|- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -|
| "I'll prove I have what it takes to survive." |
|*****************************************************************************|
= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = CHAPTER INFO = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
------> Get an "A" rank on Nightmare 1 in order to unlock this chapter. <------
Rebecca: Submachine Gun HP (Lv.1)
Recommended Secondary Weapon: --
A Rank Item on Normal Mode: Last Book, Vol. 1/2
S Rank Item on Hard Mode : Emblem/Gold Emblem
Unlockable Weapon: Magnum Revolver
Unlockable Scenario/Chapter: --
= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
== CORRIDOR TO COURTYARD ==
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] First Aid Spray - Shoot the long cabinet to the left after turning the
first corner - it's kind of dark in this section.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Once Rebecca and Richard turn the corner up ahead, a [HUNTER] will attack
around the side of the corner so have the Submachine Gun HP equipped to handle
him.
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Magnum Revolver Ammo - Shoot the picture on the left wall just past the
door on the left.
[ ] Submachine Gun HP Ammo - Blast the first set of double doors with the
Submachine Gun HP before the characters open them.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
The characters will move toward the door then turn as ANOTHER [HUNTER] appears
- shoot him with the Magnum Revolver before he jumps or as he jumps. The
characters will turn and continue into the next room.
== DARK CORRIDOR ==
/ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
| / [ ] |
| ) o ( F I L E 1 --> Enrico Marini Profile |
| / |
| |
| When the characters step through the first set of double doors (or they may |
| blow them open) after fighting two Hunters, look on the left wall once they |
| turn the corner and shoot the large painting. Both characters will look |
| toward the windows by default. |
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - /
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Grenade - On top of the cabinet to the left while fighting the five Adders.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
The characters will move down the corridor to the left then FIVE [ADDERS] will
drop from the ceiling. Shoot them all with the Handgun or Submachine Gun HP.
The characters will continue around the corner and will stop before advancing
further ahead.
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Submachine Gun HP Ammo - Shoot the door to the bathroom in the Dark
[ ] Green Herb Corridor then grab the ammo on the sink and choose
to move toward the toilet to collect the green
herb.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
While they stop, shoot the door on the left that leads to the bathroom in order
to destroy it and the characters will move inside. Be sure to point and press
the A button to "Move" forward when the command appears to get an extra item.
The characters will continue further down the corridor then open the door to
the next room.
== FIRST FLOOR CORRIDOR ==
Dead bodies will be on the side of the corridor up ahead.
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Magnum Revolver Ammo - On the first cabinet in the hall with the dead
bodies.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
The characters will walk up to the corner then look around as TWO [DOGS] charge
them. They will duck back around the corner as the two dogs attack followed by
ANOTHER [DOG]. After the dogs are defeated, TWO [ZOMBIES], a [DOG], and TWO
VOMITING [ZOMBIES] will get up from the floor behind the characters. Shoot the
dog in the head to start things off. Switch over to the Submachine Gun HP if
the vomiters start to get the best of your team. The characters will run down
the next corridor then open the door to the next room. A [ZOMBIE] will attack
them as they open the door.
== THE GALLERY ==
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Secondary Weapon Ammo - After fighting the single zombie at the doors of
the Gallery, shoot the top painting in the middle portion of the left wall.
[ ] Green Herb - Shoot the statue on the stand in the center of the Gallery.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
While inside of the Gallery, the characters will face to the right and fight
off TWO [ZOMBIES] and a [BAT] as the creatures step out of the doorway to the
right - one zombie appears from the left. The characters will then exit the
Gallery through the double doors ahead.
== MAIN HALL FIRST FLOOR ==
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Green Herb - When the characters first enter the Main Hall, shoot the vase
on the small table next to the bottom of the stairs. (NOT ON HARD MODE)
[ ] Grenade - Shoot the vase on the small table to the right of the front doors
as the characters run to them.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Finally they are back in the main hall! The characters will move toward the
door and try to open it. It is locked!
/ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
| / [ ] |
| ) o ( F I L E 2 --> Sealed Letter to Sergei Vladimir |
| / |
| |
| Once the characters enter the first floor main hall, they will check the |
| front doors to find that they are locked. When they turn, a Hunter and |
| Wasps will attack. Look to the right of the main staircase to barely make |
| out a small round painting on the back right wall. Shoot it then collect |
| the file. This can be shot while the characters move toward the stairs as |
| well. |
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - /
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Submachine Gun HP Ammo - While the characters face away from the double
doors in the main hall, look to the left and shoot the first chair against the
wall.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
They will turn around as a [HUNTER] jumps at them and THREE [WASPS] attack from
the front of the stairs. ANOTHER [HUNTER] will jump out from the area to the
left of the main staircase. The two characters will step toward the stairs as
they talk then eventually climb the stairs.
== MAIN HALL SECOND FLOOR ==
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Green Herb - On the left side of the Second Floor Main Hall as the
characters step toward the windows. (NOT ON NORMAL OR HARD MODE)
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
The door to the Second Floor Corridor on the left wall can be destroyed, though
the characters will still just pass right by it. The characters will move
around the left side of the second floor then they will be attacked by TWO
[CROWS] that fly through the window followed ANOTHER THREE [CROWS] - the last
three come one at a time. A [CRIMSON HEAD] will bust through the door behind
them as the characters turn to fight if off. TWO [WASPS] will also fly behind
the Crimson Head. Another [CRIMSON HEAD] will dash toward the group from
behind as the first one is defeated. When the second Crimson Head falls, TWO
[VOMITING ZOMBIES] will get up from behind him. Use the Submachine Gun HP for
most of the enemies at this part.
The characters will continue on across the front portion of the second floor
then they will turn and look out the window. A cutscene will trigger when they
look out. After the cutscene, the characters will enter the Outside Corridor
up ahead.
*********************** C H E C K P O I N T **************************
== OUTSIDE CORRIDOR ==
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Grenade - When the characters turn to face the Hunter and Wasps in the
Outside Corridor, this will be behind the right railing in the back.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
The characters will turn and fight off a [HUNTER] and TWO [WASPS] while trying
to advance ahead. The characters will continue ahead then another cutscene
will play.
After the cutscene, the characters will be standing face-to-face with Yawn.
Just like in the boss fight inside the Mansion with Chris and Jill, follow
Yawn's head and blast him when he begins to open his mouth. Use either the
Handgun or Submachine Gun HP for this part. Don't worry about damaging him,
just cancel his attacks.
The characters will begin to back up as Yawn follows.
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Green Herb - While running from Yawn in the Outside Corridor, this will be
behind the railing to the left across from the exit door.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
The characters will both scramble down the corridor ahead and run for the door.
Yawn will move up to them as they turn while standing next to the door. Shoot
his mouth right as he turns his head to the side before he strikes to cancel
his attack. The characters will bust through the door.
== UPSTAIRS CORRIDOR ==
The characters will turn as Yawn starts to move into the corridor.
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Submachine Gun HP Ammo - While passing by the stairway railing as Yawn
chases the characters, this will be on the floor near the left wall.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
The next door at the end of this corridor can be destroyed, but you have to
equip the Magnum Revolver and shoot it from long distance. The characters will
run to the right and vault over the railing of the staircase. They keep moving
but one of them falls and they both look back at Yawn. Shoot his mouth when he
raises up and opens it to keep him from biting.
Yawn will eventually bust through the railing but the characters will get up
and run through the door at the other end of the corridor.
== LONG CORRIDOR ==
As they open the door, they will turn back and see if Yawn is still in pursuit.
Prepare to blast Yawn in the mouth right before he strikes through the doorway.
The characters will run frantically down the corridor as Yawn follows and
knocks over the spears on the sides of the room in his pursuit. Yawn will
raise his head and attempt another strike which you should answer with a shot
to his mouth while the characters run from him. While looking back around the
corner, the characters will notice that Yawn has disappeared. The characters
will open the next door and run into the next corridor.
== CORRIDOR OUTSIDE LIBRARY ==
It seems that Yawn has given up his pursuit as the characters move freely
through the hall up ahead. Or has he?
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Grenade - Destroy the statue on the stand that the characters move toward
after opening the door to the corridor leading to the Library.
[ ] Secondary Weapon Ammo - Shoot the second small statue on the dark left wall
as the characters round the corner to head to the Library doors before the
characters move by the alcove mentioned below. This is where File #9 is
located in the Mansion Incident 1 chapter.
[ ] Magnum Revolver Ammo - In the left alcove while moving down the Corridor
[ ] Green Herb Outside Library. (GREEN HERB IS NOT ON HARD MODE)
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
/ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
| / [ ] |
| ) o ( F I L E 3 --> Yawn Notes |
| / |
| |
| Right before the characters open the double doors to the Library, shoot the |
| painting at the end of the hall. |
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - /
The characters will move down the hall then open the double doors at the end.
The double doors can be destroyed as well. A cutscene will play inside of the
Library.
== LIBRARY ==
===============================================================================
---------------------------- B O S S B A T T L E -----------------------------
Boss - Yawn
Recommended Weapon: Magnum Revolver, Submachine Gun HP (for easy attack
canceling)
Weak Point: Mouth
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Green Herb - On the first crate beside the stacked crates during the Yawn
fight.
[ ] Magnum Revolver - Blast the top crate during the Yawn fight and this will
be on the top shelf of the bookcase behind that crate.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
This fight plays out much like the last fight. He will open his mouth at the
beginning so take out the Magnum Revolver and fill his mouth full of lead.
--> YAWN ATTACKS FROM ABOVE
Yawn will move up the ladder to the side of the room and appear to disappear.
He will swing the front portion of his body down to the second floor and
attempt to bite the characters from the side. He will attack from random
sides. Cancel the attacks with the Submachine Gun HP. It is possible to
cancel the attacks with the Magnum Revolver and damage him big time here, but
you must shoot him directly in the mouth for him to take maximum damage. I
would recommend saving the Magnum Revolver for later in the battle if this is
your first time fighting on this chapter.
--> ONE MORE AIR ATTACK
The characters will dash away from under the second floor walkway and then Yawn
will jump at them from above. This jump attack is very fast, so take out the
Submachine Gun HP and blast his mouth as he falls to cancel the attack. You
have to shoot a little sooner than you think. Now the battle will carry on
like before, which is why I will simply copy and paste most of the information
from the last Yawn fight - he does move in a slightly different pattern, so
some of this info is edited.
--> SHOOT HIM IN THE MOUTH
After the characters back up and turn around Yawn will always start the ground
battle by opening his mouth and hissing at both characters, so equip the Magnum
Revolver and shoot him in the mouth. It's possible to blast him a total of
four times if you start early. Toss a grenade at him also.
--> PREPARE TO BLAST HIM IN THE MOUTH AS HE STRIKES
He will move to the right side of the room and raise his head up. Aim at the
top of his head and keep the cursor there while the Magnum Revolver is
equipped. When he moves his head back wait for him to strike forward then
blast him in the mouth the second he tries.
--> YAWN'S SIDEBITE
Yawn will move around the bookcase then slither out from the other side. He
will move toward the two characters then, starting from the left, he will begin
to move his head to the side. Equip the Magnum Revolver and keep the cursor
near the top middle portion of the screen and blast him as his head moves to
the right to bite the characters.
--> ANOTHER SIDEBITE FROM THE OTHER SIDE
Yawn will slither around the bookcase then move out on the other side of the
room. He will move his head to the right and strike with a quick bite attack.
Move the cursor to the right middle portion of the screen and blast him in the
mouth with the Magnum Revolver as he tries to bite. This shot has to be done
much quicker than the last sidebite.
--> WHY IS HE STARING AT US LIKE THAT?
He will play a slight guessing game with the characters on when he will open
his mouth by moving his head to left, right, and middle portion of the screen.
Follow his head with the cursor while the Magnum Revolver is equipped and
prepare to blast him in the mouth whenever he moves his head back and prepares
to strike. He will always open his mouth and hiss directly after this attack
(only if it is canceled), so shoot him in the mouth with the Shotgun at that
time.
--> THE PATTERN STARTS AGAIN
One he has opened his mouth for the second time while on the floor, he will
return to the top of the second floor and his entire attack pattern will start
over starting with the lunging bites from above.
--> THE BOTTOM LINE
Use the Magnum on him all the time and shoot him multiple times in the mouth
when he opens his mouth and this will be one quick boss fight! Toss grenades
at his body when he moves out from behind a bookcase to speed up the fight even
more.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
===============================================================================
-------------------------- S U B S C E N A R I O 3 ---------------------------
J U L Y 2 4, 1 9 9 8
____ _ _ _ _
ALBERT | _ ___ | |__ (_) _ __ | |_ | |__
| |_) |/ _ | '_ | || '__|| __|| '_
WESKER | _ <| __/| |_) || || | | | | | | |
| | ____||_.__/ |_||_| |_| |_| | |
/ /
[SB03]
|***************** Resident Evil (Remake) - A New Beginning ******************|
|- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -|
| R E B I R T H 1 [RE01] |
|- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -|
| "Sure I'm not human anymore but just look at the power I've gained!" |
|*****************************************************************************|
= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = CHAPTER INFO = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
Wesker: Samurai Edge 2, Assault Shotgun (Lv.1)
Recommended Secondary Weapon: --
A Rank Item on Normal Mode: Clark/Gail X-Ray
S Rank Item on Hard Mode : Slide Cartridge
Unlockable Weapon: Submachine Gun HP
Unlockable Scenario/Chapter: "Rebirth" Chapter 2
First of all, this chapter is very short (half the length of the others), but
VERY enemy-filled. There is no checkpoint, so if you die anywhere in the
chapter without a first aid spray then it's back to the beginning with you. If
you have to retry then just start over to help increase your ranking.
= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
== LAB ==
Wesker will start out in the lab after the cutscene.
/ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
| / [ ] |
| ) o ( F I L E 1 --> A Letter to Someone |
| / |
| |
| At the very beginning of this chapter, shoot the monitor in the back on the |
| right before Wesker turns to face the two Chimeras. |
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - /
Wesker will move up ahead then turn to the left and fight off TWO [CHIMERAS].
These can easily be taken down with a Handgun because of how far away they
start. Not trying to let his new power go to his head, Wesker will focus on
escaping and turn to the left with an Assault Shotgun equipped as THREE
[CHIMERAS] dash toward him. Oh, how his enemies now fall so easy to this new
power! One of the Chimeras will be on the ceiling and he will fall shortly
before attacking so be ready for him.
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] First Aid Spray - After fighting the four Chimeras in front of the entrance
doorway to the lab, shoot the monitor in the back on the left. In the Mansion
Incident 3, this is where File #7 is located.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
At the end of the next corridor TWO [CHIMERAS] will dash at Wesker then TWO
MORE [CHIMERAS] will crawl along the ceiling toward him. Wait until the
Chimeras on the ceiling get right above him then blast them with the Assault
Shotgun.
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Assault Shotgun Ammo - On the floor to the right of the exit doorway in the
[ ] Grenade lab.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Wesker will move through the doorway.
== CORRIDOR OUTSIDE LAB ==
ONE [HUNTER] will jump out from the right corridor then ANOTHER [HUNTER] will
jump out after the first has been defeated.
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Green Herb - To the right of the elevator door outside of the lab. (NOT ON
HARD MODE)
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Wesker will look down the corridor for any more then continue to the elevator
and take it down to the basement.
== CORRIDOR TO ENGINE ROOM ==
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Submachine Gun HP Ammo - To the right as Wesker steps out of the elevator.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Wesker will step off the elevator and sprint around the left corner. An action
cutscene will play.
* Follow the on-screen command as the second Chimera runs at Wesker.
What power he now has! Wesker will stand and think about the possibilities.
He will turn to the right then move down the corridor. Equip the Assault
Shotgun since he will turn and face TWO [CRIMSON HEADS] behind him followed by
a THIRD [CRIMSON HEAD]. Wesker will open the door to the next room.
== MAIN BASEMENT CORRIDOR ==
Separate paths may be chosen here. There is some enemy differences down both
paths. You can get all the items by going down the left path, but you'll have
a better chance at grabbing the second file by moving down the right path.
/ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
| / [ ] |
| ) o ( F I L E 2 --> Virus Memo |
| / |
| |
| In the Main Basement Corridor, while moving down the left corridor, after |
| choosing the left path, shoot the final light on top of the left wall while |
| moving toward the gate. If the right path is taken, this light can be seen |
| at the very end of the dark corridor. |
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - /
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Grenade - In front of the dark corridor, down the right path while choosing
paths. Look to the far right while the move icons are up in order to pick this
up without choosing the right path.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
****************************** L E F T P A T H *******************************
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Green Herb - Down the left path, to the right near the shelves in the Main
[ ] Grenade Basement Corridor.
[ ] Secondary Weapon Ammo - Down the left path, shoot the items on the second
shelf from the top to the right.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
This path has a few more enemies, but you'll be able to pick up every item.
Equip the Assault Shotgun since Wesker will turn his back as a [HUNTER] attacks
followed by ANOTHER [HUNTER]. TWO [CHIMERAS] will attack from up ahead as
Wesker turns back around.
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Assault Shotgun Ammo - On the top portion of the left wall once the group
of Chimeras and Hunters attack.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Wesker will move toward the next corridor ahead then TWO [CHIMERAS] and TWO
[HUNTERS] will dash down the corridor in pairs. After the onslaught of
enemies, Wesker will continue down the corridor then look to the right long
enough for you to snatch the item in the dark corridor.
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Green Herb - Near the end of the dark corridor.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
************************** E N D L E F T P A T H ****************************
***************************** R I G H T P A T H ******************************
Wesker will begin to move down the corridor then turn back to the right to face
off against the single [ZOMBIE] in the previous corridor. Once that zombie is
defeated, a [CRIMSON HEAD] and a [CHIMERA] will rush Wesker as he turns back to
the corridor on the left.
Wesker will be consumed by the thought of how his foes now fall so easily as he
comes upon the dark corridor up ahead. The TWO [CRIMSON HEADS] and TWO
[CHIMERAS] inside do not stand a chance. Hahaha! He will move to the end of
the corridor. Wesker will turn at the end of the corridor as a [CRIMSON HEAD]
and [CHIMERA] dash at him.
************************* E N D R I G H T P A T H ***************************
== FIRST FLOOR LAB CORRIDOR ==
Wesker will run up the stairs then be face-to-face with a [HUNTER] then a
[CHIMERA] will drop from the ceiling. He will turn to another [HUNTER] on his
left after those two enemies are finished. THREE [ZOMBIES] will get up in a
row as THREE MORE [ZOMBIES] lurch in the background. This part is your main
chance to get some headshots in this chapter!
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Green Herb - In the corner of the First Floor Corridor where Wesker turns
left to reach the Ladder Room. (NOT ON NORMAL OR HARD MODE)
[ ] Secondary Weapon Ammo - While shooting the zombies at the top of the
stairs, shoot the lit up sign on the right wall.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Wesker will move down the corridor to the side as a [HUNTER] moves up the
stairs after him. TWO [ZOMBIES] will move around the corridor after Wesker.
This is another good headshot portion. Once one of the zombies has been taken
down, a [CRIMSON HEAD] will appear then ANOTHER [CRIMSON HEAD] will follow
after the second zombie has been taken down.
Wesker will be absorbed in his newfound power as he turns the right corner - he
will begin to think about Chris and Jill... He will be so caught up in the
moment that he nearly doesn't turn to the left in time to fight off the
[CRIMSON HEAD] and [CHIMERA]. It doesn't really matter though since he will
plow through them while laughing as if they were two of Alpha team's finest.
/ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
| / [ ] |
| ) o ( F I L E 3 --> Someone's Journal |
| / |
| |
| In the First Floor Corridor, shoot the wooden stepper on the stretcher as |
| Wesker runs by it before he opens the double doors that lead to the ladder. |
| This can also be shot while fighting the four Hunters that pursue Wesker |
| afterward. Use the Submachine Gun HP to shoot it. It's very dark near the |
| stretcher making it hard to see the stepper from a distance. This is in |
| the same location as File #2 on the Mansion Incident 3 chapter. |
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - /
Wesker will run and open the double doors ahead.
== LADDER ROOM ==
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Submachine Gun HP Ammo - As Wesker opens the double doors to the Ladder
[ ] Green Herb Room, these will be in front of the ladder.
[ ] Grenade (GREEN HERB IS NOT ON HARD MODE)
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Wesker will reach the ladder then turn to face FOUR [HUNTERS]. He will climb
the ladder afterwards.
== CORRIDOR OUTSIDE EMERGENCY EXIT ==
Now all Wesker has to do is get to the elevator and... A cutscene will play as
he steps around the corner.
===============================================================================
---------------------------- B O S S B A T T L E -----------------------------
Boss - Lisa
Recommended Weapon: Submachine Gun HP and Grenades
Weak Point: Head (center)
--> THEY JUST DON'T MAKE HER LIKE THEY USED TO
Throw a grenade down the corridor at her then equip the Submachine Gun HP and
aim for the center portion of her head. As she moves toward Wesker, keep
throwing grenades and shooting her. With enough pressure she will fall when
she finally reaches Wesker.
--> IF SHE DOES MAKE IT TO WESKER
She will hold both of her arms in the air and try to hit Wesker overhead.
Shoot her in the face with rapid fire at that time to cancel her attack. Keep
shooting her in the face and it will cancel every attack that she tries to
perform. The Submachine Gun HP still works well even while she is close.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
===============================================================================
|********** Resident Evil (Remake) - A Phoenix Rises From the Fire ***********|
|- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -|
| R E B I R T H 2 [RE02] |
|- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -|
| "Magnificent, don't you think?" |
|*****************************************************************************|
= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = CHAPTER INFO = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
Wesker: Samurai Edge 2, Assault Shotgun (Lv.1)
Recommended Secondary Weapon: --
A Rank Item on Normal Mode: Blue/Red/Yellow Gemstone
S Rank Item on Hard Mode : Death Mask
Unlockable Weapon: Grenade Launcher
Unlockable Scenario/Chapter: --
This chapter can get very fast! You'll need to be ready for jumping Hunters,
face-to-face Chimeras, and plenty of quick camera turns. Keep the Assault
Shotgun equipped most of the time and reload in between single shots if
possible or right after finishing a group of enemies when the pressure is on.
This chapter is a complete rush but it is a total blast once you learn how to
play it. Let's go the details for your stalker in this chapter:
--> LISA, PROTECTED BY THREE SPIRITS
Throughout this entire chapter, Lisa will chase Wesker throughout the mansion
much like a Nemesis... only not as fast and with feminine shrieks instead of
S.T.A.R.S. yells. She must be knocked down with enough firepower to the head
in order to get her off Wesker's back for a while. In order to deal with her,
you MUST know how to cancel her attacks. Read on for a breakdown of her
attacks.
--> HER OVERHEAD ATTACK
Whenever she raises both of her arms in the air, equip the Assault Shotgun and
aim for her head. Right before her arms pass over her head, shoot her in the
head to fully cancel the attack!
--> HER SIDE PUNCH
Whenever she moves both of her arms to the side, shoot her directly in the head
with the Assault Shotgun as she prepares to swing and this will cancel the
attack. This hit much be done much faster in order to cancel the attack when
compared to her overhead swing.
--> ONLY SHOOT TO CANCEL... MOST OF THE TIME
Only shoot her to cancel an attack, don't just keep on laying down firepower on
her or she will most likely hit Wesker while you spam ammo. You can equip the
Grenade Launcher during the encounters to drive her off quite fast though - I'd
actually recommend doing this for the first few encounters, since it will drive
her off very quickly. It may pay you to shoot her right before an attack,
however, just to make sure that Wesker doesn't get hit.
= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
== FIRST FLOOR MAIN HALL ==
Wesker will move out from behind the stairs in the back of the main staircase.
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Grenade Launcher Ammo - To the left of the front doors of the main hall.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Wesker will look toward the main doors of the Spencer Estate then decide to
dash toward them. He's almost out!
Lisa appears to his right and bars Wesker's escape route. "Quite the
troublesome screwup aren't you my dear", Wesker thinks to himself as he decides
to find another route while backing up the main staircase. Don't worry about
shooting Lisa here, it does no good - just fire at breakable objects with the
handgun while Wesker backs up.
== SECOND FLOOR MAIN HALL ==
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Assault Shotgun - As Wesker approaches the railing at the top of the main
[ ] Grenade staircase, these will be behind it.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
After hopping over the railing, Wesker will look back to make sure that Lisa is
not following, but she is! He opens the door to the corridor up above. This
door can be destroyed also.
== CORRIDOR OUTSIDE ARMOR ROOM ==
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Grenade Launcher - Destroy the first cabinet on the left in the Corridor
Outside Armor Room while Wesker moves quickly down the corridor.
[ ] First Aid Spray - Destroy the second cabinet on the right almost directly
after the one that contains the Grenade Launcher in the Corridor Outside Armor
Room.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Be sure to equip the Assault Shotgun here and blast the surrounding furniture
if you want the items found within. Wesker moves too fast to shoot these with
the Handgun. Wesker will round the corner up ahead then be stopped by a
[HUNTER]. Wesker will open the doors to the Armor Room and go inside.
== ARMOR ROOM ==
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Grenade - To the right near the armor while fighting the Hunters in the
Armor Room.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
When Wesker turns TWO [HUNTERS] will appear at the open doorway of the Armor
Room. Once they are gone, [LISA] will step into the Armor Room.
--> CANCEL HER ATTACKS
As she enters the room, you will have to cancel her attacks with the Assault
Shotgun using the same methods that I described at the beginning of this
section. You can also throw grenades or hit her with the Grenade Launcher to
speed up this part. Wesker will eventually back up. Throw a grenade at that
time to damage her a bit since you have some distance in between you and her.
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Green Herb - Behind the stand in the middle of the Armor Room when Wesker
backs up after Lisa enters.
[ ] Secondary Weapon Ammo - Destroy the first armor to the left in the Armor
Room after Lisa enters and Wesker backs up. It's the first armor that appears
while looking to the left.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
She will move up close to Wesker again. At this point, simply cancel her
attacks with the Assault Shotgun until she falls over or you can cancel her
attacks just a few times with the Grenade Launcher and she fall even quicker.
Wesker will leave the room.
== CORRIDOR OUTSIDE ARMOR ROOM ==
Wesker will look back to make sure that she is still dead. She is not. She
will get up and walk toward Wesker once again.
/ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
| / [ ] |
| ) o ( F I L E 1 --> Family Picture |
| / |
| |
| Once Wesker exits the Armor Room, after grounding Lisa, he will turn the |
| corner to the left and a Hunter will jump at him. Destroy the first table |
| to the right to find this file. |
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - /
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Green Herb - Once Wesker exits the Armor Room, shoot the lamp on the back
right table.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Wesker will turn to the right then move around the corner but a [HUNTER] will
jump at him and stop his progress - this Hunter can actually be defeated with a
Handgun shot very easily as he jumps. The jumping Hunters in this chapter are
at a major disadvantage if you know their locations.
Wesker will open the door to the corridor on the right.
== STAIR ROOM ==
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Grenade - When Wesker steps into the Stair Room, grab this from near the
railing before he turns to see Lisa behind him.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
While fleeing, Wesker will turn then Lisa will bust through the door behind
him. Wesker will run down the stairs and head for the door at the bottom.
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Green Herb - In the middle of the Stair Room staircase, below the multitude
of hanging paintings. (NOT ON HARD MODE)
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
A [CHIMERA] will bust through the door in front of him then TWO MORE [CHIMERAS]
will fall down from the chandelier to his left. Wesker will move through the
doorway up ahead and enter the next corridor.
== CORRIDOR TO COURTYARD ==
Wesker will survey the area just a bit. It all seems clear until Wesker turns
toward the double doors then a [HUNTER] breaks right through them and jumps for
him.
*********************** C H E C K P O I N T **************************
After moving through the doorway up ahead Wesker will turn the corner and walk
into the middle of the Dark Corridor.
== DARK CORRIDOR ==
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Secondary Weapon Ammo - Shoot the large painting on the left wall while
Wesker moves toward the windows in the Dark Corridor. It may pay you to shoot
this once he steps further into the room and is facing the Hunters.
[ ] Green Herb - Near the wall while turning the corner in the Dark Corridor
after the checkpoint.
[ ] Assault Shotgun - When Wesker steps toward the cabinets in the Dark
Corridor after turning the corner, this will be on one of the cabinets.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
A [HUNTER] will sneak up behind Wesker as he turns back. Wesker will move to
the other end to escape it only for his path to be blocked by ANOTHER [HUNTER].
Wesker will back toward the windows as the left Hunter jumps at him. The other
Hunter will run at him, so blast the left Hunter with the Assault Shotgun first
followed by the right Hunter.
/ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
| / [ ] |
| ) o ( F I L E 2 --> Trevor Family Notes |
| / |
| |
| While fighting the two Hunters in the Dark Corridor after the checkpoint, |
| shoot the large painting on the back wall across from the window and |
| cabinets. |
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - /
Once those pests are finished, Wesker will continue around the corner ahead.
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Assault Shotgun - When Wesker turns the corner after facing both Hunters in
the Dark Corridor, destroy the first door to the left to make Wesker look
inside the bathroom. Collect this from the floor inside.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Have the Assault Shotgun equipped as he rounds the corner then destroy the
first door on the left that leads to the bathroom. While Wesker looks inside,
A [CRIMSON HEAD] will run toward him from the back of the bathroom. Grab the
weapon inside then Wesker will turn and continue toward the door on the right
side up ahead. If you didn't destroy the door then you'll miss out on the ammo
inside the bathroom and the Crimson Head will burst through the door as Wesker
continues down the corridor, so it is wise to shoot the door.
== FIRST FLOOR CORRIDOR ==
All is silent once again in the hall where things seems to pop up suddenly or
break through windows. Surely not this time.
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Grenade - Shoot the first cabinet to the right while moving down the First
Floor Corridor.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
When Wesker gets near the corner TWO [DOGS] will dash out of the right corridor
and attempt to attack Wesker. It is possible to shoot the chandelier and take
them both out but sometimes the camera doesn't cooperate too well. While
moving further around the corner a [HUNTER] will dash forward and attack.
Wesker will turn his back afterwards as a [CHIMERA] attacks from behind. It
seems the coast is clear, but don't shoot any of the two chandeliers while on
the way to the door of the Gallery - you'll be glad that you didn't later.
Lisa will bust through the door as Wesker tries to enter the Gallery. Maybe
she just wants to see a close-up of Wesker's face without though shades?
Cancel her attack as she tries to hit Wesker overhead.
--> YOU'RE A BIT OF A MESSUP
Wesker will dash away from Lisa. Remember those chandelier's that I told you
not to shoot? Well, take out your Assault Shotgun and blast the first
chandelier up above as Lisa moves under it. This will damage her greatly and
make Wesker back up some more. Another chandelier will be on the ceiling in
front of Wesker when he backs up, so wait for Lisa to move up under this one
then blast it with the Assault Shotgun once again. If you don't use the
chandeliers to your advantage then you'll have to blast her in the head as she
walks toward Wesker.
--> FACE TO FACE WITH HER FACES
There is nothing else you can do once she moves around the corner except cancel
her attacks until she falls. The Grenade Launcher can be used at this point to
speed up her defeat. Once she falls, she will get back up, but she will leave.
Don't waste ammo by shooting her when she gets up since she will walk right
back down the hall and disappear.
Wesker will continue down the hall and enter the Gallery after she leaves.
== GALLERY ==
/ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
| / [ ] |
| ) o ( F I L E 3 --> Lisa Trevor Profile |
| / |
| |
| In the Gallery, shoot the small painting below the light on the back left |
| wall. The best time to do this is after finishing the second Chimera. |
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - /
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Green Herb - On the left side of the Gallery. (NOT ON NORMAL OR HARD MODE)
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Keep the Assault Shotgun equipped since a [CHIMERA] will attack Wesker as soon
as he enters the Gallery. ANOTHER [CHIMERA] will fall down from the ceiling
and attack as Wesker turns to the right. While moving further ahead and trying
to regain focus from all these annoying enemies, Wesker will turn as TWO
[CRIMSON HEADS] dash at him. Once they have been silenced, Wesker will open
the doors and emerge back in the main hall. A cutscene will trigger shortly.
===============================================================================
---------------------------- B O S S B A T T L E -----------------------------
Boss - Lisa
Recommended Weapon: Assault Shotgun (mainly for attack canceling)
Weak Point: Head (center)
--> SHE CAN BE DAMAGED, BUT SHE WILL NOT DIE... YET
Yes, this boss can be totally drained of life right from the beginning of the
battle by shooting her with a few grenade rounds, but she will not be defeated
so easily. In order to defeat her, a certain point of the battle must be
reached first! Her life will actually recharge if she is not in the exact spot
(under the Main Hall chandelier) at the exact time (once Wesker leaps over her
a second time), so...
--> FOCUS ON DODGING/CANCELLING HER ATTACKS
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Green Herb - Near the bottom of the staircase while fighting Lisa.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Once she starts to move toward Wesker at the beginning of the battle, equip the
Assault Shotgun and throw a few grenades at her from a distance. Lisa will
eventually move close enough to Wesker where she will try to hit him and an on-
screen command will appear. Input the command and Wesker will leap to the back
of Lisa.
--> ADMIRING LISA'S BACKSIDE
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Green Herb - Near a column on the back right while facing Lisa's back.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Lisa will perform a completely different attack while Wesker is behind her.
She will squat down and make her tentacles fly out of her sides to hit Wesker.
Right when she squats, hit her in the back of the head with an Assault Shotgun
blast and this will cancel that attack. Once she gets close enough to Wesker,
an on-screen command will appear. Input the command once again and Wesker will
jump over Lisa.
--> REUNITING LISA WITH MOM
This is it! Drain her life here and it will be over once she approaches
Wesker. Shoot her until she dies. Use the Grenade Launcher to make quick work
of her. If the battle hasn't ended by the time she is in close range then
you'll have to shoot her in the head in order to cancel her attacks.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
===============================================================================
----------------------------- S C E N A R I O 3 ------------------------------
S E P T E M B E R 2 8, 1 9 9 8 - O C T O B E R 1, 1 9 9 8
____ __
JILL | _ __ _ ___ ___ ___ ___ _ __ /_/___ CARLOS
| |_) |/ _` | / __|/ __|/ _ / _ | '_ / __|
VALENTINE | _ <| (_| || (__| (__| (_) || (_) || | | | __ OLIVEIRA
|_| ___,_| ___|___|___/ ___/ |_| |_| |___/
____ _ _ _
| _ ___ ___ | |_ _ __ _ _ ___ | |_ (_) ___ _ __
| | | | / _ / __|| __|| '__|| | | | / __|| __|| | / _ | '_
| |_| || __/__ | | | | | |_| || (__ | |_ | || (_) || | | |
| ___/ ___||___/|_| |_| __,_| ___| __||_| ___/ |_| | |
/ /
[SC03]
|***************** Resident Evil 3: Nemesis - A City in Ruin *****************|
|- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -|
| R A C C O O N ' S D E S T R U C T I O N 1 [RD01] |
|- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -|
| "The monsters have overtaken the city. Somehow... I'm still alive..." |
|*****************************************************************************|
= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = CHAPTER INFO = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
Jill: Samurai Edge 2, Assault Shotgun (Lv.1)
Carlos: Handgun SG, Submachine Gun HP (Lv.1)
Recommended Secondary Weapon: --
A Rank Item on Normal Mode: S.T.A.R.S. Card (Jill's)
S Rank Item on Hard Mode : Book of Wisdom/Future Compass
Unlockable Weapon: --
Unlockable Scenario/Chapter: "Raccoon's Destruction" Chapter 2
This chapter is much longer than any other chapter thus far. It is filled with
tons of zombies and the zombies have gotten tougher now. From this point
onward, zombies will not fall so easily to an ordinary Handgun. Always go for
headshots on any approaching zombie. Don't ever depend on a Handgun to get a
zombie out of your face from now on - switch to a secondary weapon and blast
the zombie away from the screen if one of them gets too close or is about to
hit the characters.
= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
== IN FRONT OF J'S BAR ==
The action starts out in a familiar place for those that have played Resident
Evil Outbreak - in front of the bar which served as the first sighting of
zombies for the survivors of Outbreak.
Don't shoot the left police car yet! Read the second paragraph below for more
details.
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Submachine Gun HP Ammo - Near the beginning, this will be in front of the
entrance to J's Bar to the left. It can be seen after moving past the first
car or it can be seen by shooting the box to the left at the very beginning.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
As Jill and Carlos move past the car to the left, they will be attacked by a
group of THREE [ZOMBIES] from up ahead. A [ZOMBIE] to the left will get up as
the two characters back up to face a total of FIVE [ZOMBIES] - the fifth
zombies gets up after one of the first four is defeated. Try to go for
headshots as much as you can. Headshots are very important now. If the
zombies ever start to overcrowd both characters then switch to a secondary
weapon and mow them down or stagger them then switch to the Handgun for some
headshots.
As the characters move by the police car, a [ZOMBIE] will get up from the left.
The characters will continue ahead then look back as FOUR [ZOMBIES] lurch in
the back of them - shoot the police car in the back until it explodes to defeat
all of them. See, aren't you glad you didn't shoot that police car earlier?
The characters will look to the right as THREE FEASTING [ZOMBIES] get up and
attack. Shooting the nearby car here will usually not defeat any of them. Go
for headshots and use a secondary weapon if they get too close.
FIVE [ZOMBIES] will attack further ahead then the two characters will continue
further along the street and THREE [ZOMBIES] will get up as they turn toward
the hunched bodies near a car to the side. One of the three zombies is a
[VOMITING ZOMBIE].
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Grenade - On the other side of a burning car near a hunched over zombie.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
The characters will immediately turn to face another THREE [ZOMBIES] that
approach them from behind. The characters will leave as the first few zombies
fall.
They will continue around the side of a truck and turn to the right to find
SEVERAL [ZOMBIES] shuffling toward them. Lucky for them, the zombies are
walking near a red barrel that can be shot and will explode. Always look for
these red barrels since their explosions can take out a whole crowd of zombies
with just a few hits from any weapon.
The characters will turn back around and slowly approach the open doorway up
ahead. As they look toward the open area behind the door THREE [DOGS] will
rush at them.
== ALLEY ==
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Green Herb - After passing through the open double doors, when the
characters turn to face zombies, this will be beside the right door.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
The characters will step inside the next area then turn to face FIVE [ZOMBIES]
that enter from the doorway behind them. Find the red barrel to the left then
wait for them to pile up near it and shoot it to take them all out with just a
few shots.
The characters will continue further into the open alley ahead and survey the
slaughter around them. The dead bodies will begin to rise up and the
characters will run toward the double doors at the end. Equip a secondary
weapon because THREE [ZOMBIES] will rush the characters as soon as the double
doors are opened. The characters will turn after defeating those three zombies
to view the FOUR [ZOMBIES] behind them as they back through the open double
doors.
== BEHIND THE FUEL TRUCK ==
/ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
| / [ ] |
| ) o ( F I L E 1 --> Jill's Diary |
| / |
| |
| Once the characters open the double doors and step forward to the area |
| behind the fuel truck, look for the three red cones behind the group of |
| approaching zombies. Shoot the furthest cone on the left side. |
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - /
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Assault Shotgun Ammo - After opening the double doors and stepping through
them to the area behind the fuel truck, shoot the first box on the left.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
The characters will turn and face the THREE [ZOMBIES] up ahead after stepping
through the doorway.
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Fire Aid Spray - Before the characters jump into the waterway, this is in
front of a barred tunnel below. This can be seen a few times from the side of
the waterway, but it cannot be retrieved once the characters jump down and
begin to move in the water.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
The characters will move beside the waterway to the right then fight off TWO
CRAWLING [ZOMBIES] to the left. While continuing ahead, Jill will notice
something strange then, as the character move forward to get a close look, the
swarm of feasting [CROWS] near the fuel truck will attack. Only TWO of the
[CROWS] will actually fly at the characters though. The character will turn
toward the right and jump into the waterway below.
== WATERWAY ==
The characters will move down the waterway to the left - you can shoot the
crows that fly in the air up ahead for some extra kills. Once the characters
are near the second to the last pipe in the waterway a [ZOMBIE] will crawl out
of the pipe to the right and land in the water. THREE [ZOMBIES] will get up
from the water behind the characters. Once they are defeated the character
will proceed ahead but TWO [ZOMBIES] will get up from the water and attack -
one is very close. The characters will climb into the nearby pipe afterwards.
== SEWER TUNNEL ==
The characters will look around the sewer tunnel then jump into the tunnel.
The characters will elect to take the left path in the tunnel. They will peak
around the corner to find TWO [WEB SPINNERS] that can easily be taken down with
a Submachine Gun HP. After climbing the ladder at the end of the tunnel, they
will be in front of Apple Inn.
== IN FRONT OF APPLE INN ==
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Submachine Gun HP Ammo - Shoot the sign in front of the doors that the
characters look toward after climbing the sewer ladder. Zombies will move
through that doorway soon.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
All seems silent until a few zombies down the street notice the characters
followed by a group of zombies that pour out of the doorway of the Apple Inn.
The characters will turn and run down the alley behind them.
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Assault Shotgun Ammo - After climbing the sewer ladder, this will be on the
back dumpster near the burning wreckage in the back of the alley once the
characters run from the zombies.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Keep a secondary weapon equipped since a fallen [ZOMBIE] to the right will
suddenly awaken while the characters are right next to it. ANOTHER CRAWLING
[ZOMBIE] will crawl toward the group from the very back.
It seems that the way ahead is blocked by burning wreckage so the characters
will turn around only to find FOUR [ZOMBIES] directly behind them.
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Green Herb - Near a group of zombies while returning from the dead end
alley. (NOT ON HARD MODE)
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
The characters will continue back down the path and look to the right to find
THREE [ZOMBIES] approaching them.
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Secondary Weapon Ammo - After moving down the street from the dead end
alley, the characters will face a building with a neon sign inside. Shoot the
window on the left and be sure to clear the glass on the bottom in order to
grab this inside.
[ ] Assault Shotgun Ammo - Destroy the pile of boxes behind the zombies after
turning from the building with the neon sign in the window.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
While moving beside the building to the side with the neon sign in the window,
the characters will look inside and almost get caught by FIVE [ZOMBIES] as they
turn back to the left.
While moving further ahead, the characters will turn as a burning [ZOMBIE] gets
up from the flames behind them. Shoot him then FOUR [ZOMBIES] will walk
forward as the characters turn again. As the characters look to the right,
SEVERAL [ZOMBIES] will be walking toward them but thankfully there is a red
barrel near the zombies that can be shot to defeat most of them. The
characters will open the door past the fence.
== NEAR THE EXCAVATOR ==
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Assault Shotgun Ammo - When the characters open the door down a bright
path, they will turn to the right after walking through the doorway to fight a
zombie. Shoot the box and boards on the ground behind the zombie. The item is
in the boards.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Make sure you have a secondary weapon equipped since the characters will turn
and be face-to-face with a [ZOMBIE] right as they step through the doorway.
[CROWS] perched on the excavator ahead will start to fly but only TWO [CROWS]
will attack as the character move toward the bridge on the left.
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Submachine Gun HP Ammo - After dealing with the crows on the excavator,
shoot the box on the other side of the bridge (the one near the bridge).
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
/ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
| / [ ] |
| ) o ( F I L E 2 --> Carlos Oliveira Profile |
| / |
| |
| After dealing with some crows perched on a excavator, the characters will |
| move across a bridge. Shoot the box against the building on the other side |
| of the bridge. |
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - /
They will cross the bridge then look down into the pit below to find a
[ZOMBIE], but they will continue toward the door up ahead. TWO [ZOMBIES] will
get up from the right side of the characters. You can aim at the red metal
planks in the back of them and shoot them to make them fall on the zombies.
After defeating the zombies, the characters will open the next door.
== BELOW THE BRIDGE ==
A checkpoint will occur as the characters enter this area.
*********************** C H E C K P O I N T **************************
A choice of two paths now lie in front of the characters. The left path holds
extra files, it has more enemies, and it also takes longer. The right path is
shorter with fewer enemies but you'll miss out on some files.
************** B R I D G E / B U I L D I N G (L E F T) P A T H *************
== BELOW THE BRIDGE ==
The characters will walk past the fence off to the left and climb the ladder.
There are plenty of breakable objects that can be shot along the way so be sure
to shoot them - mainly boxes.
== ON THE BRIDGE ==
At the top of the ladder, shoot the cars as the characters move by them.
/ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
| / [ ] |
| ) o ( F I L E 3 --> Raccoon City Notes |
| / |
| |
| On the street that the characters climb to via the ladder they face some |
| zombies right near a car. Shoot the car and this file will be revealed |
| once they move around the side of the car thanks to the explosion. Its |
| true location is inside of the second blockade piece around the side of the |
| car. |
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - /
The characters will be attacked by a group of THREE [ZOMBIES] as they move
beside the car directly ahead. Shoot the car to make it explode in order to
defeat them all quickly. SIX [ZOMBIES] will attack as the characters walk
around to the other side of the car. Once the characters step over to the car
on the other side of the street they will turn to face FIVE [ZOMBIES]. An
action sequence will occur when the characters move further ahead.
* Input the on-screen command to dodge the truck as it dashes toward Jill and
Carlos.
Down the street the characters will turn to the right to face FOUR BURNING
[ZOMBIES].
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Green Herb - Near a car after the characters move in between some cars
after fighting the burning zombies. (NOT ON NORMAL OR HARD MODE)
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
The characters will move in between some vehicles then notice a group of
[CROWS] gathered on the streets ahead. The crows will begin to fly then the
characters will run toward the rooftop of a nearby building. The crows will
not attack.
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Green Herb - After escaping the crows on the street, this will be beside
the rooftop entrance of a building before the characters enter.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Have an Assault Shotgun ready here. While stepping toward the door of the
rooftop, a [HUNTER] will hop down from the rooftop above the doorway then
attack. Another [HUNTER] will jump at both characters from below the lit up
sign as they turn to the left. The characters will walk through the doorway of
the building.
== INSIDE THE BUILDING ==
The characters will walk down the stairs and spot some dead bodies on the floor
below but a [HUNTER] will catch their attention as it jumps down the stairs to
their left. Be sure to have an Assault Shotgun ready for him. When the
characters look down the stairs, THREE [VOMITING ZOMBIES] will get up from the
floor below. Use a Submachine Gun HP here to get rid of them quickly. TWO
[ZOMBIES] will attack on the third set of stairs.
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Submachine HP Ammo - Once the three vomiting zombies have been defeated in
the building, this will be on the stairs by the next set of zombies.
[ ] Green Herb - After moving down the third set of stairs in the building this
will be on the floor to the left shortly before fighting a Hunter.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
/ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
| / [ ] |
| ) o ( F I L E 4 --> Reporter's Memo |
| / |
| |
| Shoot the light that sticks out of the wall at the top of the fourth set of |
| stairs in the building. A green herb is on the floor across from it. |
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - /
While moving down the fourth set of stairs, a [HUNTER] will rush up the stairs
to the left, so take out the Assault Shotgun and blast him.
/ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
| / [ ] |
| ) o ( F I L E 5 --> Dario's Memo |
| / |
| |
| On the bottom floor of the building, the characters will square off against |
| three vomiter zombies. Shoot the fire extinguisher in the back of them |
| while moving down the last set of stairs. The fire extinguisher is a |
| silver color and the area is dark so it blends in a bit. |
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - /
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Green Herb - On the bottom floor of the building as the characters turn to
the right after moving down the stairs.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
THREE [VOMITING ZOMBIES] will attack from the bottom of the last set of stairs
then ANOTHER [ZOMBIE] will appear around the corner at the bottom. The
characters will step toward the door up ahead then open it. TWO [ZOMBIES] will
appear down the left corridor as the characters turn. The characters will walk
down the corridor and enter the storage room.
(Press Ctrl + F and type "[RADE1]" to continue with the Bridge/Building Path)
*********** B R I D G E / B U I L D I N G (L E F T) P A T H E N D **********
***************** B E L O W B R I D G E (R I G H T) P A T H ****************
== BELOW THE BRIDGE ==
An action cutscene will trigger once the characters move toward the car up
ahead.
* Input the on-screen command as the explosion from the mine heads toward
Carlos and Jill.
Yeah, those mines are back from Outbreak File #2, but thankfully, you don't
have to worry about stepping on those godawful things this times. In fact they
can be shot and there explosion may take down a few enemies. Enemies can also
run into them, so if you're fighting some zombies and then all of sudden
explosions go off, then you'll know that one of them found a mine before you
did.
The characters will wonder where those landmines came from...? Hmmm... They
will run ahead then look to the right as THREE [DOGS] move toward them along
with THREE [ZOMBIES] in the back. Both the zombies and the dogs can trigger
the landmines, so they might just kill themselves!
A [DOG] and TWO [ZOMBIES] will attack as the character move further ahead.
Once they begin to step by the right car, THREE [ZOMBIES] will walk toward them
from the front and one burning CRAWLING [ZOMBIE] will move toward them from the
far left side up ahead.
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Assault Shotgun Ammo - This will be visible in the right portion of the
background when the characters step forward from defeating a crawling zombie.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
TWO [ZOMBIES] and a [VOMITING ZOMBIE] (left) will get up from near the side of
the building up ahead and advance toward the characters. The characters will
move toward the double doors of the side building then open them and move
inside.
== INSIDE THE BUILDING ==
The characters will immediately turn to face TWO [ZOMBIES] upon entering the
building. Equip the Assault Shotgun, because while advancing down the
corridor, the characters will turn to the left then a [HUNTER] will suddenly
burst through wall and attack. The characters will sprint down the corridor
ahead. TWO [ZOMBIES] will get up off the floor and attack near the entrance to
the Storage Room.
************* B E L O W B R I D G E (R I G H T) P A T H E N D *************
[RADE1]
== STORAGE ROOM ==
No matter which path the characters take, they will end up here.
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Grenade - Lying on the middle shelf in the storage room.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Equip an Assault Shotgun since a [HUNTER] will attack as the group moves in
between the shelves.
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Secondary Weapon Ammo - On some shelves in the back of the storage room
[ ] Green Herb after the Hunter attacks.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
The characters will move up ahead then turn around and face off against THREE
[ZOMBIES] in front of the exit door. When the characters approach the door,
they will turn as a [HUNTER] jumps at them so have that Shotgun equipped to
silence that screeching. Finally, the characters will exit the building!
== BACK ALLEY OF THE BUILDING ==
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Assault Shotgun Ammo - Destroy the back left box in the boxes to the right
after stepping into the alley behind the building.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
As the characters turn to the right, FIVE [ZOMBIES] will attack then THREE
[DOGS] will attack as the characters move further ahead after finishing the
zombies.
The characters will turn and move down the alley up ahead but a group of
SEVERAL [ZOMBIES] will be waiting... near a red barrel and a parked car that
can be destroyed to cause a huge explosion.
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Submachine Gun HP Ammo - In a box, near a steel column, to the right of a
car as the second group of zombies attack outside of the building. Shoot the
red barrel and parked car to easily find this.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
After that group of zombies, another GROUP of [ZOMBIES] will attack the
characters at the end - throw a grenade here.
/ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
| / [ ] |
| ) o ( F I L E 6 --> U.B.C.S. Notes |
| / |
| |
| Shoot the lower box on the set of boxes to the right while fighting the |
| third group of zombies in the alley behind the building. This is the last |
| set of zombies before the characters turn and move into the right alleyway. |
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - /
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Green Herb - Across from a door as the characters look to the left after
taking down the third set of zombies outside the building.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
The characters will turn to the left and see nothing then turn to the right to
find another alley.
They will continue down the next alley and fight off TWO [CROWS] followed by
TWO MORE [CROWS]. Have a secondary weapon equipped since the characters will
eventually turn as a very close [ZOMBIE] gets up to the left of them.
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Assault Shotgun Ammo - Destroy the green dumpster on the left side of the
bridge before entering the bridge tunnel.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
The characters will find a bridge at the end then begin to move across it.
[CROWS] will start to fly through the windows as the characters move across the
bridge (none of them attack) so the characters will dash toward the other side.
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Submachine Gun HP Ammo - In the left corner after moving across the bridge.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
They will catch a breath of fresh air but quickly gain their momentum back as a
[HUNTER] drops down from the building to the left followed by ANOTHER [HUNTER].
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Submachine Gun HP Ammo - After the two Hunters attack on the other side of
the bridge, crows will attack. Look down and shoot the green dumpster for
this.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
The characters will look off the side of the bridge and see many crows flying
above then suddenly FIVE [CROWS] will attack one at a time.
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Green Herb - Down the first set of stairs after moving across the bridge.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
While rushing down the stairs, the characters will stop as TWO MORE [CROWS] fly
toward them.
== STREETS ==
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Assault Shotgun Ammo - To the right as the characters reach the bottom of
the stairs. They will turn to find tons of zombies along the street. This can
be grabbed while the characters quickly turn or while they fight the zombie
horde.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
When the characters make it to the bottom, they will look many ways as
[ZOMBIES] get up from all around them. Don't shoot that red barrel yet! The
characters will eventually move between some cars as a WHOLE HORDE of [ZOMBIES]
approach them. Thankfully, there is a red barrel to the left so this can be
shot to defeat about half of the zombies. It might pay you to throw a grenade
to the right in order to take down the rest of the zombies. This is a really
good place to rack up any final headshots but you must get them quick before
the zombies pile up. Once most of them are taken down and only stragglers
remain in the background, the characters will move out from in between the cars
then turn right and walk down the street.
Oh, did you really think that was it? You are too much of a Resident Evil:
Outbreak junkie then, since a cutscene will trigger after the zombie horde is
finished and the cutscene will lead into a boss fight.
===============================================================================
---------------------------- B O S S B A T T L E -----------------------------
Boss - Grave Digger
Recommended Weapon: Assault Shotgun, Submachine Gun HP (for attack canceling)
Weak Point: Mouth
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Assault Shotgun Ammo - All around the street while fighting the
[ ] Green Herb Gravedigger.
[ ] Green Herb
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Well, this time there are no pools of water so we can't lead the Grave Digger
into an electrified death like before - if you don't get this little reference
then go play Resident Evil 3: Nemesis. Now.
--> GRAVE DIGGER, WHAT A BIG MOUTH YOU HAVE
The Grave Digger will lift his head and face the characters right at the
beginning of the battle. Shoot him directly in the mouth with the Assault
Shotgun at this time and he will eventually burrow into the ground. If he is
not shot when he moves his head to one of the sides then he will bite both of
the characters.
--> WATCH FOR THE ON-SCREEN COMMAND
The Grave Digger will continue to move through the ground as the characters
look on. He will eventually move close to the characters and an on-screen
command will appear. It is best to press both the A + B buttons to dodge his
attacks since this will count for all button presses and you won't have to
quickly guess - go ahead and try it.
--> BLOW THE HELL OUT OF HIM WHEN HE SURFACES
Take out the Assault Shotgun and continuously blast him when he surfaces. It
doesn't matter where, just pick a spot on his side and shoot. You may even
want to throw a grenade. Be sure to keep at least two grenades for later in
the battle through.
--> ITS RAINING ASPHALT
Shortly after he surfaces, switch to the Handgun, since the characters will
look directly upward as five pieces of asphalt will fall from the air. Target
each piece and shoot. You may want to use the Submachine Gun HP for this part,
but really, the Handgun works just fine. It is possible to hit him during this
phase by looking down and firing at his head - whether you want to risk taking
damage from the falling asphalt while blasting him is up to you, but this does
work well for when his life is extremely low.
--> HE WILL ATTEMPT ANOTHER BITE
Just like at the beginning of the battle, he will lift his head up and face the
characters before lunging at them with a bite. Take out the Assault Shotgun
(or Submachine Gun HP) and fire at his mouth to cancel his bite attack then he
will go back to burrowing like before. He will go back through the same steps
once again with the emerging, the asphalt, then back to burrowing. You only
have to dodge his burrow with an on-screen command every other time that he
burrows.
--> THE SUDDEN LEAP FROM NOWHERE
Sometimes while burrowing, he will suddenly jump out of the ground then fall
down on the characters mouth first. Shoot him directly in the mouth with any
weapon when he does this and it will stun him as he falls to the ground.
Punish him for his attempt at a surprise attack by blasting him with the
Assault Shotgun as he lies on the ground helpless while trying to burrow back
under the ground.
--> WHEN HE SURFACES NEXT TO A CAR
Once his life hits somewhere around the halfway mark, he will surface next to a
car. You can shoot the car but it doesn't seem to damage him that much, so
mainly focus on Shotgun blasts. You will have to shoot asphalt pieces once
again shortly like normal but after that he will attempt to fall on both
characters - use the on-screen command to dodge this. It really pays to press
A + B to dodge this attack since it is very quick!
--> UNLOAD ON THAT MOUTH AS HE RETREATS
The characters will be facing his mouth and the Grave Digger will slowly back
up to retreat into his hole. Throw a grenade then take out the Assault Shotgun
and shoot one blast right after the other as he attempts to escape. Grenade,
fire, fire, fire, grenade, fire, fire, fire! Completely overwhelm him and he
will fall right here! If he doesn't...
--> VEHICLES WILL KEEP FALLIN ON YOUR HEAD
He will immediately burrow to the other side across from Jill and Carlos then
emerge. The best thing to do here is to equip the Submachine Gun and fire at
him until he dies. He will grab a car from the side then toss it at both
characters. Shoot it as it flies toward the characters with a secondary weapon
and it will explode. He will throw one more car then pick up a bus and toss it
at the characters. The bus will explode in just as many hits as the other
vehicles - these guns pack power!
--> IS HE STILL ALIVE?
If he is still alive after throwing vehicles then will burrow into the ground
and jump to the sides of the streets two times then jump and lunge at the
characters from above. This lunge must be dodged by an on-screen command this
one time, so don't try to shoot him as he falls - follow the on-screen command.
He will go back to his normal attacks once these three special attacks are done
and he will not attempt these three (fall, vehicles, lunge with on-screen
command) again.
--> THE BOTTOM LINE
If you want to make this battle short, then unload on this boss whenever he
surfaces from the ground and whenever he falls after being hit out of the air.
The hardest part about this battle is keeping your guns loaded. Each time he
burrows through the ground, cycle through all of your weapons and reload but be
sure to watch for the on-screen command! It is so very easy to defeat this
boss before he starts his vehicle attack if you just lay down firepower every
chance you get.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
===============================================================================
|************* Resident Evil 3: Nemesis - Path to the Evac Point *************|
|- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -|
| R A C C O O N ' S D E S T R U C T I O N 2 [RD02] |
|- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -|
| "It was Raccoon City's last chance. My last chance. My last escape" |
|*****************************************************************************|
= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = CHAPTER INFO = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
Jill: Samurai Edge 2, Assault Shotgun (Lv.1)
Carlos: Handgun SG, Submachine Gun HP (Lv.1)
Recommended Secondary Weapon: --
A Rank Item on Normal Mode: Joint N/S Plug
S Rank Item on Hard Mode : Lighter Fluid
Unlockable Weapon: --
Unlockable Scenario/Chapter: "Raccoon's Destruction" Chapter 3
This chapter is about average length and it mixes in a few more stronger
enemies along with the normal zombies. The zombies are still really the
toughest part of this chapter though. Also, do you hate Hunters? I hope not.
= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
== Subway Station 1 ==
The characters will walk down the stairs and open the double doors. THREE
[ZOMBIES] will lunge at them when the doors open. The characters will walk
down the stairs then turn to face MANY [ZOMBIES], luckily there is a red barrel
to the side so shoot it when the first zombie gets close enough. The distant
zombies will offer some nice critical shots.
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Assault Shotgun Ammo - Lying beside the opposite wall when the characters
face the group of zombies in the first Subway Station. There is a red barrel
to the left at this time.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
The characters will move to the other end of the subway station but FOUR
[ZOMBIES] block their path here, so they will move through the gate in the
middle and walk over to the other side. As they pass by the restroom, a scream
will stop them. They will walk to the door of the restroom to the side but
THREE [ZOMBIES] will open the door and lunge at them.
/ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
| / [ ] |
| ) o ( F I L E 1 --> Grave Digger Notes |
| / |
| |
| Shoot the horizontal light above the restroom door while the characters |
| fight the zombies that move through the doorway of the restroom. A scream |
| will be heard shortly before the characters turn to face these zombies. |
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - /
== Restroom ==
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Green Herb - Lying beside the feasting zombie in the restroom.
[ ] First Aid Spray - While the single zombie attacks in the restroom, shoot
the small horizontal light on the back wall to the left of him.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Sadly, the characters were too late since they will come upon a zombie happily
enjoying his meal on the floor of the restroom. The [ZOMBIE] will get up and
attack.
/ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
| / [ ] |
| ) o ( F I L E 2 --> Licker Notes |
| / |
| |
| After shooting the lone zombie in the restroom, the characters will check |
| the fallen woman's body then turn to face two zombies that move out of the |
| stalls behind them. Destroy the stall door to the left while facing the |
| zombies. This particular door can only be shot while fighting these two |
| zombies. |
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - /
The characters will walk over to the woman on the floor and search for any
signs of life, but she appears dead. TWO [ZOMBIES] will quickly open the
stalls and the characters will turn to face them. A third [ZOMBIE] will attack
when the stall door is blown open if this is you first time collecting the file
in the restroom. After the zombies are defeated, the characters will leave the
room.
== Subway Station 1 ==
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Grenade - When the characters move down the staircase after checking the
restroom, this will be in a corner at the bottom.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
The characters will move down the stairs and enter the tunnel below.
== Dark Subway Tunnel ==
The characters will steer clear of the supposed "ghost train". They will step
around the corner then an action cutscene will occur as they step to the dark
end of the tunnel.
* Follow the on-screen command to avoid the third dog in the group.
Don't be afraid to use a Submachine Gun or Shotgun for the upcoming zombie
fights since they can get quite overwhelming at times.
The tunnel ahead is bathed in darkness from a short circuit with the lights, so
Carlos will break out a pair of flashlights for Jill and himself. They will
continue down the tunnel up ahead then step onto the train tracks. TWO
[ZOMBIES] will get up from the tracks and attack right off the bat. The
characters will turn to the left after stepping ahead a bit and face off
against SIX [ZOMBIES] - the last one straggles. They will continue further
around the side of the tracks and hop over the middle walkway.
While the characters walk down the tracks on the other side they will turn as
THREE [DOGS] growl at them. Luckily, the dogs will continue to growl for quite
a while and offer a chance to hit them all three in the head with a Handgun in
repetition. The characters will turn back around and THREE [ZOMBIES] will get
up from the tracks up ahead so the characters will decide to get on the left
walkway. As the characters continue to watch the three zombies on the tracks
they will almost not turn in time to see the FOUR [ZOMBIES] that will lunge at
them from around the left corner. While the two characters continue ahead a
CRAWLING [ZOMBIE] can be seen off to the left but the characters will pass him.
They will jump onto the tracks again and move toward the middle walkway then
hop over it and onto the tracks on the other side with all the dead bodies.
Like clockwork, the dead passengers will start to rise then FOUR [ZOMBIES] will
attack. Once they are defeated, FOUR MORE [ZOMBIES] will rise as the
characters turn around then back away. The characters will pull up to the
walkway on the other side and keep an eye on the two dead bodies on the ground.
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Green Herb - In front of a staircase in the Dark Subway tunnel after the
characters climb off of the tracks. There are some crawling zombies in the
area. (NOT ON HARD MODE)
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Their attention will suddenly be drawn away from the bodies as moans sound off
behind them and they turn to face THREE [ZOMBIES]. They will quickly turn back
around though as TWO CRAWLING [ZOMBIES] move toward them. Not taking any
chances, the characters will turn and take one final look at the other three
zombies before they move on ahead.
A CRAWLING [ZOMBIE] will move toward the characters but Carlos will notice some
light in between the train carts to his left. The characters will jump back
onto the tracks and begin to approach the lights but THREE [DOGS] will run at
them from the left - these things dash fast so use a Submachine Gun HP on them.
The characters will continue toward the glow as they step in between the train
carts.
*********************** C H E C K P O I N T **************************
== LIT PATH IN SUBWAY TUNNEL ==
While the characters begin to move along the walkway they will turn as a
[LICKER] steps out of a vent in the wall. These enemies are fairly easy to
take down with just a Handgun. Shoot them anywhere and eventually they will
stand still and expose the top of their head. Shoot them in the head for some
very damaging shots. The characters will move toward the staircase but TWO
MORE [LICKERS] will bust through a vent cover beside the stairs and attack -
might want to use the Submachine Gun HP here. Be sure to take turns shooting
them both since they will prepare a tongue slash if you don't keep them
occupied - always remember to keep both Lickers busy with shots when more than
one Licker is fought.
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Submachine Gun HP Ammo - Near the left wall when the second and third
Licker bust through the vent cover on the wall.
[ ] Assault Shotgun Ammo - To the left at the top of the stairs after fighting
the two Lickers in the Subway Tunnel.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
== SUBWAY STATION 2 ==
The characters will move up the stairs to the side. They will begin to walk
around the corner but a vent cover on the ceiling will fall and TWO [LICKERS]
will land on the floor and attack. ANOTHER [LICKER] will fall out of the vent
as the characters start to back up and look around to spot THREE MORE [LICKERS]
for a total of four Lickers. The characters will quickly move to the stairs at
the other end of the subway station.
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Green Herb - In between some columns to the left when running from the four
Lickers. (NOT ON NORMAL OR HARD MODE)
[ ] Assault Shotgun Ammo - While running from the four Lickers, look to the
left and grab this before the character turn OR after fighting the three
Lickers and after moving down the steps, look to the left as the characters
move to the other side of the room to find this.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
They will climb the stairs but find that the path ahead is blocked.
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Grenade - When four Lickers chase the characters up some stairs, this will
be at the top of the stairs on the right.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Unfortunately, they will have to move back down the stairs. THREE [LICKERS]
(one on the ceiling) will be waiting on them as they move around the left
corner. Throw a grenade to put an end to all three of them or use the
Submachine Gun HP and keep all three of them occupied with hits.
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Green Herb - Lying on the back left floor as three Lickers attack after
moving back down the stairs.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
The characters will move back to the other side of the subway station and open
the door in front of the staircase that they came up earlier.
== SUBWAY CORRIDOR ==
/ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
| / [ ] |
| ) o ( F I L E 3 --> Ivy Notes |
| / |
| |
| After fighting a group of three Lickers, the characters will open a door |
| and find roaches on the left wall, shoot the first light on the ceiling |
| down the hall. |
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - /
[LARGE ROACHES] will be gathered on the left wall as the characters open the
door. The Roaches will begin to fly at the characters before too long, so
start slashing with the knife to get them off the screen. Eventually the
characters will move further ahead, but they will notice some more [LARGE
ROACHES] moving out of vent near the bottom of the right wall. The characters
will turn the right corner and be attacked by a [LICKER]. Another [LARGE
ROACH] swarm is in the back of that corridor and they will eventually fly at
the characters.
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Secondary Weapon Ammo - In the Subway Corridor (with roaches) when the
characters turn to the right to face a Licker, this will be in the back of that
corridor.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
The characters will eventually step down the corridor and fight off TWO
[LICKERS] in the left hall. At this time, move the targeting cursor over the
door to the right for an "Enter" command. Press the A button to enter that
room (Green Room) or fight off the Lickers and the next TWO [LICKERS] and move
on down the hall that the characters face.
************************* G R E E N R O O M P A T H *************************
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Submachine Gun HP Ammo - Just before the characters open the door to the
Green Room, they will look to the right and this will be near the top portion
of the left wall. This portion of the left wall sticks out a bit. It's
possible to grab this after turning from the first hall with the single Licker,
but it's hard to pinpoint.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
The characters will simply ignore the Lickers then move down the right hall a
bit and open the door to the Green Room.
== GREEN ROOM ==
The Green Room is very dark, so the characters will turn on their flashlights.
They will face the right then TWO [ZOMBIES] will get up from their feasting and
attack.
/ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
| / [ ] |
| ) o ( F I L E 4 --> Large Roach Notes |
| / |
| |
| After the second group of roaches attack, the characters will meet two |
| Lickers down a corridor. Point to the door on the right while fighting |
| them and choose to "Enter" the Green Room. Shoot the big lunch bag on the |
| far right end of the bench when the characters face two zombies in between |
| the lockers to the right. |
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - /
Once they are defeated THREE [ZOMBIES] will step out of the side lockers and
attack. There is one on the left and two on the right. The characters will
move further ahead in the room then inspect the bunker beds to the right.
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Submachine Gun HP Ammo - On and near a bed respectively when the characters
[ ] Green Herb turn right for the second time in the Green Room.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
They will turn back around and open the door on the other side of the room.
== SUBWAY CORRIDOR ==
The characters will turn to the left then continue down the corridor.
*********************** G R E E N R O O M P A T H E N D ********************
== SUBWAY CORRIDOR ==
Regardless of which path is chosen, the characters will still move down the
left corridor down the hall from where the Lickers attacked. While turning the
corner to the left, a [LICKER] will attack. Blast him then the characters will
open the door to the Staircase Room at the end of the hall.
== STAIRCASE ROOM ==
/ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
| / [ ] |
| ) o ( F I L E 5 --> Monitor Notes |
| / |
| |
| In the staircase room with roaches, shoot the small vertical light on the |
| top portion of the wall in the middle of the staircase. This is on the |
| left wall and it must be shot while the characters are near the top of the |
| staircase. |
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - /
A swarm of [LARGE ROACHES] can be seen on the wall up ahead as the characters
look down at them from the top door. Slash any roaches that fly at the two
characters when the characters start to move down the stairs then they will
eventually continue further down. The characters will look off to the side and
see a whole HORDE OF [LARGE ROACHES] crawling on the roof up above the doorway
below. The roaches will eventually start to fly toward the screen so get ready
to start slashing. You will slash for quite a while since a bunch of them will
fly toward the characters. The characters will eventually give up the fight
and continue down the stairs and open the door at the bottom.
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Assault Shotgun Ammo - At the bottom of the Staircase Room with roaches.
[ ] Green Herb
[ ] Secondary Weapon Ammo - When the characters first enter the Dark Corridor,
this will be to the left.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
== DARK CORRIDOR ==
===============================================================================
---------------------------- B O S S B A T T L E -----------------------------
Boss - Pack of 30 Hunters
Recommended Weapon: Assault Shotgun, Submachine Gun HP (whichever suits you)
Weak Point: Head (to hell with the weak points though, just shoot!)
The Assault Shotgun can kill multiples Hunters with a single shot and stop any
move that they are currently performing but you'll have to reload often and
this gun isn't that great from a distance. The Submachine Gun can take down
single Hunters pretty quickly even at a distance and you won't have to reload
as much but it doesn't have instant stopping power - this is why I say,
"Whichever gun suits you". Both of them work well, but you'll need to know how
to use them. The dialogue below with arrows serves as the headers to show
where you are in the fight.
While moving down the corridor a [HUNTER] will jump out from the right turn up
ahead. The characters will continue down the corridor then TWO [HUNTERS] will
run at them and the characters will quickly turn as TWO MORE [HUNTERS] run at
them from behind.
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Submachine Gun HP Ammo - When the Hunters begin to pile up and chase the
characters at the beginning of the Dark Corridor area, the characters will run
down a corridor and this will be to the left - look down and to the left.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
The characters will quickly run down the empty corridor to the side, but look
back as THREE [HUNTERS] chase after them. The characters will move down the
stairs then turn as TWO [HUNTERS] jump down the stairs at them (shoot them
while they leap down the stairs) followed by TWO MORE [HUNTERS] then the
characters will turn to the right and to notice TWO [HUNTERS] running at them
from that direction. ONE [HUNTER] will jump down the stairs then TWO [HUNTERS]
will dash from the right but let's not forget the last TWO [HUNTERS] that dash
down the stairs.
Good god, man! ONE MORE [HUNTER] will race down the stairs eventually but the
characters will turn and move down the right corridor before he makes it to
them.
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Green Herb - When the characters are cornered in the Dark Corridor with
Hunters rushing at them from both sides, this will be down the right corridor.
This is around the time that Jill says, "They're learned to hunt in groups!"
(NOT ON NORMAL OR HARD MODE)
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-- Hunters Owned: 19 --
--> "They've learned to hunt in groups!"
After Jill states the obvious, the characters will turn toward ONE approaching
[HUNTER] then continue down the corridor. The characters will slowly back up
then creep around the next corner.
--> "I feel trapped like a rat!"
The characters will move up the stairs ahead then turn to the left, no the
right - they will turn as a [HUNTER] jumps at them from behind then the
characters will continue down the right corridor.
--> "Haven't they had enough!?"
When they get to the corner, the characters will turn to a dashing [HUNTER]
then turn back around and continue around the corner.
--> "Damn!"
The characters will turn to look back but then turn around again and continue
down the corridor. They will turn once again after stepping ahead then a
[HUNTER] will chase them further down the corridor as they quickly back up.
-- Hunters Owned: 23 --
--> "It's fast!"
Another [HUNTER] will rush down the corridor.
--> "Carlos!"
--> "Hang in there, I won't let anything happen to you."
TWO [HUNTERS] will rush into the corridor from the right corridor then THREE
MORE [HUNTERS] will attack followed by ONE MORE [HUNTER]. This part is
intense. You may want to toss a grenade as the two enter from the corridor to
the right. Really though, you can take them all down with the Assault Shotgun
if you shoot fast enough and aim right - you shouldn't even have to reload.
--> "We're done for!"
I wouldn't say that, Carlos. (blows off tip end of Wii-mote)
-- Total Hunters Owned: 30 --
The chapter ends once the Hunters are all defeated!
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
===============================================================================
|****** Resident Evil 3: Nemesis - Desperate Times at the RPD Building *******|
|- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -|
| R A C C O O N ' S D E S T R U C T I O N 3 [RD03] |
|- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -|
| "He's after S.T.A.R.S. members... There's no escape!" |
|*****************************************************************************|
= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = CHAPTER INFO = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
Jill: Samurai Edge 2, Assault Shotgun (Lv.1)
Carlos: Handgun SG, Submachine Gun HP (Lv.1)
Recommended Secondary Weapon: Assault Shotgun
A Rank Item on Normal Mode: Crystal/Obsidian/Amber Ball
S Rank Item on Hard Mode : Chronos Key
Unlockable Weapon: --
Unlockable Scenario/Chapter: "Umbrella's End" Chapter 1
(^must have also finished both Beginnings 2 and
Rebirth 2 to unlock this chapter)
"Death's Door" Scenario
(^requires "A" rank on Raccoon's Destruction 3)
Make sure that you bring an Assault Shotgun with you for this chapter. If you
are playing with Carlos, then be sure that he has it equipped. The main weapon
that is found on this chapter is the Submachine Gun HP - if Carlos plays the
chapter with the Submachine Gun HP then all of the ammo pickups will be the
Submachine Gun HP except for one at the very end of the chapter! The Assault
Shotgun will help out for the Hunters found in this chapter and the boss at the
end of the chapter.
Both characters will encounter Nemesis many times on this chapter, but he is
really nothing during the small encounters. He can be taken down with a simple
Handgun most of the time.
= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
== MAIN HALL ==
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Submachine Gun HP Ammo - At the beginning, while walking up the steps in
the main hall, this will be off to the left near the door that the characters
head for.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
After the cutscenes, Jill and Carlos will start off in the main hall. They
will move up the stairs and open the door to the reception area.
== RECEPTION ==
THREE [ZOMBIES] will move out of the office doorway to the left up ahead. Try
for some headshots since these start at a good distance and they don't get too
rowdy. The characters will move toward the office doorway and look inside, but
after seeing TONS OF [ZOMBIES] inside, they will turn to the left and continue
down the hallway ahead. TWO [ZOMBIES] will step out from behind the right
corner and attack.
/ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
| / [ ] |
| ) o ( F I L E 1 --> Fax from the HQ |
| / |
| |
| Near the beginning, when the characters first step into the reception |
| hallway area, they will face three zombies. They will move forward and |
| fight off two more zombies. Of the two pots against the back wall, shoot |
| the small pot in the far left corner of the back wall while fighting the |
| two zombies. The corner is very dark and this is hard to see, so just aim |
| to the left of the zombies and watch for the cursor to change. This can be |
| shot or retrieved when Nemesis first busts through the ceiling since he |
| will be standing right by it. |
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - /
A group of SIX [ZOMBIES] will attack once the characters move around the
corner. Use the Submachine Gun HP to stun them if you are trying for heashots
here. The characters will continue down the hall up ahead. A cutscene will
trigger.
--> NEMESIS ENCOUNTER #1
From behind the characters, [NEMESIS] will drop through the ceiling of the RPD
building. Take out the Handgun with either character and fire at his head as
he approaches. Don't worry, he is like a walking tank and will do little
during these first few encounters. He will walk up to the group and try to
backhand them - follow the on-screen command to dodge his attack and then
characters will duck then step to the other side of him and move back down the
hall from where they originally were. Nemesis will slowly walk toward the
characters, so aim for his head with the Handgun and shoot him until an action
cutscene triggers.
* Input the on-screen command as Carlos shoots the grenade rounds.
The characters will return to the doorway of the office and look inside then
finally walk through the doorway.
== OFFICE AREA ==
There are not that many zombies in here now, but, out of the few that are left,
THREE [ZOMBIES] will attack as Jill and Carlos discuss the sweeper that they
just met. Who was he and what does he want? As the characters approach the
main office another [ZOMBIE] will walk through the doorway of the room.
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Submachine Gun HP Ammo - When the characters enter the office area they
[ ] Green Herb will fight a few zombies then move forward and
[ ] Grenade look into a room containing these three items.
The ammo is on the desk and the other two are on
the floor. (GREEN HERB IS NOT ON HARD MODE)
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
The characters will walk further ahead then take a peak inside the main office
room.
/ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
| / [ ] |
| ) o ( F I L E 2 --> Nemesis T-Type (Pursuer) Notes |
| / |
| |
| Shoot the small horizontal light near the floor next to the fallen |
| policeman in the small corridor that the characters enter from the office |
| area. There is a First Aid Spray near this as well. |
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - /
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] First Aid Spray - The characters will enter a small corridor on the far
side of the office. Grab this from next to the policeman corpse from the right
side near the door that they open to the Outside Staircase.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
The characters will enter the small corridor through the doorway at the other
end of the office then open the door to the right.
== OUTSIDE STAIRCASE ==
Don't shoot that red barrel yet! [CROWS] will begin to stir above the streets
to the side and FIVE [CROWS] will dive at the characters.
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Submachine Gun HP Ammo - While fighting the dog at the Outside Staircase,
look to the left to see this under the stairs. It can also be retrieved while
facing Nemesis at the bottom of the stairs.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
ONE [DOG] will hop over the fence to the right and attack the characters
directly after the crows. The characters will begin to walk up the stairs but
they will turn back around as FOUR more [CROWS] fly at them from the side.
--> NEMESIS ENCOUNTER #2
[NEMESIS] will yell out his signature phrase as the characters turn to look
toward the door at the top of the stairs. Don't really worry about firing at
him that much, but you can take some headshots with the Handgun. The
characters will move back down the staircase then turn back around while
standing near the door. Shoot the red barrel to the left as Nemesis moves next
to it - this will stun him. If the red barrel is not there then you should
still be able to stun him with headshots from the Handgun.
The characters will walk back into the corridor then look into the office.
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Submachine Gun HP Ammo - After stunning Nemesis on the Outside Staircase,
destroy the door at the other end of the small corridor that the characters
will open to enter the First Floor Corridor.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
It seems that [ZOMBIES] have filled the office once again, so the characters
will open the door to the First Floor Corridor to the right. This door can be
destroyed!
== FIRST FLOOR CORRIDOR ==
A [LICKER] will attack as soon as the characters turn to the right. Use the
Handgun to defeat any single Lickers in this chapter - aim for the head. The
characters will continue down the hall, but a [ZOMBIE] will bust through the
window to the right as they try. Shoot the zombie then the characters will
continue around the corner. TWO [ZOMBIES] will attack from the corridor ahead
then TWO more [ZOMBIES] will bust through the windows on the right and TWO more
[ZOMBIES] will crawl through the windows after them.
As the characters move toward the back of the corridor they will notice a
staircase up ahead that leads down to the basement. TWO [LICKERS] will attack
from the walls (right and left) near the staircase.
/ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
| / [ ] |
| ) o ( F I L E 3 --> Resident Evil 3 Digest 1 |
| / |
| |
| While the characters fight two Lickers above the stairs to the basement, |
| shoot the cabinet in the dark corner to the right in front of the stairs. |
| You'll have to turn the camera all the way to the right to barely see it or |
| you can shoot it while in the hall, before the Lickers attack. |
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - /
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Secondary Weapon Ammo - While fighting the two Lickers in the hall next to
the stairs, this will be in the lit area to the left of the staircase railing.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
After the Lickers are defeated, the characters will move down the stairs and
enter the Basement.
== BASEMENT CORRIDOR ==
They will meet up with a [LICKER] on the wall as they turn the first corner to
the left. After disposing of the Licker, they will move further ahead, but
turn to look back to make sure that the S.T.A.R.S. obsessed creatures isn't
following. When they get to the T-shaped corridor up ahead, a [LICKER] will
attack from near the left corridor. The characters will look both ways at the
T-shaped turn, but a familiar yell from behind will get their attention.
--> NEMESIS ENCOUNTER #3
The characters will move behind the right wall and take a peak back toward the
stairs corridor as a familiar figure steps into view. The characters will rush
down the corridor and open the double doors to the right.
== DARK MORGUE ==
Whew! They ditched that crazed Jill stalker. The characters will turn on the
light and...
TWO [ZOMBIES] and TWO [VOMITING ZOMBIES] will burst through the morgue drawers
in the back and attack the characters. Be sure to blast the drawers in the
back of the morgue for some good pickups. You may want to just toss a grenade.
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Submachine Gun HP Ammo - Shoot the morgue drawers when the characters turn
[ ] Green Herb on the light and fight the zombies in the morgue.
[ ] Grenade It is actually better to just throw a grenade
right as the characters turn on their flashlights.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
The characters will turn around and face the double doors and THREE [ZOMBIES]
will get up from the floor in front of them. Be sure to turn the camera to the
left and immediately defeat the very close zombie in that direction. Once the
zombies are disposed of the characters will open the double doors once again.
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Green Herb - When the characters exit the morgue, they will look down the
hall to the right. This will be near the objects at the end of that hall. It
can be retrieved earlier before entering the morgue once you know where it is.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
They will look to the right and then the left to make sure that the coast is
clear. Well, it seems that he is gone for now, so the characters will move
down the corridor.
== BASEMENT CORRIDOR ==
TWO [DOGS] will run from around the corridor up ahead and dash toward the
characters so get the Handgun ready for them.
/ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
| / [ ] |
| ) o ( F I L E 4 --> Resident Evil 3 Digest 2 |
| / |
| |
| After exiting the morgue and fighting two dogs, the characters will |
| continue to move down the basement corridor toward the garage door. Shoot |
| the horizontal light near the floor on the left wall across from the door |
| to the garage before they walk up to the door after turning the left |
| corner. |
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - /
The characters will peak around the left corridor at the end of the hall then
walk toward the door ahead and open it.
== GARAGE ==
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Secondary Weapon Ammo - Near the left column in the garage when the first
set of dogs attack.
[ ] Green Herb - While fighting the first group of dogs in the Garage this will
be next to the right column. (NOT ON NORMAL OR HARD MODE)
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
THREE [DOGS] will run up to them and attack as the characters step into the
garage.
/ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
| / [ ] |
| ) o ( F I L E 5 --> Barry Burton Profile |
| / |
| |
| When the characters turn to the left to fight the second pack of dogs in |
| the garage, shoot the red cone beside the car. The easiest way to get this |
| is to shoot the car at the end of the garage and it will destroy the cone |
| during the explosion. |
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - /
The characters will continue further ahead then turn to the left to fight off
TWO [DOGS] that try to get the drop on them from behind a car. One appears
then the other follows after the first has been defeated. The right car can be
shot and its explosion should defeat one of the dogs. The characters will turn
back around and... Oh, dear.
--> NEMESIS ENCOUNTER #4
Nemesis will appear in the background of the garage (near the fence) as the
characters turn. He will walk by a conveniently placed red barrel too! Shoot
the red barrel as he walks by it and this should damage him enough for this
battle. If the characters don't turn immediately then start to shoot his head
with the Handgun.
The characters will turn and crawl through a small tunnel at the bottom of the
wall behind the nearby parked vehicle.
== COURTYARD AREA ==
The characters will emerge in the outside corridor in front of the RPD
building.
*********************** C H E C K P O I N T **************************
They will approach the stairs up ahead then turn to face TWO [DOGS] that dash
at them from behind. The characters will turn back around and walk up the
stairs at the other end of the corridor. They will step beside some hungry
zombies that rattle the small gate to the side. FOUR [ZOMBIES] will attack
from the small yard area as the character turn.
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Green Herb - When the characters turn to fight some zombies next to the
small gate with zombies outside of it, this will be in the back of the
attacking zombies.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
The characters will hear the gate break in the back of them after defeating the
four zombies then turn to face FOUR more [ZOMBIES].
/ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
| / [ ] |
| ) o ( F I L E 6 --> Operation Report |
| / |
| |
| Facing the doors of the R.P.D. building, shoot the lamp on the right in |
| front of the entrance doors while out in the courtyard. Shoot this while |
| fighting the three dogs near the entrance or shortly afterwards before the |
| characters start to fight the zombies at the front gate. |
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - /
The characters will turn from the open gate and move further down the
courtyard.
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Grenade - Across from the entrance to the R.P.D. building. Grab this after
fighting the three dogs in the courtyard.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
THREE [DOGS] will step out from around the brick walls up ahead. Shoot them
down then the characters will step toward the front gate of the RPD building
just in time for the zombies to break through. Throw a grenade or shoot a few
of the zombies and wait for the characters to turn. The characters will
eventually turn and open the double doors to the RPD building.
== FIRST FLOOR MAIN HALL ==
Well, now they are back where they started! The characters will turn and look
back at the doors as the zombies struggle to get in then the characters will
look toward the statue in the middle of the building up ahead shortly before
moving down the steps. Be sure to have a secondary weapon equipped here
(Submachine Gun HP or Assault Shotgun) because TWO [HUNTERS] will jump down
from the second floor up above and attack from near the front of the statue.
TWO MORE [HUNTERS] will jump down after the first two are finished. The
characters will move to the right then turn to face another TWO [HUNTERS] that
jump from the second floor.
/ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
| / [ ] |
| ) o ( F I L E 7 --> R.P.D. Notes |
| / |
| |
| Shoot the computer monitor on the circular counter while fighting the |
| Hunters near the ladder in the First Floor Main Lobby of the R.P.D. |
| building. |
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - /
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Green Herb - On the counter while fighting the Hunters near the back
ladder. (NOT ON NORMAL OR HARD MODE)
[ ] Submachine Gun HP Ammo - In between the circular counter area while
fighting the Hunters in front of the ladder in the First Floor Main Hall.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
After moving around the side of the front counter up ahead, ONE [HUNTER] will
jump from the left side of the second floor and land near the counter then once
he is defeated ONE [HUNTER] will jump down from the right side of the second
floor. The characters will move over to the ladder beside the counter and
climb it to the second floor.
== SECOND FLOOR MAIN HALL ==
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Green Herb - When the characters look to the left after climbing to the
second floor of the main hall quickly grab this from the ground. It can also
be collected as the view zooms in before the first Hunter attack.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
The characters will look both ways after getting off the ladder then they will
move down the left side of the second floor walkway. A running figure can be
noticed through the railing to the left but once the railing is passed, we can
see that it is a [HUNTER] that is running toward the characters. Blast him
then the characters will continue, but suddenly turn to face ONE more [HUNTER]
that tries to sneak up from behind.
The characters will survey the bloodshed and dead Hunter bodies from the top
then look toward the entrance doors to see a familiar face...
--> NEMESIS ENCOUNTER #5
He's back, and this time he has brought his trusty rocket launcher in order to
score a few headshots!
In order to stop him this time, his rocket launcher must be destroyed. Wait
for him to lift up his rocket launcher and shoot the rocket launcher with the
Submachine Gun HP shortly before he fires rockets from it. If you hit it
enough and destroy the first rocket that he shoots, the first rocket will
explode and stun him for a few seconds and he won't be able to fire any more
rockets for a while. If he does shoot rockets then he will shoot three of them
and you will have to shoot each one of them before they make it to the
characters - shoot them with the Submachine Gun HP. He will move around the
first floor and take aim then fire three rockets until his rocket launcher is
destroyed. The explosion from the rocket launcher will stun him.
The characters will turn from the stunned Nemesis then open the door to the
room on the left up ahead.
== SAVE ROOM ==
/ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
| / [ ] |
| ) o ( F I L E 8 --> Mail to the Chief |
| / |
| |
| After destroying Nemesis' rocket launcher, shoot the paper attached to the |
| top portion of the wall behind the counter in the Save Room that the |
| characters move into. A zombie will appear behind this counter while the |
| characters leave the room. |
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - /
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Submachine Gun HP Ammo - After destroying Nemesis' rocket launcher, these
[ ] Green Herb will be on the floor in the next room. Right and
left respectively.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
The characters will turn to face off against THREE [ZOMBIES] up ahead after
entering. ONE [ZOMBIE] will appear behind the counter to the right just before
the characters step through the next door.
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Green Herb - Destroy the door in the corridor outside of the Save Room that
leads to the Second Floor Corridor. Once the characters exit the Save Room
then just shoot the next door with a secondary weapon.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
The characters will step inside the corridor then open the door on the right.
== SECOND FLOOR CORRIDOR ==
The characters will walk up to the door ahead then turn the corner and fight
off the TWO [ZOMBIES] from that side.
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Submachine Gun HP Ammo - When the characters fight two zombies in the
Second Floor Corridor, this will be on the floor behind the zombies.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
The characters will continue ahead then turn the next corridor and fight off a
[LICKER] as it busts through the window to the right. After moving down the
corridor up ahead they will turn the left corner and fight off TWO [LICKERS] -
be sure to use the Submachine Gun HP here.
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] MRL Ammo - Two Lickers will attack at the end of the Second Floor corridor
and this will be on the ground near them.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
/ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
| / [ ] |
| ) o ( F I L E 9 --> Brian Irons Profile |
| / |
| |
| Shoot the "Exit" sign above the door after shooting the two Lickers at the |
| end of the Second Floor Corridor. An MRL Ammo pickup is near this door. |
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - /
The characters will continue toward the door ahead then step out onto the
rooftop.
== ROOFTOP ==
Don't shoot any of the red barrels out here yet! While walking to the side of
the roof, the characters will turn around to find Nemesis stepping through the
door of the Second Floor Corridor. Nemesis will walk toward the two characters
and try to backhand them as an on-screen command appears. Once the backhand is
dodged, the characters will step away from Nemesis while he still has his back
turned. Shoot one of the red barrels in the group of three near the side of
the roof to the right of Nemesis to trigger a cutscene. The barrel to his left
will not hit him. If the barrels are not shot then the cutscene will play once
he has sustained enough damage.
===============================================================================
---------------------------- B O S S B A T T L E -----------------------------
Boss - Nemesis
Recommended Weapon: Assault Shotgun, Submachine Gun HP (for attack canceling)
Weak Point: Head
This boss fight has a pattern with a slight bit of randomness to it, but
Nemesis can be a big time consumer. One of the most time-consuming aspects of
this battle is the fact that you mainly only find Submachine Gun HP ammo
throughout this stage, so that is about all that your characters have, no
matter what extra weapon you brought along. His weak point (head) is also very
hard to hit at times, so you will most likely waste a bit of ammo while trying
to hit his weak spot.
--> SHOOT HIM IN THE HEAD
Switch to the Assault Shotgun since he starts out close then aim for his head
and shoot. The characters will duck under him and move toward the side of the
roof. Switch to the Submachine Gun and fire at him while at a distance.
--> THE TENTACLE SLAP
Before too long, Nemesis will hold his right arm to the right (his left) and
get ready to perform a slap on both characters with his arm tentacle. Shoot
him in the head with the Submachine Gun HP while he holds his arm back and the
shots will stagger him and cancel this move.
--> THE TENTACLE GRAB
Nemesis will then extend his right arm behind him to the left (his right) and
prepare to grab the characters with his arm tentacle. Shoot him in the head
once again to cancel the attack and stagger him. If he manages to grab both
characters then he will hold them both up in the air. Shoot him with the
Assault Shotgun or Submachine Gun HP in the head at that time to make him drop
the characters. In a way, it is good to let him grab the character since then
you can switch to the Assault Shotgun and get in some very close hits as he
holds both characters up. I would actually recommend that you let him grab
both characters if you want to finish this battle quicker!
--> TENTACLES FROM ABOVE
Eventually, he will jump to the rooftop surrounding the current area. You can
fire at him while he is above, but do so with the Handgun to save ammo since
you're less likely to hit him in the head from up there. Nemesis will run to
one side of the roof then look toward the characters and shove his tentacles
into the concrete below him. Look down as he does this and find the cracking
concrete trails as the tentacles move underground. Take out the Handgun or
Submachine Gun HP and shoot at the cracking concrete as the tentacles burrow
under the concrete and towards the characters. Shoot the cracking concrete
with a Submachine Gun HP if they begin to get too close but start out with the
Handgun to save ammo. It's easier to shoot them when they first move down the
wall.
If the tentacles are all stopped then Nemesis will move on to his next attack
but if they aren't then the tentacles will surface from the concrete near the
characters. There is absolutely nothing that can be done at this point - the
tentacles will slap the characters for minor damage. Taking down a few of the
tentacles by shooting the cracking concrete before they get to the characters
helps out quite a bit even if you don't manage to get them all. Don't waste
secondary weapon ammo by trying to shoot the tentacles at this time since it
will not do anything. It seems that aiming down and shooting them makes them
go away a bit faster - or that might just be me being hopeful whenever I miss
the burrowing tentacles. You'll really just have to wait for the attack to
end. Once the tentacle attack is finished then Nemesis may run to the other
side of the top portion and do another or he might perform...
--> THE DIVE FROM ABOVE
Nemesis will usually jump straight up into the air after performing a tentacle
attack from above. The characters will look straight up and watch as he falls.
An on-screen command will appear at this time so press the buttons that appear
on the screen. Buttons always appear for the dodge command, so just go ahead
and press both A + B to guarantee that the characters dodge this attack. The
action on the screen is very distracting during this attack and the time to
input the command is short.
--> UNLOAD ON HIM WHILE HE RECOVERS
Nemesis will have his tentacles stuck in the ground while he is hunched over
from the jump attack so blast him in the head with the Assault Shotgun or
anywhere on his body with the MRL as he tries to get up. This is a really good
time to use a Grenade along with the Assault Shotgun since he is close to the
characters and will remain still for a few seconds. Eventually he will pull
his tentacles out of the concrete and begin to walk toward the characters once
again. Blast the hell out of his head as he approaches the characters then get
ready to dodge his attack once again. The same pattern up above will start
over once again!
--> THE BOTTOM LINE
It really, really helps to bring some other type of weapon with you to this
battle besides just the Submachine Gun HP and the MRL. You really need another
gun that will take damage from Nemesis quickly. This battle can easily eat up
all your ammo and leave you with just the Handgun as Nemesis drops below half
of his life. You have to conserve ammo as much as possible and take whatever
routes that you can to make sure that you conserve ammo (shoot his rooftop
tentacles with a Handgun or Submachine Gun HP, don't miss with the rocket
launcher, make sure you are aiming at his head while firing the Submachine Gun
HP.)
Switch between your weapons often and try not to use up each secondary weapon
very quickly or you most likely won't be able to cancel his attacks. Whenever
you shoot Nemesis with the MRL, make sure he is walking or recovering so the
shot is not wasted. Don't aim for his head with the MRL or you might miss,
just shoot him in the body. Switch over to the Handgun every now and then if
you think that you are using too much secondary weapon ammo.
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Green Herb - Lying in the area while fighting Nemesis during the boss
battle.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
The battle won't always go the way that I described above. Nemesis will
perform some of his attacks in a row depending on how you respond to the
attacks. There is also a certain level of randomness to the attacks it seems.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
===============================================================================
-------------------------- S U B S C E N A R I O 4 ---------------------------
O C T O B E R 1, 1 9 9 8
____ _ _ ____
ADA | _ ___ __ _ | |_ | |__ __ ___ | _ ___ ___ _ __
| | | | / _ / _` || __|| '_ /_// __| | | | | / _ / _ | '__|
WONG | |_| || __/| (_| || | | | | | __ | |_| || (_) || (_) || |
|____/ ___| __,_||_| |_| |_| |___/ |____/ ___/ ___/ |_|
[SB04]
|******** Resident Evil 3: Nemesis - End of the Road for Raccoon City ********|
|- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -|
| D E A T H ' S D O O R 1 [DD01] |
|- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -|
| "I really wanted to escape with you... Escape from everything..." |
|*****************************************************************************|
= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = CHAPTER INFO = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
> Get an "A" rank on Raccoon's Destruction 3 in order to unlock this chapter. <
Ada: Burst Handgun, Shotgun SA (Lv.1)
Recommended Secondary Weapon: --
A Rank Item on Normal Mode: Picture (Ada and Jon)
S Rank Item on Hard Mode : S.T.A.R.S. Card (Brad's)
Unlockable Weapon: Grenade Launcher HP, Shotgun SA
Unlockable Scenario/Chapter: --
Ada wakes up from her plummet into darkness after loosing her grip of Leon's
hand on the catwalk up above. She has managed to retrieve the G-virus sample
and is now on her way to join up with her contact at the meeting point.
Like the scenario title hints at, Ada is nearly at Death's doorstep because of
her injuries. Look at her life gauge if you don't believe me. Ada starts with
very minimal life, so be careful while shooting the enemies in the sewer
tunnels. Use the Shotgun SA often in this chapter. Don't worry about
conserving ammo for it. If enemies start to overcrowd the screen at any time
then just switch the Shotgun SA and show them you mean business.
Ada starts with the Burst Handgun which will shoot out a burst of three rounds
at an enemy per shot. The shots are not as powerful as other Handguns, so try
to go for weak points when you use the Burst Handgun.
= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
== SEWER TUNNEL ==
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Shotgun SA Ammo - This can be seen in the back end of the tunnel as Ada
moves ahead. It can be grabbed from very far away, just line up the red dot on
the targeting cursor with it and grab it.
[ ] Shotgun SA Ammo - As Ada turns to fight the first Web Spinner quickly pick
this up from behind it before shooting the Web Spinner. It can be grabbed from
far away just like the other Shotgun SA pickup when Ada turns at the end of the
tunnel.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Ada will move up ahead into the sewers then suddenly turn and face off against
a [WEB SPINNER]. She will turn back around and see some [SMALL SPIDERS] on the
left wall next to her then look ahead and see TWO [WEB SPINNERS] along the
walls of the tunnel up ahead. Use the Shotgun SA to defeat the Web Spinners.
There are plenty of pickups for the Shotgun SA and each pickup holds 16 shots
so there is plenty of ammo to go around in this chapter.
Ada will eventually turn back around and a [WEB SPINNER] will attack from
behind. When she turns back around a [HUNTER] will jump straight at her, so
have the Shotgun SA ready to blast him back. It is a good idea to always aim
for the Hunter's heads in this chapter, since they pile up quick at times and
they always dash straight toward Ada aggressively. Ada will continue ahead
then look back to make sure that nothing is behind her.
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Grenade Launcher HP Ammo - As Ada turns the left corner after fighting the
Hunter, this will be on the ground.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Further down the tunnel, Ada will jump around the corner then continue toward
the ladder up ahead. She will eventually turn and fight an approaching
[HUNTER] then another [HUNTER] will step out from the tunnel in the back.
While moving toward the ladder, a [HUNTER] will jump through the opening above
the ladder then another [HUNTER] will jump down from above shortly. Ada will
turn again as another [HUNTER] tries to sneak up from behind her. Ada will
climb the ladder afterwards.
== IN FRONT OF APPLE INN ==
She will emerge on the streets of Raccoon City, right in front of the Apple Inn
- her contact meeting point.
/ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
| / [ ] |
| ) o ( F I L E 1 --> Ada Wong Profile |
| / |
| |
| Destroy the standing sign in front of the Apple Inn entrance as Ada |
| approaches the building after climbing out of the sewers. |
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - /
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Green Herb - On the street near the manhole as Ada climbs out of the sewer.
[ ] Shotgun SA Ammo - Near the entrance to the Apple Inn where the dog group
attacks.
[ ] Shotgun SA Ammo - While Ada backs away from the manhole, look down to spot
a small wooden crate, destroy the crate to find this inside. Get this before
she fights the dogs.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
She will look around the streets as she moves toward the doors of the Apple
Inn. For this next part, start out with your Burst Handgun then switch over to
the Shotgun SA once the enemies become too overwhelming. There may be times
where all you can see is blood and the inside of a dog's mouth during this next
part since it can get quite intense.
TWO [DOGS] will race toward Ada from the burning alley across from the Apple
Inn then TWO more [DOGS] will dash at her from that same alley. Oh, and let's
not forget about the THREE [DOGS] from the left and the other THREE [DOGS] from
the right. Good grief, even another TWO [DOGS] will dash from the right
then... ARGGGHHHHH! Ada will run through the doors of the Apple Inn as the
last two dogs appear. She will run to the end of the corridor inside the
entrance hallway then open the door at the end.
== APPLE INN LOBBY ==
/ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
| / [ ] |
| ) o ( F I L E 2 --> Resident Evil 2 Digest 1 |
| / |
| |
| When Ada first steps into the Apple Inn Lobby, shoot the painting on the |
| wall across from her - it has a light above it. |
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - /
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Grenade Launcher HP Ammo - On a bench as Ada steps into the Lobby of the
Apple Inn.
[ ] Shotgun SA Ammo - When Ada turns to fight the zombies on the left this will
be in the fireplace on the back wall.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
She will look ahead then turn to the left as FOUR [ZOMBIES] rise up from the
floor and attack her. ONE more [ZOMBIE] will rise before she turns to the
right.
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Green Herb - On the front counter as Ada turns to the right after fighting
the group of zombie in the Lobby. (NOT ON HARD MODE)
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
TWO [ZOMBIES] will be lurking behind the desk to the right. TWO [HUNTERS] will
jump down from the second floor up above then ANOTHER [HUNTER] will jump down
eventually.
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Grenade - Lying on a bench as Ada turns to fight the last two Hunters in
the Lobby. This can be grabbed along with the Shotgun SA as Ada enters the
Lobby - you just have to know that it is on the other side of that item pickup.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Ada will walk toward the door up ahead then she will turn as TWO more [HUNTERS]
leap to the room from the second floor. A cutscene will trigger once Ada opens
the door.
After the cutscene, Ada will be back out in the lobby. While moving ahead, you
may want to throw a grenade as TWO [HUNTERS] appear on the second floor then
jump to the first floor to attack. Another TWO [HUNTERS] will do the same
thing. It's easy to kill both sets with grenades or you can just use the
Shotgun SA, but be sure to aim for their heads and the Shotgun SA will defeat
them quickly. Ada will open the doors and walk back out to the street.
== IN FRONT OF APPLE INN ==
Ada will move out onto the street then turn to the car to her left as TWO
[DOGS] race toward her from behind the car. An action cutscene will trigger
once Ada defeats both of the dogs.
* Input the on-screen command as the three crows dive toward Ada.
Once the cutscene ends, [CROWS] will be flying around the area above the
street. TWO of the [CROWS] will attack Ada. TWO [DOGS] will chase after her
toward the alley, so break out the Shotgun SA or use some well placed headshots
with the Burst Handgun. Ada will turn and continue toward the burning wreckage
at the end of the alley.
Judging from the dialogue, the more playful Ada from RE4 will take over as Ada
nears the burning wreckage at the end. She will look toward a damaged
staircase on a building up above. Highlight the staircase and choose the "Use"
command to continue.
== STREET PAST BURNING WRECKAGE ==
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Green Herb - On the street in front of Ada after grappling over the burning
wreckage in the street.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Ada will wind up on the other side of the burning wreckage. She will look back
at the burning wreckage then back up as THREE [ZOMBIES] rise from it. She will
try to step beside the car up ahead but THREE [ZOMBIES] will block that way as
well. She will turn back around and face the three burning zombies. Try to go
for headshots but quickly switch to the Shotgun SA if any of the zombies get
too close. Ada will turn back around and deal with the three zombies near the
car. The car to the right can be shot to defeat a few of the zombies, but you
should really try for some headshots.
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Grenade Launcher HP Ammo - After fighting off the first six zombies on the
street past the burning wreckage, shoot the red barrel up ahead as the zombies
walk by it and the box that this is in will be destroyed. It's true location
is in the bottom box of the set of boxes.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Ada will look on as FOUR [ZOMBIES] step out of an alley up ahead. Luckily for
her, they will walk beside a red barrel, so just shoot the red barrel to defeat
the whole group. Ada will move ahead then face the alley to the left where the
zombies walked out from.
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Shotgun SA Ammo - Shoot the second red barrel down the alley in front of
the entrance to the building and this will appear behind it.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
SEVERAL [ZOMBIES] will be lurking about but just shoot the red barrel near the
back and this will take care of them all. Ada will open the door on the side
of the building.
== STORAGE ROOM ==
A [HUNTER] will attack from the right as soon as Ada steps into the Storage
Room, so have a Shotgun SA ready and hit him in the head. It is very important
that you hit all of the Hunters in the head while in this storage room, since
they always attack from close range.
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Shotgun SA Ammo - On the shelf across from Ada as she enters the Storage
[ ] Green Herb Room. (GREEN HERB IS NOT ON NORMAL OR HARD MODE)
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
ONE [HUNTER] followed by ANOTHER [HUNTER] will step around the side of the set
of shelves further ahead. Ada will turn the right corner and move in between
the shelves.
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Grenade - On the left shelf as Ada moves in between the sets of shelves in
the Storage Room.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
ONE [HUNTER] will jump from the left and ANOTHER [HUNTER] will move down the
stairs to the right as Ada moves toward the door.
== INSIDE THE BUILDING ==
Ada will turn the corner up ahead and find FOUR [ZOMBIES] staggering along the
corridor ahead. Blast them with the Shotgun SA if they start to attack,
otherwise go for headshots. Ada will continue further down the corridor, but
she will stop as THREE [ZOMBIES] step around the corner ahead. Ada will decide
to move through the doorway to the right and into the staircase area after
noticing the zombies down the corridor.
*********************** C H E C K P O I N T **************************
Ada will look up the first set of stairs and spot a [LICKER] on the wall.
Shoot the Lickers in this part with the Burst Handgun since each one will be
fought solo.
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Shotgun SA Ammo - After fighting the first Licker, this will be at the top
of the stairs where he was.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
She will move up the first set of stairs followed by the second. Ada will
notice a [LICKER] at the top of the third set of stairs, so shoot it. As Ada
prepares to move up the fourth set of stairs, she will look on the ceiling to
see a [LICKER] that is about to attack.
/ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
| / [ ] |
| ) o ( F I L E 3 --> Resident Evil 2 Digest 2 |
| / |
| |
| Shoot the blinking exit sign as Ada walks to the top floor of the building. |
| A First Aid Spray is at the top as Ada walks up the stairs. |
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - /
Ada will move to the very top of the building by continuing up the remaining
sets of stairs then she will exit to the roof.
== ROOFTOP OF BUILDING ==
Ada will disturb some [CROWS] perched on the rooftop as she steps outside then
the crows will start to gather up above. A total of NINE [CROWS] will dive
toward her. Use the Burst Handgun to fire at them until they overwhelm Ada
then start slashing with the knife. Ada will move up the ramp up ahead then
walk out onto the street up above and a cutscene will play.
/ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
| / [ ] |
| ) o ( F I L E 4 --> G Notes |
| / |
| |
| After fighting the many crows on the roof of the building, Ada will |
| approach a ramp that will lead to the boss fight. Find the two barrels |
| directly across from the ramp, on the other side, and destroy the right |
| barrel before, during, or after the boss fight. The file will appear near |
| the left barrel but only the right barrel has to be shot for it to appear. |
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - /
== STREET ==
===============================================================================
---------------------------- B O S S B A T T L E -----------------------------
Boss - Tyrant R (Tyrant Reborn)
Recommended Weapon: Shotgun SA and Grenade Launcher HP
Weak Point: Head
Hailing from Resident Evil Outbreak File #2's "End of the Road" scenario, Ada
must fight the mutated form (or Super Tyrant) of the T-103 (Mr. X-type) Tyrant
from that scenario known as Tyrant R (or Tyrant Reborn). This walking
monstrosity comes equipped with two claw arms for twice the torture! This time
there is no bomb trigger to set off the explosive in its body like there was in
Outbreak File #2.
--> THE EXPLOSIVE BARRELS
Ada will receive a bit of help for this boss fight in the form of the four red
explosive barrels found around the street. Shoot each barrel as Tyrant R
stands next to each one and it will take off a fair amount of damage as he is
caught up in the explosion. Don't get too overconfident with the explosion
however. Besides taking damage from the blast, it doesn't even phase Tyrant R!
--> THE DASHING ATTACK
Tyrant R's dashing attack is his most used attack for when Ada is at a
distance. He will dash toward her and attempt to hit her with one of his claw
hands. In order to cancel this move, shoot him in the head with the Shotgun SA
the second before he hits Ada. The Shotgun SA's spread makes this attack
fairly easy to cancel.
--> WHILE HE IS IN FRONT OF ADA
He will perform the usual Tyrant slaps that both Ivan and Tyrant used in
earlier chapters. Shoot him in the head to make him miss with the first punch
then use the on-screen command to dodge the second punch. If he readies a
third then shoot him in the head or heart to cancel that attack. He may only
perform one punch for the first few close encounters. Ada will run away from
the Tyrant after he is finished attacking.
--> HIS SUPER DASH
Whenever Tyrant R is at a distance and a whitish aura surrounds him then that
means he is about to perform his super dash attack. This move takes some split
second timing to cancel since it is so fast. He is literally at long distance
then suddenly in front of Ada in an instant. When he crouches over to perform
the dash, take out the Shotgun SA or Burst Handgun and fire at his head.
Tyrant R must be hit the second before he hits Ada in order to cancel this
move, so timing is very crucial.
--> THE SUDDEN GRAB
He may pick up Ada with his left arm while he is close to her. If he does
this, then aim at his head with the Shotgun SA equipped and shoot him in the
head a few times to make him drop Ada. This is nothing new since every Tyrant
has performed this same attack thus far.
--> THE BOTTOM LINE
Sure, he may have some fancy attacks along with his incredible size but Tyrant
R is really the easiest Tyrant out of the ones that have been fought thus far.
He falls fast if you take advantage of the red explosive barrels and keep
constant pressure on him with the Shotgun SA. Use the Grenade Launcher HP a
bit during the battle and this will do some massive damage if he is hit while
he is close. Close hits with Grenade Launcher HP = half life gone! The
Shotgun SA allows for some heavy (nearly rapid) fire, so blow the hell out of
him at all times while moving and maybe he will go pick on some other survivors
in Raccoon City - I think he already has, but still...
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Secondary Weapon Ammo - Near a car during the boss fight.
[ ] Green Herb
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
===============================================================================
Once Tyrant R falls, a cutscene will play, but it isn't over yet!
== STREETS ==
Ada will begin to back up as THREE [ZOMBIES] approach her from the left. This
is a really good time to rack up on some extra headshots as Ada backs up. She
will turn and move in between some cars and spot the helicopter. She will look
back at a [ZOMBIE HORDE] that approaches from down the street, then look back
toward the other three zombies. She will move beside a truck and spot the
perfect grapple point on a bridge up above.
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Green Herb - As Ada moves away from the zombies after the boss fight, this
will be lying near a van when she stops.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Point toward the bridge and press "A" when the "Use" command appears to grapple
to the top of the truck. While on the top, Ada will look toward the
helicopter. Follow the cargo crate that it carries with the targeting cursor
and press the A button when the crate moves past the bridge metal pieces up
above in order to grapple to it. A cutscene will play once Ada grapples.
Grappling the crate is all that must be done to finish this part.
If Ada does not grapple in time then THREE or possibly FOUR [HUNTERS] will jump
at her from below. Wait for each of them to jump toward Ada then shoot them
out of the air with the Shotgun SA. You can also toss a grenade down at them
while they gather. You'll have to keep fighting off three or four Hunters
until you finally grapple onto the crate. The helicopter will always
eventually fly close enough to where the "Use" command will appear on it, so
just wait for it while defending yourself from the Hunters.
If a Hunter knocks Ada off, then she will have to deal with either TWO or FOUR
[ZOMBIES] while on the ground then grapple back to the top of the truck once
again. This portion will keep repeating like this until the crate suspended
from the helicopter is grappled. Getting knocked off is a good way to get some
extra critical headshots for higher ranking but you'll suffer damage each time.
-------------------------- S U B S C E N A R I O 5 ---------------------------
N O V E M B E R 3 0, 1 9 9 8
_____ _ _
| ___|___ _ _ _ __ | |_ | |__
| |_ / _ | | | || '__|| __|| '_
| _|| (_) || |_| || | | |_ | | | |
|_| ___/ __,_||_| __||_| |_|
____ _
HUNK / ___| _ _ _ __ __ __(_)__ __ ___ _ __
___ | | | || '__| / /| | / // _ | '__|
___) || |_| || | V / | | V /| (_) || |
|____/ __,_||_| _/ |_| _/ ___/ |_|
[SB05]
|******************** Resident Evil 2 - G-virus Retrieval ********************|
|- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -|
| F O U R T H S U R V I V O R 1 [FS01] |
|- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -|
| "The Death cannot die." |
|*****************************************************************************|
= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = CHAPTER INFO = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
>>>>>>>>>>>>>> Finish all other chapters to unlock this chapter. <<<<<<<<<<<<<<
>>>>>>>>> This chapter will be the last chapter unlocked in the game! <<<<<<<<<
HUNK: Matilda, Automatic Pistol (Lv.1)
Recommended Secondary Weapon: --
A Rank Item on Normal Mode: G-virus
S Rank Item on Hard Mode : Eagle/Serpent/Jaguar Stone
Unlockable Weapon: Hand Cannon (it's hidden in the chapter)
Unlockable Scenario/Chapter: --
After his team of operatives get wiped out by the mutated William Birkin, HUNK
awakens in the sewers below the RPD building and contacts his helicopter at the
evacuation point.
Much like the original Fourth (4th) Survivor mode in Resident Evil 2, HUNK must
fight through a legion of T-virus creatures on his way to the evac point. Ammo
and healing items are scarce this time and not completely nonexistent except
for your current supply like in the original 4th Survivor.
Bring a weapon with a bunch of ammo, preferably an Automatic weapon. HUNK
starts with the Automatic Pistol, so that will do if you have enough ammo. The
default of 150 ammo may leave you with only the Handgun at times.
= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
== KENNEL ==
HUNK starts his escape in the corridor leading out of the Kennel after having
climbed the ladder of the sewer tunnel. When he turns to the left THREE [DOGS]
will dash out from the cages in the back of the Kennel. Try to go for
headshots with the Handgun.
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] First Aid Spray - Right before HUNK opens the first door that leads out of
the Kennel, he will talk to the helicopter pilot over the radio about Birkin,
this will be lying on a crate as he turns away from the door while talking.
Grab it quickly!
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
HUNK will move down the corridor to the right and walk toward the door and then
turn around and look back while talking about Birkin. Make sure that you grab
the First Aid Spray on the crate behind him when he turns. He will open the
door afterwards.
== BASEMENT CORRIDOR OUTSIDE CELLS ==
HUNK will look to the right as SEVERAL [ZOMBIES] move toward him. Go for
headshots and try not to use much secondary weapon ammo. HUNK will continue
toward the left corner then turn left and face off against FIVE [ZOMBIES]. He
will move past their defeated bodies and open the door to the Garage.
== GARAGE ==
FOUR [DOGS] will run at him from the left, so go for headshots with the
Handgun. If the dogs get too violent then switch over to the Automatic Pistol
here. THREE more [DOGS] will sprint out from behind the car up ahead to the
right. You can equip the Automatic Pistol and shoot the car to defeat all
three if you shoot it fast enough. TWO [DOGS] will run out from behind the
right and left columns as HUNK moves toward the exit door.
/ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
| / [ ] |
| ) o ( F I L E 1 --> HUNK Profile |
| / |
| |
| After fighting the last set of dogs in the garage, HUNK will turn and look |
| at the door that he just came from. Shoot the red "Exit" sign above that |
| distant door to reveal this file. |
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - /
HUNK will look back toward the door that he just entered the garage from then
open the door to the Basement Corridor.
== BASEMENT CORRIDOR ==
TWO [ZOMBIES] will attack right as HUNK steps through the door. As HUNK rounds
the corner up ahead, THREE [ZOMBIES] will attack and ONE [VOMITING ZOMBIE] will
attack from further down the corridor. Use the Automatic Pistol on the
vomiter. HUNK will continue ahead and face a [WEB SPINNER] as it move around
the corner. He will stand and decide on whether he should go straight or not,
but will make a decision to turn around and fight the [WEB SPINNER] on the wall
then continue toward the stairs that lead to the First Floor Corridor.
== FIRST FLOOR CORRIDOR ==
HUNK will move up the stairs then face off against THREE [DOGS] as they run
down the corridor up ahead.
/ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
| / [ ] |
| ) o ( F I L E 2 --> Umbrella Special Forces |
| / |
| |
| In the First Floor Corridor that HUNK enters after climbing the basement |
| staircase, he will fight three dogs then eventually turn the right corner |
| up ahead to see a Green Herb on a cabinet. Destroy the cabinet that the |
| Green Herb is on to reveal this file. |
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - /
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Green Herb - At the end of the First Floor Corridor, this will be on top of
a cabinet before stepping into the office. (NOT ON HARD MODE)
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
When he rounds the corner at the end of the corridor another THREE [DOGS] will
dash at him from behind. HUNK will open the door then continue into the
office.
*********************** C H E C K P O I N T **************************
== OFFICE ==
Before HUNK can exit the small hallway, a [HUNTER] will jump through the
outside doorway to the left and screech at him. The Hunter stands still for
quite a while, so take out the Handgun and blast him in the face. He should
die shortly before he attacks if you're aiming is good.
HUNK will enter the office area and face off against THREE [ZOMBIES] then turn
to see TWO [ZOMBIES] along with a third [ZOMBIE] exiting the main office. He
will turn and see a [ZOMBIE] blocking the doorway that he just came through.
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Automatic Pistol Ammo - On the row of desk in the office as HUNK runs
[ ] Grenade toward the double doors on the other side.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
HUNK will move across the other side of the row of desk. When he makes it to
the end SEVERAL [ZOMBIES] will stand at the double doors. Try to go for
headshots on them all. A grenade may be helpful.
/ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
| / [ ] |
| ) o ( F I L E 3 --> Chief's Diary |
| / |
| |
| When HUNK runs to the other end of the office and faces off against the |
| group of zombies near the double doors, shoot the stack of two boxes near |
| the left wall on the other side of the door. There is a trashcan near the |
| boxes. |
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - /
HUNK will turn back to the right and spot TWO [ZOMBIES] moving close to him
from the side of the row of desk. Shoot the first then HUNK will continue
through the set of double doors leading to the Reception Area.
== RECEPTION AREA ==
Shoot the TWO [CRAWLING ZOMBIES] on the floor to the right while singing along
with the radio transmission. Raccoon City! Raccoon City!
HUNK will turn around and fight TWO [ZOMBIES] near the door ahead. He will
open the door to the main hall.
== FIRST FLOOR MAIN HALL ==
All is quiet until HUNK steps in front of the entrance double doors and some
banging is heard behind him. When HUNK turns, SEVERAL [ZOMBIES] will open the
door and attempt to attack him. HUNK will back up and move down the stairs.
He will spin around and face the double doors that lead to the Trunk Room.
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Automatic Pistol Ammo - After the entrance doors in the main hall are
[ ] Hand Cannon Ammo opened and zombies step through, HUNK will move
[ ] Green Herb away from the zombies then eventually stare at a
set of double doors. Blast the double doors with
the Automatic Pistol to break them open. HUNK will
move inside of that room and you will find these
off to the left inside.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Blast the double doors with the Automatic Pistol to destroy them and make them
open. HUNK will automatically walk into the room on the other side once the
doors are destroyed.
== TRUNK ROOM ==
Grab the items off to the left inside. FOUR [ZOMBIES] will move out of the
corridor behind the bookshelf in the back of the room as TWO [ZOMBIES] look on
from behind the right reception counter. The zombies in this room are much
harder than ordinary zombies. They will not stagger often from rapid fire and
even a grenade will sometimes not instantly defeat them. Try to go for
headshots with the Handgun as much as possible and shake off any that grab
HUNK.
HUNK will look behind the bookshelf after the first wave of zombies only to see
FOUR more [ZOMBIES] behind it. He will move back from behind the bookcase then
stand as SEVERAL [ZOMBIES] move toward him. Again, go for headshots since
these zombies are very tough. HUNK will eventually back off and exit the room
during the middle of the zombie battle.
== FIRST FLOOR MAIN HALL ==
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Green Herb - On top of the long counter in the main hall where HUNK fights
several Web Spinners.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
HUNK will continue around the left side of the reception counter in the middle
of the room then look up to see THREE [WEB SPINNERS] on the ceiling. He will
continue ahead then turn back as ONE [WEB SPINNER] drops from behind him. Use
the Automatic Pistol for this first one. When he turns back around TWO [WEB
SPINNERS] will fall from the ceiling. Immediately shoot the left Web Spinner
with the Hand Cannon or will hit HUNK.
HUNK will vault over the counter to the right then turn as TWO [WEB SPINNERS]
drop from the ceiling and land on the counter. You have to shoot and defeat
these enemies fast or they will lunge forth and attack - it's good to use the
Hand Cannon on one of them or aim for their head while shooting both of them
with the Automatic Pistol. HUNK will move around the other side of the counter
and climb the middle ladder leading to the Second Floor Main Hall.
== SECOND FLOOR MAIN HALL ==
While still on the ladder, he will look to the left and spot an [IVY] on the
walkway. Shoot the Ivy directly in the head with the Handgun to make it show
the inside of its mouth. Once HUNK climbs up, shoot the Ivy in the mouth with
the Handgun for an instant kill (on Easy and Normal mode). HUNK will turn as
TWO more [IVYS] move toward him from behind. Shoot them both in the head with
the Handgun then shoot them both in the mouth just like with all Ivys.
As HUNK continues around the other side of the second floor walkway, he will
look on the opposite side and see a [HUNTER]. As the view zooms in, take out
the Handgun and shoot the Hunter as it dashes from the other side. By the time
it reaches HUNK's end, it should fall shortly before reaching him if you keep
blasting it - if not then switch to the Automatic Pistol and take him down the
rest of the way. HUNK will open the door at the end of the hall and enter the
Save Room.
== SAVE ROOM ==
An action sequence will take place as soon as HUNK enter this room.
* Input the on-screen command as the Ivy attempts to attack HUNK.
HUNK will move toward the door in the outside hall then open it and continue.
== SECOND FLOOR CORRIDOR ==
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Green Herb - On the floor in the back of the crawling zombies in the second
floor corridor.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Go for headshots on the TWO [CRAWLING ZOMBIES] that move toward HUNK from the
back of the corridor. When HUNK rounds the left corner, THREE [ZOMBIES] will
attack. He will continue on around the next corner. Get the knife ready as
FOUR [CROWS] bust through the windows and dash toward HUNK. When HUNK rounds
the corner at the very end of the corridor THREE [IVYS] will stand in his way.
Shoot the first two Ivys in the head followed by the mouth with the Handgun
then do the same for the Ivy behind them. HUNK will continue on through the
door at the end of the hall then step out onto the roof.
== ROOFTOP ==
He will turn to the left as TWO [LICKERS] attack followed by a [HUNTER] that
jumps down to join them. TWO more [HUNTERS] will attack along with a [LICKER]
after the first wave is defeated then finally TWO [HUNTERS] will leap down from
the roof and attack to end the wave of all enemies. Use the Automatic Pistol
and whatever is left of the Hand Cannon for this part. Grenades work excellent
here - throw them right before each wave jumps down and the explosion will kill
the group of enemies right before they attack. HUNK will turn around and step
toward the roof then a cutscene will play to end this chapter.
----------------------------- S C E N A R I O 4 ------------------------------
F E B R U A R Y 1 8, 2 0 0 3
_ _ _ _ _ __
| | | | _ __ ___ | |__ _ __ ___ | || | __ _ /_/___
| | | || '_ ` _ | '_ | '__|/ _ | || | / _` | / __|
| |_| || | | | | || |_) || | | __/| || || (_| | __
___/ |_| |_| |_||_.__/ |_| ___||_||_| __,_| |___/
_____ _
CHRIS | ____| _ __ __| | JILL
| _| | '_ / _` |
REDFIELD | |___ | | | || (_| | VALENTINE
|_____||_| |_| __,_|
[SC04]
|************** Pre-Resident Evil 4 - Entering the Umbrella Base *************|
|- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -|
| U M B R E L L A ' S E N D 1 [UE01] |
|- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -|
| "Hey, it's up to us to take out Umbrella." |
|*****************************************************************************|
= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = CHAPTER INFO = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
>>> Must have finished both Beginnings 2 and Rebirth 2 as well as Raccoon's <<<
>> Destruction 3 to unlock this chapter. <<
Chris: Samurai Edge 2, Shotgun SA (Lv.1)
Jill : Samurai Edge 2, Automatic Pistol (Lv.1)
Recommended Secondary Weapon: --
A Rank Item on Normal Mode: Plastic Bomb/Detonator
S Rank Item on Hard Mode : Square Crank
Unlockable Weapon: Automatic Pistol, Shotgun SA
Unlockable Scenario/Chapter: "Umbrella's End" Chapter 2
Both default secondary weapons are very useful in this chapter. If you're
going for some headshots at the beginning it's good to start with the Automatic
Pistol however - rapid auto-fire on three zombies, quick switch to Handgun,
headshot, headshot, headshot.
Up until this point, I have been counting most of the zombies that the
characters face in their encounters, but this chapter has way too many zombies
grouped together for me to count them as I defeat them, so get used to reading
"hordes", "several", "few", etc. I may go into to heavy detail at times, but
please, give me a break here.
= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
== OUTSIDE THE FACILITY ==
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] First Aid Spray - At the very beginning, pick these up from the dead body
[ ] Grenade to the right as the characters approach the zombie horde.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
The characters will walk toward a HORDE OF [ZOMBIES] at the beginning. Try for
a few headshots here and quickly switch to a secondary weapon if any of them
start to get too close. There is a red barrel to the left that can be shot,
but the explosion doesn't really help that much.
The characters will eventually move up the ladder to the right. They will look
back down and stare at the zombie horde from the catwalk up above - you can
throw a grenade here for some extra kills since more zombies continue to get up
from the ground as the characters look downward.
/ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
| / [ ] |
| ) o ( F I L E 1 --> Umbrella Russian Branch Notes |
| / |
| |
| Once the characters move up the stairs after fighting the horde of zombies |
| at the start, shoot the curved light up above the area where the dogs dash |
| forth from. The light is facing to the right so it doesn't give off that |
| much light. |
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - /
TWO [DOGS] will dash from the other side of the catwalk and attack the
characters and ANOTHER [DOG] will attack after one of the first two has been
defeated.
Chris and Jill will move to the other side of the catwalk then turn to face a
[HUNTER] that dashes toward them. A [VOMITING ZOMBIE] gets up from the catwalk
floor as the Hunter attacks.
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Automatic Pistol Ammo - Lying on the catwalk floor when the Hunter and
Vomiting Zombie attack after fighting the dogs.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
The characters will jump to the snowfield below after fighting off the two
creatures.
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Shotgun SA Ammo - After dropping from the ladder the characters will turn
to the right and this will be down that path before they get to the stairs.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
The characters will stare at THREE [ZOMBIES] behind the fence up ahead then
turn to the right and move down some steps.
== DARK PIPE TUNNEL ==
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Automatic Pistol Ammo - When the characters move down the stairs and enter
[ ] Grenade the Dark Pipe Tunnel, these will be on the left
wall and in the back of the tunnel, respectively.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
The steps lead to a dark tunnel, and SEVERAL [ZOMBIES] will block the tunnel in
the middle. Shoot them down then the characters will move toward the end of
the tunnel and then turn back around to face TWO [CRIMSON HEADS]. The
characters will exit the tunnel by climbing the next set of stairs.
== OUTSIDE THE FACILITY ==
A GROUP of [ZOMBIES] will walk toward the characters as the characters stand in
front of the stairs.
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Automatic Pistol Ammo - Once the characters step out of the tunnel, they
will fight some zombies. Afterwards, they will move forward and look to the
right and spot two move zombies with this in front of them.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
After disposing of the zombies, the characters will move forward a bit then
turn to the right and see TWO [ZOMBIES] lurking down the right path.
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Green Herb - To the left when the characters fight the zombies shortly
after looking down the path with the two zombies in front of the pistol pickup.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
The characters will turn back around and face SEVERAL [ZOMBIES], TWO of which
are [VOMITING ZOMBIES]. Switch to the Automatic Pistol when dealing with the
vomiting zombies.
The characters will move further ahead then turn as THREE [DOGS] rush at them
from behind.
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Shotgun SA Ammo - On a crate in the back right portion of the area while
the characters fight zombies that have three red barrels in the back of them.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Upon turning back around the characters will spot SEVERAL [ZOMBIES] moving
toward them with three red barrels behind them. Pick one of the three red
barrels and destroy it to kill the whole group of zombies. Yeah!
Have the Shotgun SA ready since the characters will turn the corner to the left
just as TWO [CRIMSON HEADS] dash toward them. SEVERAL [ZOMBIES] will attack
from up ahead and ONE of them is a [VOMITING ZOMBIE]. Find the red barrel off
to the right in the back of this path and shoot it to defeat most of the
zombies.
The characters will walk forward then they will have a choice of paths. If you
want all the files then choose the path below, through the opening to the side.
The top path above the stairs is the longest path, but you won't have to worry
about as many enemy pileups at one time while going that way.
***************************** B E L O W P A T H ******************************
== DARK CORRIDOR ==
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Automatic Pistol Ammo - On the left wall as the characters turn from the
ladder.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Don't shoot any of the barrels just yet. Once the characters turn around,
SEVERAL [ZOMBIES] will attack from the front of the corridor up ahead. The
characters will turn to face SEVERAL [ZOMBIES] on the left once the others have
been taken care of. Shoot the red barrels around this second group of zombies
to quickly get rid of them.
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Shotgun SA Ammo - On the left side of the first hall that the characters
[ ] Green Herb move down. (GREEN HERB IS NOT ON NORMAL OR HARD MODE)
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
While the characters move ahead a [CHIMERA] will crawl out of the vent at the
bottom of the left wall followed by ANOTHER [CHIMERA]. As the characters pass
the corner, they will turn to the right and deal with TWO [CHIMERAS] and FOUR
[ZOMBIES] - shoot the red barrel to the right to finish them all quickly.
THREE [CHIMERAS] will move down the hall to the left as the characters finish
off the first set. The characters will move up into the corridor and turn
their backs to the dead end as THREE [CHIMERAS] move out from the left
corridor.
Once the coast is clear, the characters will continue ahead down the right
corridor. One of their falling comrades will contact them over the radio
shortly before a [CHIMERA] moves out of the vent on the left wall. The
character will run ahead then turn to face FOUR [ZOMBIES]. THREE [CHIMERAS]
will run forward from in between the zombies so don't try for headshots here
since the zombies are basically just there for distraction purposes. The
characters will immediately turn after the fight to deal with a GROUP of
[ZOMBIES] behind them - shoot the red barrel to the right up ahead.
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Grenade - In the back of the two crawling zombies that attack from
underneath the half open shutter.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
The characters will turn once again to face off against TWO CRAWLING [ZOMBIES]
that will attack from under the shutter to the side. The characters will move
up under the shutter once the last crawling zombie is shot.
== CORRIDOR PAST THE SHUTTER ==
/ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
| / [ ] |
| ) o ( F I L E 2 --> Talos Project Proposal |
| / |
| |
| Choose to go down below when given a choice of paths. When the characters |
| move under the shutter after fighting two crawling zombies, destroy the top |
| right box next to the item pickups. |
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - /
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Automatic Pistol Ammo - Near some boxes after the characters move under the
[ ] Green Herb half open shutter.
[ ] Automatic Pistol Ammo - Destroy the bottom box on the left of the pickups
described above.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
While on the other side, collect the items as the characters move by them and
the boxes up ahead. TWO [ZOMBIES] and one [VOMITING ZOMBIE] will attack down
the corridor to the right. Shoot either of the red barrels near them in order
to kill them.
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Automatic Pistol Ammo - After fighting some zombies that move in between
[ ] Shotgun SA Ammo two red barrels, the characters will look in the
right alcove ahead and these will be there.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
The characters will look around the right corner then quickly turn to the left
as a [HUNTER] attacks from behind them followed by ANOTHER [HUNTER] from the
right as they turn.
While stepping up to the turn, a [HUNTER] and a [CHIMERA] will attack then the
characters will turn to face a [HUNTER] and a [ZOMBIE]. Don't get too
overconfident with a headshot on that zombie since the characters will turn
back around to face another [HUNTER] and [CHIMERA]. After those lovely
couples, the characters will continue ahead and run across a single [ZOMBIE]
with a red barrel behind him just begging to be shot. Don't shoot the barrel
yet though, since TWO MORE [ZOMBIES] will get up from the right wall - now
shoot the barrel to defeat all three! The characters will duck and move up
under the shutter on the side wall.
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Grenade - Look to the left while moving up under the second half open
shutter and this will be on a cart.
[ ] Shotgun SA Ammo - To the right after stepping out from the half open second
shutter.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
== OTHER SIDE OF DARK CORRIDOR ==
Upon turning to the right, the characters will have to fight THREE [CHIMERAS].
/ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
| / [ ] |
| ) o ( F I L E 3 --> Umbrella Raccoon City Judgement |
| / |
| |
| After moving up under the second shutter, three Chimeras will attack. Once |
| the characters walk up to some stairs, destroy the top box in the stack of |
| boxes in the alcove to the left of the staircase. |
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - /
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Green Herb - After fighting the three Chimeras the characters will stare
down at the half open shutter then eventually turn around. Look down and to
the left when they turn then grab this from the floor.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
The characters will back up afterwards and look up under the shutter that they
just moved under to make sure those damn zombie don't go Crimson anytime soon.
Thankfully they won't and the characters will continue toward the stairs down
the corridor ahead then open the door at the top. Strangely the door's squeak
sounds like a zombie moan.
== INSIDE THE FACILITY ==
Ah, so that wasn't the door?! FIVE [ZOMBIES] will walk toward the characters
from the side of the room as the characters step through the door then turn to
face the zombies. This group will make some perfect headshots.
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Shotgun SA Ammo - As the characters step through the door to the facility,
this will be to the right near some zombies.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Jill will begin to get a strange feeling as Chris questions her spider sense
then the characters will turn and TWO [WEB SPINNERS] will attack from the walls
along with TWO [ZOMBIES] in the middle. Take out an Automatic Pistol then
shoot the Web Spinners and quickly fire at one of the zombies to stagger it if
it grows restless. Right when the characters get next to the end of the crate
on the left they will turn as THREE [HUNTERS] jump down from the crates up
above and hop toward the characters.
(This is where the paths meet, so press Ctrl + F and type in "[UMEN1]" to
continue with the Inside the Facility area)
************************** B E L O W P A T H E N D **************************
**************************** S T A I R S P A T H *****************************
== UP THE STAIRS ==
Chris and Jill will move up the stairs to the left then they will go up two
more sets of stairs. On the top catwalk, they will look out toward a group of
FOUR [ZOMBIES] in the snowfield below. Distracted by the possibility of
headshots, the characters will nearly not even notice the GROUP of [ZOMBIES] to
the right as they turn. There is an red explosive barrel to the right near the
group of zombies, but hit it quick since they will start lunging fast.
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Shotgun SA Ammo - After rounding the right corner, once the first group of
zombies on the catwalk have been defeated, this will be on the floor.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
The characters will move ahead then step around the right corner. They will
look upwards and survey the path ahead. While cautiously climbing the stairs,
a SINGLE [ZOMBIE] will stand and attack after moving up the first set of
stairs. While moving toward the next flight of stairs, a [CRIMSON HEAD] will
run down the stairs toward the characters from above.
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Shotgun SA Ammo - After fighting the Crimson Head on the second flight of
stairs, this will be on the next catwalk.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
A radio call will come through Chris' radio then both characters will look on
the catwalk below them to make sure that that damn Crimson Head is still dead.
They will continue up the stairs but look back down one more time just to make
sure.
== TOP OF THE CATWALK ==
Once the characters have made it to the top catwalk, they will stare to the
left for a moment then hear some zombie moans. Where in the world are they?
Oh, it's just a GROUP of [ZOMBIES] and TWO [VOMITING ZOMBIES] to the side they
think as they turn. Break out a secondary weapon here, and make sure to go for
the annoying Vomiting Zombies first of all.
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Grenade - Once the characters fight off the group of zombies on the top
[ ] Green Herb catwalk, this will be to the left further around the corner.
(GREEN HERB IS NOT ON NORMAL OR HARD MODE)
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
The characters will follow the catwalk around the side then come upon a
platform with two red barrels. Don't shoot the red barrels as the characters
climb the stairs. TWO [HUNTERS] will jump down near the second barrel in front
of the characters so have a Shotgun SA ready for them. Don't shoot the red
barrel near the Hunters! Once the Hunters are defeated, the characters will
turn to face a GROUP of [DOGS] that run up the stairs at them. Turn and shoot
the first red barrel on the right (with a secondary weapon) just before the
dogs make it to the characters in order to defeat most of them.
The characters will turn back around and move down the stairs on the other
side. They will hear some moans then turn to face THREE dashing [CRIMSON
HEADS]. Shoot the second red barrel while the Crimson Heads run by it to
defeat all three of them at once.
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Automatic Pistol Ammo - When the characters break out into a dash after
defeating the three Crimson Heads, this will be in front of them (to the left)
before they turn again.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
The characters will get cocky after this accomplishment and dash forth down the
rest of the catwalk like they own the facility now, but they will quickly turn
around as the excitement wear off, but thankfully nothing is following them.
*********************** C H E C K P O I N T **************************
== TOP OF THE CATWALK ==
The characters will continue ahead and move across a bridge. Arm the Automatic
Pistol here, since the characters will look off to the left and see TWO
[HUNTERS] dash by a red barrel on a catwalk below and they will look to the
right and see TWO more [HUNTERS] dash by a red barrel on another catwalk -
shoot the red barrels with a secondary weapon as the characters turn to look at
each Hunter group and this will defeat some of them before the Hunters can jump
to the catwalk that the characters are on. It's hard to hit the barrels
however, so prepare to take out the Shotgun SA if the Hunters land on the
catwalk.
ONE [HUNTER] will jump straight at the characters from the left and attack
while in the air - you have to be extremely ready for this bastard and bust him
with a Shotgun SA shot the moment he appears - it's so very easy to get hit
here if you're not expecting him. ANOTHER [HUNTER] will leap up onto the
catwalk from the right but he is at a distance. The characters will move
further ahead. Don't shoot the red barrel on the right just yet. The
characters will look off to the left then turn and face TWO [ZOMBIES] and a
GROUP of [ZOMBIES] that move next to the red barrel. Take down the first two
zombies then wait for the group in the back to approach the red barrel and then
shoot the red barrel. This is a really good portion to rack up on headshots
since the group of zombies are so distant!
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Automatic Pistol Ammo - The characters will look over the left railing
[ ] Grenade after defeating a group of zombies near a barrel
later on and these will be lying beside the dead
body on that catwalk.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
The characters will continue along the catwalk and stop to look at a dead body
on a catwalk to the left. At the end of the current catwalk they will climb a
ladder on the right wall. Not taking any chance, the characters will survey
the rooftop before climbing all the way up. It appears clear...
Well, that is, until the characters walk to the vent up ahead. They will turn
as TWO [HUNTERS] rush toward them. The characters will receive a radio call
where the fellow comrade will mention the vent that they are near.
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Green Herb - While sliding down the vent, this will be off to the left as
the characters turn to the left.
[ ] Shotgun SA Ammo - When the characters slide down the vent they will slide
into the facility and break some boxes along the way. This will be right by
them as they stop.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Chris and Jill will slide down the vent and land on the top floor of the
facility below them.
== INSIDE THE FACILITY ==
Once the characters get up, they will turn as TWO [HUNTERS] dash toward them -
make sure to have a Shotgun SA ready. The characters will move along the top
catwalk and look down to survey the inside of the facility and HORDE of
[ZOMBIES] that lurk on the bottom floor. Jill will get a sudden feeling that
something is not right as Chris turns to question her mood.
The characters will move down the first staircase and a [HUNTER] will hop
through the vent on the right wall once they make it to the bottom. The
characters will slowly back down the catwalk toward the next set of stairs, and
it is a good thing that they do back away, because ANOTHER [HUNTER] will attack
as they step away. The characters will turn and face TWO [VOMITING ZOMBIES]
once the Hunter is toast - use an Automatic Pistol here to avoid headaches.
THREE [ZOMBIES] will get up from the current area once the two vomiting zombies
are defeated. The characters will continue down the next set of stairs once
they have swept the current floor clean of T-virus trash.
************************* S T A I R S P A T H E N D *************************
[UMEN1]
Both paths meet up as this next cutscene plays. An action cutscene will
trigger once the characters move down the stairs/try to step into the middle of
the area (depending on which path was taken).
* Input the on-screen command to dodge the big hook that moves toward Chris and
Jill.
Well, they can't move into the middle now, so the characters will continue
around the corner to the right. A FEW [ZOMBIES] will attack from this side,
THREE of which will be [VOMITING ZOMBIES]. Use the Automatic Pistol to place
constant fire on the Vomiting Zombies in the back of the crowd. The characters
will move further ahead then look up and spot THREE [WEB SPINNERS] on the right
wall. These Web Spinners can easily be taken down with a Handgun if you work
quick enough. They will begin to shoot venom if you take too long.
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Green Herb - Directly after fighting the three Web Spinners up on the right
wall, look to the left as Chris and Jill step forward then quickly grab this
from in between the crates up ahead before they turn toward the zombies - it
can be hard to grab. (NOT ON HARD MODE)
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
The characters will turn around as some familiar moans draw their attention to
SEVERAL [ZOMBIES] behind them. The zombies will cause the characters to back
up behind some crates in the back of them as they look for a way to escape.
They will move toward a crate up ahead then climb over the crate and jump to
the middle then turn to face THREE [ZOMBIES] and a [VOMITING ZOMBIE].
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Automatic Pistol Ammo - When the characters climb over the boxes these will
[ ] Shotgun SA Ammo be behind the group of zombies to the right when
they turn.
[ ] Grenade - On a far crate while fighting the enemies in the open area of the
facility. This can be grabbed at any time up until the characters make it to
the other side.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Directly after taking down the zombies TWO [HUNTERS] will appear on the top
crate to the right then leap down at the characters and attack. Be sure to
have a secondary weapon ready for them.
Chris and Jill will turn around and fight FOUR [ZOMBIES] and a [VOMITING
ZOMBIE] that conveniently stand with a red barrel to their back... shoot it.
Immediately following the zombies' demise, the characters will turn to the
right as THREE [HUNTERS] begin to climb over the crates all the way on the
other side - use the Automatic Pistol here since they're far away, or use the
Shotgun SA as they get closer.
The characters will turn to face FIVE [ZOMBIES] then decide to move forward
before they get swamped with zombies.
/ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
| / [ ] |
| ) o ( F I L E 4 --> Eradication Operation Notes |
| / |
| |
| When the characters "get surrounded and have to fall back" from the five |
| zombies inside the facility, shoot the wooden crate to the left of the red |
| explosive barrel when they turn to face the five zombies while on the other |
| side. This crate can also be shot while Chris checks the body of his dead |
| comrade, Bronson - it's directly across from the characters at that point. |
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - /
The FIVE [ZOMBIES] from earlier will approach the characters as the characters
turn to lure them toward the red barrel on the left. Yes, shoot the barrel!
A gruesome sight will be awaiting Chris and Jill as they move around the left
side of the big crate. Their friend Bronson has perished at the hands of these
Umbrella mutants! So sad... Anyway, quickly steal all his ammo and the other
items that he placed next to him while Chris and Jill lament. He's dead -
might as well rob his ass.
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Automatic Pistol Ammo - While Chris checks the body of his dead partner,
[ ] Secondary Weapon Ammo Bronson, these will be lying to the left on a shelf
[ ] Grenade and near his body.
[ ] Green Herb
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
While continuing around the corner, the characters will stop as TWO [HUNTERS]
dash toward them. After turning to the left, TWO [ZOMBIES] will begin to
approach the characters but they are merely a distraction since TWO [HUNTERS]
will dash out from the side of the crates behind them and leap over them to
attack the characters. Use the Shotgun SA to fight the Hunters.
While walking further ahead, the characters will look to the right then Jill
will call Chris' attention to the Hunter that begins to jump down from the
stacked crates to the right. Take out the Shotgun SA and point toward each
Hunter and shoot them as they hit the floor or move out from the side of the
crate. There are a total of TEN [HUNTERS] in the first wave then FOUR
[HUNTERS] will follow in the second wave followed by FIVE [HUNTERS] in the
final wave. As you may notice, the Hunters are plentiful but they fall like
flies when the Shotgun SA is used - very rarely will you need to shoot one of
them more than once for a kill.
"There were so many of them. What's with this place?"
You have almost reached the final stage, Chris! What did you expect?
The chapter will end shortly after the thoughts of our Special Force team.
They will walk toward the elevator controls and the chapter will come to a
close.
|*************** Pre-Resident Evil 4 - Inside the Umbrella Base **************|
|- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -|
| U M B R E L L A ' S E N D 2 [UE02] |
|- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -|
| "That's it. Umbrella is going down." |
|*****************************************************************************|
= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = CHAPTER INFO = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
Chris: Samurai Edge 2, Shotgun SA (Lv.1)
Jill : Samurai Edge 2, Automatic Pistol (Lv.1)
Recommended Secondary Weapon: --
A Rank Item on Normal Mode: Blue/Red/Green Chemical
S Rank Item on Hard Mode : Ink Ribbon
Unlockable Weapon: --
Unlockable Scenario/Chapter: "Umbrella's End" Chapter 3
= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
== ELEVATOR BOTTOM ==
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Automatic Pistol Ammo - Look to the right at the beginning to see these
[ ] Shotgun SA Ammo shining to the side. These can be retrieved at the
starting or when the characters jump off the
elevator after defeating the Hunters.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Chris and Jill will walk toward the front of the elevator at the beginning and
they will look on as SEVERAL [ZOMBIES] begin to enter room through the doorway
up ahead. Try to go for some headshots here with the Handgun - if you're not
good at aiming just blindly fire with the Handgun and you might luckily score
some headshots.
The characters will turn as a [HUNTER] jumps onto the elevator. Switch to the
Shotgun SA and fire at him then the characters will turn to the right as
ANOTHER [HUNTER] jumps on the elevator with them. The characters will turn
back around as TWO more [HUNTERS] jump onto the elevator. Blast them and the
characters will jump off the side then turn to face SEVERAL [ZOMBIES] to their
left.
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Automatic Pistol Ammo - This will be to the left while fighting a zombie
horde below the elevator along the way to the first door.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
The main focus right now is to keep the zombies from lunging at you, so take
out the Shotgun SA or Automatic Pistol and blast them if they try. It really
doesn't do any good to shoot the red barrel right now since they will respawn
in just a minute if you do.
The characters will turn and face off against a [ZOMBIE], a [HUNTER], and a
[VOMITING ZOMBIE]. Defeat the Hunter first of all then use the Automatic
Pistol to quickly defeat the Vomiting Zombie. Go for a headshot with the other
zombie. The characters will turn once again to face the [ZOMBIE HORDE] behind
them. Shoot the red barrel this time to clear a path through the zombies.
Throw a grenade if you need to. THREE [VOMITING ZOMBIES] are in the back of
the crowd, so be sure to watch for their vomit balls and shoot any that they
fire.
As the characters move toward the door ahead, a [HUNTER] will eventually dash
through it as they approach it from the side. Blast him with the Shotgun SA
the moment he shows his face.
== LOCKER ROOM ==
The characters will walk through the hall ahead and enter a room with lockers.
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Automatic Pistol Ammo - After stepping through the first door, destroy the
middle locker door.
[ ] Grenade - After stepping through the first door, destroy the far right
locker door.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Shoot some of the lockers to reveal some items. A [ZOMBIE] will bust through
one of the right lockers. The door to the Decontamination Room to the right
will open eventually and the characters will move inside.
== DECONTAMINATION ROOM ==
The characters will look over the three dead bodies inside the Decontamination
Room then step into the next room on the other side.
== OUTSIDE THE DECONTAMINATION ROOM ==
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Automatic Pistol Ammo - While stepping out of the Decontamination Room,
[ ] First Aid Spray these will be against the far wall.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
The characters will turn back toward the Decontamination Room entrance as they
hear some familiar moans. THREE [ZOMBIES] and one [VOMITING ZOMBIE] will move
through the doorway of the Decontamination Room and attack. The characters
will turn around and move through the next doorway while discussing the
possibility of a new Umbrella bioweapon.
== WHITE HALL ==
The characters will walk into a white hall with the Umbrella insignia near the
T-shaped corridor.
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Grenade - On the left side of the floor while stepping into the hall.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
/ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
| / [ ] |
| ) o ( F I L E 1 --> Simulated Battle Data |
| / |
| |
| After moving out of the Decontamination Room, the characters will enter a |
| small room with items and then eventually a hall. Look for the Umbrella |
| symbol on the floor and shoot the security camera on the right wall nearly |
| above the Umbrella symbol. While stepping away from the door near the |
| Umbrella symbol, the camera is on the right side of the door. |
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - /
While walking they will turn as the vent cover on the ceiling behind them
falls. They will walk forward some more and a vent cover from up ahead will
fall from the ceiling. The characters will turn and face a [CHIMERA] as it
drops through the vent behind them.
The characters will back down a hall as TWO [CHIMERAS] race around the corner
followed by ANOTHER [CHIMERA] then another THREE [CHIMERAS]. Once the final
Chimera falls immediately switch to the Automatic Pistol since TWO [LICKERS]
will bust through the vents on the lower walls and they will both try to slice
the characters with their claws. Aim for the one on the right first and fire
as he exits the vent then fire at the other.
/ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
| / [ ] |
| ) o ( F I L E 2 --> Richard Aiken's Letter |
| / |
| |
| While the characters are in the hall, Lickers will begin to bust through |
| the vents on the side of the lower walls. When the characters turn to the |
| second set of vents that the Lickers bust through, a file will appear near |
| the right vent after a Licker busts through it. |
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - /
The characters will turn around and the vent covers behind them will fly out as
THREE [LICKERS] crawl out of them. Use the Automatic Pistol for all Licker
encounters throughout this chapter.
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Automatic Pistol Ammo - To the right and left at the back of the hall in
[ ] Green Herb front of the exit door when the second set of
Lickers attack.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
The characters will step forward and walk through the doorway ahead.
== WATER TANK ==
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Green Herb - On the right side of the metal platform after entering the
water tank area. (NOT ON HARD MODE)
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
The characters will survey the catwalk submerged in water up ahead then have a
choice of two paths to take. There really isn't too much difference between
the paths. If you don't like Hunters then go left. The left path will lead to
a darker room where the characters will be forced to use a flashlight and the
right path will lead to a bright room. If you want to collect all the files in
this chapter then take the right path.
***************************** R I G H T P A T H ******************************
== WATER TANK ==
Equip the Shotgun SA here. The characters will spot a [NEPTUNE] shark on the
left side of the catwalk, it will submerge then jump up out of the water and
try to take a bite out of the characters. Shoot these sharks with the Shotgun
SA right before they hit the characters to drive them off. The characters will
turn to the right and face another [NEPTUNE] shark - this one will dash
straight at the characters. While moving forward, another [NEPTUNE] shark will
dash straight at the characters from the left. The characters will step
through the door up ahead and enter the East Disposal Room.
== EAST DISPOSAL ROOM ==
Look to the right while stepping into the this room and try to grab both items
on the counter, if not, then you can grab them when the characters turn back
around to face some enemies.
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Shotgun SA Ammo - On the counter to the right while entering the East
Disposal Room. This particular pickup is hard to get without knowing that it
is there. You need to face the right while entering the door and tap the A
button. You can also retrieve both of the pickups on the counter while facing
the Hunters on the metal platform.
[ ] Grenade - On the counter to the right while entering the East Disposal
Room.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
/ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
| / [ ] |
| ) o ( F I L E 3 --> Leon S. Kennedy Profile |
| / |
| |
| In the water tank area, choose the right path. After moving through the |
| door, look to the right to see some monitors. Shoot the furthest monitor |
| on the top for this file. |
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - /
The characters will look at some round containers on a railway that are being
carried to a disposal pit. TWO [LICKERS] will appear from the left as the
characters turn to face them. While moving further into the room, one of the
containers will suddenly burst open and a [HUNTER] will jump toward them and
attack. Another container will bust open soon and another [HUNTER] will jump
at the characters and a SECOND [HUNTER] will dash at them from the right.
While trying to move up the stairs TWO [LICKERS] will appear (left and right
wall) then a [HUNTER] will jump down the stairs. A SECOND [HUNTER] will show
up eventually. Try to shoot them both equally to cancel their attacks.
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Automatic Pistol Ammo - After moving up the steps to the metal platform,
this will be around the left corner while moving ahead.
[ ] Automatic Pistol Ammo - Blast the box behind the first dead body on the
left after turning the corner.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
The characters will move up the stairs and move around the left corner toward
some dead bodies. TWO [ZOMBIES] and one [VOMITING ZOMBIE] will attack as the
characters continue forward.
Following the zombie attack, the characters will turn as a [HUNTER] burst out
of an overhead container behind them. Take out the Shotgun SA and fire at him
since he is rather close. The characters will look down the stairs at TWO
[VOMITING ZOMBIES] in the area that they just came from and nearly miss out on
the TWO [LICKERS] that attack from the left. The two vomiting zombies will run
up the stairs and begin their vomiting attacks while the Lickers attack from
the floor. The characters will turn back around and move to the back of the
room then a checkpoint will take place.
*********************** C H E C K P O I N T **************************
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Automatic Pistol Ammo - To the right and left, respectively, after the
[ ] Shotgun SA Ammo checkpoint.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
While moving ahead the characters will look back at the containers up above
just to make sure then TWO [ELIMINATORS] will hop up the stairs to the side.
The characters will turn and face a [HUNTER] then TWO MORE [HUNTERS] will
follow after the first one has been defeated. The second two Hunters move
quite fast so make sure to aim for their faces when you shoot them with the
Shotgun SA in order to stop their claw attack.
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Shotgun SA Ammo - On top of the large crate to the left while moving down
[ ] Green Herb the steps as a radio call comes through.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
A radio call will come through where a fellow comrade will mention that the
factory is secure. The characters will move down the stairs up ahead then walk
through the doorway.
== HALLWAY TO SECURITY ROOM ==
The lights on both sides of this room can be shot out and there are quite a few
of them, so blast them if you want some extra destroyable objects. While
continuing around the left corner up ahead, the characters will catch sight of
an Eliminator that runs down the middle corridor ahead.
(This is where the paths meet, so press Ctrl + F and type in "[UMEN2]" to
continue with the Inside the Facility area)
************************** R I G H T P A T H E N D **************************
****************************** L E F T P A T H *******************************
== WATER TANK ==
The characters will turn to the right as a [NEPTUNE] shark submerges. Take out
the Shotgun and shoot him as he jumps and tries to bite the characters.
Another [NEPTUNE] shark will dash at the characters from the left, then another
[NEPTUNE] will attack from the right. The characters will walk through the
doorway up ahead and enter the West Disposal Room.
== WEST DISPOSAL ROOM ==
This room is dark, so the characters will have to use flashlights in order to
see making visibility a little tough. Equip an Automatic Pistol in here.
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Automatic Pistol Ammo - On top of the stack of crates on the left while
entering the West Disposal Room.
[ ] Shotgun SA Ammo - On top of some crates when the characters turn further to
the left and Lickers attack.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
As the characters step further into the room, they will eventually turn to the
left and fight a [LICKER]. TWO more [LICKERS] will dash toward the characters
as they turn around. FOUR [BATS] will eventually fly toward the characters,
but only two of them will attack. A checkpoint will occur as the characters
stand in front of the stairs.
*********************** C H E C K P O I N T **************************
The characters will continue up the stairs to the metal platform in the middle
of the Disposal Room.
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Grenade - At the top of the stairs after the checkpoint.
[ ] Green Herb - Break the two crates to the right after the checkpoint and
[ ] Grenade these will be inside.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
THREE [ZOMBIES] and TWO [VOMITING ZOMBIES] will attack as the characters move
toward the corner. The characters will turn and look toward TWO [ZOMBIES]
below the stairs then they will turn back around as TWO [LICKERS] attack from
behind.
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Automatic Pistol Ammo - Further along the metal platform and to the left as
[ ] Shotgun SA Ammo the characters round the corner.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
While the characters continue ahead they will eventually turn as THREE
[ZOMBIES] and TWO [VOMITING ZOMBIES] attack them from behind. The first zombie
always dashes straight toward the characters, but the characters always step
away from it as it dashes toward the wall.
While the characters quietly step toward the next set of stairs, they will turn
as TWO [CRIMSON HEADS] attack them from behind. TWO [LICKERS] will run up to
the characters once the characters turn again. The right Licker likes to get
up close and personal, so look down and shoot him with the Automatic Pistol.
TWO more [LICKERS] will fall from the ceiling once the other two are defeated.
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Shotgun SA Ammo - On a large crate to the right while the characters move
down the stairs after fighting the Lickers.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
A radio call will come through once the characters reach the bottom of the
stairs. They will step through the doorway afterward.
== HALLWAY TO SECURITY ROOM ==
Shoot the lights while moving down the hall for some extra objects to destroy.
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Shotgun SA Ammo - As the characters step into the hall past the door, this
will be on the wall above the first left light.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
The characters will catch sight of a running Eliminator as it runs into the
middle hall.
*************************** L E F T P A T H E N D ***************************
[UMEN2]
== OUTSIDE THE SECURITY HALLWAY ==
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Green Herb - Near the wall in the back of the Eliminator that runs. (NOT ON
NORMAL OR HARD MODE)
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Both paths will meet up in the middle corridor. The characters will follow
after the Eliminator and see that it is trying to lead them into a trap as they
reach the middle corridor. Look for the explosive charges placed on the sides
of the wall up ahead with the laser in between them. Shoot one the explosive
charges on the wall to continue. Yeah!!!! Chris gets a bit too excited when
it comes to explosions, don't you think? Must have been a destructive child in
his early years.
Take out a secondary weapon for this next area. The characters will turn
around as the vent covers on the ceilings beside them fall. They know what to
expect, so the characters will back into the corridor ahead as THREE [CHIMERAS]
approach them. Soon THREE more [CHIMERAS] will dash at them followed by ONE
more [CHIMERA]. TWO [CHIMERAS] will chase them deeper into the hall and a
[LICKER] will busts through the left vent as the two Chimeras approach.
ONE more [LICKER] will bust through the other vent cover then TWO more
[CHIMERAS] will chase the characters down the corridor. TWO more [LICKERS]
will bust through the vents at the very end of the corridor. Look up when the
last two Lickers bust through the vents and shoot one of the explosive charges
with the lasers in between them to take out a few of the enemies quickly. It
pays to let them pile up but it can get rather chaotic. Come on fellow gamer,
it's the final stretch, lets move it!
== SECURITY HALLWAY ==
The characters will enter the hallway behind them once the door opens. An
action sequence will take place in this hall.
* Input the on-screen command as the lasers head toward the characters.
The Umbrella employees have been watching too many Resident Evil movies haven't
they? No, wait...
The characters will run to the opposite site and try to use the keypad to open
the door but they will only set off the alarm for the facility. They will move
back into the corridor where they just came from.
== OUTSIDE THE SECURITY HALLWAY ==
/ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
| / [ ] |
| ) o ( F I L E 4 --> Emergency Orders |
| / |
| |
| When the characters exit the laser room, shoot the security camera in the |
| top left corner of the door that they move toward as they turn to the right |
| in the outside hall. It helps to not shoot the lights on the side walls of |
| the hall to help make this more visible. |
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - /
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Automatic Pistol Ammo - When the characters step out of the laser room,
[ ] Secondary Weapon Ammo these will be to the right and left respectively,
once they turn to the right in the hallway.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
The characters will move down the right corridor then enter the next room at
the end.
== DARK ROOM ==
This room can get quite intense, especially if you're unfamiliar with it. I'll
help you out as best I can on how to react to each set of enemies. It really
helps to arrive into this room with at least two grenades. Save them for the
very last set of enemies.
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Green Herb - Near a dead body as the characters turn to look at it.
[ ] Grenade - After looking at the dead body, this will be on the desk when the
characters turn to face the Eliminators behind them.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Shortly after examining the dead body on the right side of the room, the
characters will turn right as TWO [ELIMINATORS] attack. Make sure to turn with
the Automatic Pistol equipped and have the targeting cursor in the upper right
portion of the screen then fire right when you catch sight of the Eliminators
and hold down on the B button as the first one falls and move to the left while
firing to cancel both of their jump attacks.
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Automatic Pistol Ammo - To the left in the middle area, on a dark wall.
[ ] Shotgun SA Ammo You can see these shining on the wall.
[ ] Green Herb - To the right of the Automatic Pistol and Shotgun SA pickup
mentioned above. (NOT ON NORMAL OR HARD MODE)
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
The characters will move toward the middle but an [ELIMINATOR] will jump down
from the ceiling and attack. The characters will turn right as a [CRIMSON
HEAD] begins to attack. He's no different than other in-your-face Crimson Head
encounters.
Once the Crimson Head is defeated, FOUR [WASPS] will appear from the right side
- try to shoot them with the Handgun then slash at them when they fly toward
the screen. It's best to shoot them since the knife doesn't always hit them
before they hit the characters.
When the characters turn they will move toward the middle of the room as TWO
[ZOMBIES] and TWO [VOMITING ZOMBIES] lurch in the middle of the room. Use the
Automatic Pistol to defeat the Vomiting Zombies quickly. A [HUNTER] will jump
into view from the left soon after the zombies are defeated so prepare to
switch to the Shotgun SA. When the characters turn, they will be face-to-face
with TWO [HUNTERS] so quickly shoot the right one in the face then shoot the
left one in the face with the Shotgun SA. It is crucial that you hit them both
quickly in the face since they will attack at about the same time - they must
fall quick in order to avoid damage.
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Automatic Pistol Ammo - As the characters make their way toward the final
double doors, this will be near those doors.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Once the Hunters are defeated the characters will move toward the double doors
on the other side of the room. When they turn, FOUR [ELIMINATORS] will fall
very close nearby. It pays to throw a grenade at that time. Another FOUR
[ELIMINATORS] will drop after the first group so throw another grenade. ONE
final [ELIMINATOR] will drop from the ceiling but he will fall fast to just
about any kind of weapon. The characters will turn and face the double doors
after the battle and the chapter will end.
|**************** Pre-Resident Evil 4 - The Ultimate Bioweapon ***************|
|- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -|
| U M B R E L L A ' S E N D 3 [UE03] |
|- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -|
| "Yeah! It's payback time! We've got to destroy Umbrella, now! |
| Let's finish this once and for all!" |
|*****************************************************************************|
= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = CHAPTER INFO = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
Chris: Samurai Edge 2, Shotgun SA (Lv.1)
Jill : Samurai Edge 2, Automatic Pistol (Lv.1)
Recommended Secondary Weapon: MRL
A Rank Item on Normal Mode: Vaccine
S Rank Item on Hard Mode : Medium Base
Unlockable Weapon: --
Unlockable Scenario/Chapter: "Dark Legacy" Chapter 1
Like I mention above, be sure to bring the MRL with you for this stage. Don't
be afraid to use it on a pileup of normal enemies. There is a secondary weapon
pickup right before the boss (in the back of the weapon room) if you take the
right path in the Honeycomb Maze. I cannot stress enough how much you need to
bring the MRL!
Also, upgrade your Automatic Pistol until the damage increases. Increased
damage for the Automatic Pistol will help out tons for the final boss fight.
= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
== DARK ROOM ==
Chris and Jill will start this chapter right where they ended the last chapter.
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Automatic Pistol Ammo - On the surrounding walls by the door and on the
[ ] Shotgun SA Ammo floor before getting on the elevator at the
[ ] First Aid Spray beginning of the stage.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
They will move through the doorway ahead then get on the elevator.
== ELEVATOR DESCENT ==
A [CHIMERA] will eventually fall down and attack the characters then some
monkey sounds will be heard as TWO [ELIMINATORS] drop from above - blast them
with the Automatic Pistol. ANOTHER [ELIMINATOR] will drop from the left and
join the first two eventually. Switch to the Shotgun SA since the characters
will turn to the right as a [HUNTER] drops near them followed by another
[HUNTER] in the background. TWO [CHIMERAS] will drop to the left then, after
defeating them, the characters will turn to an [ELIMINATOR] then walk to the
side and turn to face against the Eliminator. TWO [CHIMERAS] will drop and
attack then the characters will turn and look up as TWO [ELIMINATORS] and a
[CHIMERA] drop from behind them. The characters will look up once the enemies
stop attacking to recover from the rush they just went through. Once the
elevator stops, the characters will step into the Monitor Room.
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Green Herb - To the left of the door once the elevator stops. (NOT ON
NORMAL OR HARD MODE)
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
== MONITOR ROOM ==
The characters will enter the room cautiously. They will look back toward the
elevator as TWO [LICKERS] try to attack from the elevator shaft. The Handgun
should work just fine for defeating both if you don't want to use any secondary
weapon ammo - it's good to conserve it for this chapter.
/ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
| / [ ] |
| ) o ( F I L E 1 --> T-A.L.O.S. Notes |
| / |
| |
| In the Monitor Room, shoot the stack of videos on the right counter while |
| moving toward the door on the opposite side. The videos are right next to |
| a CPU monitor. |
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - /
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Grenade - While facing the Chimera in the monitor room, look to the right
to see a row of monitors with red images on the screen. Shoot the monitor next
to the last bottom monitor on the right side. If that is confusing, then just
throw a grenade toward the right side of the room.
[ ] Shotgun SA Ammo - Shoot the single CPU monitor on the counter beside the
stack of videos.
[ ] Automatic Pistol Ammo - On the floor, to the left while walking toward the
exit door in the Monitor Room.
[ ] Grenade - On the counter below the monitors on the far wall in the Montitor
Room.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
The characters will look to the right as TWO [CHIMERAS] dash toward them from
the back of the Monitor Room - shoot the overhead set of monitors attached to
the ceiling (look up) and these will fall on them and kill them - or at least
one. The characters will move to the other side of the Monitor Room then step
into the next room.
== STOREROOM ==
TWO [ZOMBIES] will attack and ONE [VOMITING ZOMBIE] will shoot vomit balls from
the back of the room. Take out the Automatic Pistol and shoot the Vomiting
Zombie with it. The characters will step further into the room then face to
the left as THREE [ZOMBIES] attack. TWO [VOMITING ZOMBIES] will get up from
the floor as the first three zombies drop. It is possible to shoot the set of
three explosive cylinders in the back of the left vomiting zombie to defeat him
quickly. The characters will move up the staircase to the side afterwards and
an action cutscene will trigger.
* Input the on-screen command in order to dodge the explosion that Chris sets
off.
== STOREROOM ==
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Grenade - After turning to the left to fight the enemies after the action
cutscene, this will be to the right of the stacked boxes.
[ ] Automatic Pistol Ammo - On top of the set of boxes.
[ ] Shotgun SA Ammo
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
The characters will look above for a few seconds then turn around as TWO
[IVYS], TWO [ZOMBIES], and ONE [CRIMSON HEAD] attack. The Crimson Head will
always dash straight toward the characters from the right side of the screen,
so get ready to blast him back with the Shotgun SA. Shoot the set of three
explosive cylinders to the left to take out most of this crowd. For the Ivy
enemy, shoot them once with any weapon then wait for them to open their mouth.
When they open their mouth, shoot the inside of their mouth for some extreme
damage - this can all be done with the Handgun.
Eliminators will start to grow restless up above as the characters look up at
them then ONE [ELIMINATOR] will hop down and join the TWO [CRAWLING ZOMBIES]
that move toward the characters. Take out an Automatic Pistol and shoot down
the Eliminator first of all then you can go for headshots with the Handgun on
the crawling zombies.
Once the crawling zombies fall, a total of SIX [ELIMINATORS] will group
together and attack. It may pay you to throw a grenade right as they start to
fall and hop from the sides then use the Automatic Pistol to keep them at bay
until the explosion goes off. Take down any stragglers with the Automatic
Pistol.
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Green Herb - After the group of Eliminators are all finished, the
characters will turn to the right and this will be near them - look down. Bats
will attack soon afterwards. (NOT ON HARD MODE)
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
The characters will look toward the right side as THREE [BATS] appear from the
right. The bats will circle around the middle platform then the characters
will turn as the THREE [BATS] and TWO [IVYS] attack. Shoot at the bats and
Ivys with the Automatic Pistol. Slash at the bats if they get too close,
though this doesn't always avoid damage.
/ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
| / [ ] |
| ) o ( F I L E 2 --> Red Queen Notes |
| / |
| |
| After the action cutscene, the characters will walk further into the room |
| where sets of explosive cylinders lie around. When the characters approach |
| the red room with dead bodies, look to the right and shoot the set of three |
| explosive cylinders against the back wall. These are to the left while |
| fighting the single Crimson Head before the checkpoint. |
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - /
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Grenade - When the characters look into the red room with the dead bodies,
this will be near a dead body on the right side.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
The characters will move toward the red room in the back of them and look
inside. THREE [ZOMBIES] will attack from the left side of the room as the
characters begin to back up a bit to face them. Right after shooting the
zombies, the characters will turn as a [CRIMSON HEAD] attacks - shoot the set
of three explosive cylinders to the left with a secondary weapon to instantly
defeat the Crimson Head. A checkpoint will occur as the characters step toward
the doors up ahead.
*********************** C H E C K P O I N T **************************
== STOREROOM ==
TWO [ELIMINATORS] will attack right as the characters turn, so have the
Automatic Pistol ready and get ready to aim downward since they will be close.
THREE [ZOMBIES] and TWO [VOMITING ZOMBIES] will be lurking in the back of the
room while the Eliminators attack. TWO more [ELMINATORS] will run toward the
characters from the back of the room as the zombies begin to fall. The
characters will turn and enter the maze after taking down all the enemies.
== HONEYCOMB MAZE ==
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Grenade - On the floor as the characters enter the first maze room.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
This maze has a total of 15 rooms in it with the fifteenth being the boss room
for this stage. One weapon room is hidden at the right end of the maze and it
has tons of weapons that can be stocked up on for the battle ahead. I will
take you on the journey to the weapon room for now. Keep in mind that you need
to blast the locks on the right side of each door to open it.
/ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
| / [ ] |
| ) o ( F I L E 3 --> Sergei Vladimir Profile |
| / |
| |
| While in the maze take the following route: |
| |
| 1) At the beginning, go through the left doorway. |
| 2) Go through the right doorway. |
| 3) Go through the left doorway. |
| 4) One way route - just shoot the door to go through it. |
| 5) Go through the right door. |
| 6) One way route - Eliminators will bust through the glass door. |
| 7) Go through the doorway that the characters face. |
| |
| Shoot the black box on the right side of the far wall directly ahead. Just |
| throw a grenade since you most likely want to collect the ammo inside as |
| well. This is on the far side of the Weapon Room. |
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - /
The path for the file up above is outlined below since this is the best path to
take:
1) Step through the left doorway to start things off.
The characters will turn to the left and fight off TWO [ZOMBIES] in this room.
2) Step through the right doorway.
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Automatic Pistol Ammo - On the wall inside the third room while on the path
to the Weapon Room.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3) Step through the left doorway
The characters will step by some dead bodies in this next room. They will face
the next door but then turn around to fight THREE [ZOMBIES].
4) Step through the door directly ahead.
The characters will turn back to the previous room as ONE [CRIMSON HEAD] dashes
at them followed by ANOTHER [CRIMSON HEAD] once the first has been defeated.
5) Step through the right door.
The characters will enter a seemingly empty room until they look up on the
ceiling and a [WEB SPINNER] drops. Shoot the Web Spinner with the Shotgun SA -
really the Handgun works just fine though. The characters will turn to the
previous room as an [ELIMINATOR] runs toward them from the back of the room
that they just exited from. Equip the Automatic Pistol and blast him. The
characters will turn toward the next door and an [ELIMINATOR] will bust through
the glass door then ANOTHER [ELIMINATOR] will attack behind it. Blast them
then ONE more [ELIMINATOR] will dash through the door followed by TWO more
[ELIMINATORS]. It might pay you to throw a grenade into that room, but the
problem with doing that is that the Eliminators don't all show up at once, so
you'll miss a few. It's really best to shoot them with an Automatic Pistol if
you can keep the cursor on them.
6) Step forward through the next doorway that the Eliminators broke.
7) The characters will face the door to the right inside of the next room, so
blast the lock on the door and step into the weapon room.
== WEAPON ROOM ==
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Automatic Pistol Ammo (many) - Blast the glass on the left wall of the
weapon room then grab these off the wall.
[ ] Shotgun SA Ammo (many) - Blast the glass on the right wall of the weapon
room then grab these off the wall.
[ ] Secondary Weapon Ammo - Blast the glass on the back wall of the weapon room
then grab it off the wall.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Start to blast all the glass on the sides of the room with an Automatic Pistol
as the characters enter the room - you may want to just throw a grenade as you
enter, but you'll still have to fire a bit in order to break some of the glass.
There is Automatic Pistol Ammo on the left wall, Shotgun SA Ammo on the right
wall, and Secondary Weapon Ammo on the very back wall - you did bring that MRL,
right? The characters will eventually leave, no matter what all you have or
haven't collected, as THREE [ZOMBIES] get up from the back of the room.
== HONEYCOMB MAZE A ==
While stepping toward the next doorway, TWO [CRIMSON HEADS] will dash straight
at the characters, so make sure to have a Shotgun SA equipped in order to stop
their assault. The characters will enter the next room then stare at the
double doors that lead out of the maze. A cutscene will trigger.
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Green Herb - To the left of the final set of doors at the end of the
Honeycomb Maze. (NOT ON NORMAL OR HARD MODE)
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
===============================================================================
---------------------------- B O S S B A T T L E -----------------------------
Boss - Talos
Recommended Weapon: MRL and Grenades, maybe the Shotgun SA
Weak Point: Naked body up under armor
--> DODGE THE ROCKETS
If you didn't bring an MRL, then throw a grenade at the very beginning of the
battle, if you did bring the MRL then shoot him with one rocket. At the very
start of the battle, input the on-screen command to move behind the white wall
to the left and avoid Talos' rockets from his rocket launcher. Talos' rockets
will not destroy the wall for now. Fail to input the command and Chris and
Jill will stand and face his rockets as they stream out from the rocket
launcher. Try to shoot the rockets with the Automatic Pistol if that happens.
--> HE WILL DASH IN FOR A HIT
Talos will dash toward the characters then try to hit them as another on-screen
command appears. Input the command and the characters will jump away from
Talos. Right after the characters jump away is a good time to throw a grenade
or fire a rocket.
--> DESTROY THE ROCKETS THAT HE SHOOTS
Talos will then move around the room in a circle and blast rockets at the
characters. The first rocket will be very close and will appear near the right
side of the screen so prepare to blast the rocket from that point. To hit the
rest of the rockets aim toward the middle of the screen then move the cursor to
the left just a bit and you'll be in the perfect spot to shoot the rest with a
Handgun. Talos will move by the white walls while firing, so the rockets will
sometimes hit the walls.
--> HE WILL DASH TOWARD THE CHARACTERS AND ATTEMPT ANOTHER HIT
Eventually, he will stop firing rockets then dash toward the characters, input
the on-screen command to dodge his attack.
--> MORE ROCKET BLASTS
The characters will stand in between two walls as he fires a few rockets from
his rocket launcher at them. Point toward his rocket launcher and blast the
rockets once he fires them. He only fires about three, and shooting one will
usually take the others out too. He will walk toward the characters afterward
and this is an excellent time to throw a grenade at him. Hit the portions of
the armor on his left arm, body, and head. You have to destroy this armor in
order to heavily damage. See "Stripping Him of His Armor".
--> THE STREAM OF ROCKETS
The characters will eventually move to one side of the room then Talos will
begin to fire a whole stream of rockets. Aim toward the tip of his rocket
launcher then shoot one of the rockets while they are close together to make
all of them or most of them explode together. They all mount up in a circle.
--> THE PATTERN STARTS AGAIN
He will go back to his normal pattern after the stream of rockets, starting
with the dodgeable rocket attack that he did at the start of the battle. He
can only destroy two white walls, so the characters will always be able to take
cover behind a white wall from the attack as long as the on-screen command is
performed.
--> STRIPPING HIM OF HIS ARMOR
He has pieces detachable armor on his head, body, and left arm. Once all of
this armor is destroyed then he will take heavier damage from each shot. The
best way to strip of his armor without the MRL is to throw a grenade at him
during certain attacks throughout the battle:
a) At the very beginning
b) After dodging his first punch (before he runs and shoots rockets)
c) After dodging his second punch (while he moves toward the characters)
This will remove most of his armor. Some of his armor may continue to linger
so blast it with a shotgun when he gets close. He will stagger every time a
piece of armor falls off of him.
--> ONCE HIS ARMOR IS GONE
Take out the Shotgun SA and blast him from close range. The Shotgun SA will
take off quite a bit at this point so fill him full of shots while he is close.
Whenever the characters dodge his second dashing punch during his pattern,
while his armor is off, they will automatically move behind him. While they
are behind him, take out the Shotgun SA and blast the hell out of his backside
for some heavy damage.
--> IF YOU HAVE THE MRL WITH YOU AND CAN AIM JUST RIGHT...
Then his ass is yours plain and simple. Even with a Level 1 MRL, he will fall
within four hits - that should be all the ammo that you have with a Level 1
MRL. The first rocket damages most of his armor and the remaining hits make
his life bar fall extremely fast. Hit him at the beginning of the battle to
strip him of most of his armor as the characters take cover. Once he destroys
the wall, fire another rocket before he moves. This second rocket will stagger
him, so fire another rocket then another then... oh, wait, he's defeated.
--> THE BOTTOM LINE
If you bring the MRL to this boss fight then Talos is no problem whatsoever.
If you have plenty of grenades or at least one then he will fall fairly quick
with the use of the Shotgun SA after his armor is broken from a grenade
explosion. If you have no grenades and no MRL then this battle is going to
take a while since you have to strip off his armor piece by piece with gunfire
if that is the case - shoot him with the Shotgun SA while he is close. Don't
use any Automatic Pistol Ammo on him since that will be needed for the next
fight.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
===============================================================================
===============================================================================
---------------------------- B O S S B A T T L E -----------------------------
Boss - Mutated Talos
Recommended Weapon: Automatic Pistol and Grenades, Shotgun SA (when close)
Weak Point: Pink tears on his chest and arms/Pink glowing section on his back
--> GET READY TO DODGE HIS LASERS
This boss is very random and has no real pattern. He will most likely start
the battle by firing sets of lasers at the characters, but keep in mind that he
might not. You have to react to each laser set with an on-screen command for a
total of three on-screen commands. The command for the first set of lasers is
delayed quite a bit, but the commands for the second and third, while the
characters move to the side, are quite fast. Watch for the command and react
quickly. The hard part about dodging his attacks is that not all of them are
button commands, so you can't just keep tapping both buttons - sometimes you'll
need to wiggle the Wii-mote.
--> THE TENTACLES FROM THE SIDE OF THE ROOM
Sometimes he will burrow his tentacles into the ceiling then the characters
will look to one side of the room as the tentacles fly out of the wall and head
toward them. Arm the Automatic Pistol at this time and shoot the end of each
tentacle before it flies toward the screen. Only tap the button when you go to
fire - you don't want to waste too much ammo.
--> THE TENTACLES AND DEBRIS FROM ABOVE
Sometimes he will burrow his tentacles into the ceiling and the characters will
look up as a tentacle and a piece of debris falls from the middle of the room.
Shoot the debris fist since it will always appear in the middle then shoot the
end of the tentacle. You'll have to constantly switch between pieces of debris
and another tentacle as more tentacles move out of the ceiling. Use an
Automatic Pistol for this part. It can be done with a Handgun if you can
manage to shoot the flailing tentacle well enough.
--> THE PUNCH FROM NOWHERE
Sometimes the characters will get too close to Talos and on-screen command will
appear shortly before he punches the characters. He swings twice but only the
second punch will hit. The characters will jump back and Chris will mention
that they should keep their distance.
--> AIM FOR THE TEARS ON HIS SHOULDERS AND LOWER CHEST. CONCENTRATE FIRE!
Take out the Automatic Pistol and shoot at the pink tears on both of his
shoulders and in the middle of his chest while he is suspended and not
performing any attack. Hit them just right and the pink portion will break.
This can be done with the Handgun if you manage to hit the very center of each
tear. You can also hit the boss with a rocket launcher while he remains still
to instantly hit all the tears at one time.
--> HE WILL FALL AFTER THE PINK TEARS EXPLODE
When he falls, he will expose the pink glowing weak spot on his back. At this
time, throw a grenade if you still have one then take out the Automatic Pistol
and fill that weak spot full of lead.
--> THE PUNCH AND GRAB COUNTER
Talos will get up from the ground and walk toward the characters eventually
after falling. Use the two on-screen commands to dodge both of his punches.
He will grab the characters afterwards. While he holds the characters up to
his face, blast him in the mouth with the Shotgun SA to make him drop the
characters. Two tentacles will appear from behind his back next to the left
and right side of his head while he holds the characters, so shoot each of
those tentacle when they appear or they will hit the characters. He will drop
the characters once he has been shot in the head enough.
--> HE WILL FALL AGAIN
This time he will be closer when he falls, so you can shoot him with the
Shotgun SA and take off some decent damage with it. Really shooting him with
the Automatic Pistol is the best way to go though, especially if the damage for
it is upgraded. Throw a grenade at this time if you still have one. He will
go back to his normal attacks right after this and you will have to shoot the
red tears on his body and arms once again.
--> THE BOTTOM LINE
This boss is almost completely random, so you'll have to get used to his
attacks and be sure to watch for the on-screen commands. There are two
Automatic Pistol Ammo pickups in the back of him and they can be very helpful
even if that is all you have. What really helps out for this battle is to
upgrade your Automatic Pistol Ammo before starting this chapter. One damage
upgrade for the Automatic Pistol means that he'll be taking much more damage
when he is shot in his weak spot when compared to the default damage level.
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Automatic Pistol Ammo - In the back of the Mutated Talos.
[ ] Automatic Pistol Ammo
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
===============================================================================
-------------------------- S U B S C E N A R I O 6 ---------------------------
F E B R U A R Y 1 8, 2 0 0 3
____ _
| _ __ _ _ __ | | __
| | | | / _` || '__|| |/ /
| |_| || (_| || | | <
|____/ __,_||_| |_|_
_
ALBERT | | ___ __ _ __ _ ___ _ _
| | / _ / _` | / _` | / __|| | | |
WESKER | |___| __/| (_| || (_| || (__ | |_| |
|_____|___| __, | __,_| ___| __, |
|___/ |___/
[SB06]
|********** Pre-Resident Evil 4 - A Backdoor into the Umbrella Base **********|
|- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -|
| D A R K L E G A C Y 1 [DL01] |
|- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -|
| "I will use one pawn to eliminate the other and emerge with the spoils for |
| myself." |
|*****************************************************************************|
= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = CHAPTER INFO = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
Wesker: Handgun w/Silencer, Shotgun SA (Lv.1)
Recommended Secondary Weapon: MRL
A Rank Item on Normal Mode: King/Knight/Bishop/Rook Plug
S Rank Item on Hard Mode : Battery
Unlockable Weapon: --
Unlockable Scenario/Chapter: "Dark Legacy" Chapter 2
(^must have finished ALL chapters up to this point
to unlock this chapter)
It is very important that you bring an MRL with you for the boss fight at the
end of this chapter. Also, it is a good idea to save the three grenades that
you start with and the two grenades that you find at the beginning for a total
of five grenades for the boss fight as well. Don't be afraid to use the MRL on
groups of normal enemies since Wesker will find a secondary weapon pickup
shortly before the end of this chapter that can be used to replenish any
rockets that you might use.
= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
== SUBWAY STATION ==
Wesker will start out in the subway tunnel and look at the dead bodies to the
left and right. He will turn to the right and move down the tunnel while
surveying the dead bodies.
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Automatic Pistol Ammo - On a bench near the right wall as Wesker turns to
[ ] Grenade the right at the beginning
[ ] Grenade
[ ] Shotgun SA Ammo - On a seat further down the hall beside the one mentioned
above.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
When he turns to look toward the subway tracks, TWO [LICKERS] will appear then
a THIRD [LICKER] will appear once one of the other two fall. The Silenced
Handgun can easily dispatch these if you keep hitting each one in order to
cancel their attacks, otherwise the Automatic Pistol will defeat them quickly.
/ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
| / [ ] |
| ) o ( F I L E 1 --> Wesker Report Extract on "Her" |
| / |
| |
| Wesker will fight three Lickers at the beginning of this chapter then turn |
| to the left to fight zombies. Shoot the chandelier in the very back of the |
| corridor and make it fall to see this file. This chandelier can also be |
| shot as Wesker turns to look to the left at the beginning of this stage. |
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - /
Right after finishing those nuisances, Wesker will turn to the left as THREE
[ZOMBIES] attack from the side. As the zombies fall, THREE more [ZOMBIES] will
get up from the left and Wesker will back up. Some of these zombies sometimes
dash quite a bit, so you might have to stagger them with an Automatic Pistol if
you want a headshot.
Wesker will turn back around once those pests are disposed of then continue
down the subway tunnel. When he looks back toward the tracks a [CHIMERA] will
fall followed by ANOTHER [CHIMERA]. Wesker will look to the back of the subway
station as THREE [CHIMERAS] dash toward him. Wesker will humor them with a
face off and back up while shooting.
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] First Aid Spray - On the seats to the right while fighting the bats. This
can be retrieved along with all the other items at the beginning if your aiming
is good.
[ ] Green Herb - Lying near the seats to the left of the First Aid Spray (NOT
ON NORMAL OR HARD MODE)
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Wesker will turn back around and a total of SIX [BATS] will attack. Have the
Shotgun SA ready since Wesker will turn to the left as a [HUNTER] jumps into
view. A [WEB SPINNER] will crawl into view from the left. TWO more [WEB
SPINNERS] will crawl past the train tracks in the back once the first one is
defeated.
/ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
| / [ ] |
| ) o ( F I L E 2 --> Albert Wesker Profile |
| / |
| |
| While Wesker fights the last wave of four Web Spinners, destroy the wooden |
| bench on the back right wall. It is hard to see because the seats block |
| the view of it and it's quite far back. While Wesker moves forward to |
| board the subway train it can be made out a bit better. |
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - /
Wesker will turn and fight THREE [WEB SPINNERS] that move down the corridor
ahead - use the MRL here if you brought it. ONE more [WEB SPINNER] will crawl
out of the back of the tunnel.
Wesker will continue ahead then find a train further ahead to the left. He
will decide to board the train in order to continue deeper into the facility.
== INSIDE THE SUBWAY CART ==
/ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
| / [ ] |
| ) o ( F I L E 3 --> U.M.F.-013 Notes |
| / |
| |
| Shoot the back light on the right side of the ceiling when Wesker starts |
| out in the train. |
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - /
/ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
| / [ ] |
| ) o ( F I L E 4 --> Ivan Notes |
| / |
| |
| Shoot the reddish circular light on the left wall of the train (left wall |
| when starting). The light doesn't really glow that much. |
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - /
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Automatic Pistol Ammo - All inside the train. (GREEN HERB ON RIGHT IS NOT
[ ] Automatic Pistol Ammo ON HARD MODE)
[ ] Shotgun SA Ammo
[ ] Green Herb
[ ] Green Herb
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
It's best to stick with the Shotgun SA for most of the battles in here. Wesker
will eventually turn as a tile from the ceiling falls to his left. A [CHIMERA]
will drop through the ceiling on the right then Wesker will turn as a [HUNTER]
jumps through the back door. Another [HUNTER] will jump through the door to
the left once the first has been defeated. Wesker will turn as a [CHIMERA]
stands behind him then turn again to face a [LICKER] followed by another
[CHIMERA] that will fall through the ceiling on his right.
Wesker will look around the train while expecting another creature in just a
few moments. Rest assured that he will turn as a [LICKER] jumps through the
open doorway then a [CHIMERA] will fall through the ceiling on the left
followed by another [CHIMERA] on the right. TWO more [CHIMERAS] will bust
through the ceiling and dash at Wesker. THREE other [CHIMERAS] will fall from
the ceiling. A confident Wesker will stand and view the bloodshed below him
then turn and take out the last [HUNTER] behind him. Make sure that you have a
Shotgun SA equipped as Wesker turns. After killing all the creatures, Wesker
will stand as the train continues to descend deeper into the facility.
*********************** C H E C K P O I N T **************************
== SUBWAY TUNNEL PLATFORMS ==
Wesker will stand at the top of the tunnel and look down to the bottom floor.
He will eventually jump to the platform across from him. Wesker will turn to
his right and fight the TWO [LICKERS] on the sidewall - use an Automatic Pistol
here, they're too separated for a Handgun. Wesker will look to a platform with
TWO [CHIMERAS] then look onward past a [WEB SPINNER] to see an empty platform
on the left wall. Wesker will jump to that platform.
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Shotgun SA - When Wesker jumps to the second platform these will be on the
platform when he turns to face the Chimera - look in the back of the Chimera.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Wesker will look toward two [WEB SPINNERS] on the left wall - only shoot the
first one. A Handgun should do. He will turn to his right and face off
against a [CHIMERA] that drops from the ceiling - make sure you get the pickups
on this side even if you have to get hit by the Chimera to do so since Wesker
will not turn back this way again once the Chimera is defeated.
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Green Herb - Right after fighting the Chimera mentioned above, Wesker will
look out toward the center. This is on the platform below the left platform
that is currently on the same level is Wesker. You'll see it shining as Wesker
prepares to jump to the platform across from him. Look down and to the left.
(NOT ON HARD MODE)
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Wesker will look off the side - look to the left and grab the Green Herb on the
left platform (the one below the current level platform) just as Wesker moves
forward. It's the only chance you have to get it.
Wesker will leap to the platform on the other side. An [INFECTED BAT] will fly
by him as he turns to look away from the platform. Wesker will jump to a
platform on the left.
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Secondary Weapon Ammo - While Wesker fights the Web Spinners and Licker on
the wall near the fourth platform he jumps to, look downward and to the right
for this.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
He will turn around and deal with a [LICKER] and TWO [WEB SPINNERS] on the wall
across from him. Use the MRL if you still have ammo for it then grab the
secondary weapon pickup on the current platform (look down) to replenish it.
Be sure to grab it before Wesker turns to face the [CHIMERA] and [WEB SPINNER]
behind him.
Wesker will look toward the middle then turn as a [LICKER] and TWO [BATS]
attack from his right. Wesker will then look to the bottom and see a [BAT] fly
by then he will jump to the platform across from him. He will look to each
side to see a [LICKER] on the left and a [LICKER] and [WEB SPINNER] on the
right, but decide to jump to the very bottom of the tunnel.
== BOTTOM OF THE SUBWAY TUNNEL ==
An [INFECTED BAT] will try to attack. Arm the Shotgun SA and hit it in the
head whenever it flies close to Wesker to attack in order to cancel that attack
then hit it with an Automatic Pistol while it flies in the air. Always aim for
the head. The Infected Bat will dash in one more time and attempt another
attack. A [LICKER] will eventually appear to the side of Wesker and try to
attack him during this fight - shoot it to continue the fight with the Infected
Bat. Eventually the Infected Bat will hover in the air and release smaller
[BATS]. Keep firing and the Infected Bat should die shortly after this move or
possibly during it. A cutscene will trigger once the bat falls.
===============================================================================
---------------------------- B O S S B A T T L E -----------------------------
Boss - Twin Ivans
Recommended Weapon: MRL and Grenades, Handgun, and Automatic Pistol (for attack
canceling)
Weak Point: Head
--> CHECKING OUT OUR FOES
At the beginning of this match, Wesker will turn to each Ivan and examine it.
Take out the Handgun and shoot each one in the head a few times as Wesker turns
to each one. Notice how each of them have on different colored visors - this
will help you distinguish between which one you are hitting. There are two
life bars representing each Ivan. Wesker will eventually turn and dash into
the tunnel up ahead.
--> THE DASH ATTACKS
Wesker will look for them behind him but turn to find that they are stepping
onto the same platform as him. They will stand and prepare a dash attack.
This is the best time to throw a few grenades at them. Throw about three if
you have them and this will take off some really good damage. Switch to the
Automatic Pistol or Shotgun SA as they run toward Wesker and shoot each of them
in the head to cancel their dash attack.
--> IF THEY HIT WESKER
If the first Ivan hits then it will only take damage, but if the second Ivan
hits then it will knock Wesker to ground. Look upwards and shoot the Ivan in
the head with a secondary weapon as it moves toward Wesker and this will
eventually knock it back to where Wesker can escape. Fail to shoot him enough
times and the Ivan will stomp on Wesker's head and instantly kill him.
--> DASH ATTACKS FROM THE OTHER SIDE
Wesker will run to the end of the platform on the other side then turn right as
the Ivans begin to dash toward him again. Switch to the Automatic Pistol or
Shotgun SA and blast each of them in the head once again to stop them. Get hit
here and Wesker will have to fend off while on the ground once again. Two
different things can happen after this attack - either Wesker will jump onto
the top platform or he will dash back into the outside tunnel.
--> WHILE ON THE TOP PLATFORM (Wesker will sometimes skip this step)
If Wesker jump to the top platform instead of running back into the tunnel then
he will remain on the top platform then look for the Ivans below. He will
continue to try to find them then see them on the platform across from him.
They will begin to fire rockets at him from a distance. Switch to the Handgun
and shoot each rocket as it moves close to Wesker. Sometimes the smoke from
the explosion can block the view so be careful.
Before they begin to fire or right after they fire is an excellent time to
break out the MRL and fire a few rockets at them. Each rockets takes quite a
bit no matter where they are hit. They will pause after firing the rockets and
then one of them will jump to the platform that Wesker is on and they will both
dash down the platforms as Wesker drops to the bottom and runs back out of the
tunnel.
--> THE DODGEABLE DASHES
After dashing back into the tunnel, Wesker will turn and face the Ivans as they
dash toward him. An on-screen command will appear shortly. Input the command
and Wesker will move back and dodge both of their attacks. Fail to do so and
the first Ivan will knock Wesker to the ground then the second Ivan will pick
him up and hold him in the air. Take out the Shotgun SA at that time and blast
the Ivan in the head to make him drop Wesker.
--> THE AIR BATTLE
Wesker will jump and kick off a platform then look down as the Ivans jump and
kick off a side platform in order to follow. Arm the Automatic Pistol and
shoot the head of each Ivan before it makes it to Wesker to knock them out of
the air. Fire at the left one as it kicks off the wall then quickly turn and
fire at the right one. This part can be done with a Handgun if you're aiming
is good. They will both fall back to the ground and Wesker will eventually
fall on the other side across from them. Wesker will run back into the tunnel
then the entire boss pattern will start over again starting with the first set
of dash attacks.
--> ABOUT HITTING THEM
You really, really need to bring an MRL with you to this fight or have all five
grenades that were collected from throughout this chapter. If you don't have
either one then this is going to be one long battle. The main problem with
this battle is that the Ivans never really get close enough for Wesker to use a
Shotgun SA to take off major damage - it's basically only useful for canceling
their attacks and even then, the Automatic Pistol is still better. The only
time the Shogun SA can take major damage is when an Ivan grabs Wesker from
failing to input the command in order to dodge them shortly before jumping. At
that time, the Shotgun SA really comes in handy but you have to get hit in
order to get that sequence.
The Handgun isn't a bad option at all for this battle, in fact, I recommend
that you switch to it often when Wesker runs to a different portion of the
tunnel. The Handgun can be used to fire at them for extra damage without
having to worry about running out of ammo. It takes off some fair damage when
you can fire directly at an Ivan's head for a period of time. The Automatic
Pistol is another good weapon to use, but you mainly need to save it for attack
canceling unless you want to have the Shotgun SA fulfill that role.
--> THE BOTTOM LINE
Either way, the MRL and Grenades will take them down fast if you have both
weapons with you. Make sure that both of the Ivans are grouped for either the
first dash attack or the rocket attack (MRL only) then let loose the explosions
for some extreme damage.
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Shotgun SA Ammo - Lying around the tunnel during the Twin Ivan fight.
[ ] Green Herb
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
===============================================================================
|************** Pre-Resident Evil 4 - The True Fall of Umbrella **************|
|- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -|
| D A R K L E G A C Y 2 [DL02] |
|- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -|
| "My dear, Spencer. How the mighty have fallen." |
|*****************************************************************************|
= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = CHAPTER INFO = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
>> Finish all other chapters except Fourth Survivor to unlock this chapter. <<
Wesker: Handgun w/Silencer, Shotgun SA (Lv.1)
Recommended Secondary Weapon: MRL
A Rank Item on Normal Mode: Film A/B/D/C
S Rank Item on Hard Mode : Spade/Diamond/Club/Heart Key
Unlockable Weapon: Anti-Tank Gun
Unlockable Scenario/Chapter: "Fourth Survivor" Chapter 1
(^must have finished ALL chapters up to this point
to unlock this chapter)
The MRL is not a complete necessity this time if you have your Automatic Pistol
fully powered, but it sure does help still. It would pay to bring it and try
not to use too many grenades during the course of the chapter.
= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
== DARK ROOM ==
Wesker will start out near the hall that leads to the elevator shaft as he
turns to enter.
== ELEVATOR SHAFT ==
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Automatic Pistol Ammo - On the sidewalls before moving through the elevator
[ ] Automatic Pistol Ammo door.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
He will walk toward the door up ahead and see that someone has already taken
the elevator downward. Good ole' Chris Redfield no doubt.
Wesker will leap from the top of the elevator shaft while laughing at the
thought of his rival and grab onto the side of the wall. TWO [BATS] will
attack from the right followed by TWO more [BATS] from below and, would you
believe, ONE more [BAT] from the left. Slash them all with the knife. Wesker
will jump further down and continue his plunge to the bottom. He will jump
next to many [WEB SPINNERS] on the way down but don't even waste any ammo on
them since they won't bother Wesker. You can slash at them or shoot at them
with the Handgun for fun though.
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Automatic Pistol Ammo - When Wesker lands on the elevator at the bottom of
the elevator shaft, he will stare downward then look up and this will be to the
left of the door.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Wesker will hit the bottom of the elevator shaft then look up. He will turn to
the left as TWO [ELIMINATORS] walk toward him followed by ANOTHER [ELIMINATOR]
once one of the first two are defeated. Wesker will look around the room then
TWO [LICKERS] will fall near him, followed by TWO more [LICKERS], oh, and TWO
more [LICKERS] then... Good god, man! TWO [MORE] LICKERS will fall for total
of eight Lickers! Thankfully they all fall in groups of two as Wesker defeats
each one. Don't hold back, just use the Automatic Pistol on them and aim for
their heads. TWO [ELIMINATORS] will fall from the left then after their demise
TWO [CHIMERAS] will fall and attack from the right. Wesker will look up toward
the ceiling and stand to wait on any stragglers, but eventually he will turn
and enter the Monitor Room.
== MONITOR ROOM ==
/ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
| / [ ] |
| ) o ( F I L E 1 --> Sergei Monster Notes |
| / |
| |
| Shoot the small phone on the counter below the first set of monitor screens |
| that Wesker sees while entering the Monitor Room. |
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - /
/ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
| / [ ] |
| ) o ( F I L E 2 --> Letter from Sergei to Nicholai |
| / |
| |
| When Wesker turns to the left in the Monitor Room, shoot the second red |
| monitor screen from the bottom on the far left on the collection of |
| monitors on the back wall. This can also be shot when Wesker looks at the |
| three zombies back in the Monitor Room while in the Storeroom. |
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - /
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] First Aid Spray - As Wesker opens the door to the Monitor Room, these will
[ ] Grenade be on the counter below the monitors ahead.
[ ] Automatic Pistol Ammo - As Wesker turns to the left in the Monitor Room,
[ ] Anti-Tank Gun Ammo these will be on the back counter and right
counter respectively.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Wesker will turn to the left shortly after entering the monitor room then walk
toward the next door. He will turn as FOUR [ZOMBIES] move through the doorway
behind him. TWO more [ZOMBIES] will enter the room as the first few fall.
After they are finished, Wesker will turn as SIX [ZOMBIES] get up from near the
exit doorway. Wesker will back up as they rise. You can look up and shoot the
set of hanging monitors in order to defeat most of them, but you will miss out
on some of the easiest critical hits for this chapter since they are so far
away from Wesker while he backs up and it will take them a while to reach
Wesker. Wesker will walk to the exit door of the monitor room after defeating
the zombies.
== STOREROOM ==
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Automatic Pistol Ammo - On the top of the drawers under the stairs in the
Storeroom.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
A [ZOMBIE] will attack from the side of the stairs as Wesker steps into the
Storeroom. Wesker will turn to the left after finishing the single zombie and
THREE [ZOMBIES] will get up from the floor. Shoot the set of three explosive
cylinders in the back of the zombies (past the railing) to get rid of most of
them and enjoy some extra dialogue from Wesker - Burn! When Wesker looks back
into the monitor room, THREE [ZOMBIES] will shamble toward him from the back of
that room. As Wesker turns back around, THREE [IVYS] will be approaching him
from near the stairs - shoot each of them in the head with a Handgun in a row
then shoot each of their mouths in a row with a Handgun for some quick and easy
kills.
After the zombies are defeated TWO [ELIMINATORS] will run toward Wesker from
the background then TWO more [ELIMINATORS] will follow once the first two have
been defeated. During this whole time TWO [IVYS] will be approaching from the
left portion up ahead. Use the Automatic Pistol to take down both sets of
Eliminators quickly then switch to the Handgun and fire at the Ivys then shoot
the inside of their mouth as their mouths open.
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Green Herb - Lying to the left of the bottom of the stairs in the
Storeroom. (NOT ON NORMAL OR HARD MODE)
[ ] Grenade - Near the top of the stairs in the Storeroom.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Wesker will move up the stairs to the side then approach the destroyed portion
of the catwalk up above.
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Automatic Pistol Ammo - On the other side of the catwalk that Wesker jumps
[ ] Green Herb to in the Storeroom. (GREEN HERB IS NOT ON HARD
MODE)
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
After jumping to the other side, a checkpoint will activate.
*********************** C H E C K P O I N T **************************
/ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
| / [ ] |
| ) o ( F I L E 3 --> Wesker's Notes on Differing Mutations |
| / |
| |
| While Wesker looks off the side of the catwalk after the checkpoint, shoot |
| the closest set of three explosive cylinders next to the catwalk. This can |
| be shot early while climbing the stairs as well. |
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - /
Wesker will look down below then turn as TWO [ZOMBIES] begin to climb the
stairs on the other side of the catwalk. When he turns back around, TWO
[ELIMINATORS] will fall behind him and ANOTHER [ELIMINATOR] will fall once one
of the first two has been taken down. Be sure to aim downward when the first
few fall and shoot them with the Automatic Pistol to make sure they don't get
in a quick punch. TWO [LICKERS] will fall shortly after the Eliminators then
ONE more [LICKER] will fall eventually - use the Automatic Pistol and don't let
them get close enough to hit Wesker with their claws. Wesker will turn back
toward the zombies on the opposite catwalk then back up toward the door ahead.
/ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
| / [ ] |
| ) o ( F I L E 4 --> Ozwell E. Spencer Profile |
| / |
| |
| While Wesker looks off the side of the catwalk while fighting the Lickers |
| on the wall, look to the far left and shoot the set of three explosive |
| cylinders on the bottom floor. |
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - /
Wesker will look back to the bottom floor as a [LICKER] moves out from the
doorway below and climbs the ceiling. Shoot the Licker with a Handgun to
easily kill him without the need of secondary weapon ammo. Another [LICKER]
will scale the wall after the first Licker, so break out the Handgun once again
and shoot at his head. After humoring the T-virus pests below, Wesker will
continue into the maze up ahead after defeating the final Licker.
== HONEYCOMB MAZE B ==
TWO [ZOMBIES] and TWO [IVYS] will be inside the first room of the maze. Take
out the MRL and shoot them with it to kill them all really quickly. I wouldn't
advise headshots since the zombies start out very close and they get aggressive
quick.
/ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
| / [ ] |
| ) o ( F I L E 5 --> Online Interview with Anti-Umbrella Activist |
| / |
| |
| In the Honeycomb Maze B take the following route: |
| |
| 1) Go through the middle doorway. |
| 2) Go through the doorway directly ahead. |
| 3) Go through the left doorway. |
| 4) Go through the doorway directly ahead. |
| 5) Go through the left doorway. |
| |
| Shoot the small box on the back wall (right side) to open a secret |
| compartment in the back wall containing this file and an Anti-Tank Gun Ammo |
| pickup. |
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - /
Like before, I will take you on a tour of the path that leads to the weapon
room at the end of the maze. This maze is set up the same way as the last but
the weapon room is on the other side (left) this time.
1) Go through the doorway in the middle
TWO [ZOMBIES] will move out from both sides of the doorway as Wesker approaches
it, so go for some easy headshots. Wesker will enter the next room but turn to
find SEVERAL [ZOMBIES] in the room behind him. Take out the MRL and fire at
one to take down the whole crowd. Throw a grenade if you didn't bring the MRL.
Headshots can be risky at this point unless your aim is quite good.
2) Go through the doorway directly ahead.
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Automatic Pistol Ammo - Go through the middle door then the next door in
[ ] Automatic Pistol Ammo the Honeycomb Maze B and these will be on the floor
of the next room.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3) Go through the left doorway.
A single [CRIMSON HEAD] will get up in the next room, so switch to the
Automatic Pistol and shoot him with it to stagger him then try to go for a
headshot with the Handgun while he stands in place.
4) Go through the door directly ahead.
5) Go through the left doorway.
While standing outside of the weapon, you can take advantage of the free time
in between moving inside of the room and blast the glass on the right side of
the room to clear it so you can easily grab the Automatic Pistols while
entering.
== WEAPON ROOM ==
Blast the glass on the sides and shoot the small black box on the right side of
the back wall to open a secret wall compartment that will reveal an Anti-Tank
Gun pickup and a file. Be sure to grab the secondary weapon ammo on the bottom
portion of the left wall.
---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
[ ] Automatic Pistol Ammo - All in the Weapon Room. (GREEN HERB ON LEFT IS NOT
[ ] Automatic Pistol Ammo ON HARD MODE)
[ ] Automatic Pistol Ammo
[ ] Automatic Pistol Ammo
[ ] Automatic Pistol Ammo
[ ] Automatic Pistol Ammo
[ ] Automatic Pistol Ammo
[ ] Automatic Pistol Ammo
[ ] Automatic Pistol Ammo
[ ] Automatic Pistol Ammo
[ ] Secondary Weapon Ammo
[ ] Green Herb
[ ] Green Herb
[ ] Anti-Tank Gun Ammo - Shoot the black box on the back wall (right side) of
the Weapon Room to reveal this.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Wesker will leave the room in a few seconds so horde everything that you can.
== HONEYCOMB MAZE B ==
While stepping toward the next door of the maze a [CRIMSON HEAD] will rush
Wesker so take him down with the Automatic Pistol. Wesker will walk through
the doorway that the Crimson Head came through and face the double doors inside
the next room. A cutscene will trigger shortly.
===============================================================================
---------------------------- B O S S B A T T L E -----------------------------
Boss - Sergei Monster
Recommended Weapon: MRL and Grenades, and Automatic Pistol
Weak Point: Pink spot on his back
--> SERGEI TRANSFORMS!
Wesker will start this battle directly in front of Sergei in his transformed
state. Sergei will simply stand there for the time being, so take out the MRL
and blast him with a rocket or throw a grenade at him. Before long, his tongue
appendage will try to slap Wesker and an on-screen command will appear for
Wesker to dodge so input the command and Wesker will hop over to the left.
--> WHERE DID HE GO?
Sergei will seemingly disappear when Wesker turns to face him but, before long,
he will appear along the far wall as he races toward Wesker from the other side
of the room. Arm the Handgun at this point and shoot at Sergei while he crawls
along the wall. It doesn't take massive firepower to bring him down from the
wall, in fact, it is simply a waste of ammo to use any secondary weapon to
attempt this task since the Handgun works just fine. He will fall from the
wall shortly, so throw a grenade at him and shoot his crippled ass with the
MRL. If he manages to hit Wesker then prepare to dodge his next attack via the
on-screen command that will appear.
--> THE ANNOYING WORMS
Sergei will get up and use his tongue appendage to bring him closer to the
raised area behind Wesker. He will stand suspended from the wall for a moment
then shoot a red pod toward the ceiling. Arm the Automatic Pistol as Wesker
looks toward the ceiling and try to destroy the red pod before it releases
white worms. If it is shot enough then it will harmlessly explode and the
battle will continue, but if it isn't shot enough then it will release white
worms that will shower Wesker and damage him. Shoot at all the white worms
with the Automatic Pistol in an attempt to destroy them before they reach
Wesker. Both shooting the pod and the worms are easier said than done since it
is hard to aim at times, but you'll eventually get the hang of it.
--> WHAT A BIG TONGUE YOU HAVE
Sergei will eventually grab Wesker with his tongue appendage and hold him up in
the air in front of him. You can use this time to shoot him with the Automatic
Pistol but you don't have long before an on-screen command will appear. Sergei
will throw Wesker to the other side of the room if you miss the command or
Wesker will escape if you input the command and leap to the other side of the
room himself. Wesker will skip off the wall while jumping in order to move
behind Sergei.
--> SERGIE'S APPENDAGE ATTACK
While Wesker is on the other side of the room, Sergei will have his back to
Wesker and his pink spot weak point on his back will be revealed. At this
time, fire at him with the Anti-Tank Gun, the MRL, or the Automatic Pistol in
order to damage him heavily. If you use the Anti-Tank Gun or MRL then you will
need to quickly switch to the Automatic Pistol afterwards and continue to fire
at his weak spot in order to cancel his appendage attack. If the attack is not
canceled then Wesker will get hit by the four appendages that protrude from
Sergei's back.
--> THE PATTERN STARTS AGAIN
Sergei will eventually chase Wesker back toward the entrance of the room as he
moves to the center. He will stand in front of Wesker again, but this time he
will shoot another red pod toward the ceiling, so break out the Automatic
Pistol and shoot it before it releases a white worm shower. Sergei will stand
in front of Wesker for a couple of moments afterwards then the on-screen
command will shortly appear before he slaps Wesker with his tongue appendage.
The entire pattern described above will commence once again over and over until
he reaches about 25% life.
--> SERGEI GOES ALL OUT
Once Sergei's health bar is at 25% then he will scale the middle pillar as
Wesker stands in front of the entrance. He will only do this while he stands
in front of the middle pillar so he can actually be defeated before he ever
starts this attack if he doesn't make it to the middle of the room again while
he is low in life.
Sergei will basically unleash all of his attacks at this point. Shoot the red
appendages when they move out of his back and to one of his sides, shoot the
red pod that he will fire at Wesker, shoot his middle tongue appendage when it
moves straight toward Wesker while in the middle of the screen - the Automatic
Pistol will be needed to cancel all of these attacks. This portion can get
quite intense and that is why you need to save at least one Anti-Tank Gun shot
for him here since you need to take him down as quickly as you can at this
point. The Anti-Tank Gun will nearly kill him and some constant Automatic
Pistol sprays should finish the rest.
Sergei and Wesker have a most interesting conversation during Sergei's final
attacks. It pays to listen to their words at least once since some valuable
pieces of story about Sergei is exposed before he dies.
--> THE BOTTOM LINE
It's pretty easy to take down Sergei without the MRL if you have your Automatic
Pistol at full power, but the MRL sure can speed up the battle quite a bit.
Grenades help a bunch as well, but only throw them at the very beginning and
when he falls from the wall, otherwise you might miss him. The Anti-Tank Gun
takes about 25% of his life at any time no matter where he is hit, so don't
miss!
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
===============================================================================
The true ending cutscenes will play following this battle. The credits will
play after the cutscene - DON'T SKIP the credits since there is an extra
cutscene that plays after them and it will not play if you skip the credits.
Congrats, you just finished the game! Now go play the Fourth Survivor
scenario. The walkthrough for it is located below the Death's Door scenario.
T H E E N D
. . . A N D F A L L O F U M B R E L L A
[CS00]
===============================================================================
M E E T T H E P E O P L E B E H I N D U M B R E L L A . . .
___ _ __ _ ___ _____ __ __ __
/ __ / //_ /__ /_ / __/__ /__/__/ _
/ / / /_/ //_ / // //_ / / / //_ / //
/ /___/ __ / _ / _ / _ / /___ / / //__/ _ _
____// /_/_/ _// _/_/ _/____/ / __// _/__/
A N D T H E O N E S T H A T P U R S U E T H E M
===============================================================================
=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=
This section contains spoilers for the original games of the Resident Evil
series but many of the details are brief so as not to spoil too much. Each
character has a few details (if I know them) revealed about themselves along
with plenty of description as to their roles in the games throughout the
series. I also added urls to pics of them here and there. Unfortunately there
is not one existing pic of Spencer to this date... well, not a CONFIRMED pic of
him. ;)
Some of these characters are not playable and are only mentioned because of the
key role that they play in Umbrella Chronicles.
(The information inside this section was taken from many different sources: The
files in the game, The Reviewers Guide for RE: UC [http://tinyurl.com/yqywep],
and the Resident Evil: Archives book. All information is summarized in my own
words.)
=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=
_____ __ _ ___ __ ___ _ __ __
/ ___// / ____ (_)___ / _ ___ ___/ // _/(_)___ / /___/ /
/ /__ / _ / __// /(_-< / , _// -_)/ _ // _// // -_)/ // _ /
___//_//_//_/ /_//___/ /_/|_| __/ _,_//_/ /_/ __//_/ _,_/
/-------------------------------------
| S.T.A.R.S. Alpha Team |
| Pointsman/Marksman |
| |
| Gender: Male |
| Age: 25 |
| Blood: O |
| Height: 181cm |
| Weight: 80.4kg |
-------------------------------------/
Playable Scenarios: Mansion Incident, Umbrella's End
Equipped Gun: Samurai Edge 2
Counter Attack: Stab to the Head + Straight Kick
Pic(s): http://tinyurl.com/2wfysl (Mansion Incident)
http://tinyurl.com/33p9tu (Umbrella's End)
This former USAF pilot is fully trained in both armed and unarmed hand-to-hand
combat. Although an exceptional pilot, he was discharged from his unit due to
constant disagreements with his superiors possibly brought on by his straight-
laced personality. He is S.T.A.R.S. Alpha Team's top marksman and tags along
with Alpha Team on their investigation into Raccoon Forest to search for Bravo
Team. Both him and Jill are eventually chased into the mansion along with
their team leader Wesker. Chris along with Jill fights through the horrors of
the Spencer Mansion and eventually finds a hidden lab where the ultimate T-
virus bio-weapon (at that time) is unleashed upon them by a traitor. Chris
survives the Mansion Incident then decides to take the investigation further as
he continues to gather information about Umbrella.
He heads off to Umbrella headquarters located in Europe but is stopped on his
way by a warning from Leon that his sister, Claire, is being held captive on
Rockfort Island while on her journey to find Chris. He goes off in search for
Claire and meets up with his old Alpha Team leader Wesker once Chris makes it
to the island. Learning that Claire has been taken to an Antarctic Base, Chris
flies there and manages to save Claire and also destroy that facility.
Chris is one of the most strongly identifiable protagonist due to his
involvement in the original Resident Evil. In the original game, he could take
more damage than Jill and even received help from Bravo team member Rebecca
Chambers, but he could not hold as many items in his inventory and had to find
extra keys in order to open doors (even an extra Sword Key in the original).
Even though he was not present in Resident Evil 2 as a protagonist, his young
sister Claire serves as a substitute to carry on the Redfield name in T-virus
bashing. He later returns in Code Veronica to join the battle with his fellow
sister and is slated to return yet again in the upcoming Resident Evil 5.
Appearances:
-- Resident Evil, Resident Evil: Director's Cut, Resident Evil: Deadly Silence,
Resident Evil (GC)
Playable character (one of the two scenarios)
-- Resident Evil Code: Veronica, Resident Evil Code: Veronica X
Playable character (second half of game)
-- Resident Evil 5 (upcoming title)
Playable character (lead character)
Other Appearances/Mentions:
-- Resident Evil 2: Dual Shock Edition
Extra Battle Mode unlockable character
-- Resident Evil 3: Nemesis
Character epilogue
-- Resident Evil Code: Veronica, Resident Evil Code: Veronica X
Playable character in Battle Game
-- Resident Evil/Biohazard Gun Survivor 2 Code: Veronica
Playable secret character
__ _ __ __ _ __ __ __ _
__ / /(_)/ // / | | / /___ _ / /___ ___ / /_ (_)___ ___
/ // // // // / | |/ // _ `// // -_)/ _ / __// // _ / -_)
___//_//_//_/ |___/ _,_//_/ __//_//_/__//_//_//_/__/
/-------------------------------------
| S.T.A.R.S. Alpha Team |
| Rear Security/B&E Specialist |
| |
| Gender: Female |
| Age: 23 |
| Blood: B |
| Height: 166cm |
| Weight: 60.4kg |
-------------------------------------/
Playable Scenarios: Mansion Incident, Raccoon's Destruction, Umbrella's End
Equipped Gun: Samurai Edge 2
Counter Attack: Taser + Kick
Pic(s): http://tinyurl.com/2r6qpd (Mansion Incident)
http://tinyurl.com/2zw2ve (Raccoon's Destruction)
http://tinyurl.com/32at7g (Umbrella's End)
Before joining S.T.A.R.S., Jill spent years as a member of the US Army's Delta
Force. Her mad skills for lock picking has earned her the title "Master of
Unlocking". Being highly skilled at bomb disposal and, given her size, highly
adept at physical combat have helped her to gain a secure position among the
local police department's top ranks.
Along with Chris, she survives the horrors of the Spencer Estate then plans to
meet up with him in order to take down a newly discovered Umbrella base after
she finishes gathering data on a nearby Umbrella facility in Raccoon City. She
is unfortunate enough to be stuck in Raccoon City as the T-virus is spread
throughout the town. She plans her last escape then journeys out into the
streets only to face a new enemy, a pursuer sent by Umbrella that will not stop
until it has hunted down the last of the remaining S.T.A.R.S. team. She
watches in horror as her fellow comrade, Brad Vickers, that helped her escape
the Spencer Mansion, is assassinated by this monster, this Nemesis, right in
front of her eyes.
While escaping from the endless pursuit of this new threat, Jill stumbles
across Carlos, a member of the U.B.C.S. (Umbrella Biohazard Countermeasure
Service) and decides to join up with him and his remaining team. She
eventually fights off her pursuer in a heated battle where she delivers
S.T.A.R.S. unto him shortly before reaching a rescue helicopter that flies her
and Carlos out of Raccoon City shortly before the sterilizing missile hits the
city and wipes it from the face of the Earth.
Jill is a highly popular protagonist much like Chris in the Resident Evil
series. Along with her numerous cameos in other Capcom titles, being one of
the two main protagonist in the original Resident Evil as well as her starring
role in Resident Evil 3 has helped many series fans to single her out as the
most favored of the Resident Evil characters. In the original Resident Evil,
she could take less damage than Chris, but her lock picking skills and larger
inventory helped to make up for her shortcoming. In Resident Evil 3, she still
held her unlocking title with her lock pick and resorted to mixing gunpowder to
form a variety of ammo for her weaponry.
Appearances:
-- Resident Evil, Resident Evil: Director's Cut, Resident Evil: Deadly Silence,
Resident Evil (GC)
Playable character (one of the two scenarios)
-- Resident Evil 3: Nemesis
Playable character (lead character)
Other Appearances/Mentions:
-- Resident Evil 3: Nemesis
Character epilogue
-- Marvel vs. Capcom 2
Playable fighter
-- Under the Skin
Nonplayable (in a way playable) character (Raccoon City stage)
-- We Love Golf! (upcoming title)
Playable golfer
___ __
/ _ ___ / / ___ ____ ____ ___ _
/ , _// -_)/ _ / -_)/ __// __// _ `/
/_/|_| __//_.__/__/ __/ __/ _,_/
_____ __ __
/ ___// / ___ _ __ _ / / ___ ____ ___
/ /__ / _ / _ `// ' / _ / -_)/ __/(_-<
___//_//_/_,_//_/_/_//_.__/__//_/ /___/
/-------------------------------------
| S.T.A.R.S. Bravo Team |
| Rear Security/Medic |
| |
| Gender: Female |
| Age: 18 |
| Blood: AB |
| Height: 161cm |
| Weight: 42.1kg |
-------------------------------------/
Playable Scenarios: Train Derailment, Nightmare
Equipped Gun: Samurai Edge 2
Counter Attack: Push + Grenade
Pic(s): http://tinyurl.com/35327f (Train Derailment & Nightmare)
As the team medic, this S.T.A.R.S. Bravo Team rookie was involved in the
outbreak that occurred aboard the Ecliptic Express. Although her lack of
experience can cause her to hesitate in certain situations she remains calm in
the face of danger. She has a tendency to act overconfident and act as if she
does not need anyone's help even when she is fully aware that she does.
She first meets Billy Coen while on board the Ecliptic Express and tries to
shrug him off as a criminal that is simply using the outbreak as a means to
reach freedom. After the two work together and Billy begins to help her out,
Rebecca begins to respect Billy and believe that he has been wrongfully
convicted. The two characters survive the Training Facility nightmare together
and Rebecca allows Billy to walk away from the incident claiming that he
officially died in the train wreck. The two go their separate ways and Rebecca
heads for the Spencer Estate to rejoin Bravo Team.
Rebecca was introduced in the original Resident Evil as a passive character
that Chris met up with him while on his journey through the mansion. She is
most noted for having tended to Richard Aikan while he suffered from a
snakebite. She was only playable at certain points in the first game depending
on how Chris answered her and how he met up with her. Resident Evil Ø was her
only starring role in the series along with Billy Coen. Rebecca could take
less damage than Billy but she had the ability to combine herbs and carry
chemical in her medkit. The truth behind her survival at the mansion leading
up to the point where Chris runs across her while searching the Spencer Mansion
is now revealed in Umbrella Chronicles.
Appearances:
-- Resident Evil Ø
Playable Character (team play with Billy)
-- Resident Evil, Resident Evil: Director's Cut, Resident Evil: Deadly Silence,
Resident Evil (GC)
Playable side character (only twice in Chris' game under certain conditions)
Other Appearances/Mentions:
-- Resident Evil: Deadly Silence
Unlockable character in Multiplayer mode
___ _ __ __ ___ _ __
/ _ (_)____ / / ___ _ ____ ___/ / / _ | (_)/ /__ ___ ___
/ , _// // __// _ / _ `// __// _ / / __ | / // '_// -_)/ _
/_/|_|/_/ __//_//_/_,_//_/ _,_/ /_/ |_|/_//_/_ __//_//_/
/-------------------------------------
| S.T.A.R.S. Bravo Team |
| BUM (Back-up Man) |
| |
| Gender: Male |
| Age: 23 |
| Blood: AB |
| Height: 172cm |
| Weight: 62.5kg |
-------------------------------------/
Playable Scenarios: Groups with Rebecca in the Nightmare scenario
Equipped Gun: --
Counter Attack: --
After being separated from the rest of Bravo Team, this back-up man of Bravo
Team looks after Rebecca during their stay at the Spencer Estate. He is always
cheerful and frank during a conversation and will throw himself in harm's way
to rescue others. A dark past memory keeps him motivated to protect those he
cares dearly for and he doesn't hesitate to act quickly even during the most
dangerous of moments. His preferred weapon is the shotgun.
Richard is later found in the mansion being nursed back to health by Rebecca
after receiving a nasty bite from a giant poisonous snake. Umbrella Chronicles
shows us the horrors that both Richard and Rebecca faced during their stay at
the mansion before the arrival of Alpha Team.
Appearances:
-- Resident Evil Ø
Nonplayable character
-- Resident Evil, Resident Evil: Director's Cut, Resident Evil: Deadly Silence,
Resident Evil (GC)
Nonplayable character
Other Appearances/Mentions:
-- Resident Evil: Deadly Silence
Unlockable character in Multiplayer mode
___ _ __ __ _____
/ _ ) (_)/ // /__ __ / ___/___ ___ ___
/ _ |/ // // // // / / /__ / _ / -_)/ _
/____//_//_//_/ _, / ___/ ___/__//_//_/
/___/
/-------------------------------------
| Gender: Male |
| Age: 26 |
| Blood: A |
| Height: 181cm |
| Weight: 74.2kg |
| Occupation: U.S. Marine |
-------------------------------------/
Playable Scenarios: Train Derailment
Equipped Gun: Handgun
Counter Attack: Push + Jump Kick
Pic(s): http://tinyurl.com/2kkqbk (Train Derailment)
This former second lieutenant of the U.S.M.C. was sentenced to death for his
role in the murder of 23 people. Even though he appears to be a cynical man of
few words, this battle hardened Marine has a strong sense of justice and a deep
passion for his duty. He escapes custody due to monsters from the biohazard
outbreak aboard the train attacking the prisoner transport that held him. The
convicts and guards that were on board were killed by the monster but Billy
managed to survive and found cover aboard the Ecliptic Express train. He
eventually teams up with Rebecca. Even though Rebecca did not fully trust him
at first, the two continue to fight side by side and manage to survive the
crash of the train.
While at the Training Facility, Billy begins to display a more protective role
over Rebecca. When asked about his involvement in the slaughter of 23 people,
Billy simply tells Rebecca that his commanding officer asked him and his
comrades to open fire on a group of civilians and that he alone refused to do
so. The two survive the Training Facility together and, perhaps out of respect
of Billy's refusal, Rebecca tells him that she will report him as having died
during the train crash and that he is now free to leave.
Much like Chris compared to Jill, Billy could take more damage than Rebecca in
Resident Evil Ø. He does not have the ability to combine herbs or carry
chemicals as displayed by Rebecca. Little is known of what happened to Billy
after the two separated, but Rebecca does still think of him during the one of
her scenarios.
Appearances:
-- Resident Evil Ø
Playable Character (team play with Rebecca)
Other Appearances/Mentions:
-- Resident Evil 2 (N64)
Mentioned in an EX File (Rebecca's Report)
His name is spelled "Billy Koen" in the file.
_____ __ ____ __ _ _
/ ___/___ _ ____ / /___ ___ / __ / /(_)_ __ ___ (_)____ ___ _
/ /__ / _ `// __// // _ (_-< / /_/ // // /| |/ // -_)/ // __// _ `/
___/ _,_//_/ /_/ ___//___/ ____//_//_/ |___/ __//_//_/ _,_/
/-------------------------------------
| Gender: Male |
| Age: 21 |
| Blood: O |
| Height: 182cm |
| Weight: 83kg |
| Occupation: U.B.C.S. Corporal |
-------------------------------------/
Playable Scenarios: Raccoon's Destruction
Equipped Gun: Handgun SG
Counter Attack: 3 Hit Combo with Back End of Submachine Gun
Pic(s): http://tinyurl.com/3xg88x (Raccoon's Destruction)
After his role in anti-government guerilla operations in South America was
finished due to government forces, this Native American joined Umbrella's
U.B.C.S. special ops unit. An expert in heavy weaponry and vehicle operation
along with bravery and the will to throw himself in the middle of danger makes
him a very useful asset to his team.
Carlos' team is sent in under the impression of saving civilians during the
Raccoon City outbreak. His squad gets wiped out during an ambush with the
infected T-virus inhabitants causing him to wonder the streets where he
eventually meets up with Jill Valentine. Carlos gets caught up in the war
between Jill's pursuer and his own team commander's hidden agenda. He later
finds out that his team was simply sent in for the purpose of gaining combat
data against the T-virus bio-weapons. He survives the Raccoon City incident
along with Jill by making it to an escape helicopter with Jill shortly before
Raccoon City is wiped out by a missile.
Carlos is only playable during a certain point in the RE3 storyline in which
Jill becomes infected with the T-virus. He comes equipped with his Assault
Rifle weapon and even has the ability to push a large bell that Jill could not
shove away from the floor by a door!
Appearances:
-- Resident Evil 3: Nemesis
Playable side character (only while finding Vaccine for Jill)
Other Appearances/Mentions:
-- Resident Evil 3: Nemesis
Playable character in The Mercenaries mode
-- Under the Skin
Nonplayable (in a way playable) character (Raccoon City stage)
___ __ _ __
/ _ | ___/ /___ _ | | /| / /___ ___ ___ _
/ __ |/ _ // _ `/ | |/ |/ // _ / _ / _ `/
/_/ |_|_,_/ _,_/ |__/|__/ ___//_//_/_, /
/___/
/-------------------------------------
| Gender: Female |
| Age: 24 |
| Blood: AB |
| Height: ? |
| Weight: ? |
| Occupation: Spy |
-------------------------------------/
Playable Scenarios: Death's Door
Equipped Gun: Burst Handgun
Counter Attack: Somersault Kick + Fan Kick
Ada Wong is a female spy that works for her own unknown objectives. She was
first introduced to Resident Evil fans in Resident Evil 2 where she met up with
Leon under the cover of "looking for her husband" while she secretly searched
for a sample of the G-virus to complete her true mission. She tried to
distance herself from Leon as she continued to run across him but Leon
continually forced himself into her aid, thereby allowing Ada to gain feelings
for him, nearly costing her the mission.
She suffered great injuries during her battle to seize a sample of the G-virus
but Leon nursed her back to health. Ada later discovered that Leon had found a
sample of the G-virus - after knowing this, she held him at gunpoint in order
to take it for herself. Her existing emotions for the rookie cop couldn't
bring her to shoot him, and in that moment of weakness she was shot by Birkin's
wife and fell over the edge of a lab catwalk. Leon struggled to maintain hold
as he held her by one arm, but eventually lost the battle as Ada plummeted into
the sewers below. Umbrella Chronicles reveals for the first time, what exactly
happened to Ada before the events of RE4 and it reveals more behind her mission
to obtain the G-virus.
Ada always remains neutral in her quests in Resident Evil 2 and Resident Evil
4, not choosing either side yet offering help to Leon whenever he appears to be
in danger. She works with Wesker to fulfill her own goals and maintains a
clever relationship with the former Alpha Team leader while secretly engaging
in battles to help those that he opposes. Whether she truly cares for anyone
or if she is just using her charm to manipulate others is questionable with
this wild card of a character.
Appearances:
-- Resident Evil 2
Playable side character (only once per Leon scenario [Game A or B])
-- Resident Evil 4
Playable characters in Assignment Ada, Separate Ways, and unlockable character
in The Mercenaries mode
Other Appearances/Mentions:
-- Resident Evil 3: Nemesis
Character epilogue
-- Resident Evil 4
Unlockable character in The Mercenaries mode
___ __ __ __ _ __ __
/ _ | / // / ___ ____ / /_ | | /| / /___ ___ / /__ ___ ____
/ __ | / // _ / -_)/ __// __/ | |/ |/ // -_)(_-< / '_// -_)/ __/
/_/ |_|/_//_.__/__//_/ __/ |__/|__/ __//___//_/_ __//_/
/-------------------------------------
| S.T.A.R.S. Alpha Team |
| Mission Leader |
| |
| Gender: Male |
| Age: 38 |
| Blood: O |
| Height: 183cm |
| Weight: 84.5kg |
-------------------------------------/
Playable Scenarios: Beginnings, Rebirth, Dark Legacy
Equipped Gun: Samurai Edge 2 (Beginnings - Rebirth)
Handgun w/Silencer (Dark Legacy)
Counter Attack (Beginnings): Push + Jump Kick
Counter Attack (Rebirth +) : Jump Kick + Super Punch (Chikyo Chagi)
Pic(s): http://tinyurl.com/398oqt - Dark Legacy (beginning FMV)
http://tinyurl.com/2kmkhz - Dark Legacy
Another easily identifiable character in the Resident Evil series along with
Chris and Jill is the series' main antagonist, Albert Wesker. Wesker was first
introduced in the original Resident Evil where he played the role of the
S.T.A.R.S. Alpha Team leader. It was later revealed that he had simply lead
his crew into the Spencer Mansion to observe their combat ability with the
B.O.W.'s contained therein. He intentionally decided to use the outbreak at
the mansion and surrounding area as a clever distraction while he fulfilled his
own agenda of downloading Umbrella's personal data from their mansion files.
He unleashed the awesome Tyrant on both of the survivors of Alpha Team and was
killed upon its releasing.
He later resurfaced on Rockfort Island and commanded a raid on the island in an
attempt to gain control of a sample of the T-Veronica virus that Alexia had
worked on. This is where Wesker once again met up with Chris, the one person
that had messed up his plans and caused him to die once. Wesker revealed that
he had injected himself with a virus that allowed him to come back to life
shortly before being attacked back at the Spencer Estate. He follows Chris to
the Antarctic Base and manages to seize control of a specimen that would make
an excellent test subject for the study of the T-Veronica virus. With his
newfound power, he engages in a showdown with Chris shortly before leaving the
island in an effort to rid himself of the surviving member of S.T.A.R.S. but
fails in his attempts.
Little is known of what happened to Wesker in between the Mansion Incident up
to Resident Evil 4. Umbrella Chronicles goes into heavy detail about his
involvement in between these events and even shows us his role in the fall of
Umbrella.
Appearances:
-- Resident Evil, Resident Evil: Director's Cut, Resident Evil: Deadly Silence,
Resident Evil (GC)
Nonplayable character
-- Resident Evil Code: Veronica, Resident Evil Code: Veronica X
Nonplayable character in main story
-- Resident Evil 4
Nonplayable character (appears in Assignment Ada and Separate Ways)
Other Appearances/Mentions:
-- Resident Evil (Sega Saturn)
Zombie Wesker (Battle Game)
-- Resident Evil: Deadly Silence
Unlockable character in Multiplayer mode
-- Resident Evil Code: Veronica, Resident Evil Code: Veronica X
Unlockable character in Battle Game
-- Resident Evil 4
Unlockable character in The Mercenaries mode
__ __ __ __ _ __ __ __
/ // // / / // |/ // //_/
/ _ // /_/ // // ,<
/_//_/ ____//_/|_//_/|_|
/-------------------------------------
| Gender: Male |
| Age: ? |
| Blood: ? |
| Height: ? |
| Weight: ? |
| Occupation: Umbrella Special Forces |
| Team Leader |
-------------------------------------/
Playable Scenarios: Fourth Survivor
Equipped Gun: Matilda
Counter Attack: Cold Shoulder + Neck Break
Pic(s): http://tinyurl.com/3xoxx8
Earning the nickname of the "Grim Reaper" or "Death", this Umbrella Special
Forces member has been involved in a large number of operations where he was
the only survivor of his team. Him and his squad confronted William Birkin in
his lab then shot him and took the G-virus sample for themselves. Little did
they know that Birkin remained alive and injected himself with G then
confronted his attackers in the sewers of Raccoon City. HUNK single-handedly
survived the attack and managed to retrieve the G-virus sample.
He wakes up in the sewers later and contacts his helicopter at the evacuation
point outside the building. With little ammo left, HUNK must then fight
through the remainder of the T-virus carriers that roam the police station on
his way to the evac point. He keeps his usual attitude during his fight -
cold, silent, and emotionless - and keeps one thing in mind - the Death cannot
die. The Fourth Survivor scenario is a reimagining of the unlockable "4th
Survivor" mode from Resident Evil 2.
Appearances:
-- Resident Evil 2
Playable character in 4th Survivor mode
-- Resident Evil 4
Unlockable character in The Mercenaries mode
Other Appearances/Mentions:
-- Resident Evil 3: Nemesis
Character epilogue (Mr. X)
____ _ _ __ __ __ _ _
/ __/___ ____ ___ _ ___ (_) | | / // /___ _ ___/ /(_)__ _ (_)____
_ / -_)/ __// _ `// -_)/ / | |/ // // _ `// _ // // ' / // __/
/___/ __//_/ _, / __//_/ |___//_/ _,_/ _,_//_//_/_/_//_//_/
/___/
/-------------------------------------
| Gender: Male |
| Age: ? |
| Blood: ? |
| Height: ? |
| Weight: ? |
| Occupation: Umbrella Corp. Officer |
-------------------------------------/
Playable Scenarios: N/A
Equipped Gun: --
Counter Attack: --
Pic(s): http://tinyurl.com/3b3rrs
This former colonel first approached Umbrella after the fall of the Soviet
Union. He is made an officer while at Umbrella and is known to have some
involvement in Tyrant research. His experience in military affairs has lead to
him being instrumental in the founding of Umbrella's Private Militia, the
Umbrella Biohazard Countermeasure Service (U.B.C.S.).
Sergei is loyal to Spencer and his Umbrella Corporation and seeks to maintain
that loyalty no matter how radical Spencer's wishes may appear. He also
appears to have ties with Nicholai, the Resident Evil 3 antagonist, as
displayed in a file in Umbrella Chronicles.
Appearances:
-- None
Other Appearances/Mentions:
-- None
____ __ __ ____ ____
/ __ ___ _ __ ___ / // / / __/ / __/___ ___ ___ ____ ___ ____
/ /_/ //_ /| |/|/ // -_)/ // / / _/ _ _ / _ / -_)/ _ / __// -_)/ __/
____/ /__/|__,__/ __//_//_/ /___/(_) /___// .__/__//_//_/__/ __//_/
/_/
/-------------------------------------
| Gender: Male |
| Age: ? |
| Blood: ? |
| Height: ? |
| Weight: ? |
| Occupation: Owner of Umbrella Corp. |
-------------------------------------/
Playable Scenarios: N/A
Equipped Gun: --
Counter Attack: --
A man of noble birth, Ozwell E. Spencer is one of the original co-founders of
the Umbrella Corporation along with the late Edward Ashford and James Marcus.
This group are the ones responsible for the creation of the Progenitor virus
(later became T-virus) and they formed Umbrella Corporation to develop
biological weapons from this new virus strand. The latter two co-founders were
mercilessly removed from their positions and Spencer took control of the
organization for himself. Albert Wesker and William Birkin, two Umbrella
workers at the Training Facility, were ordered by Spencer to kill James Marcus
and take over his research. Easily the most elusive character of the Resident
Evil universe, Spencer's mansion serves as the premise for the very first game
in the series.
Spencer asked the renown architect George Trevor to build him a lab facility
that looked much like a mansion on the outside. George Trevor later went
missing and is believed to have "assisted" Spencer as a test subject for the
Progenitor virus along with George's wife (Jessica) and daughter (Lisa).
Wesker eventually causes the downfall of Spencer's Umbrella Corporation as
explained in the final scenario of Umbrella Chronicles. Spencer's identity
continues to remain a mystery as always, though his role in Umbrella Chronicles
hints at the possibility of him resurfacing and becoming a key player as the
series progresses.
Appearances:
-- None
Other Appearances/Mentions:
-- Resident Evil (GC)
Mentioned in a few files. (Trevor's Diary, Crumpled Memo)
-- Wesker's Report II
Mentioned in a few areas.
[EN00]
===============================================================================
__ __ __ _____ __ __
/__/ /__// _ /__/ _
/_ / / /_ / / //_
//__/ / //__/ // // /_//__ _
__/_ /__// /____/__/ __/
T - V I R U S B I O W E A P O N S & A C C I D E N T A L M U T A T I O N S
===============================================================================
=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=
Below is a list of every normal enemy found in the game. Each enemy has a
description and a small analysis of their attacks along with the best way to
handle each of them.
=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=
======
Zombie
======
Zombies are dead humans brought back to the life from the effects of the T-
virus. With a low mentality and decaying flesh due to their infection of the
virus, these walking carriers mindlessly seek out living organisms in order to
satisfy their insatiable hunger. Before the incident these walking corpses
were responsible for numerous deaths in the Arklay Mountains where victims were
apparently eaten...
Recommended Weapon: Handgun
Weak Point: Forehead
Blast a zombie directly in the forehead with a Handgun of any type for a one
hit instant kill. Wait for the cursor to form a red dot in order to know when
you have the precise aim. Use a Submachine Gun or Shotgun for close encounters
with zombies or for crowd control with several zombies. A Submachine Gun hit
will stun them in place for a few seconds and allow one to switch back over to
the Handgun for an easy headshot. Zombies will also stand still for a few
seconds right after standing up or after being shot in the knee. Grenades also
come in handy for big groups of zombies.
Zombies will attack by lunging forward to bite or by hitting with one of their
arms from mid-distance. Wiggle the Wii-mote to shake off these pests and shoot
them in the head while they are stunned from a knockback. A knife slash comes
in handy for an instant slash knockback once they lunge.
When fighting a zombie it is always best to switch over to a secondary weapon
whenever one of them tries to attack. As a zombie lifts its arm to ready a
strike, switch to a secondary weapon then shoot him back or stagger him - this
idea can also be used for their lunges or you can hit them with a knife slash.
Zombies start out as basically walking headshots with little strength and
aggressiveness but once the Raccoon's Destruction scenario is reached, the
zombies' aggression and overall tolerance to gunfire increases quite a bit.
There are a few occasions where a zombie will not stagger at all from secondary
weapon fire. To see what I am speaking of, try to stagger the zombies in that
one room where the Hand Cannon is obtained in the Fourth Survivor chapter.
These uber zombies are also placed in a few other chapters though they are very
rare most of the time.
In later scenarios you will also run into Vomiting Zombies that will shoot
vomit balls from their mouth toward the screen. The vomit balls can be
destroyed by shooting the middle of the vomit. Always switch to a Submachine
Gun and defeat these type of zombies quickly since they will almost always
remain at a distance while vomiting and continue to be an annoyance. They
don't stand still that well for headshots, so use Submachine Guns to defeat
them for the most part.
============
Crimson Head
============
When a zombies' corpse has been incapacitated and it remains dormant for a
certain period of time, its body mutates into something even more ferocious.
Its tissues are reconstructed at a cellular level giving it a reddish color and
a new, more savage, hunger. The Crimson Head's speed is much greater than that
of an ordinary zombie and it attacks with a much higher ferocity, lunging forth
with newly grown claws and an increased determination for its meal.
Recommended Weapon: Submachine Gun, Shotgun, Handgun (for headshot)
Weak Point: Forehead
Much like the standard zombie, a Crimson Head can be defeated by a direct
Handgun shot to the forehead. Yeah, just aim directly at the forehead as the
beast dashes straight forward with a maniacal aggression speed. No, I am
kidding - though it can be done with a good enough aim!
For a Crimson Head, use the Submachine Gun to stagger them in place and they
will stand still just like normal zombies then switch over to the Handgun and
go for a headshot. They always stand still for a few seconds after getting up
from the ground which will allow for a headshot as well. While fighting groups
of these enemies, make sure to focus gunfire on each one of them without
letting any of them get too close. For instance, while two of them are close
to the screen, use the Submachine Gun and switch rapid fire between the two to
keep them staggering. A Shotgun is excellent for knocking them out of your
face.
There are times when you will run across an uber Crimson Head that will not
stagger as easily, so be careful while going for those headshots. They are not
found often, but it is quite surprising when they are located. The Crimson
Head that dashes after Chris and Jill right before they take the elevator up to
the lab in the corridor outside the engine room is an example of these uber
Crimson Heads.
=====================
Cerberus (Zombie Dog)
=====================
Most likely responsible for the numerous brutal murders in Raccoon Forest prior
to the incident at the Mansion, these zombie dogs are the result of the T-virus
being administered to large military-based Dobermans. Much like a zombie
they're body continues to decay and they have a hunger for flesh. They are
known to hunt in packs in order to outnumber their prey.
Recommended Weapon: Handgun, Submachine Gun
Weak Point: Head
Always try to for a heashot on a Cerberus and it will fall instantly. A
Cerberus always has its head open while charging so just point and shoot. A
Handgun bullet will also stop its leap and ground it for a few seconds,
allowing you to get in plenty of hits to finish it. Cerberus always attacks by
leaping straight at its foe so be ready for in-your-face attacks while fighting
these beasts. Use a Submachine Gun to deal with packs greater than two and
this will keep them from ganging up as much.
==========
Eliminator
==========
A result of the T-virus being administered to monkey DNA by the late Dr. James
Marcus. The monkey's overdeveloped muscles actually tightened through its skin
displaying tissue through its outside hair. Due to the Eliminator keeping a
monkey's already high intelligence, an Eliminator can aggressively jump and
strike in order to ground its prey while on its vicious pursuit for flesh.
Recommended Weapon: Handgun (single), Submachine Gun (grouped)
Weak Point: Head
Aim for the head while fighting an Eliminator and it will fall with a few well
placed handgun bullets. Most of the time, a single Eliminator can be finished
with a Handgun but these enemies normally hunt in groups so it is wise to break
out a Submachine Gun once there are more than one of these enemies.
The Eliminator mainly attacks through jumping strikes so watch them carefully
and shoot them away the moment they jump toward the screen. They can also
attack through ground hits while close, so don't take your eyes off any
approaching Eliminators - it is always best to shoot them back when they get
too close.
=====
Leech
=====
What you see here is Dr. Marcus' "children". Yes, these leeches were
intentionally exposed to the T-virus and bred by the late James Marcus in an
effort to study the effects of the T-virus on living organisms. These leeches
jump and attach to their prey in order to not only suck the blood from their
foe, but devour their flesh as well.
Recommended Weapon: Knife (while attached to screen), Handgun (distance)
Weak Point: none
Leeches attack by jumping and sticking to the screen. If they remain on the
screen for too long then the characters will begin to suffer damage. Whenever
they stick to the screen, slash at them with the Knife to defeat them. Usually
once one leech begins to leap toward the screen, more will follow so prepare to
slash the Knife wildly at times.
Leeches are basically walking hits to boost your "Enemy Hits" score at the end
of each chapter, so don't hesitate to throw a grenade into the middle of a
leech-filled room in order to boost your hit count. Stages with leeches
intentionally have a high Enemy Hit requirement, so take advantage of the
grouped leeches in order to get more hits per stage. Shoot at single leeches
with the Handgun when there is absolutely nothing else to do.
========================
Mimicry Marcus/Leech Man
========================
Sometimes the leeches will secrete a bodily fluid and mold together to form a
humanoid shape. They sometimes resemble the late James Marcus with their
forms, but they become aggressive and begin to break their human form when they
are in the presence of prey.
Recommended Weapon: Shotgun, Submachine Gun, Grenade/Grenade Launcher
Weak Point: none
Leech Men were some of the more annoying enemies in Resident Evil Ø and still
continue to be that way in Umbrella Chronicles. They attack by moving toward
their prey and swinging wildly with their tentacle arms. Use a Shotgun or
Submachine Gun in order to damage them heavily when they first. If there are
more than one then I recommend using a grenade or Grenade Launcher. These
things can be very vicious and it is sometimes hard to cancel their attacks
when they group, especially when leeches continue to jump on the screen while
they attack.
Be forewarned that a Leech Man will explode when it is almost defeated - at
that time, you must concentrate fire on its staggered body in order to finish
it off before it explodes. Fail to do so, and you will suffer damage from its
explosion. It will always stand still shortly before it explodes. It is very
important to make sure NOT to reload after shooting them a bunch of times. You
don't want to get stuck reloading when they are about to explode.
It is very possible to defeat these enemies with a simple Handgun, but make
sure that you are only fighting one of them. It's best to only use the Handgun
on approaching Leech Men and not a close range Leech Man. Keep them staggered
at a distance with gunfire and they won't be much of a problem.
====
Crow
====
These wild crows that have come in contact with the T-virus display no physical
signs of mutation. Their increased aggressiveness and fearless nature show
their infection results however. With the capability of flight, these are the
most dangerous carriers of the T-virus as they fly through the forest and
surrounding wilderness spreading the infectious disease. They have also been
noted for having completely killed a Forest. Did you get that there?
Recommended Weapon: Handgun (distant), Knife (close)
Weak Point: Head
It is almost always best to try to shoot a crow with a Handgun before it dives
toward the screen. Crows always attack by diving straight toward the screen.
Don't even worry about the weak point, just shoot since they always fall within
one hit from any gun. Once a crow comes into close contact, slash the knife in
its direction to make it fall. The main bad aspect of using the knife is that
it doesn't always help you to avoid damage.
===
Bat
===
Much like the crow, the bat has not undergone any physical changes due to its
contamination with the T-virus. Other than the usual heightened aggressiveness
displayed in other carriers, it appears much like an ordinary bat at first
glance.
Recommended Weapon: Handgun and Submachine Gun(distant), Knife (close)
Weak Point: Head
A bat is much harder to hit with a firearm than a crow since it will dive in a
wavy pattern while dashing toward the screen. The Knife works much better
while slashing at a bat rather than a crow since a bat will always fly toward
the characters then swoop backward shortly before biting. This close attack
leaves it more open to Knife slashes when compared to a crows straight dive.
Knife slashing should be used for small groups of bats but I recommend
switching to a firearm for a group greater than two. Use a Handgun or
Submachine Gun (for many) in an attempt to knock them out of the air before
they hit.
=====
Adder
=====
A small venomous snake that has come in contact with the T-virus resulting in
an enhanced aggressiveness and a more powerful venom to further weaken its foe.
The Adder has also been known to have an increased fertility rate so its
numbers continue to increase.
Recommended Weapon: Handgun, Knife (close)
Weak Point: none
An Adder will always coil then stand with its head up shortly before lunging at
its foe so learn to shoot a coiled Adder first while fighting a group of them.
One Handgun shot is usually enough to defeat these creatures but their constant
slither can make them a hard target to hit. Only use the Knife as a last
resort. Hitting an Adder with a Knife slash will usually result in you getting
hit as well. Always try to hit these enemies from distance when they first
appear and shoot the coiling Adders first before they leap in for a bite.
===========
Large Roach
===========
As the T-virus spread throughout the town of Raccoon City, a vermin war was
occurring in the sewers below the streets. Rats and roaches were both being
infected by the T-virus and waged a war for domination of the sewers. Needless
to say, the roaches won.
These roaches have grown to eight times their normal size along with their
increased aggressiveness and they now have a new hunger for flesh. Roaches
have a tendency to attack in groups and will usually lunge for the carotid
artery while attempting to go for a human's weak points.
Recommended Weapon: Knife (close)
Weak Point: none
Roaches are the most rare of any T-virus infected enemy, only showcasing
themselves in Raccoon's Destruction 2. They basically attack much like the
standard leech. They fly toward the screen and stick on while biting. Slash
at them with the Knife to easily kill each of them. They swarm quite a bit in
areas so multiple Knife slashes is a must. These enemies are also good to hit
for extra enemy hits. Toss a grenade into a swarm of them while they crawl to
rack up on hits. Sometimes they will cling to high walls however so it may pay
to break out the Submachine Gun when a grenade will simply not reach. The
Handgun is not really a good firearm for their vast number.
====
Wasp
====
Having been infected with the T-virus, the wasp has grown to a much greater
size along with its increased appetite for combat. Wasps usually attack in
groups and overwhelm their foe with constant stings to subdue their prey. They
have built a big nest in the Guardhouse of the Spencer Estate and some of them
have even moved further into the Mansion.
Recommended Weapon: Handgun, Knife (close)
Weak Point: none
Wasps are not fought too much in the game but they are more numerous than
roaches. They have a habit of popping up in some of the most strangest of
places at times however. A wasp will always hover in front of the screen along
with other wasps and eventually fly straight at the screen with their stingers
outward. Try to shoot each of them with a Handgun bullet while they hover and
prepare to attack. Only use a Knife slash as a last resort since slashing will
sometimes get you hit.
===========
Web Spinner
===========
When the T-virus was administered to this arthropod, it increased greatly in
size. Ironically called the Web Spinner, this B.O.W. now uses its acidic venom
to incapacitate its foes instead of relying on webbing. It is able to climb
walls and even hang from ceilings while searching for food. The inability to
control this species led to its disposal as a useful bio-weapon.
Recommended Weapon: Shotgun
Weak Point: Head (basically its eyes above the fangs)
Web Spinners attack from many different angles. Sometimes they will appear on
the ceiling or walls. They will spit venom from the ceiling which can be shot
much like zombie vomit. While on the ground, they will lunge forward with
their legs and bite their prey. They are most dangerous on the ground because
of their sudden lunge so always make sure to take them down fast whenever they
move toward the screen. Use a Shotgun for the best results. Grenades are good
to use for a batch of spiders as well.
They can be hit in between the eyes and taken down quickly with a Handgun if
hit in the right spot but don't always rely on this. Every now and then not
even a Shotgun blast is enough to stop their aggressive lunge - this is where a
Magnum comes in handy.
===========
Black Tiger
===========
A disposed Web Spinner that grew even larger through the effects of the T-virus
making it even more deadly. Unlike the Web Spinner, this type of spider uses
its webbing to build nests in order to trap its prey. Other than their larger
size they can also be distinguished from the Web Spinner by their black
markings across the back of their body.
Recommended Weapon: Shotgun
Weak Point: Head (basically its eyes above the fangs)
The only major difference between the Black Tiger and Web Spinner is that the
Black Tiger can receive a bit more damage when compared to its fellow brethren.
A Shotgun is still the best choice of weapon for disposing of one and the
grenades still work well for a group. These are much more rare than the Web
Spinner and can only be found in the Guardhouse area of the Spencer Estate.
=======
Neptune
=======
In an effort to see the results of the T-virus on sea life, this great white
shark was injected with the T-virus to view its usefulness as a B.O.W. The
results proved to be only minor enhancements to the strength of an already
aggressive nature that the great white shark carries. In the water it reigns
supreme but on land it is nothing more than a flapping annoyance just waiting
to be silenced with a Knife slash or simple Handgun round.
Recommended Weapon: Shotgun
Weak Point: Head (the top portion of the front of its mouth)
These enemies only appear in two portions of the game. The most well known
appearance to all RE fans is their presence in the Aqua Ring below the
Guardhouse. Once a Neptune shark spots its prey, it will quickly swim toward
it then break out into an underwater dash ending with a lunge to snatch its
foe. The Neptune can easily be defeated with a single Shotgun blast before it
makes contact or you can aim for the top portion of its mouth with a Handgun
and shoot for an instant kill. Its best to use the Shotgun unless your aiming
skills are superb.
======
Hunter
======
A battle B.O.W. which was created by mixing a human egg with reptilian DNA
along with an added dosage of T-virus. One of the more intelligent T-virus
creations, this creature jumps at its prey and slashes at them with its long
sharp claws while exhibiting an extreme and deadly delight in combat earning it
the nickname, the Hunter.
Recommended Weapon: Shotgun
Weak Point: Head (face)
Many RE fans are familiar with the Alpha, Beta, and Gamma Hunters fought
throughout the series. This Alpha Hunter slashes from close range and performs
a jumping claw strike from distances. Hunters should be take down quickly and
aggressively at all time especially when they arrive in pairs. They will
sometimes appear as they are leaping toward the screen, so you will have to
instantly answer their surprise attack with a blast from your current weapon.
Hunters are completely defenseless when they jump in for an attack and can be
taken down with a well-placed Handgun shot at that time. Their most brutal
attack (jumping attack) can also be their biggest downfall when taken advantage
of. Always aim directly at the head while shooting them with a Shotgun and
this will defeat them much faster and knock them out of any attacks that they
may try to perform. Hunters like to dodge gun blasts a lot - they actually
dodge to the side a few seconds after the targeting cursor falls over them so
be prepared to shoot at them again if they dodge a gun blast. They like to
dodge blasts when they have been on the ground for a while, so try to shoot
them as they appear or as they fall to the ground to make sure that your blast
connects.
=======
Chimera
=======
While mixing the genes of a human with those of a fly, the Chimera B.O.W. was
born. Much like the sneaky insect it is derived from, the Chimera uses its
appendages to climb along walls and ceilings while in pursuit of its prey.
Underneath it's humanoid appearance it still shares many qualities of a fly and
even spews maggots when shot at.
Recommended Weapon: Submachine Gun
Weak Point: Head
These sneaky creatures will attack from the floor, wall, and ceiling, so it is
advised to use a Submachine Gun to kill them very quickly. They fall fast to
any sort of rapid fire.
Chimeras that crawl along the wall are the most dangerous especially when
combined with a Chimera that moves along the floor. It's easy to lose sight of
an approaching ceiling Chimera while fighting others and you have to keep in
mind that when a Chimera falls from the ceiling, it will instantly attack with
one of its arms, so be ready to blast it back. The Shotgun works fairly well
against these enemies but any rapid fire weapon will almost instantly kill them
quickly.
===
Ivy
===
The Ivy's DNA is derived from the same data that composed Plant 42 in the
Guardhouse of the Spencer Estate and thereby gains the official name of Plant
43. Much like Plant 42, it will wrap its tentacles around its foes and suck
them dry of blood, but unlike Plant 42 this brethren also uses hydraulic force
for locomotion. It still has the ability to secrete a digestive fluid that
allows it to incapacitate its foe from a distance.
Recommended Weapon: Handgun
Weak Point: Head (Inside of Mouth)
Much like its appearance in Resident Evil 2, the Ivy is a very slow moving but
deadly foe. It will mainly attack by rearing back and slapping both of its
tentacles forward from medium range. To easily defeat these foes, shoot them
once in the head then wait for them to open their mouth. When the mouth is
open, shoot the inside with a Handgun for an instant kill on Normal mode - it
takes two shots on Hard mode. These enemies can be taken down very easily once
their weakness is exposed.
======
Licker
======
These creatures are zombies that have mutated further under the effects of the
T-virus. The brain has expanded to the point of becoming visible on the top of
their head and their body has begun to peel even further than that of a normal
zombie to reveal their muscle tissues below the skin. Appropriately named
"Licker" due to the blade-like tongue that they use to lash out at their prey.
These creatures have also formed claws that they use to climb walls and move
across ceilings. They are blind but have superior hearing that allows them to
easily pick up the faintest footstep of a foe nearby. Once a foe is heard,
they lash out aggressively in its direction.
Recommended Weapon: Handgun, Submachine Gun
Weak Point: Head (brain)
These foes are mainly encountered at a distance from the characters for the
first few chapters that they appear in, so they can easily be taken down with a
Handgun by aiming at their head and firing off a few shots. The Handgun
usually staggers them per shot so it is easy to take down any single Licker
with only a Handgun.
Later in the chapters, they are usually fought at a very close range and attack
in packs. While fighting more than one Licker it is almost always best to use
a Submachine Gun. Aim at their head and use rapid fire to defeat them quickly.
While fighting more than one it is always very important to knock each Licker
out of an attack as it prepares to lash out its tongue while sitting upward.
As mentioned above, they will sit upwards and ready a tongue attack from a
distance or they will attempt to slash with one of their claws from close
range. Claw attacks are extremely quick, so make sure to knock them back with
a blast if they get too close.
[WE00]
===============================================================================
__ __ __ _ ___ ___ __ __
/ / / /__/_ / _ /___/ / _
/ / /_ //_ / /_)// // / /
/ //__/ _ / ___/ _// / / _
/ /__/_/ _// ___/_ / __/
S E C O N D A R Y W E A P O N S
===============================================================================
=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=
This is a list and description of all secondary weapons found in the game.
Weapons are listed in the same order that they are displayed in on the weapon
selection menu.
=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=
Level = Current level that a weapon is on (changes stats of weapon).
Ammo = Amount of ammo that a weapon can hold altogether.
Capacity = The number of shots that can be fired before the need to reload.
Power = The amount of damage that a weapon will take.
Cost = The number of stars that must be earned to upgrade the weapon.
(NOTE: Stars are earned based on your rank for a particular chapter. See
"Ranking" and "Customize" under basics for more details.)
TIP: For any Shotgun, Grenade Launcher (especially the Grenade Launcher), or
Rocket Launcher, the closer you are to an enemy, the more damage you will take!
It really helps to take this knowledge into consideration while fighting a
boss. For a perfect example, shoot the Tyrant R from a distance with the
Grenade Launcher HP, then try shooting him while he is up close and see for
yourself.
Damage from far: xxx-----------
Damage from close: xxxxxxx-------
______ __
/ __/ / ___ / /____ ___ _____ ___
_ / _ / _ / __/ _ `/ // / _ (_-<
/___/_//_/___/__/_, /_,_/_//_/___/
/___/
The shotguns are well known for their spread fire that instantly knocks any
normal enemy out of a character's face and in Umbrella Chronicles they are no
exception. Try to make sure that an enemy is close before shooting. As
always, a shotgun is not as effective from a distance as it is up close. Along
with Magnums, these are some of the best weapons to use against Hunters.
===============
Assault Shotgun
===============
The Assault Shotgun has the best power out of the shotgun category but it has
one mighty reload time that can get you hit if not timed well. It can hold a
greater capacity in between reload times when compared to the Shotgun, but it's
not that much higher. To use an Assault Shotgun effectively, reload often and
don't get caught having to perform a full reload very much!
/--------------------------------------------
| Level | Ammo | Capacity | Power | Cost |
|============================================|
| 1 | 60 | 6 | C | - |
| 2 | 120 | 10 | C | 3 |
| 3 | 120 | 10 | C | 4 |
| 4 | 120 | 10 | C+ | 5 |
| 5 | Infinite | 10 | C+ | 6 |
--------------------------------------------/
=======
Shotgun
=======
The Shotgun is the standard shotgun found early in the game. It is the weakest
shotgun but is has an average reload and rate of fire when compared to the
Assault Shotgun. Even though some may shrug it off due to its low damage, the
good thing about this weapon is that it still packs the same amount of force as
the other shotguns thereby allowing you to cancel boss attacks even on later
chapters with this gun. More powerful normal enemies found on the later
chapters will not fall as easy to this weapon when compared to an Assault
Shotgun however.
/--------------------------------------------
| Level | Ammo | Capacity | Power | Cost |
|============================================|
| 1 | 60 | 6 | D | - |
| 2 | 120 | 6 | D | 2 |
| 3 | 120 | 8 | D | 3 |
| 4 | 120 | 8 | D+ | 4 |
| 5 | Infinite | 8 | D+ | 5 |
--------------------------------------------/
==========
Shotgun SA
==========
The Shotgun SA is the most well balanced of the shotguns. It trades some of
its power for a better capacity and faster firing speed. It's weak damage rate
means that you will have to hit later enemies with more shots to kill them, but
thankfully you can spam shots quite quickly with this baby.
/--------------------------------------------
| Level | Ammo | Capacity | Power | Cost |
|============================================|
| 1 | 80 | 8 | D+ | - |
| 2 | 160 | 8 | D+ | 4 |
| 3 | 160 | 12 | D+ | 5 |
| 4 | 160 | 12 | C | 6 |
| 5 | Infinite | 12 | C | 7 |
--------------------------------------------/
___ _ __ _____ _ __
/ _ ___ ____ (_)__/ / / __(_)______ | | /| / /__ ___ ____ ___ ___ ___
/ , _/ _ `/ _ / / _ / / _// / __/ -_) | |/ |/ / -_) _ `/ _ / _ / _ (_-<
/_/|_|_,_/ .__/_/_,_/ /_/ /_/_/ __/ |__/|__/__/_,_/ .__/___/_//_/___/
/_/ /_/
The rapid fire weapons are best used for spamming damage on single or multiple
enemies. They are also good for simply stunning an enemy, especially zombies.
Shoot a weaker enemy with one of these weapons and it will stagger thereby
allowing you to switch to another weapon to finish it off or continue to shoot
it with rapid fire. These weapons hardly ever stagger Hunters though, don't
try it often!
Rapid Fire Weapons are also very useful for some boss fights. When the damage
rate of these weapons are increased, they can help out a bunch for spamming a
boss' weak point with rapid fire.
==============
Submachine Gun
==============
The Submachine Gun is the weakest out of the rapid fire weapons, but you WILL
want this when you want to go for headshots. This weaker rapid fire weapon is
the better option when you want to simply stun a foe and set him up for a
critical shot.
/--------------------------------------------
| Level | Ammo | Capacity | Power | Cost |
|============================================|
| 1 | 750 | 50 | D | - |
| 2 | 1500 | 50 | D | 2 |
| 3 | 1500 | 100 | D | 3 |
| 4 | 1500 | 100 | D+ | 4 |
| 5 | Infinite | 100 | D+ | 5 |
--------------------------------------------/
================
Automatic Pistol
================
The Automatic Pistol is the most well balanced out of the rapid fire category
since it combines a good damage rate with an excellent ammo storage. This is
the more favorable rapid fire weapon to use during boss fights.
/--------------------------------------------
| Level | Ammo | Capacity | Power | Cost |
|============================================|
| 1 | 750 | 50 | D+ | - |
| 2 | 1500 | 50 | D+ | 4 |
| 3 | 1500 | 100 | D+ | 5 |
| 4 | 1500 | 100 | C | 6 |
| 5 | Infinite | 100 | C | 7 |
--------------------------------------------/
=================
Submachine Gun HP
=================
The Submachine Gun HP is the most powerful rapid fire weapon but it slightly
lacks in the overall ammo storage and capacity that the other rapid fire
weapons have. This is best used for normal enemies that need to be taken down
quickly - Eliminators, Lickers, maybe Hunters (again maybe with the Hunters).
/--------------------------------------------
| Level | Ammo | Capacity | Power | Cost |
|============================================|
| 1 | 600 | 40 | C | - |
| 2 | 1200 | 40 | C | 3 |
| 3 | 1200 | 80 | C | 4 |
| 4 | 1200 | 80 | C+ | 5 |
| 5 | Infinite | 80 | C+ | 6 |
--------------------------------------------/
_____ __ __ __
/ ___/______ ___ ___ ____/ /__ / / ___ ___ _____ ____/ / ___ _______
/ (_ / __/ -_) _ / _ `/ _ / -_) / /__/ _ `/ // / _ / __/ _ / -_) __(_-<
___/_/ __/_//_/_,_/_,_/__/ /____/_,_/_,_/_//_/__/_//_/__/_/ /___/
Grenade launchers are some very powerful weapons, but ammo is rather hard to
come by most of the time, though still not as hard as a rocket launcher. These
are best used for a group of enemies, especially the leeches and Leech Men in
the earlier chapters. They are also useful against a group of zombies or
finding hidden items in the environment. These make a good alternative for
tossing grenades. The main bad aspect of a grenade launcher is that there is
always a slight pause before each shot, so the shot is not instant. The rate
of fire for these weapons are not that great either, but the fact that they
clean out a good chunk of the room sort of makes that stand out less.
They can be useful for boss fights also, especially against a boss that likes
to get in your face a bunch. The closer an enemy is to you, the more damage a
grenade launcher will take off - always keep this in mind during boss fights!
================
Grenade Launcher
================
By combining a decent ammo storage, capacity, and damage rate, the Grenade
Launcher is the most well balanced of the grenade guns.
/--------------------------------------------
| Level | Ammo | Capacity | Power | Cost |
|============================================|
| 1 | 12 | 4 | B+ | - |
| 2 | 24 | 4 | B+ | 4 |
| 3 | 24 | 8 | B+ | 5 |
| 4 | 24 | 8 | A | 6 |
| 5 | Infinite | 8 | A | 7 |
--------------------------------------------/
===================
Grenade Launcher AT
===================
The Grenade Launcher AT is the weakest grenade gun but it makes up for it with
its ammo storage and capacity.
/--------------------------------------------
| Level | Ammo | Capacity | Power | Cost |
|============================================|
| 1 | 18 | 6 | B | - |
| 2 | 36 | 6 | B | 3 |
| 3 | 36 | 12 | B | 4 |
| 4 | 36 | 12 | B+ | 5 |
| 5 | Infinite | 12 | B+ | 6 |
--------------------------------------------/
===================
Grenade Launcher HP
===================
This is the most powerful grenade gun found in the game but it has a very long
reload time. The reload time is almost similar to that of the Anti-tank Rifle.
It's a good weapon for boss fights but only for a particular boss that gets
close for an attack. It's slow rate of fire and heavy pause before a shot make
it useless for any distant enemy or one that must be hit quickly. I would
recommend the MRL over this weapon for most bosses. The Grenade Launcher HP
works mighty well for the boss in the Death's Door chapter however - the
chapter where it is first unlocked.
/--------------------------------------------
| Level | Ammo | Capacity | Power | Cost |
|============================================|
| 1 | 3 | 1 | A | - |
| 2 | 6 | 1 | A | 5 |
| 3 | 6 | 2 | A | 6 |
| 4 | 6 | 2 | S | 7 |
| 5 | Infinite | 2 | S | 8 |
--------------------------------------------/
__ ___
/ |/ /__ ____ ____ __ ____ _ ___
/ /|_/ / _ `/ _ `/ _ / // / ' (_-<
/_/ /_/_,_/_, /_//_/_,_/_/_/_/___/
/___/
Magnums are best used for quick high damage on any single enemy. Hunters are
some of the best reasons to carry these weapons along with you in a chapter.
They work well for boss fights also, but with the lack of any type of spread
from gunfire, you have to hit the boss precisely in a weak point to see the
true damage that can be dealt from one of these.
===============
Magnum Revolver
===============
Trading ammo and capacity for damage, this is the best magnum that can be found
early in the game. It takes off quite a bit when hitting a boss in a weak
point but it lacks a good rate of fire when compared to the Magnum AT. This
weapon nearly doubles what the Magnum AT's normal damage rate is when used
against a boss however.
/--------------------------------------------
| Level | Ammo | Capacity | Power | Cost |
|============================================|
| 1 | 18 | 6 | B | - |
| 2 | 36 | 6 | B | 4 |
| 3 | 36 | 12 | B | 5 |
| 4 | 36 | 12 | B+ | 6 |
| 5 | Infinite | 12 | B+ | 7 |
--------------------------------------------/
=========
Magnum AT
=========
The Magnum AT is the weakest magnum but it has the best reload, ammo storage,
and capacity out of the magnum category. It has a much better rate of fire
when compared to the Magnum Revolver, which can really help out for spamming a
boss' weak point if you can get that precise aim on it. The Magnum Revolver
takes off nearly two times the Magnum AT's shot, but the Magnum AT's faster
rate of fire makes up for that loss in damage if you have enough ammo.
/--------------------------------------------
| Level | Ammo | Capacity | Power | Cost |
|============================================|
| 1 | 24 | 8 | C+ | - |
| 2 | 48 | 8 | C+ | 3 |
| 3 | 48 | 16 | C+ | 4 |
| 4 | 48 | 16 | B | 5 |
| 5 | Infinite | 16 | B | 6 |
--------------------------------------------/
===========
Hand Cannon
===========
Hailing from Resident Evil 4, the Hand Cannon is one of the best weapons in the
game. While combining a decent ammo and capacity, its sheer power will take
some heavy damage from anything and still have enough shots to shoot it some
more. This is the number one choice for hunting elephants!
This is still second in damage when compared to the Anti-Tank Gun but its
better rate of fire and higher ammo and capacity more than make up for that
weak point. Much like it was in Resident Evil 4, this gun takes the fun out of
the game at times. Give it infinite ammo with the Level 5 upgrade and... well,
it becomes the ultimate cure for any virus infection.
/--------------------------------------------
| Level | Ammo | Capacity | Power | Cost |
|============================================|
| 1 | 9 | 3 | S | - |
| 2 | 18 | 3 | S | 7 |
| 3 | 18 | 6 | S | 8 |
| 4 | 18 | 6 | S+ | 9 |
| 5 | Infinite | 6 | S+ | 10 |
--------------------------------------------/
__ __ _ __
/ // /__ ___ __ ____ __ | | /| / /__ ___ ____ ___ ___ ___
/ _ / -_) _ `/ |/ / // / | |/ |/ / -_) _ `/ _ / _ / _ (_-<
/_//_/__/_,_/|___/_, / |__/|__/__/_,_/ .__/___/_//_/___/
/___/ /_/
These are basically your boss battling weapons. The lack of ammo in a chapter
is what makes them basically useless against normal enemies unless you are
certain that you are about to run across some more ammo for them. They can be
useful for instantly clearing a room or finding hidden items in a room.
Weapons such as these truly shine during a boss battle - hit the boss in any
location regardless if it is a weak point or not and these weapons will take
some serious damage. Much like the grenade launchers and shotguns these
weapons take off more damage when a boss is hit from up close.
===
MRL
===
This is one of the best powerful weapons to carry with you for boss fights. It
has a high damage rate and its capacity is decent, even better than the normal
Rocket Launcher.
/--------------------------------------------
| Level | Ammo | Capacity | Power | Cost |
|============================================|
| 1 | 4 | 4 | A | - |
| 2 | 8 | 4 | A | 5 |
| 3 | 8 | 8 | A | 6 |
| 4 | 8 | 8 | A+ | 7 |
| 5 | Infinite | 8 | A+ | 8 |
--------------------------------------------/
===============
Rocket Launcher
===============
This is the first rocket launcher that is found. The only plus side to this
compared to the MRL is the fact that it reloads slightly quicker, has a
slightly faster rate of fire, and it can hold four more rockets total. The
differences are so very slight that they can be easily overlooked for the more
powerful MRL.
/--------------------------------------------
| Level | Ammo | Capacity | Power | Cost |
|============================================|
| 1 | 6 | 3 | B+ | - |
| 2 | 12 | 3 | B+ | 4 |
| 3 | 12 | 6 | B+ | 5 |
| 4 | 12 | 6 | A | 6 |
| 5 | Infinite | 6 | A | 7 |
--------------------------------------------/
=============
Anti-Tank Gun
=============
You point, you shoot, extreme damage is taken. The Anti-Tank Gun is the most
damaging weapon in the game. This is arguably the ultimate boss killer, though
some gamers, much like myself, may favor the MRL's higher ammo and capacity in
exchange for a higher damage when it comes to a boss fight.
/--------------------------------------------
| Level | Ammo | Capacity | Power | Cost |
|============================================|
| 1 | 2 | 1 | S | - |
| 2 | 4 | 1 | S | 8 |
| 3 | 4 | 2 | S | 9 |
| 4 | 4 | 2 | S+ | 10 |
| 5 | Infinite | 2 | S+ | 11 |
--------------------------------------------/
[FI00]
===============================================================================
________ __ __ __ __ _____ _____ __ __
/ ___ / / /__/ _ / / _ /__ /__// / _
/ _ / // / /_ / / / // / //_ /
/ / // /_/ /___//__ _ / / // /_ / / //__/ // _
/ ____/____/__/ __/ /_/ ____/ / __// /__/
F I L E A N D I T E M L I S T S
===============================================================================
=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=
A checklist of all the Files and Items for each chapter is listed below.
Want a nicely numbered printable list of all the hidden files without the item
location descriptions included? Want a list of all the items without the
files? Well, then visit my blog and click on the link to the right of the page
and enjoy.
http://berserkersblog.blogspot.com/
=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Train Derailment 1 Files
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
====================================
[ ] Memo on the Founding of Umbrella
====================================
Shoot the far chair at the second right table once both characters enter the
second floor dining cart.
==================================
[ ] Court Order for Transportation
==================================
When moving up the stairs for the first time, a zombie will meet the characters
at the top and stand still. Don't shoot him just yet! Look directly up and to
the left then shoot the furthest light on the left wall. If you miss, then
while stepping away from the many leeches in the dining cart, shoot the light
above the staircase from the other side of the room - it's very far back but
still shootable.
============================
[ ] Rebecca Chambers Profile
============================
Use the on-screen command to turn right after exiting the room that is jumped
to from the top of the train and shoot the light near the door at the end of
the corridor. Dogs will attack here and Billy and Rebecca will not go down the
corridor so you must hit it from a distance.
======================
[ ] Billy Coen Profile
======================
Blast the cabinet on the left before moving down the stairs of the corridor
where you have a choice of paths to find this. Shooting the chandelier right
before getting to the stairs will expose this also.
==========================
[ ] Ecliptic Express Notes
==========================
After moving downstairs, blast the small light above the exit door. This is
the room where many zombies will pop one at a time near the end - the two
characters will turn and face each of them individually.
=================
[ ] Stinger Notes
=================
Shoot the pile of boxes after the two characters run through the corridor of
leeches. They automatically make a run through this corridor, so just shoot
the boxes once they stop running.
========================
[ ] Raccoon Forest Notes
========================
In the room that both characters duck into after running into a Leech Man,
shoot the books on the left on the top shelf of the bookcase. The characters
will look to the left but move the analog to the left as well since they will
turn.
===============
[ ] Leech Notes
===============
Shoot the far chair near the right wall while fighting the Scorpion boss.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Train Derailment 1 Items
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
[ ] Herb - Near the beginning, by a door that zombies move through, in the room
with the staircase that leads up to the second floor.
[ ] Grenade - On the first table to the left while getting off the staircase
and entering the dining room.
[ ] Submachine Gun Ammo - On the second table to the right while stepping into
the dining room.
[ ] First Aid Spray - Right after climbing the ladder to the top of the train
this will be to the right.
[ ] Green Herb - When Rebecca and Billy move by the second set of leeches on
top of the first train cart, look into the hole in the middle of the train to
quickly catch a glimpse of this in the room through the hole.
[ ] Secondary Weapon Ammo - At the end of the first cart before Rebecca and
Billy jump to the second cart. This can be noticed from very far away.
[ ] Grenade - While fighting the two crawling zombies on top of the second
train cart, this will be lying behind the left zombie.
[ ] Submachine Gun Ammo - After the checkpoint, destroy the door to the outside
corridor before the characters open the door and this will be lying on the
floor to the right when the characters look to the right.
[ ] Green Herb - Choose to turn to the right after stepping out of the room
that both characters drop to after maneuvering along the outside and this will
be at the end of the corridor that they stare down. Dogs will attack from the
other side of the corridor. (NOT ON HARD MODE)
[ ] Shotgun Ammo - In front of the staircase that both characters take down to
the first floor.
[ ] Secondary Weapon Ammo - After walking downstairs, when the two characters
start to move down the train corridor then suddenly turn their backs as a group
of zombies move through the door behind them, shoot the light on the left to
find this item.
[ ] Green Herb - While the zombies get up in the middle of the corridor of
Passenger Cart 2, this will be lying next to the pair of zombies on the left.
(NOT ON NORMAL OR HARD MODE)
[ ] Shotgun Ammo - As the two characters step into the room with the leech
corridor, they will look to the right. This ammo will be on a table as they
look to the right. This train cart is right after the train cart where the two
characters turn in many directions to face zombies that get up from around the
passenger seats.
[ ] Green Herb - Right after the two move down the leech corridor, this will be
next to the corner of the hall on the right.
[ ] Green Herb - Once the two characters duck into the small room to evade the
Leech Man, this will be lying on a table to the left.
BOSS FIGHT ITEMS
[ ] Green Herb - On the right floor.
[ ] Submachine Gun Ammo - Shoot the chair on the back right side.
[ ] Shotgun Ammo - Shoot the table lamp on the right table.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Train Derailment 2 Files
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
===========================
[ ] Memo about Billy's Past
===========================
Once the characters enter the sewer, they will look right then left. Shoot the
light in the top corner near the ceiling when they look to the left. The pair
will turn to the right to notice zombies further down the waterway so it can be
shot then as well - look for the closest light on the left wall at that time.
========================
[ ] James Marcus Profile
========================
At the top of the ladder, shoot the candle on the wall to the right of the
front door.
========================
[ ] Mimicry Marcus Notes
========================
Above the picture of Dr. Marcus, two large statues lie against the wall on the
sides of the double doors - shoot the statue on the right and make it break to
reveal this.
====================
[ ] Eliminator Notes
====================
After stepping through the double doors and into the lecture room, shoot the
small lamp on the table with the green herb.
=============
[ ] Bat Notes
=============
After the checkpoint, when the characters enter the small corridor, shoot the
bust on the left at the end of the corridor. It's best to wait until the
leeches attack from below the side with the bust.
======================
[ ] Infected Bat Notes
======================
Once both characters finish the Leech Man/Leeches at the door of the study they
will turn and look at the elevator - shoot the table with the pen stand while
looking down and to the right. Basically, aim and shoot downward then to the
right while the characters look toward the elevator. The desk is extremely
close.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Train Derailment 2 Items
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
[ ] Secondary Weapon Ammo - After the characters walk through the sewers, they
will look toward the ladder and this will be next to the ladder.
[ ] Grenade - On the left side of the statue in front of the second floor
double doors leading to the lecture room (above the picture of Marcus).
[ ] Submachine Gun Ammo - While moving up the staircase to the right, after
looking at Marcus' portrait, this will be hanging on the second floor wall to
the left.
[ ] Green Herb - Right before moving to the second floor double doors, this
will be on the floor to the left. (NOT ON HARD MODE)
[ ] Green Herb - The characters will walk toward a small table in the Lecture
Room with this item on it.
[ ] Shotgun Ammo - Destroy the potted plant to the right of the small table
that the characters approach in the Lecture Room.
[ ] Submachine Gun Ammo - At the end of the outside second floor balcony.
[ ] Green Herb (<--NOT ON NORMAL OR HARD MODE)
[ ] Shotgun Ammo - While the first set of Leeches chase the characters, point
to the right and destroy the double doors that lead to the Library. The
Shotgun Ammo will be inside the Library. Destroying the doors will cause the
characters to immediately move into the Library if done early and limit your
chances for collecting the file in this area if you didn't get it while
fighting the Leech Man.
[ ] Grenade - On the desk to the right after entering the Library.
[ ] Green Herb - Next to the elevator in the Library.
[ ] Submachine Gun Ammo - Shoot the chair in front of the computers while the
characters are on the elevator. The Eliminators will be attacking at this
time.
[ ] First Aid Spray - While the characters back away from the elevator on the
floor above the study, shoot the plaque on the wall.
[ ] Submachine Gun Ammo - After moving up the elevator, shoot the middle row
item on the right shelf while the characters back up.
[ ] Green Herb - Near the fountain in the outside area. (NOT ON NORMAL OR HARD
MODE)
[ ] Submachine Gun Ammo - When the Eliminators attack in the outside area after
the elevator, this will be against the left side of the back railing.
[ ] Shotgun Ammo - On a cage to the right as the characters back into the cage
room.
[ ] Green Herb - After defeating the first set of Eliminators, this will be on
the ground to the right as the characters back up and prepare for the second
wave. It can be seen from across the room when the characters first enter the
cage room also.
[ ] Green Herb - While moving through the doors of the observatory, after
shooting both armors, shoot the left set of boxes - it's in the far right box.
[ ] Grenade - On top of the boxes on the bottom floor of the observatory.
BOSS FIGHT ITEMS
[ ] Green Herb - In front of the church doors and to the right.
[ ] Green Herb - On the roof of the church.
[ ] Shotgun Ammo
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Train Derailment 3 Files
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
==========================
[ ] Resident Evil 0 Digest
==========================
While the first crawling zombie crawls toward the characters, look to the right
and shoot the big light to the right.
============================
[ ] Resident Evil 0 Digest 2
============================
After the turntable stops, zombies will appear from the side of the room as the
characters look on. Shoot the light on the ceiling of the elevator corridor
where two zombies lurch. This light is to the left of the green light.
=====================
[ ] Queen Leech Notes
=====================
Directly after fighting Marcus (big leech man) the characters will walk through
a doorway and this will be inside of a box on the back left shelf. Throw a
grenade to the left while entering or, while staring at both shelves with both
characters on the elevator, shoot the left box on the right shelf, middle row.
This box is the only one on the middle row.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Train Derailment 3 Items
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
[ ] Grenade - Shoot the standing red cone to the right as the characters walk
toward the first set of steps.
[ ] First Aid Spray - At the top of the first set of stairs at the beginning.
[ ] Shotgun Ammo - While fighting the first two zombies in the area with the
turntable, this will be next to the back right wall.
[ ] Grenade Launcher Ammo - While looking out toward the turntable, shoot the
set of lights on the back left in the background.
[ ] Secondary Weapon Ammo - On a crate right near the light where the Grenade
Launcher Ammo is located.
[ ] Green Herb - Once the turntable gets to the bottom, this will on the floor
behind the left pair of zombies.
[ ] Shotgun Ammo - While facing the group of six zombies mentioned above, shoot
the green light above the right door.
[ ] Shotgun Ammo - Once the turntable is at the bottom, when the characters
face the three zombies behind them this will be on the back left.
[ ] Green Herb - While fighting the Prototype Tyrant look to the right to find
this on the floor, or when stepping behind his back look to the left. (NOT ON
HARD MODE)
[ ] Grenade - When the characters back up then swing around to the left after
getting out of the elevator, look to the left and grab this from the pipes to
the side. You can see this better by looking to the left while fighting the
second Leech Man.
[ ] Green Herb - After fighting the two Eliminators in the Pipe Room this will
be against the left wall of the other side of the room.
MIMICRY MARCUS BOSS FIGHT ITEMS
[ ] Green Herb - To the left as Marcus walks toward the characters.
[ ] Shotgun Ammo - To the right as Marcus walks toward the characters.
[ ] Grenade Launcher Ammo - Look down and grab this as the characters turn away
from Marcus and enter the corridor. This can also be seen when they turn to
the right to face Marcus from the corridor - look down.
[ ] Green Herb - On the ground to the left as soon as the characters step
through the door after the Marcus battle.
[ ] Shotgun Ammo - In a box on the shelf across from the lift directly after
the Marcus battle. While facing the shelves from the lift this is on the left
shelf, middle row, left box
LEECH QUEEN BOSS FIGHT ITEMS
[ ] Shotgun Ammo - Look to the left when first fighting the Leech Queen to see
this on a metal drum.
[ ] Secondary Weapon Ammo - On top of the forklift to the left after moving
away from the Leech Queen.
[ ] Green Herb - On the floor to the left after moving away from the Leech
Queen. (NOT ON NORMAL OR HARD MODE)
[ ] Shotgun Ammo - On the floor to the right after moving away from the Leech
Queen.
[ ] Green Herb - On the stairs to the right side of the room. Look to the
right of the roof opening where sunlight pours in.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Beginnings 1 Files
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
========================
[ ] Leech Growth Records
========================
While Wesker walks down the steps toward the railcart, shoot the red cone that
is standing in between the wall and the side of the bottom staircase. This can
be obtained at the very end of this mission as well.
==========================
[ ] William Birkin Profile
==========================
Shoot the computer monitor of the computer that points toward the green herb
pickup in the Power Room - use the Submachine Gun.
=============================
[ ] Reclamation Project Notes
=============================
When Wesker returns to the turntable, he will begin to sprint while backing up
to avoid the group of surrounding zombies. Look up on the left wall and shoot
the lower right light.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Beginnings 1 Items
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
[ ] First Aid Spray - On the drums to the left at the very beginning.
[ ] Submachine Gun Ammo
[ ] Secondary Weapon Ammo - Right as Wesker steps through the door this will be
on the wall to the left.
[ ] Magnum Ammo - While walking down the stairs pick this up on the structure
to the left as Wesker approaches the dead bodies.
[ ] Green Herb - While Wesker runs to the control panel for the turntable, this
will be next to the light up ahead. (NOT ON HARD MODE)
[ ] Green Herb - Lying on the floor to the right as Wesker first steps out onto
the turntable. Eliminators appear above this. (NOT ON NORMAL OR HARD MODE)
[ ] Green Herb - Right when Wesker starts on the turntable after its descent,
this will be on a metal drum in the right portion of the room ahead. Wesker
will eventually move in the direction of this item.
[ ] Magnum Ammo - Once Wesker gets out of the elevator, these will be above the
[ ] Green Herb door and in front of the door respectively.
[ ] Grenade - On the floor in front of the entrance to the Power Room.
[ ] Submachine Gun Ammo - While Wesker moves past the leeches, look on the
bottom floor to the right and pick up the glimmering object on the floor below.
[ ] Secondary Weapon Ammo - On the top monitor of the first row of monitors to
the left in the Power Room.
[ ] Green Herb - Lying on the counter below the monitors.
[ ] Green Herb - While back on the turntable, Wesker will turn to face
[ ] Submachine Gun Ammo a Crimson Head and these will be on the floor and on
the door behind it respectively.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Beginnings 2 Files
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
================================
[ ] Regulations for the Trainees
================================
While on the bridge that leads to the Training Facility, shoot the last non-lit
light on the left. When Wesker turns around near the Training Facility
entrance, the light will be on the right.
====================
[ ] Marcus's Diary 1
====================
In the outside portion with the fountain, shoot the light above the door on the
opposite side of the area. Eliminators will attack here.
================
[ ] Zombie Notes
================
Shoot the last light near the ceiling on the left in the Sewage Tunnel.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Beginnings 2 Items
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
[ ] Secondary Weapon Ammo - Near the wall to the left when starting.
[ ] First Aid Spray - Inside the belltower.
[ ] Grenade - On the stack of boxes on the first floor of the Observatory.
[ ] Submachine Gun Ammo - Near the boxes on the other side of the Observatory.
[ ] Green Herb - In a cage while Wesker fights the first Eliminator in the Cage
Room.
[ ] Rocket Launcher - Shoot the light on the left side of the pit with Web
Spinners.
[ ] Green Herb - Right when Wesker exits the Cage Room after being chased out
by the Eliminators, this will be next to the outside left as he opens the door.
(NOT ON NORMAL OR HARD MODE)
[ ] Green Herb - Lying in the chair in the Gear Room.
[ ] Submachine Gun Ammo - Shoot the plaque on the wall right beside the
elevator in the Gear Room.
[ ] Grenade - Shoot the table lamp by the computer on the large desk across
from the elevator while stepping off the elevator in the Library.
[ ] Rocket Launcher - Shoot the middle desk with the pen stand in the Library.
[ ] Submachine Gun Ammo - Shoot the left set of books on the desk near the door
(not on the side with the elevator).
[ ] Green Herb - Down the outside corridor, below the two busts.
[ ] Submachine Gun Ammo - On the wall at the checkpoint in the corridor.
[ ] Submachine Gun Ammo - Destroy the door leading out of the corridor right
after the checkpoint.
[ ] Secondary Weapon Ammo - Shoot the statue right when Wesker opens the double
doors to the Main Hall.
[ ] Grenade - Inside the torch to the left while moving down the first set of
stairs.
[ ] Green Herb - In front of the picture of Marcus. (NOT ON HARD MODE)
[ ] Submachine Gun Ammo - Facing the bottom of the main staircase, this is near
the wall to the right of it. A Crimson Head will be near it.
[ ] Green Herb - When the zombie attacks in the sewer, this will be in front of
the door behind him. (NOT ON HARD MODE)
BOSS FIGHT ITEMS
[ ] Green Herb - On a structure behind Ivan.
[ ] Submachine Gun Ammo - On the wall when Wesker turns.
[ ] Rocket Launcher - Behind the fallen train cart that Wesker runs behind.
Grab it fast when Wesker moves behind it!
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Mansion Incident 1 Files
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
==================
[ ] Keeper's Diary
==================
Once both characters enter the Dining Room, two zombies will attack from the
doorway. When the characters look to the right to face a third zombie, shoot
the vase on the small table behind the zombie for a First Aid Spray then shoot
the table for this file. A really good way to get this is to play with Chris
and allow the zombie to grab him then shake it off - Chris will kick the zombie
back into the vase and table breaking both of them.
==========================
[ ] Jill Valentine Profile
==========================
As the characters enter the main hall from the Dining Room, shoot the vase on
the small table near the stairs as they look for Wesker.
==========================
[ ] Chris Redfield Profile
==========================
When the characters first enter The Gallery, shoot the picture below the small
light on the opposite side next to the door.
===============================
[ ] Kenneth J. Sullivan Profile
===============================
As the characters dash into the corridor after exiting The Gallery, shoot the
painting before they turn down the left hall.
====================
[ ] S.T.A.R.S. Notes
====================
Looking at the suits of armor on the left when first entering the armor room,
shoot the third armor near the back.
=========================
[ ] Forest Speyer Profile
=========================
While fighting the dogs in the corridor outside the armor room, shoot the very
back cabinet on the right wall near the door. It is hard to see because the
hall is dark near the end.
============================================
[ ] Arklay Research Facility "Mansion" Notes
============================================
Right after shooting Forest, dogs will attack as the characters turn the corner
that he came from. Shoot the light on the wall in the back of the dogs.
==================
[ ] Cerberus Notes
==================
After fighting the dogs mentioned for the "Arklay Research Facility 'Mansion'
Notes", the characters will bust through the door and three crows will attack
in the room ahead. Look on the right wall and shoot the vase lying in the back
while the first crow attacks.
======================
[ ] Crimson Head Notes
======================
When the characters enter the corridor outside of the Library, they will hear a
woman yell out "Nooo!" When they are about to go around the corner near the
windows, throw a grenade and it will bust a small statue hanging on the side
wall on the left wall as they turn the corner that will contain this file. The
statue that contains the file is in an extremely dark portion of the wall near
the top just before the left alcove and the characters move by it rather fast
so a grenade is highly recommended here.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Mansion Incident 1 Items
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
[ ] First Aid Spray - Shoot the vase behind the third zombie to the right in
the Dining Room.
[ ] Grenade - While the crawling zombie moves toward the characters, this is
lying on a small table near the typewriter as the characters walk toward the
exit doors for the Dining Room.
[ ] Green Herb - At the opposite end of the dining table just before exiting
the Dining Room. (NOT ON NORMAL OR HARD MODE)
[ ] Shotgun Ammo - Shoot the middle statue in The Gallery.
[ ] Secondary Weapon Ammo - As the characters turn to face the group of zombies
in The Gallery, shoot the picture below the light in the direction that they
face. This is on the left side of the Gallery.
[ ] Green Herb - While the characters peak around the corner of the first floor
corridor, shoot the cabinet against the left wall.
[ ] Submachine Gun Ammo - Shoot the first door in the Dark Corridor then move
[ ] Shotgun Ammo inside that restroom and collect these items from
near the tub.
[ ] Shotgun Ammo - Destroy the door to the Stair Room right when the characters
turn to open it after the checkpoint.
[ ] Green Herb - Behind the first zombie that appears after the checkpoint.
[ ] Grenade - In the back of the armor room.
[ ] Shotgun Ammo
[ ] Green Herb
[ ] Submachine Gun Ammo - Shoot the first suit of armor to the right. This is
actually the second suit of armor, but it's the first one that you can see from
the door.
[ ] Secondary Weapon Ammo - When the characters race to the other side of the
second floor after spotting the Crimson Heads below, shoot the painting on the
wall in the direction that they run.
[ ] Green Herb - After fighting the two Crimson Heads on the Second Floor Main
Hall, destroy the door leading to the Outside Corridor before the characters
open it. (NOT ON NORMAL OR HARD MODE)
[ ] Shotgun Ammo - Shortly after fighting Forest, these items will be lying on
[ ] Green Herb the floor after fighting three crows.
[ ] Green Herb - Destroy the door leading to the Corridor Outside Library
before Chris and Jill open it. They will fight some zombies in the Long
Corridor then finally turn and open it.
BOSS FIGHT ITEMS
[ ] Green Herb - To the right when the battle with Yawn begins.
[ ] Submachine Gun
[ ] Green Herb - Choose to go up the ladder while fighting Yawn and this will
be on the walkway at the top. It has to be taken either while climbing the
ladder or while climbing down, not while the characters stand on the walkway.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Mansion Incident 2 Files
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
NOTE: This chapter must be played through twice in order to collect all files
since some are along the Guardhouse Path and one is along the Cave Path.
================
[ ] Hunter Notes
================
After moving through the gate and into the floodgate area, shoot the light on
the other side of the pool. This can be hit after moving across the drained
pool.
=================
[ ] Neptune Notes
=================
While walking out to the area across from the waterfall shoot the urn in front
of the waterfall while fighting the crawling zombie and other zombie. This is
in the left urn.
==============
[ ] Wasp Notes
==============
While fighting the zombies in front of the waterfall, shoot the right crow
statue in the background on the side of the gates to the guardhouse.
=====================
[ ] Web Spinner Notes
=====================
When first entering the guardhouse, grab the ammo directly ahead then shoot the
first hanging light while the characters move down the right hall. [GUARDHOUSE
PATH]
=====================
[ ] Black Tiger Notes
=====================
Shoot the coat rack across from the double doors entrance to the Game Room.
The best time to shoot it is after the Crimson Head enters the room - look to
the left at that time to see it. [GUARDHOUSE PATH]
===============
[ ] Adder Notes
===============
Shoot the light above the typewriter as the characters turn to the left for the
first time in the caves. [CAVE PATH]
==================
[ ] Plant 42 Notes
==================
While in the Guest Room, where the dead body lies on the bed, shoot the lamp to
the left. This is in the room where the zombie flies through the door shortly
before entering.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Mansion Incident 2 Items
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
[ ] First Aid Spray - When the characters turn to the left and face off against
the crawling zombie and standing zombie in the Floodgate Area, shoot the light
to the left in the background. This can also be shot when the characters first
enter the Floodgate area if you look to the left.
[ ] Green Herb - Near the ladder on the walkway across from the pool in the
Floodgate Area. (NOT ON NORMAL OR HARD MODE)
[ ] Grenade - While fighting the zombie in front of the waterfall this will be
lying on a background platform.
GUARDHOUSE PATH ITEMS
[ ] Submachine Gun Ammo - On a broken portion of the right wall while moving to
the front door of the guardhouse.
[ ] Shotgun Ammo - Directly in front of the characters after entering the
[ ] Grenade Guardhouse.
[ ] Green Herb - Shoot the small box under the Shotgun mentioned above. It's
in the dark right corner of the alcove.
[ ] Green Herb - On the second floor of the Game Room next to the pool table.
This can be collected while fighting the first few Web Spinners in this room -
watch for it to shine in the background.
[ ] Shotgun Ammo - Down the steps behind the railing near some folded chairs in
front of the bar.
[ ] Secondary Weapon Ammo - After walking further down the steps in front of
the bar, this will be behind the middle column.
CAVE PATH ITEMS
[ ] Shotgun Ammo - Near the typewriter to the left after the first left
[ ] Grenade turn.
[ ] Submachine Gun Ammo
[ ] Green Herb - On the metal flamethrower hangar to the right after stepping
through the first door in the caves.
EITHER PATH BACK IN THE GUARDHOUSE ITEMS
[ ] Green Herb - Lying in the floor across from a door in the corridor right
before getting to the door of the Guest Room. (NOT ON NORMAL OR HARD MODE)
[ ] Shotgun Ammo - On the Path to the Aqua Ring, these will be along the wall
[ ] Green Herb right before reaching a dead body. (GREEN HERB IS NOT ON
HARD MODE)
[ ] Submachine Gun Ammo - After fighting the three Hunters and the zombie along
the Path to the Aqua Ring, this will be on the floor around the right corner.
BOSS ITEMS
[ ] Shotgun Ammo - On the middle of the right staircase as the characters run
up them.
[ ] Shotgun Ammo - All on the second floor walkway.
[ ] Secondary Weapon Ammo
[ ] Green Herb
[ ] Green Herb
[ ] Shotgun Ammo - On the left staircase.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Mansion Incident 3 Files
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
NOTE: File 3 (Researcher's Letter) and File 8 (Resident Evil Digest 1) can be
collected in a different order depending on if you choose the Straight Path or
Dark Corridor path in the Main Basement Corridor. It is much easier to choose
the Straight Path (aka. do nothing when the "Enter" icon pops up)
============================================
[ ] Wesker Report Extract on the Tyrant Plan
============================================
After climbing down the ladder, the characters face two zombies, shoot the
light on the ceiling.
=================================
[ ] Mail to the Chief of Security
=================================
Look to the left and shoot the wooden stepper on the left side of the
stretchers once the characters move through the double door after descending
the ladder. This can also be shot while fighting the Crimson Head in this
area. He can actually be knocked back into it.
=======================
[ ] Researcher's Letter
=======================
When the characters enter the Main Basement Corridor, do not move down the dark
corridor. Let the characters move around the corner ahead. Shoot the top
small wooden stepper by the left wall near the stretcher once they pass by the
left set of shelves.
=================
[ ] Chimera Notes
=================
Fully destroy the computer monitor to the right while on the way to the power
switch controls.
========================
[ ] Brad Vickers Profile
========================
Before leaving the engine room, shoot the light above the double doors - this
can be hard to hit, so keep shooting.
========================
[ ] Tyrant (T-002) Notes
========================
Shoot the light on the ceiling in the Corridor Outside Lab after getting off
the elevator.
================
[ ] B.O.W. Notes
================
When the characters enter the lab, quickly shoot the big CPU to the right and
this will appear on the side of the destroyed monitor. This is all directly in
front of the characters and to the right a bit as they enter. A cutscene plays
shortly after this is in view.
==========================
[ ] Resident Evil Digest 1
==========================
When the characters enter the dark corridor down the right hall, shoot the
light at the bottom of the left wall while fighting the Chimera and zombies.
==========================
[ ] Resident Evil Digest 2
==========================
Right as the characters step through the doors of the corridor that lead to the
emergency elevator, shoot the second light up above them as they run. The
first light cannot be destroyed. The characters will turn back around and
fight two Hunters afterward. It can still be shot then, but I would advise
throwing a grenade at that point.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Mansion Incident 3 Items
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
[ ] First Aid Spray - Shoot the light above the ladder after fighting the first
group of zombies
[ ] Shotgun Ammo - On a pipe along the left wall after climbing down the
ladder.
[ ] Secondary Weapon Ammo - As the characters look around the corner near the
[ ] Grenade staircase in the First Floor Corridor these will be
on the floor.
[ ] Shotgun Ammo - Near the left wall down the dark corridor in the Basement
Main Corridor. You don't have to go down the corridor to get it, just look to
the left while passing by it and grab it.
[ ] Shotgun Ammo - Near the set of shelves around the corner in the Basement
[ ] Green Herb Main Corridor.
[ ] Green Herb - Look down the left corridor right before exiting the Basement
Main Corridor and collect this as the Chimera moves beside it.
[ ] Shotgun Ammo - In the reddish colored Engine Room, these will be on the
[ ] Grenade fence near the door and on a pipe across from the door
respectively. These will respawn if the characters die and
return to the checkpoint in the Engine Room ahead.
[ ] Shotgun Ammo - Lying on the floor across from the elevator switch controls.
[ ] Green Herb - When the characters reenter the first Engine Room this will be
directly across from them before they turn. (NOT ON NORMAL OR HARD MODE)
[ ] Shotgun Ammo - When the character turn to face the zombies followed by the
vomiting zombie in the first Engine Room, this will be on the wall above where
the vomiting zombie appear.
[ ] Secondary Weapon Ammo - In the right corner of the Corridor Outside Lab
[ ] Green Herb after stepping off of the elevator.
[ ] Green Herb - In the left corner of the Corridor to Engine Room when the
Chimera and two zombies attack on the way back.
[ ] Green Herb - At the top of the stairs in the First Floor Corridor while
leaving the Main Basement Corridor. (NOT ON NORMAL OR HARD MODE)
[ ] Shotgun Ammo - After defeating the single Hunter in the Corridor to
[ ] Green Herb Emergency Elevator these will be behind the railing on the
left and right side respectively as the characters move
around the left corridor ahead. They both blend in with the
pipes and you'll have to turn the camera a bit to the left
to see the Green Herb. (GREEN HERB IS NOT ON HARD MODE)
BOSS FIGHT ITEMS
[ ] Green Herb - All lying around the Heliport during the fight with the
[ ] Green Herb Tyrant.
[ ] Green Herb
[ ] MRL Ammo - When the Tyrant reaches its last 25% of life AND it is at a
distance from the characters, Brad will throw this out from the helicopter.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Nightmare 1 Files
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
=================
[ ] Richard Aiken
=================
At the end of the hall after fighting the first dog, shoot the right stack of
books on the desk while the characters stare at the zombie outside the window.
========================
[ ] Edward Dewey Profile
========================
Shoot the last light on the left as the characters step toward the ladder at
the end of the Cave Tunnel.
==============
[ ] Crow Notes
==============
While the characters move toward the lift at the Waterfall Area, look to the
left to find two pots on the ground. Shoot the back pot for this.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Nightmare 1 Items
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
[ ] Grenade - Look to the right while starting in the Guest Room to see it on
some drawers.
[ ] First Aid Spray - Shoot the light on the left wall while heading toward the
door of the Guest Room.
[ ] Assault Shotgun - Destroy the first door in the Guest Room with the
Submachine Gun HP.
[ ] Submachine Gun HP Ammo - After the zombie breaks through the window, shoot
the bottom left picture on the row of shelves by the door at the end of the
corridor.
[ ] Secondary Weapon Ammo - Shoot the middle glass bottles on the right table
in front of the bar table below the steps.
[ ] Green Herb - At the far end of the pool table up the stairs.
[ ] Assault Shotgun - On top of the pool table up the stairs.
[ ] Green Herb - After exiting the Game Room, this will be in the left
corridor. (NOT ON HARD MODE)
[ ] Green Herb - While fighting the Black Tigers in their nest, look to the
right to see this.
[ ] Submachine Gun HP Ammo - On the back right wall after stepping out of the
Black Tiger nest - at the checkpoint.
[ ] Green Herb - In the Boulder Tunnel, this will be further down the tunnel as
the characters turn to the right. Zombies will attack as they turn, making
them stop. (NOT ON HARD MODE)
[ ] Green Herb - In the alcove with the typewriter.
[ ] Grenade
[ ] Assault Shotgun - On a bench to the left after stepping out from under the
waterfall.
[ ] Grenade - On the back right bench after stepping out from the waterfall.
[ ] Green Herb - Near the bench with the grenade pickup. It comes into view
after fighting a few enemies.
[ ] Secondary Weapon Ammo - Destroy the bench that the grenade was on.
[ ] Green Herb - Lying near the exit door in the Courtyard. Where all the
small spiders and wasps attack. This can be seen shining up ahead while
fighting the first set of crows. (NOT ON NORMAL OR HARD MODE)
[ ] Green Herb - While fighting the first set of dogs in the courtyard, this
will be at the top of the steps near the gate.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Nightmare 2 Files
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
=========================
[ ] Enrico Marini Profile
=========================
When the characters step through the first set of double doors (or they may
blow them open) after fighting two Hunters, look on the left wall once they
turn the corner and shoot the large painting. Both characters will look toward
the windows by default.
====================================
[ ] Sealed Letter to Sergei Vladimir
====================================
Once the characters enter the first floor main hall, they will check the front
doors to find that they are locked. When they turn, a Hunter and Wasps will
attack. Look to the right of the main staircase to barely make out a small
round painting on the back right wall. Shoot it then collect the file. This
can be shot while the characters move toward the stairs as well.
==============
[ ] Yawn Notes
==============
Right before the characters open the double doors to the Library, shoot the
painting at the end of the hall.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Nightmare 2 Items
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
[ ] First Aid Spray - Shoot the long cabinet to the left after turning the
first corner - it's kind of dark in this section.
[ ] Magnum Revolver Ammo - Shoot the picture on the left wall just past the
door on the left.
[ ] Submachine Gun HP Ammo - Blast the first set of double doors with the
Submachine Gun HP before the characters open them.
[ ] Grenade - On top of the cabinet to the left while fighting the five Adders.
[ ] Submachine Gun HP Ammo - Shoot the door to the bathroom in the Dark
[ ] Green Herb Corridor then grab the ammo on the sink and choose
to move toward the toilet to collect the green
herb.
[ ] Magnum Revolver Ammo - On the first cabinet in the hall with the dead
bodies.
[ ] Secondary Weapon Ammo - After fighting the single zombie at the doors of
the Gallery, shoot the top painting in the middle portion of the left wall.
[ ] Green Herb - Shoot the statue on the stand in the center of the Gallery.
[ ] Green Herb - When the characters first enter the Main Hall, shoot the vase
on the small table next to the bottom of the stairs. (NOT ON HARD MODE)
[ ] Grenade - Shoot the vase on the small table to the right of the front doors
as the characters run to them.
[ ] Submachine Gun HP Ammo - While the characters face away from the double
doors in the main hall, look to the left and shoot the first chair against the
wall.
[ ] Green Herb - On the left side of the Second Floor Main Hall as the
characters step toward the windows. (NOT ON NORMAL OR HARD MODE)
[ ] Grenade - When the characters turn to face the Hunter and Wasps in the
Outside Corridor, this will be behind the right railing in the back.
[ ] Green Herb - While running from Yawn in the Outside Corridor, this will be
behind the railing to the left across from the exit door.
[ ] Submachine Gun HP Ammo - While passing by the stairway railing as Yawn
chases the characters, this will be on the floor near the left wall.
[ ] Grenade - Destroy the statue on the stand that the characters move toward
after opening the door to the corridor leading to the Library.
[ ] Secondary Weapon Ammo - Shoot the second small statue on the dark left wall
as the characters round the corner to head to the Library doors before the
characters move by the alcove mentioned below. This is where File #9 is
located in the Mansion Incident 1 chapter.
[ ] Magnum Revolver Ammo - In the left alcove while moving down the Corridor
[ ] Green Herb Outside Library. (GREEN HERB IS NOT ON HARD MODE)
BOSS FIGHT ITEMS
[ ] Green Herb - On the first crate beside the stacked crates during the Yawn
fight.
[ ] Magnum Revolver - Blast the top crate during the Yawn fight and this will
be on the top shelf of the bookcase behind that crate.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Rebirth 1 Files
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
=======================
[ ] A Letter to Someone
=======================
At the very beginning of this chapter, shoot the monitor in the back on the
right before Wesker turns to face the two Chimeras.
==============
[ ] Virus Memo
==============
In the Main Basement Corridor, while moving down the left corridor, after
choosing the left path, shoot the final light on top of the left wall while
moving toward the gate. If the right path is taken, this light can be seen at
the very end of the dark corridor.
=====================
[ ] Someone's Journal
=====================
In the First Floor Corridor, shoot the wooden stepper on the stretcher as
Wesker runs by it before he opens the double doors that lead to the ladder.
This can also be shot while fighting the four Hunters that pursue Wesker
afterward. Use the Submachine Gun HP to shoot it. It's very dark near the
stretcher making it hard to see the stepper from a distance. This is in the
same location as File #2 on the Mansion Incident 3 chapter.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Rebirth 1 Items
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
[ ] First Aid Spray - After fighting the four Chimeras in front of the entrance
doorway to the lab, shoot the monitor in the back on the left. In the Mansion
Incident 3, this is where File #7 is located.
[ ] Assault Shotgun Ammo - On the floor to the right of the exit doorway in the
[ ] Grenade lab.
[ ] Green Herb - To the right of the elevator door outside of the lab. (NOT ON
HARD MODE)
[ ] Submachine Gun HP Ammo - To the right as Wesker steps out of the elevator.
[ ] Grenade - In front of the dark corridor, down the right path while choosing
paths. Look to the far right while the move icons are up in order to pick this
up without choosing the right path.
[ ] Green Herb - Down the left path, to the right near the shelves in the Main
[ ] Grenade Basement Corridor
[ ] Secondary Weapon Ammo - Down the left path, shoot the items on the second
shelf from the top to the right.
[ ] Assault Shotgun Ammo - On the top portion of the left wall once the group
of Chimeras and Hunters attack.
[ ] Green Herb - Near the end of the dark corridor.
[ ] Green Herb - In the corner of the First Floor Corridor where Wesker turns
left to reach the Ladder Room. (NOT ON NORMAL OR HARD MODE)
[ ] Secondary Weapon Ammo - While shooting the zombies at the top of the
stairs, shoot the lit up sign on the right wall.
[ ] Submachine Gun HP Ammo - As Wesker opens the double doors to the Ladder
[ ] Green Herb Room, these will be in front of the ladder.
[ ] Grenade (NOT ON HARD MODE)
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Rebirth 2 Files
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
==================
[ ] Family Picture
==================
Once Wesker exits the Armor Room, after grounding Lisa, he will turn the corner
to the left and a Hunter will jump at him. Destroy the first table to the
right to find this file.
=======================
[ ] Trevor Family Notes
=======================
While fighting the two Hunters in the Dark Corridor after the checkpoint, shoot
the large painting on the back wall across from the window and cabinets.
=======================
[ ] Lisa Trevor Profile
=======================
In the Gallery, shoot the small painting below the light on the back left wall.
The best time to do this is after finishing the second Chimera.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Rebirth 2 Items
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
[ ] Grenade Launcher Ammo - To the left of the front doors of the main hall.
[ ] Assault Shotgun - As Wesker approaches the railing at the top of the main
[ ] Grenade staircase, these will be behind it.
[ ] Grenade Launcher - Destroy the first cabinet on the left in the Corridor
Outside Armor Room while Wesker moves quickly down the corridor.
[ ] First Aid Spray - Destroy the second cabinet on the right almost directly
after the one that contains the Grenade Launcher in the Corridor Outside Armor
Room.
[ ] Grenade - To the right near the armor while fighting the Hunters in the
Armor Room.
[ ] Green Herb - Behind the stand in the middle of the Armor Room when Wesker
backs up after Lisa enters.
[ ] Secondary Weapon Ammo - Destroy the first armor to the left in the Armor
Room after Lisa enters and Wesker backs up. It's the first armor that appears
while looking to the left.
[ ] Green Herb - Once Wesker exits the Armor Room, shoot the lamp on the back
right table.
[ ] Grenade - When Wesker steps into the Stair Room, grab this from near the
railing before he turns to see Lisa behind him.
[ ] Green Herb - In the middle of the Stair Room staircase, below the multitude
of hanging paintings. (NOT ON HARD MODE)
[ ] Secondary Weapon Ammo - Shoot the large painting on the left wall while
Wesker moves toward the windows in the Dark Corridor. It may pay you to shoot
this once he steps further into the room and is facing the Hunters.
[ ] Green Herb - Near the wall while turning the corner in the Dark Corridor
after the checkpoint.
[ ] Assault Shotgun - When Wesker steps toward the cabinets in the Dark
Corridor after turning the corner, this will be on one of the cabinets.
[ ] Assault Shotgun - When Wesker turns the corner after facing both Hunters in
the Dark Corridor, destroy the first door to the left to make Wesker look
inside the bathroom. Collect this from the floor inside.
[ ] Grenade - Shoot the first cabinet to the right while moving down the First
Floor Corridor.
[ ] Green Herb - On the left side of the Gallery. (NOT ON NORMAL OR HARD MODE)
BOSS FIGHT ITEMS
[ ] Green Herb - Near the bottom of the staircase while fighting Lisa.
[ ] Green Herb - Near a column on the back right while facing Lisa's back.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Raccoon's Destruction 1 Files
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
================
[ ] Jill's Diary
================
Once the characters open the double doors and step forward to the area behind
the fuel truck, look for the three red cones behind the group of approaching
zombies. Shoot the furthest cone on the left side.
===========================
[ ] Carlos Oliveira Profile
===========================
After dealing with some crows perched on a excavator, the characters will move
across a bridge. Shoot the box against the building on the other side of the
bridge.
======================
[ ] Raccoon City Notes
======================
On the street that the characters climb to via the ladder they face some
zombies right near a car. Shoot the car and this file will be revealed once
they move around the side of the car thanks to the explosion. Its true
location is inside of the second blockade piece around the side of the car.
===================
[ ] Reporter's Memo
===================
Shoot the light that sticks out of the wall at the top of the fourth set of
stairs in the building. A green herb is on the floor across from it.
================
[ ] Dario's Memo
================
On the bottom floor of the building, the characters will square off against
three vomiter zombies. Shoot the fire extinguisher in the back of them while
moving down the last set of stairs. The fire extinguisher is a silver color
and the area is dark so it blends in a bit.
==================
[ ] U.B.C.S. Notes
==================
Shoot the lower box on the set of boxes to the right while fighting the third
group of zombies in the alley behind the building. This is the last set of
zombies before the characters turn and move into the right alleyway.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Raccoon's Destruction 1 Items
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
[ ] Submachine Gun HP Ammo - Near the beginning, this will be in front of the
entrance to J's Bar to the left. It can be seen after moving past the first
car or it can be seen by shooting the box to the left at the very beginning.
[ ] Grenade - On the other side of a burning car near a hunched over zombie.
[ ] Green Herb - After passing through the open double doors, when the
characters turn to face zombies, this will be beside the right door.
[ ] Assault Shotgun Ammo - After opening the double doors and stepping through
them to the area behind the fuel truck, shoot the first box on the left.
[ ] Fire Aid Spray - Before the characters jump into the waterway, this is in
front of a barred tunnel below. This can be seen a few times from the side of
the waterway, but it cannot be retrieved once the characters jump down and
begin to move in the water.
[ ] Submachine Gun HP Ammo - Shoot the sign in front of the doors that the
characters look toward after climbing the sewer ladder. Zombies will move
through that doorway soon.
[ ] Assault Shotgun Ammo - After climbing the sewer ladder, this will be on the
back dumpster near the burning wreckage in the back of the alley once the
characters run from the zombies.
[ ] Green Herb - Near a group of zombies while returning from the dead end
alley. (NOT ON HARD MODE)
[ ] Secondary Weapon Ammo - After moving down the street from the dead end
alley, the characters will face a building with a neon sign inside. Shoot the
window on the left and be sure to clear the glass on the bottom in order to
grab this inside.
[ ] Assault Shotgun Ammo - Destroy the pile of boxes behind the zombies after
turning from the building with the neon sign in the window.
[ ] Assault Shotgun Ammo - When the characters open the door down a bright
path, they will turn to the right after walking through the doorway to fight a
zombie. Shoot the box and boards on the ground behind the zombie. The item is
in the boards.
[ ] Submachine Gun HP Ammo - After dealing with the crows on the excavator,
shoot the box on the other side of the bridge (the one near the bridge).
[ ] Green Herb - Near a car after the characters move in between some cars
after fighting the burning zombies. [LEFT PATH] (NOT ON NORMAL OR HARD MODE)
[ ] Green Herb - After escaping the crows on the street, this will be beside
the rooftop entrance of a building before the characters enter. [LEFT PATH]
[ ] Submachine HP Ammo - Once the three vomiting zombies have been defeated in
the building, this will be on the stairs by the next set of zombies. [LEFT
PATH]
[ ] Green Herb - After moving down the third set of stairs in the building this
will be on the floor to the left shortly before fighting a Hunter. [LEFT PATH]
[ ] Green Herb - On the bottom floor of the building as the characters turn to
the right after moving down the stairs. [LEFT PATH]
[ ] Assault Shotgun Ammo - This will be visible in the right portion of the
background when the characters step forward from defeating a crawling zombie.
[RIGHT PATH]
[ ] Grenade - Lying on the middle shelf in the storage room.
[ ] Secondary Weapon Ammo - On some shelves in the back of the storage room
[ ] Green Herb after the Hunter attacks.
[ ] Assault Shotgun Ammo - Destroy the back left box in the boxes to the right
after stepping into the alley behind the building.
[ ] Submachine Gun HP Ammo - In a box, near a steel column, to the right of a
car as the second group of zombies attack outside of the building. Shoot the
red barrel and parked car to easily find this.
[ ] Green Herb - Across from a door as the characters look to the left after
taking down the third set of zombies outside the building.
[ ] Assault Shotgun Ammo - Destroy the green dumpster on the left side of the
bridge before entering the bridge tunnel.
[ ] Submachine Gun HP Ammo - In the left corner after moving across the bridge.
[ ] Submachine Gun HP Ammo - After the two Hunters attack on the other side of
the bridge, crows will attack. Look down and shoot the green dumpster for
this.
[ ] Green Herb - Down the first set of stairs after moving across the bridge.
[ ] Assault Shotgun Ammo - To the right as the characters reach the bottom of
the stairs. They will turn to find tons of zombies along the street. This can
be grabbed while the characters quickly turn or while they fight the zombie
horde.
BOSS FIGHT ITEMS
[ ] Assault Shotgun Ammo - All around the street while fighting the
[ ] Green Herb Gravedigger.
[ ] Green Herb
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Raccoon's Destruction 2 Files
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
======================
[ ] Grave Digger Notes
======================
Shoot the horizontal light above the restroom door while the characters fight
the zombies that move through the doorway of the restroom. A scream will be
heard shortly before the characters turn to face these zombies.
================
[ ] Licker Notes
================
After shooting the lone zombie in the restroom, the characters will check the
fallen woman's body then turn to face two zombies that move out of the stalls
behind them. Destroy the stall door to the left while facing the zombies.
This particular door can only be shot while fighting these two zombies.
=============
[ ] Ivy Notes
=============
After fighting a group of three Lickers, the characters will open a door and
find roaches on the left wall, shoot the first light on the ceiling down the
hall.
=====================
[ ] Large Roach Notes
=====================
After the second group of roaches attack, the characters will meet two Lickers
down a corridor. Point to the door on the right while fighting them and choose
to "Enter" the Green Room. Shoot the big lunch bag on the far right end of the
bench when the characters face two zombies in between the lockers to the right.
=================
[ ] Monitor Notes
=================
In the staircase room with roaches, shoot the small vertical light on the top
portion of the wall in the middle of the staircase. This is on the left wall
and it must be shot while the characters are near the top of the staircase.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Raccoon's Destruction 2 Items
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
[ ] Assault Shotgun Ammo - Lying beside the opposite wall when the characters
face the group of zombies in the first Subway Station. There is a red barrel
to the left at this time.
[ ] Green Herb - Lying beside the feasting zombie in the restroom.
[ ] First Aid Spray - While the single zombie attacks in the restroom, shoot
the small horizontal light on the back wall to the left of him.
[ ] Grenade - When the characters move down the staircase after checking the
restroom, this will be in a corner at the bottom.
[ ] Green Herb - In front of a staircase in the Dark Subway tunnel after the
characters climb off of the tracks. There are some crawling zombies in the
area.
[ ] Submachine Gun HP Ammo - Near the left wall when the second and third
Licker bust through the vent cover on the wall.
[ ] Assault Shotgun Ammo - To the left at the top of the stairs after fighting
the two Lickers in the Subway Tunnel.
[ ] Green Herb - In between some columns to the left when running from the four
Lickers. (NOT ON NORMAL OR HARD MODE)
[ ] Assault Shotgun Ammo - While running from the four Lickers, look to the
left and grab this before the character turn OR after fighting the three
Lickers and after moving down the steps, look to the left as the characters
move to the other side of the room to find this.
[ ] Grenade - When four Lickers chase the characters up some stairs, this will
be at the top of the stairs on the right.
[ ] Green Herb - Lying on the back left floor as three Lickers attack after
moving back down the stairs.
[ ] Secondary Weapon Ammo - In the Subway Corridor (with roaches) when the
characters turn to the right to face a Licker, this will be in the back of that
corridor.
[ ] Submachine Gun HP Ammo - Just before the characters open the door to the
Green Room, they will look to the right and this will be near the top portion
of the left wall. This portion of the left wall sticks out a bit. It's
possible to grab this after turning from the first hall with the single Licker,
but it's hard to pinpoint.
[ ] Submachine Gun HP Ammo - On and near a bed respectively when the characters
[ ] Green Herb turn right for the second time in the Green Room.
[GREEN ROOM PATH]
[ ] Assault Shotgun Ammo - At the bottom of the Staircase Room with roaches.
[ ] Green Herb
[ ] Secondary Weapon Ammo - When the characters first enter the Dark Corridor,
this will be to the left.
[ ] Submachine Gun HP Ammo - When the Hunters begin to pile up and chase the
characters at the beginning of the Dark Corridor area, the characters will run
down a corridor and this will be to the left - look down and to the left.
[ ] Green Herb - When the characters are cornered in the Dark Corridor with
Hunters rushing at them from both sides, this will be down the right corridor.
This is around the time that Jill says, "They're learned to hunt in groups!"
(NOT ON NORMAL OR HARD MODE)
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Raccoon's Destruction 3 Files
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
===================
[ ] Fax from the HQ
===================
Near the beginning, when the characters first step into the reception hallway
area, they will face three zombies. They will move forward and fight off two
more zombies. Of the two pots against the back wall, shoot the small pot in
the far left corner of the back wall while fighting the two zombies. The
corner is very dark and this is hard to see, so just aim to the left of the
zombies and watch for the cursor to change. This can be shot or retrieved when
Nemesis first busts through the ceiling since he will be standing right by it.
==================================
[ ] Nemesis T-Type (Pursuer) Notes
==================================
Shoot the small horizontal light near the floor next to the fallen policeman in
the small corridor that the characters enter from the office area. There is a
First Aid Spray near this as well.
============================
[ ] Resident Evil 3 Digest 1
============================
While the characters fight two Lickers above the stairs to the basement, shoot
the cabinet in the dark corner to the right in front of the stairs. You'll
have to turn the camera all the way to the right to barely see it or you can
shoot it while in the hall, before the Lickers attack.
============================
[ ] Resident Evil 3 Digest 2
============================
After exiting the morgue and fighting two dogs, the characters will continue to
move down the basement corridor toward the garage door. Shoot the horizontal
light near the floor on the left wall across from the door to the garage before
they walk up to the door after turning the left corner.
========================
[ ] Barry Burton Profile
========================
When the characters turn to the left to fight the second pack of dogs in the
garage, shoot the red cone beside the car. The easiest way to get this is to
shoot the car at the end of the garage and it will destroy the cone during the
explosion.
====================
[ ] Operation Report
====================
Facing the doors of the R.P.D. building, shoot the lamp on the right in front
of the entrance doors while out in the courtyard. Shoot this while fighting
the three dogs near the entrance or shortly afterwards before the characters
start to fight the zombies at the front gate.
================
[ ] R.P.D. Notes
================
Shoot the computer monitor on the circular counter while fighting the Hunters
near the ladder in the First Floor Main Lobby of the R.P.D. building.
=====================
[ ] Mail to the Chief
=====================
After destroying Nemesis' rocket launcher, shoot the paper attached to the top
portion of the wall behind the counter in the Save Room that the characters
move into. A zombie will appear behind this counter while the characters leave
the room.
=======================
[ ] Brian Irons Profile
=======================
Shoot the "Exit" sign above the door after shooting the two Lickers at the end
of the Second Floor Corridor. An MRL Ammo pickup is near this door.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Raccoon's Destruction 3 Items
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
[ ] Submachine Gun HP Ammo - At the beginning, while walking up the steps in
the main hall, this will be off to the left near the door that the characters
head for.
[ ] Submachine Gun HP Ammo - When the characters enter the office area they
[ ] Green Herb will fight a few zombies then move forward and
[ ] Grenade look into a room containing these three items.
The ammo is on the desk and the other two are on
the floor. (GREEN HERB IS NOT ON HARD MODE)
[ ] First Aid Spray - The characters will enter a small corridor on the far
side of the office. Grab this from next to the policeman corpse from the right
side near the door that they open to the Outside Staircase.
[ ] Submachine Gun HP Ammo - While fighting the dog at the Outside Staircase,
look to the left to see this under the stairs. It can also be retrieved while
facing Nemesis at the bottom of the stairs.
[ ] Submachine Gun HP Ammo - After stunning Nemesis on the Outside Staircase,
destroy the door at the other end of the small corridor that the characters
will open to enter the First Floor Corridor.
[ ] Secondary Weapon Ammo - While fighting the two Lickers in the hall next to
the stairs, this will be in the lit area to the left of the staircase railing.
[ ] Submachine Gun HP Ammo - Shoot the morgue drawers when the characters turn
[ ] Green Herb on the light and fight the zombies in the morgue.
[ ] Grenade It is actually better to just throw a grenade
right as the characters turn on their flashlights.
[ ] Green Herb - When the characters exit the morgue, they will look down the
hall to the right. This will be near the objects at the end of that hall. It
can be retrieved earlier before entering the morgue once you know where it is.
[ ] Secondary Weapon Ammo - Near the left column in the garage when the first
set of dogs attack.
[ ] Green Herb - While fighting the first group of dogs in the Garage this will
be next to the right column. (NOT ON NORMAL OR HARD MODE)
[ ] Green Herb - When the characters turn to fight some zombies next to the
small gate with zombies outside of it, this will be in the back of the
attacking zombies.
[ ] Grenade - Across from the entrance to the R.P.D. building. Grab this after
fighting the three dogs in the courtyard.
[ ] Green Herb - On the counter while fighting the Hunters near the back
ladder. (NOT ON NORMAL OR HARD MODE)
[ ] Submachine Gun HP Ammo - In between the circular counter area while
fighting the Hunters in front of the ladder in the First Floor Main Hall.
[ ] Green Herb - When the characters look to the left after climbing to the
second floor of the main hall quickly grab this from the ground. It can also
be collected as the view zooms in before the first Hunter attack.
[ ] Submachine Gun HP Ammo - After destroying Nemesis' rocket launcher, these
[ ] Green Herb will be on the floor in the next room. Right and
left respectively.
[ ] Green Herb - Destroy the door in the corridor outside of the Save Room that
leads to the Second Floor Corridor. Once the characters exit the Save Room
then just shoot the next door with a secondary weapon.
[ ] Submachine Gun HP Ammo - When the characters fight two zombies in the
Second Floor Corridor, this will be on the floor behind the zombies.
[ ] MRL Ammo - Two Lickers will attack at the end of the Second Floor corridor
and this will be on the ground near them.
BOSS FIGHT ITEMS
[ ] Green Herb - Lying in the area while fighting Nemesis during the boss
battle.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Death's Door Files
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
====================
[ ] Ada Wong Profile
====================
Destroy the standing sign in front of the Apple Inn entrance as Ada approaches
the building after climbing out of the sewers.
============================
[ ] Resident Evil 2 Digest 1
============================
When Ada first steps into the Apple Inn Lobby, shoot the painting on the wall
across from her - it has a light above it.
============================
[ ] Resident Evil 2 Digest 2
============================
Shoot the blinking exit sign as Ada walks to the top floor of the building. A
First Aid Spray is at the top as Ada walks up the stairs.
===========
[ ] G Notes
===========
After fighting the many crows on the roof of the building, Ada will approach a
ramp that will lead to the boss fight. Find the two barrels directly across
from the ramp, on the other side, and destroy the right barrel before, during,
or after the boss fight. The file will appear near the left barrel but only
the right barrel has to be shot for it to appear.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Death's Door Items
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
[ ] Shotgun SA Ammo - This can be seen in the back end of the tunnel as Ada
moves ahead. It can be grabbed from very far away, just line up the red dot on
the targeting cursor with it and grab it.
[ ] Shotgun SA Ammo - As Ada turns to fight the first Web Spinner quickly pick
this up from behind it before shooting the Web Spinner. It can be grabbed from
far away just like the other Shotgun SA pickup when Ada turns at the end of the
tunnel.
[ ] Grenade Launcher HP Ammo - As Ada turns the left corner after fighting the
Hunter, this will be on the ground.
[ ] Green Herb - On the street near the manhole as Ada climbs out of the sewer.
[ ] Shotgun SA Ammo - Near the entrance to the Apple Inn where the dog group
attacks.
[ ] Shotgun SA Ammo - While Ada backs away from the manhole, look down to spot
a small wooden crate, destroy the crate to find this inside. Get this before
she fights the dogs.
[ ] Grenade Launcher HP Ammo - On a bench as Ada steps into the Lobby of the
Apple Inn.
[ ] Shotgun SA Ammo - When Ada turns to fight the zombies on the left this will
be in the fireplace on the back wall.
[ ] Green Herb - On the front counter as Ada turns to the right after fighting
the group of zombie in the Lobby. (NOT ON HARD MODE)
[ ] Grenade - Lying on a bench as Ada turns to fight the last two Hunters in
the Lobby. This can be grabbed along with the Shotgun SA as Ada enters the
Lobby - you just have to know that it is on the other side of that item pickup.
[ ] Green Herb - On the street in front of Ada after grappling over the burning
wreckage in the street.
[ ] Grenade Launcher HP Ammo - After fighting off the first six zombies on the
street past the burning wreckage, shoot the red barrel up ahead as the zombies
walk by it and the box that this is in will be destroyed. It's true location
is in the bottom box of the set of boxes.
[ ] Shotgun SA Ammo - Shoot the second red barrel down the alley in front of
the entrance to the building and this will appear behind it.
[ ] Shotgun SA Ammo - On the shelf across from Ada as she enters the Storage
[ ] Green Herb Room. (GREEN HERB IS NOT ON NORMAL AND HARD MODE)
[ ] Grenade - On the left shelf as Ada moves in between the sets of shelves in
the Storage Room.
[ ] Shotgun SA Ammo - After fighting the first Licker, this will be at the top
of the stairs where he was.
BOSS FIGHT ITEMS (and afterwards)
[ ] Secondary Weapon Ammo - Near a car during the boss fight.
[ ] Green Herb
[ ] Green Herb - As Ada moves away from the zombies after the boss fight, this
will be lying near a van when she stops.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Fourth Survivor Files
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
================
[ ] HUNK Profile
================
After fighting the last set of dogs in the garage, HUNK will turn and look at
the door that he just came from. Shoot the red "Exit" sign above that distant
door to reveal this file.
===========================
[ ] Umbrella Special Forces
===========================
In the First Floor Corridor that HUNK enters after climbing the basement
staircase, he will fight three dogs then eventually turn the right corner up
ahead to see a Green Herb on a cabinet. Destroy the cabinet that the Green
Herb is on to reveal this file.
=================
[ ] Chief's Diary
=================
When HUNK runs to the other end of the office and faces off against the group
of zombies near the double doors, shoot the stack of two boxes near the left
wall on the other side of the door. There is a trashcan near the boxes.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Fourth Survivor Items
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
[ ] First Aid Spray - Right before HUNK opens the first door that leads out of
the Kennel, he will talk to the helicopter pilot over the radio about Birkin,
this will be lying on a crate as he turns away from the door while talking.
Grab it quickly!
[ ] Green Herb - At the end of the First Floor Corridor, this will be on top of
a cabinet before stepping into the office. (NOT ON HARD MODE)
[ ] Automatic Pistol Ammo - On the row of desk in the office as HUNK runs
[ ] Grenade toward the double doors on the other side.
[ ] Automatic Pistol Ammo - After the entrance doors in the main hall are
[ ] Hand Cannon Ammo opened and zombies step through, HUNK will move
[ ] Green Herb away from the zombies then eventually stare at a
set of double doors. Blast the double doors with
the Automatic Pistol to break them open. HUNK will
move inside of that room and you will find these
off to the left inside.
[ ] Green Herb - On top of the long counter in the main hall where HUNK fights
several Web Spinners.
[ ] Green Herb - On the floor in the back of the crawling zombies in the second
floor corridor.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Umbrella's End 1 Files
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
=================================
[ ] Umbrella Russian Branch Notes
=================================
Once the characters move up the stairs after fighting the horde of zombies at
the start, shoot the curved light up above the area where the dogs dash forth
from. The light is facing to the right so it doesn't give off that much light.
==========================
[ ] Talos Project Proposal
==========================
Choose to go down below when given a choice of paths. When the characters move
under the shutter after fighting two crawling zombies, destroy the top right
box next to the item pickups.
===================================
[ ] Umbrella Raccoon City Judgement
===================================
This is along the path that is down below as well. After moving up under the
second shutter, three Chimeras will attack. Once the characters walk up to
some stairs, destroy the top box in the stack of boxes in the alcove to the
left of the staircase.
===============================
[ ] Eradication Operation Notes
===============================
When the characters "get surrounded and have to fall back" from the five
zombies inside the facility, shoot the wooden crate to the left of the red
explosive barrel when they turn to face the five zombies while on the other
side. This crate can also be shot while Chris checks the body of his dead
comrade, Bronson - it's directly across from the characters at that point.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Umbrella's End 1 Items
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
[ ] First Aid Spray - At the very beginning, pick these up from the dead body
[ ] Grenade to the right as the characters approach the zombie horde.
[ ] Automatic Pistol Ammo - Lying on the catwalk floor when the Hunter and
Vomiting Zombie attack after fighting the dogs.
[ ] Shotgun SA Ammo - After dropping from the ladder the characters will turn
to the right and this will be down that path before they get to the stairs.
[ ] Automatic Pistol Ammo - When the characters move down the stairs and enter
[ ] Grenade the Dark Pipe Tunnel, these will be on the left
wall and in the back of the tunnel, respectively.
[ ] Automatic Pistol Ammo - Once the characters step out of the tunnel, they
will fight some zombies. Afterwards, they will move forward and look to the
right and spot two move zombies with this in front of them.
[ ] Green Herb - To the left when the characters fight the zombies shortly
after looking down the path with the two zombies in front of the pistol pickup.
[ ] Shotgun SA Ammo - On a crate in the back right portion of the area while
the characters fight zombies that have three red barrels in the back of them.
BELOW PATH
[ ] Automatic Pistol Ammo - On the left wall as the characters turn from the
ladder.
[ ] Shotgun SA Ammo - On the left side of the first hall that the characters
[ ] Green Herb move down. (GREEN HERB IS NOT ON NORMAL OR HARD MODE)
[ ] Grenade - In the back of the two crawling zombies that attack from
underneath the half open shutter.
[ ] Automatic Pistol Ammo - Near some boxes after the characters move under the
[ ] Green Herb half open shutter.
[ ] Automatic Pistol Ammo - Destroy the bottom box on the left of the pickups
described above.
[ ] Automatic Pistol Ammo - After fighting some zombies that move in between
[ ] Shotgun SA Ammo two red barrels, the characters will look in the
right alcove ahead and these will be there.
[ ] Grenade - Look to the left while moving up under the second half open
shutter and this will be on a cart.
[ ] Shotgun SA Ammo - To the right after stepping out from the half open second
shutter.
[ ] Green Herb - After fighting the three Chimeras the characters will stare
down at the half open shutter then eventually turn around. Look down and to
the left when they turn then grab this from the floor.
[ ] Shotgun SA Ammo - As the characters step through the door to the facility,
this will be to the right near some zombies.
STAIRS PATH
[ ] Shotgun SA Ammo - After rounding the right corner, once the first group of
zombies on the catwalk have been defeated, this will be on the floor.
[ ] Shotgun SA Ammo - After fighting the Crimson Head on the second flight of
stairs, this will be on the next catwalk.
[ ] Grenade - Once the characters fight off the group of zombies on the top
[ ] Green Herb catwalk, this will be to the left further around the corner.
(GREEN HERB IS NOT ON NORMAL OR HARD MODE)
[ ] Automatic Pistol Ammo - When the characters break out into a dash after
defeating the three Crimson Heads, this will be in front of them (to the left)
before they turn again.
[ ] Automatic Pistol Ammo - The characters will look over the left railing
[ ] Grenade after defeating a group of zombies near a barrel
later on and these will be lying beside the dead
body on that catwalk.
[ ] Green Herb - While sliding down the vent, this will be off to the left as
the characters turn to the left.
[ ] Shotgun SA Ammo - When the characters slide down the vent they will slide
into the facility and break some boxes along the way. This will be right by
them as they stop.
WHEN THE PATHS MEET
[ ] Green Herb - Directly after fighting the three Web Spinners up on the right
wall, look to the left as Chris and Jill step forward then quickly grab this
from in between the crates up ahead before they turn toward the zombies - it
can be hard to grab. (NOT ON HARD MODE)
[ ] Automatic Pistol Ammo - When the characters climb over the boxes these will
[ ] Shotgun SA Ammo be behind the group of zombies to the right when
they turn.
[ ] Grenade - On a far crate while fighting the enemies in the open area of the
facility. This can be grabbed at any time up until the characters make it to
the other side.
[ ] Automatic Pistol Ammo - While Chris checks the body of his dead partner,
[ ] Secondary Weapon Ammo Bronson, these will be lying to the left on a shelf
[ ] Grenade and near his body.
[ ] Green Herb
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Umbrella's End 2 Files
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
=========================
[ ] Simulated Battle Data
=========================
After moving out of the Decontamination Room, the characters will enter a small
room with items and then eventually a hall. Look for the Umbrella symbol on
the floor and shoot the security camera on the right wall nearly above the
Umbrella symbol. While stepping away from the door near the Umbrella symbol,
the camera is on the right side of the door.
==========================
[ ] Richard Aiken's Letter
==========================
While the characters are in the hall, Lickers will begin to bust through the
vents on the side of the lower walls. When the characters turn to the second
set of vents that the Lickers bust through, a file will appear near the right
vent after a Licker busts through it.
===========================
[ ] Leon S. Kennedy Profile
===========================
In the water tank area, choose the right path. After moving through the door,
look to the right to see some monitors. Shoot the furthest monitor on the top
for this file.
====================
[ ] Emergency Orders
====================
When the characters exit the laser room, shoot the security camera in the top
left corner of the door that they move toward as they turn to the right in the
outside hall. It helps to not shoot the lights on the side walls of the hall
to help make this more visible.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Umbrella's End 2 Items
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
[ ] Automatic Pistol Ammo - Look to the right at the beginning to see these
[ ] Shotgun SA Ammo shining to the side. These can be retrieved at the
starting or when the characters jump off the
elevator after defeating the Hunters.
[ ] Automatic Pistol Ammo - This will be to the left while fighting a zombie
horde below the elevator along the way to the first door.
[ ] Automatic Pistol Ammo - After stepping through the first door, destroy the
middle locker door.
[ ] Grenade - After stepping through the first door, destroy the far right
locker door.
[ ] Automatic Pistol Ammo - While stepping out of the Decontamination Room,
[ ] First Aid Spray these will be against the far wall.
[ ] Grenade - On the left side of the floor while stepping into the hall.
[ ] Automatic Pistol Ammo - To the right and left at the back of the hall in
[ ] Green Herb front of the exit door when the second set of
Lickers attack.
[ ] Green Herb - On the right side of the metal platform after entering the
water tank area. (NOT ON HARD MODE)
RIGHT PATH ITEMS
[ ] Shotgun SA Ammo - On the counter to the right while entering the East
Disposal Room. This particular pickup is hard to get without knowing that it
is there. You need to face the right while entering the door and tap the A
button. You can also retrieve both of the pickups on the counter while facing
the Hunters on the metal platform.
[ ] Grenade - On the counter to the right while entering the East Disposal
Room.
[ ] Automatic Pistol Ammo - After moving up the steps to the metal platform,
this will be around the left corner while moving ahead.
[ ] Automatic Pistol Ammo - Blast the box behind the first dead body on the
left after turning the corner.
[ ] Automatic Pistol Ammo - To the right and left, respectively, after the
[ ] Shotgun SA Ammo checkpoint.
[ ] Shotgun SA Ammo - On top of the large crate to the left while moving down
[ ] Green Herb the steps as a radio call comes through.
LEFT PATH ITEMS
[ ] Automatic Pistol Ammo - On top of the stack of crates on the left while
entering the West Disposal Room.
[ ] Shotgun SA Ammo - On top of some crates when the characters turn further to
the left and Lickers attack.
[ ] Grenade - At the top of the stairs after the checkpoint.
[ ] Green Herb - Break the two crates to the right after the checkpoint and
[ ] Grenade these will be inside.
[ ] Automatic Pistol Ammo - Further along the metal platform and to the left as
[ ] Shotgun SA Ammo the characters round the corner.
[ ] Shotgun SA Ammo - On a large crate to the right while the characters move
down the stairs after fighting the Lickers.
[ ] Shotgun SA Ammo - As the characters step into the hall past the door, this
will be on the wall above the first left light.
RIGHT BEFORE THE LASER ROOM ITEMS
[ ] Green Herb - Near the wall in the back of the Eliminator that runs. (NOT ON
NORMAL OR HARD MODE)
[ ] Automatic Pistol Ammo - When the characters step out of the laser room,
[ ] Secondary Weapon Ammo these will be to the right and left respectively,
once they turn to the right in the hallway.
[ ] Green Herb - Near a dead body as the characters turn to look at it.
[ ] Grenade - After looking at the dead body, this will be on the desk when the
characters turn to face the Eliminators behind them.
[ ] Automatic Pistol Ammo - To the left in the middle area, on a dark wall.
[ ] Shotgun SA Ammo You can see these shining on the wall.
[ ] Green Herb - To the right of the Automatic Pistol and Shotgun SA pickup
mentioned above. (NOT ON NORMAL OR HARD MODE)
[ ] Automatic Pistol Ammo - As the characters make their way toward the final
double doors, this will be near those doors.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Umbrella's End 3 Files
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
====================
[ ] T-A.L.O.S. Notes
====================
In the Monitor Room, shoot the stack of videos on the right counter while
moving toward the door on the opposite side. The videos are right next to a
CPU monitor.
===================
[ ] Red Queen Notes
===================
After the action cutscene, the characters will walk further into the room where
sets of explosive cylinders lie around. When the characters approach the red
room with dead bodies, look to the right and shoot the set of three explosive
cylinders against the back wall. These are to the left while fighting the
single Crimson Head before the checkpoint.
===========================
[ ] Sergei Vladimir Profile
===========================
While in the maze take the following route:
1) At the beginning, go through the left doorway.
2) Go through the right doorway.
3) Go through the left doorway.
4) One way route - just shoot the door to go through it.
5) Go through the right door.
6) One way route - Eliminators will bust through the glass door.
7) Go through the doorway that the characters face.
Shoot the black box on the right side of the far wall directly ahead. Just
throw a grenade since you most likely want to collect the ammo inside as well.
This is on the far side of the Weapon Room.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Umbrella's End 3 Items
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
(NOTE: Item list does not include Full Honeycomb Maze list, yet...)
[ ] Automatic Pistol Ammo - On the surrounding walls by the door and on the
[ ] Shotgun SA Ammo floor before getting on the elevator at the
[ ] First Aid Spray beginning of the stage.
[ ] Green Herb - To the left of the door once the elevator stops. (NOT ON
NORMAL OR HARD MODE)
[ ] Grenade - While facing the Chimera in the monitor room, look to the right
to see a row of monitors with red images on the screen. Shoot the monitor next
to the last bottom monitor on the right side. If that is confusing, then just
throw a grenade toward the right side of the room.
[ ] Shotgun SA Ammo - Shoot the single CPU monitor on the counter beside the
stack of videos.
[ ] Automatic Pistol Ammo - On the floor, to the left while walking toward the
exit door in the Monitor Room.
[ ] Grenade - On the counter below the monitors on the far wall in the Montitor
Room.
[ ] Grenade - After turning to the left to fight the enemies after the action
cutscene, this will be to the right of the stacked boxes.
[ ] Automatic Pistol Ammo - On top of the set of boxes.
[ ] Shotgun SA Ammo
[ ] Green Herb - After the group of Eliminators are all finished, the
characters will turn to the right and this will be near them - look down. Bats
will attack soon afterwards. (NOT ON HARD MODE)
[ ] Grenade - When the characters look into the red room with the dead bodies,
this will be near a dead body on the right side.
[ ] Grenade - On the floor as the characters enter the first maze room.
[ ] Automatic Pistol Ammo - On the wall inside the third room while on the path
to the Weapon Room.
[ ] Automatic Pistol Ammo (many) - Blast the glass on the left wall of the
weapon room then grab these off the wall.
[ ] Shotgun SA Ammo (many) - Blast the glass on the right wall of the weapon
room then grab these off the wall.
[ ] Secondary Weapon Ammo - Blast the glass on the back wall of the weapon room
then grab it off the wall.
[ ] Green Herb - To the left of the final set of doors at the end of the
Honeycomb Maze. (NOT ON NORMAL OR HARD MODE)
MUTATED TALOS BOSS FIGHT ITEMS
[ ] Automatic Pistol Ammo - In the back of the Mutated Talos.
[ ] Automatic Pistol Ammo
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Dark Legacy 1 Files
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
==================================
[ ] Wesker Report Extract on "Her"
==================================
Wesker will fight three Lickers at the beginning of this chapter then turn to
the left to fight zombies. Shoot the chandelier in the very back of the
corridor and make it fall to see this file. This chandelier can also be shot
as Wesker turns to look to the left at the beginning of this stage.
=========================
[ ] Albert Wesker Profile
=========================
While Wesker fights the last wave of four Web Spinners, destroy the wooden
bench on the back right wall. It is hard to see because the seats block the
view of it and it's quite far back. While Wesker moves forward to board the
subway train it can be made out a bit better.
====================
[ ] U.M.F.-013 Notes
====================
Shoot the back light on the right side of the ceiling when Wesker starts out in
the train.
==============
[ ] Ivan Notes
==============
Shoot the reddish circular light on the left wall of the train (left wall when
starting). The light doesn't really glow that much.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Dark Legacy 1 Items
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
[ ] Automatic Pistol Ammo - On a bench near the right wall as Wesker turns to
[ ] Grenade the right at the beginning
[ ] Grenade
[ ] Shotgun SA Ammo - On a seat further down the hall beside the one mentioned
above.
[ ] First Aid Spray - On the seats to the right while fighting the bats. This
can be retrieved along with all the other items at the beginning if your aiming
is good.
[ ] Green Herb - Lying near the seats to the left of the First Aid Spray (NOT
ON NORMAL OR HARD MODE)
[ ] Automatic Pistol Ammo - All inside the train. (GREEN HERB ON RIGHT IS NOT
[ ] Automatic Pistol Ammo ON HARD MODE)
[ ] Shotgun SA Ammo
[ ] Green Herb
[ ] Green Herb
[ ] Shotgun SA - When Wesker jumps to the second platform these will be on the
platform when he turns to face the Chimera - look in the back of the Chimera.
[ ] Green Herb - Right after fighting the Chimera mentioned above, Wesker will
look out toward the center. This is on the platform below the left platform
that is currently on the same level is Wesker. You'll see it shining as Wesker
prepares to jump to the platform across from him. Look down and to the left.
(NOT ON HARD MODE)
[ ] Secondary Weapon Ammo - While Wesker fights the Web Spinners and Licker on
the wall near the fourth platform he jumps to, look downward and to the right
for this.
BOSS FIGHT ITEMS
[ ] Shotgun SA Ammo - Lying around the tunnel during the Twin Ivan fight.
[ ] Green Herb
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Dark Legacy 2 Files
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
========================
[ ] Sergei Monster Notes
========================
Shoot the small phone on the counter below the first set of monitor screens
that Wesker sees while entering the Monitor Room.
==================================
[ ] Letter from Sergei to Nicholai
==================================
When Wesker turns to the left in the Monitor Room, shoot the second red monitor
screen from the bottom on the far left on the collection of monitors on the
back wall. This can also be shot when Wesker looks at the three zombies back
in the Monitor Room while in the Storeroom.
=========================================
[ ] Wesker's Notes on Differing Mutations
=========================================
While Wesker looks off the side of the catwalk after the checkpoint, shoot the
closest set of three explosive cylinders next to the catwalk. This can be shot
early while climbing the stairs as well.
=============================
[ ] Ozwell E. Spencer Profile
=============================
While Wesker looks off the side of the catwalk while fighting the Lickers on
the wall, look to the far left and shoot the set of three explosive cylinders
on the bottom floor.
================================================
[ ] Online Interview with Anti-Umbrella Activist
================================================
In the Honeycomb Maze B take the following route:
1) Go through the middle doorway.
2) Go through the doorway directly ahead.
3) Go through the left doorway.
4) Go through the doorway directly ahead.
5) Go through the left doorway.
Shoot the small box on the back wall (right side) to open a secret compartment
in the back wall containing this file and an Anti-Tank Gun Ammo pickup.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Dark Legacy 2 Items
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
(NOTE: Item list does not include Full Honeycomb Maze list, yet...)
[ ] Automatic Pistol Ammo - On the sidewalls before moving through the elevator
[ ] Automatic Pistol Ammo door.
[ ] Automatic Pistol Ammo - When Wesker lands on the elevator at the bottom of
the elevator shaft, he will stare downward then look up and this will be to the
left of the door.
[ ] First Aid Spray - As Wesker opens the door to the Monitor Room, these will
[ ] Grenade be on the counter below the monitors ahead.
[ ] Automatic Pistol Ammo - As Wesker turns to the left in the Monitor Room,
[ ] Anti-Tank Gun Ammo these will be on the back counter and right
counter respectively.
[ ] Automatic Pistol Ammo - On the top of the drawers under the stairs in the
Storeroom.
[ ] Green Herb - Lying to the left of the bottom of the stairs in the
Storeroom. (NOT ON NORMAL OR HARD MODE)
[ ] Grenade - Near the top of the stairs in the Storeroom.
[ ] Automatic Pistol Ammo - On the other side of the catwalk that Wesker jumps
[ ] Green Herb to in the Storeroom. (GREEN HERB IS NOT ON HARD
MODE)
[ ] Automatic Pistol Ammo - Go through the middle door then the next door in
[ ] Automatic Pistol Ammo the Honeycomb Maze B and these will be on the floor
of the next room.
[ ] Automatic Pistol Ammo - All in the Weapon Room. (GREEN HERB ON LEFT IS NOT
[ ] Automatic Pistol Ammo ON HARD MODE)
[ ] Automatic Pistol Ammo
[ ] Automatic Pistol Ammo
[ ] Automatic Pistol Ammo
[ ] Automatic Pistol Ammo
[ ] Automatic Pistol Ammo
[ ] Automatic Pistol Ammo
[ ] Automatic Pistol Ammo
[ ] Automatic Pistol Ammo
[ ] Secondary Weapon Ammo
[ ] Green Herb
[ ] Green Herb
[ ] Anti-Tank Gun Ammo - Shoot the black box on the back wall (right side) of
the Weapon Room to reveal this.
[BD00]
===============================================================================
___ __ __ _ _ ___ __ __
/ __ /__ /__/_ / / /_ / __ / / /__
/__// / // /_ //_ / //_///_ /__// / / /_
/ / / _ //__/ _ / __ / _ / / / /___//__
_____// _/__/_/ _// /_/ _/_____/____/__/
___ ___ ___ __ __
/ /___/___/__/ _
/ / // /// // //
/ /_// _// _// _ _
/___,'___/___// _/__/
D O O R S T H A T C A N B E D E S T O Y E D
===============================================================================
=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=
This section contains a list of all doors that can be destroyed in each
chapter. It is best to shoot each door with a shotgun to ensure that the door
is broken, and broken quickly! The only exception is the door in Nightmare 2
that leads to the Long Corridor - you will want to use a Magnum Revolver for
that door.
Go now and surprise your friends with your ability to find destructible doors!
There is a standalone list of all breakable doors on my site as well:
http://berserkersblog.blogspot.com/
=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
TRAIN DERAILMENT 1 BREAKABLE DOORS
[01]
Door: The door in the room that both characters jump to from the top of the
train. While playing this chapter for the first time, you will receive a
tutorial about blasting open doors as the characters turn toward this door.
Reason: Submachine Gun Ammo
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
TRAIN DERAILMENT 2 BREAKABLE DOORS
[01]
Door: The double doors that lead to the Library in the corridor after the
checkpoint.
Reason: Shotgun Ammo
Special Note: Destroying these doors will usually cause the characters to enter
the Library instantly, thereby limiting your chance for collecting the file in
the corridor (in the bust) and limiting your kills for the chapter since the
group of leeches at the other end of the hall will not chase the characters if
the door is blown open fast enough.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
TRAIN DERAILMENT 3 BREAKABLE DOORS
No breakable doors.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
BEGINNINGS 1
No breakable doors.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
BEGINNINGS 2
[01]
Door: The door in the corridor that leads to the Lecture Room directly after
the checkpoint.
Reason: Submachine Gun Ammo
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
MANSION INCIDENT 1 BREAKABLE DOORS
[01]
Door: The door leading back into the Dining Room from Kenneth's Corridor.
Reason: Extra Breakable Object
[02]
Door: The double doors leading back into the Main Hall from the Dining Room.
Reason: Extra Breakable Object
[03]
Door: The door leading into the First Floor Corridor from the Gallery.
Reason: Extra Breakable Object
[04]
Door: The door leading into the Dark Corridor from the First Floor Corridor.
Reason: Extra Breakable Object
[05]
Door: The door to the right of the first zombie in the Dark Corridor.
Reason: Hidden Room, Submachine Gun Ammo, Shotgun Ammo
[06]
Door: The door leading to the first floor of the Stair Room from the Corridor
to the Courtyard (aka. the door after the first checkpoint)
Reason: Shotgun Ammo
Special Note: The zombie in the Stair Room will already be in the hall on the
other side of the door if it is blown down.
[07]
Door: The door leading to the Second Floor Corridor from the second floor of
the Stair Room (after the two Crimson Heads attack).
Reason: Extra Breakable Object
[08]
Door: The door leading to the Outside Corridor from the Second Floor Main Hall.
Reason: Extra Breakable Object
[09]
Door: The door leading to the Corridor Outside Library from the Long Corridor.
Reason: Green Herb
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
MANSION INCIDENT 2 BREAKABLE DOORS
No breakable doors.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
MANSION INCIDENT 3 BREAKABLE DOORS
No breakable doors.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
NIGHTMARE 2 BREAKABLE DOORS
[01]
Door: The double doors leading to the Dark Corridor from the Corridor to the
Courtyard (corridor where the first two Hunters attack)
Reason: Submachine Gun HP Ammo
[02]
Door: The door leading to the bathroom in the Dark Corridor. This will be on
the left wall once both characters round the corner after fighting the Adders.
Reason: Hidden Room, Submachine Gun HP Ammo, Green Herb (on toilet)
[03]
Door: The door leading to the Second Floor Corridor from the Second Floor Main
Hall. The characters simply move by this door but it can be destroyed as they
walk by it.
Reason: Extra Breakable Object
Special Note: A Crimson Head and Wasps will either come through the broken
doorway or, if the door is not destroyed, then the Crimson Head will destroy
it. Either way, the characters will turn around to face the Crimson Head and
Wasps after moving by the door.
[04]
Door: The door leading to the Long Corridor from the Stair Hallway while Yawn
chases the two characters. Destroy this door while the characters hop over the
railing of the stairs. It's a very hard door to destroy without the Magnum
Revolver.
Reason: Extra Breakable Object
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
REBIRTH 1
No breakable doors.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
REBIRTH 2
[01]
Door: The door leading to the Second Floor Corridor from the Second Floor Main
Hall. Blast it as Wesker hops over the railing.
Reason: Extra Breakable Object
[02]
Door: The door on the left as Wesker turns the corner in the Dark Corridor
after fighting two Hunters. Shoot it fast since he doesn't stop moving that
much after turning the corridor.
Reason: Hidden Room, Assault Shotgun Ammo
Special Note: Blasting this door early will allow you to fight the Crimson Head
inside of the bathroom early instead of having to turn around as he burst
through the door of the bathroom.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
RACCOON'S DESTRUCTION 1 BREAKABLE DOORS
No breakable doors.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
RACCOON'S DESTRUCTION 2 BREAKABLE DOORS
[01]
Door: The stall door to the left after turning to face the two zombies in the
restroom.
Reason: Contains a file/Extra Breakable Object
Special Note: Upon destroying this door while the file is still in it, a third
zombie will attack along with the others from the inside of the stall. If the
file has already been collected, then the dead body will remain motionless.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
RACCOON'S DESTRUCTION 3 BREAKABLE DOORS
[01]
Door: The door leading to the First Floor Corridor in the Office Hallway. This
can be destroyed after stunning Nemesis for the second time on the Outside
Staircase. Destroy it right after the characters turn away while looking into
the Office full of zombies.
Reason: Submachine Gun HP Ammo
[02]
Door: The door leading to the Second Floor Corridor in the hallway outside the
Save Room.
Reason: Green Herb
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
DEATH'S DOOR BREAKABLE DOORS
No breakable doors.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
FOURTH SURVIVOR BREAKABLE DOORS
[01]
Door: The double doors on the left side of the First Floor Main Hall. After
HUNK escapes the zombies at the entrance, destroy the double doors when he
turns to look at the doors to the left at the bottom of the steps.
Reason: Hidden Room, Submachine Gun HP Ammo, Green Herb, Hand Cannon Ammo
Special Note: This room is filled with tons of zombies around the side corner
in the back of the room and these zombies do not fall easily! They don't even
stagger when shot with the Submachine Gun HP so be prepared to throw some
grenades.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
UMBRELLA'S END 1 BREAKABLE DOORS
No breakable doors.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
UMBRELLA'S END 2 BREAKABLE DOORS
No breakable doors.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
UMBRELLA'S END 3 BREAKABLE DOORS
No breakable doors.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
DARK LEGACY 1 BREAKABLE DOORS
No breakable doors.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
DARK LEGACY 2 BREAKABLE DOORS
No breakable doors.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
[SP00]
===============================================================================
__ ___ __ ___ _____ _ __ __ _____ _ ___ __
/ _ / _ /__/ __ _ /_ / / / _/__ /_ / _ /__
/ /_)/_ / / / ///_ / / / ///_ / /_//_
_ / ___//__/ /___// /_/ _ / /___ _ / / / _ / /_//__
__// __/____/____/_/ _/____/ __/ / _/ _/____/__/
I T C H Y . . . T A S T Y
===============================================================================
=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=
The Special Stage is unlocked after every chapter in the game has been beaten.
The following section is a brief outline of the Special Stage.
=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=
=======
Weapons
=======
The handgun serves as your only weapon.
======
Health
======
One hit from any zombie during the sudden death round will kill your character.
============
Your Enemies
============
Your enemies for this stage are naked graveyard zombies from Resident Evil
Code: Veronica X. They can all be defeated with one shot on any portion of
their body from the handgun.
======
Rounds
======
There are a total of 10 rounds and each round will contain a certain number of
zombies that must be shot or they will dash at your character during the sudden
death round. Only five zombies appear in the first round then one more zombie
will be added to that total amount for each following round, so by round 9, you
will be facing a total of 13 zombies (actually 14 since two of them appear at
the same time on that particular round).
These zombies will appear in a random variety, so there is no way I can help
you with trying to shoot each one since they will always appear in a different
order. There is always a certain number of each type of zombie that will
appear however, so that is one aspect that I can list for you.
==================
Sudden Death Round
==================
A Sudden Death Round occurs after a full wave of zombies in a round have
appeared. For each zombie that is not shot, one zombie will appear in the
sudden death round. Fail to shoot five of the zombies and five of them will
appear in the sudden death round.
Once the sudden death round begins, the character will turn and look at the set
of doors to the right then the doors will slide open and however many zombie
you missed will run at your character and attempt to hit her. If you are hit
during this round then your character will be killed instantly. The key to
shooting the zombies during this round is to start shooting as early as
possible when the first zombie appears then shoot the next closest zombie on
either side for the remainder of zombies.
Just because a zombie has made it to the screen doesn't mean that your
character is dead yet. Remember that each zombie must raise its hand and hit
your character in order to kill her.
================
The Zombie Types
================
--> Zombie Head
Description: A zombie head will poke up from behind the counter.
Warning: These zombies will moan as the head appears then they will moan right
as they duck back down.
Tips: Keep your cursor in the middle of the screen all the time so you can
instantly move the cursor over these zombie heads and shoot them as they
appear. Most of the time, you will only have time enough for one shot, so
always make the first shot count. Aim and shoot quickly yet calmly.
--> Crawling Zombie
Description: Starting from the left, a zombie will quickly crawl by on the
floor in front of the counter.
Warning: Starting from the left, the zombie will rapidly crawl by on the floor
in front of the counter. There is no moan but you can hear some fast
shuffling.
Tips: These zombies will always appear from the left side of the screen, so
listen for the shuffling and then quickly aim to the right portion of the floor
then shoot to hit these. They do not moan, so listen for the shuffling then
react.
--> Streaking Counter Zombie
Description: A zombie will quickly run across the counter. His head is not
visible.
Warning: A moan is heard as a zombie quickly runs across the counter.
Tips: Listen for a sudden moan then quickly look to the left side of the
counter and this streaking zombie will quickly run across the counter. It will
always run from the left side of the counter, so quickly aim to the right side
then shoot his top portion when you first see him. These have to be shot
pretty fast. As you get better at hitting these, you may have to delay your
shot just a bit.
--> Streaking Close Zombie
Description: A zombie will quickly run across the floor in front of the camera.
Only his legs and lower middle half are visible.
Warning: A moan is heard then the zombie will quickly run across the floor in
front of the counter. You will see a quick close up view of a zombie's legs as
it runs by.
Tips: Listen for a sudden moan then quickly look to make sure that a zombie
head does not rise from the counter. If a zombie head does not rise then this
streaking zombie will quickly run across the floor in front of the counter.
These will have a slight delay before they appear when compared to the
Streaking Counter Zombie. It will always run from the left side of the
counter, so quickly aim to the right side of the screen then shoot at it's legs
when you first catch a glimpse of it. These are extremely quick and they
appear very close to the screen.
The biggest tip I can give you for a streaking close zombie is to listen for
their faster moan in comparison to all the other zombie moans. The other
zombie moans have a slight delay after defeating the zombie before them, but
this certain zombie moans almost immediately after defeating the zombie before
it, so listen for that immediate moan then aim to the right side of the screen
and prepare to shoot him. If you have a surround sound speaker setup then you
will be able to hear this zombie moan coming from the left speaker and back
left speaker.
--> Hesitant Streaking Zombie
Description: A zombie will run out from the left portion of the floor in front
of the counter then quickly circle back and return the way it came.
Warning: A moan is heard as the zombie quickly dashes out from the left portion
of the screen then it circles back to return the way it came.
Tips: These are some of the most annoying types of zombie since they do not
give much warning at all and they will basically just appear with a moan then
disappear just as quick as they appeared.
These are likely to escape your handgun most of the time, since you basically
have to keep a steady aim on the side that they appear in order to hit them and
by doing this, you will likely miss other zombies, so just ignore these for the
most part, but try to hit them if they appear - you may get lucky.
--> Far Zombie Head
Description: A zombie head will appear on either the far right or left side of
the counter.
Warning: A zombie will moan then a head will appear on the far right or left
side of the counter.
Tips: These are just like shooting the normal zombie heads but they appear on
one of the far sides, so you'll have to quickly aim to the far right or left
then shoot. Just like with the normal zombie heads, aim and shoot quickly, yet
calmly.
--> Dashing Head
Description: A zombie will quickly lift its head then, starting from the left,
it will dash by the other side of the counter.
Warning: A zombie will moan as it raises its head from near the left portion
behind the counter then dashes toward the right side of the counter. The head
will bounce up and down quite a bit.
Tips: Besides the Hesitant Streaker, these are some of the hardest zombies to
hit since its head will bounce up and down as it dashes to the right side of
the counter. Watch for a moving head then keep your cursor in the center of
the screen and shoot it as it passes by the cursor. You have to keep your
cursor right near the top portion of the counter where the zombie heads usually
appear, nearly touching the counter top.
--> Double Head
Description: A zombie head will rise from behind the counter and a zombie head
will rise from the bottom of the screen at the same time.
Warning: A moan is heard shortly before both heads rise.
Tips: Aim for at least one head then try to shoot the other the instant after
shooting the first. It's best to aim for the head in the back of the counter
since you never know when these heads will rise. These always rise in the
middle of the room.
--> Dangerous Zombie
Description: This zombie falls from a vent opening during the final round. It
will get up and shuffle toward the character then dash toward the screen
eventually.
Warning: After staring at the counter, the character will turn to the left then
the zombie will fall out of the vent then get up and shuffle toward the
character.
Tips: A critical headshot must be obtained on this zombie to defeat it. Wait
for it to get up after falling out of the vent then shoot it directly in the
forehead during the brief second that it remains still when it first gets up.
It will shuffle toward the screen and bob its head much more than a normal
zombie so keep trying for a headshot at that time or it will eventually dash
toward the screen and hit the character like the zombies in the sudden death
rounds.
======================
Full Round Description
======================
This is a list of all the zombies that will be found in each round. The
zombies will appear randomly, but there are always a certain amount of each
type that will appear in a given round.
Round 01 - 5 Zombie Heads
Round 02 - 5 Zombie Heads, 1 Crawling Zombie
Round 03 - 5 Zombie Heads, 1 Crawling Zombie, 1 Streaking Counter Zombie
Round 04 - 5 Zombie Heads, 1 Crawling Zombie, 1 Streaking Counter Zombie, 1
Streaking Close Zombie
Round 05 - 5 Zombie Heads, 1 Crawling Zombie, 1 Streaking Counter Zombie, 1
Streaking Close Zombie, 1 Far Zombie Head
Round 06 - 5 Zombie Heads, 1 Crawling Zombie, 1 Streaking Counter Zombie, 1
Streaking Close Zombie, 1 Hesitant Streaking Zombie, 1 Far Zombie Head
Round 07 - 5 Zombie Heads, 1 Crawling Zombie, 1 Streaking Counter Zombie, 1
Streaking Close Zombie, 1 Hesitant Streaking Zombie, 2 Far Zombie Heads
Round 08 - 5 Zombie Heads, 1 Crawling Zombie, 2 Streaking Counter Zombies, 1
Streaking Close Zombie, 1 Hesitant Streaking Zombie, 2 Far Zombie Heads, 1
Dashing Head
Round 09 - 5 Zombie Heads, 1 Crawling Zombie, 2 Streaking Counter Zombies, 1
Streaking Close Zombie, 1 Hesitant Streaking Zombie, 2 Far Zombie Heads, 1
Dashing Head, 1 Double Head
Round 10 - 1 Dangerous Zombie
=============================
Round 10 - 1 Dangerous Zombie
=============================
On Round 10, the character will turn back from the sliding doors and look at
the counter space but no zombies will appear. The character will stand in
place for a while then eventually turn to the left. A single zombie will crawl
out of a vent structure then fall to the ground. The zombie will get up and
stand still for a brief second then it will move slowly toward the character.
The zombie will shuffle and bob its head much more than a standard zombie then
it will eventually dash toward the character and strike her.
In order to hit this one dangerous zombie, you must shoot it directly in the
forehead to get a critical headshot on it. The best time to shoot it is the
moment it first stands up since it will stand still for a brief second. Try to
hit its bobbing head when it shuffles toward the character - use multiple shots
to try to hit it. The zombie will eventually run toward the character and hit
her like the rest of the zombies in the sudden death match for a one-hit kill.
============
General Tips
============
- While using the Wii-mote, hold the remote with both hands to steady your aim.
Using this setup is just as good if not better than using a Zapper or Perfect
Shot.
- Keep the cursor in the center portion of the screen on the same level as
where the zombies heads appear.
- When a zombie head appears, gently move the remote in that direction then
slightly pause to take aim and shoot. Don't jerk the remote frantically and
shoot extremely quick or you will miss. Patience is required to maintain
focus in this special stage.
- Look at the screen and focus in on anything that moves in the slightest
manner then take action based on that movement.
- Listen for zombie moans and learn the difference between the Streaking Close
Zombie moan compared to the others (see description above).
- During the first round, clear the counter by shooting all the stacks of
books, papers (middle), and windows. Its good to clear out all the breakable
objects around the counter so your cursor doesn't form a distracting plus
shape when placed over these objects. This will make it to where the plus
shape will only appear whenever the targeting cursor falls over a zombie.
- Practice shooting at least five zombies during the sudden death round while
on round 1. Shoot a few of the zombies as they appear in the back room then
shoot them one by one as they dash closer. It is so very important that each
shot hits. Don't shoot rapidly or you'll risk hitting a falling defeated
zombie instead of a dashing zombie.
- Count the number of zombies that you miss in a round in order to prepare
yourself for the sudden death round.
==========
The Ending
==========
There is a very slight ending sequence to this mode. After dispatching the
final zombie, the character will walk toward the vent structure where the
zombie crawled out from then crawl up inside the vent herself. The character
will lie down in the vent then stare up at the light on the ceiling and the
special stage will end.
There are no rewards and you do not even receive any sort of ranking for
beating the stage or mark to show that the stage was completed.
[UN00]
===============================================================================
____ _______ __ _ __
/__ / /__ /__ /_ / _
/_ / / // // //_
//__ / / / / _ / _ _
__/ /_/_/ / _/_/ _/__/
U N L O C K A B L E S & E X T R A S
===============================================================================
=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=
This section is a collection of all the unlockable extras found within the
game. Many of them simply require beating all of the chapters up to a certain
point, but there are a few exceptions.
=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=
In order to unlock each Scenario or Subscenario, all chapters (including
subchapters) must be beaten up to the current Scenario. All of the secret
Subscenarios or Chapters can be unlocked by beating the required chapter or
reaching a certain rank on a chapter (Death's Door, Nightmare 2) on ANY
difficulty.
*******************************************************************************
SCENARIOS AND CHAPTERS
*******************************************************************************
=============================
Unlock Beginnings Subscenario
=============================
Beat Train Derailment 3.
============================
Unlock Nightmare Subscenario
============================
Beat Mansion Incident 1.
==========================
Unlock Rebirth Subscenario
==========================
Beat Mansion Incident 3.
==========================
Unlock Nightmare 2 Chapter
==========================
Beat Nightmare 1 with an "A" ranking or higher to unlock Nightmare 2.
===============================
Unlock Death's Door Subscenario
===============================
Beat Raccoon's Destruction 3 with an "A" ranking or higher to unlock Death's
Door.
==============================
Unlock Umbrella's End Scenario
==============================
Beat Train Derailment scenario, Beginnings scenario, Mansion Incident scenario,
Rebirth scenario, and Raccoon's Destruction scenrio
==============================
Unlock Dark Legacy Subscenario
==============================
Beat Umbrella's End 3.
============================
Unlock Dark Legacy 2 Chapter
============================
Beat every other chapter, besides Fourth Survivor, and Dark Legacy will be
unlocked.
==================================
Unlock Fourth Survivor Subscenario
==================================
Beat every other chapter and Fourth Survivor will be unlocked under the
Raccoon's Destruction Scenario page.
*******************************************************************************
OTHER UNLOCKABLES
*******************************************************************************
==============
Archives Items
==============
Beat the following difficulties with the corresponding rank for each chapter to
get an item per chapter. An "S" rank on Hard without an "A" rank on Normal
prior to that will result in both items being unlocked. In other words, you
can "S" rank a chapter on Hard and get both of the items found on it without
the need of an "A" rank on Normal. The items can be viewed in the Archives
menu.
-- "A" Rank on Normal Mode
Mixing Set - Train Derailment 1
Statue of Evil/Good - Train Derailment 2
Blue/Green Leech Charm - Train Derailment 3
Motherboard - Beginnings 1
Fire/Water Key - Beginnings 2
Lighter/Lockpick - Mansion Incident 1
Sun/Star/Moon Crest - Mansion Incident 2
MO Disc - Mansion Incident 3
Cylinder Shaft - Nightmare 1
Last Book, Vol. 1/2 - Nightmare 2
Clark/Gail X-Ray - Rebirth 1
Blue/Red/Yellow Gemstone - Rebirth 2
S.T.A.R.S. Card (Jill's) - Raccoon's Destruction 1
Joint N/S Plug - Raccoon's Destruction 2
Crystal/Obsidian/Amber Ball - Raccoon's Destruction 3
Picture (Ada and Jon) - Death's Door
G-virus - Fourth Survivor
Plastic Bomb/Detonator - Umbrella's End 1
Blue/Red/Green Chemical - Umbrella's End 2
Vaccine - Umbrella's End 3
King/Knight/Bishop/Rook Plug - Dark Legacy 1
Film A/B/D/C - Dark Legacy 2
-- "S" Rank on Hard Mode
Briefcase - Train Derailment 1
Relief of Discipline/Obedience/Unity - Train Derailment 2
Sterilizing Agent - Train Derailment 3
Valve Handle - Beginnings 1
Microfilm A/B - Beginnings 2
Great Eagle/Wolf Medal - Mansion Incident 1
V-Jolt - Mansion Incident 2
Fuel Canteen - Mansion Incident 3
Hex Crank - Nightmare 1
Emblem/Gold Emblem - Nightmare 2
Slide Cartridge - Rebirth 1
Death Mask - Rebirth 2
Book of Wisdom/Future Compass - Raccoon's Destruction 1
Lighter Fluid - Raccoon's Destruction 2
Chronos Key - Raccoon's Destruction 3
S.T.A.R.S. Card (Brad's) - Death's Door
Eagle/Serpent/Jaguar Stone - Fourth Survivor
Square Crank - Umbrella's End 1
Ink Ribbon - Umbrella's End 2
Medium Base - Umbrella's End 3
Battery - Dark Legacy 1
Spade/Diamond/Club/Heart Key - Dark Legacy 2
-- Below is a complete list of the way that all items will be placed while
viewing them in the Archives Menu:
July 23, 1998
-------------
ROW 1: [ ] Mixing Set, [ ] The Statue of Evil/Good, [ ] Blue/Green Leech Charm,
[ ] Motherboard, [ ] Fire/Water Key, [ ] Briefcase, [ ] Relief of
Discipline/Obedience/Unity
ROW 2: [ ] Sterilizing Agent, [ ] Valve Handle, [ ] Microfilm A/B
July 24, 1998
-------------
ROW 1: [ ] Lighter/Lockpick, [ ] Sun/Star/Moon Crest, [ ] MO Disc, [ ] Cylinder
Shaft, [ ] Last Book, Volume 1/2, [ ] Clark/Gail X-Ray, [ ] Blue/Red/Yellow
Gemstone
ROW 2: [ ] Great Eagle/Wolf Medal, [ ] V-Jolt, [ ] Fuel Canteen, [ ] Hex Crank,
[ ] Emblem/Gold Emblem, [ ] Slide Cartridge, [ ] Death Mask
September 28, 1998
------------------
ROW 1: [ ] S.T.A.R.S. Card (Jill's), [ ] Joint N/S Plug, [ ]
Crystal/Obsidian/Amber Ball, [ ] Picture (Ada and Jon), [ ] G-virus, [ ] Book
of Wisdom/Future Compass, [ ] Lighter Fluid
ROW 2: [ ] Chronos Key, [ ] S.T.A.R.S. Card (Brad's), [ ] Eagle/Serpent/Jaguar
Stone
February 18, 2008
-----------------
ROW 1: [ ] Plastic Bomb/Detonator, [ ] Blue/Red/Green Chemical, [ ] Vaccine,
[ ] King/Knight/Bishop/Rook Plug, [ ] Spade/Diamond/Club/Heart Key, [ ] Film
A/B/C/D, [ ] Square Crank
ROW 2: [ ] Ink Ribbon, [ ] Medium Base, [ ] Battery
====================
Unlock Special Stage
====================
Beat all chapters and this will appear as a separate photograph under the Train
Derailment scenario on the scenario select.
=================================
Unlock Co-op Play in Subscenarios
=================================
Beat every mission and there will be an option that says "Begin play with 2
players" that will display while choosing your character for a subscenario
allowing that chapter to be played cooperatively. This will appear for all
subscenario chapters.
======================
Unlock the Hand Cannon
======================
While playing the "Fourth Survivor" scenario, when HUNK moves out into the main
hall of the police station, destroy the double doors on the left side of that
hall. Facing the statue in the hall the double doors are to the left of it.
Blast them with a secondary weapon when HUNK turns to face them in order to
destroy them and HUNK will move inside. The Hand Cannon is located on a desk
on the left side of the room.
==============
Unlimited Ammo
==============
Get an "S" rank on all chapters (normal chapters and subchapters) while playing
on "Hard" difficulty and this will unlock unlimited ammo for all secondary
weapons. You will receive a message that says, "Unlimited Ammo has been
deactivated" meaning that all weapons can be customized up to Level 5 which
places Unlimited Ammo on each gun for a certain cost per gun.
=========================
Loading Screen Easter Egg
=========================
Press the B button on any loading screen to make the targeting cursor appear.
Target and shoot the Umbrella logo next to the "Loading" phrase and see how
many times you can juggle it while firing. A ringing sound will be heard every
time it is juggled from a shot.
[FA00]
===============================================================================
___ _ ____
/ __/_ /___
/ _ //_ // / /
/ / / _ / _/ /
/ _/ _/___,_
F R E Q U E N T L Y A S K E D Q U E S T I O N S
===============================================================================
=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=
This section contains a few of the more frequently asked questions that need to
be addressed. Of course there are a few fanboy rantings as well...
=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=
[01]
Q: Whenever I restart my game, the game asks if I want to start from the
current checkpoint, but when I say "no" it asks if I want to delete my current
save. Will this actually delete the whole game save!?
A: No, it will only delete your checkpoint save. The game keeps track of your
current checkpoint if you triggered one in a chapter and didn't finish the
chapter before turning off the game. Choosing to delete that save will only
delete the checkpoint save then take you back to the scenario list with all the
scenarios you have unlocked thus far.
[02]
Q: Is there any other use for these collectible items other than simply viewing
them?
A: They're just there for your viewing pleasure and to keep completionist busy.
[03]
Q: How do I unlock Umbrella's End 1, Death's Door, Nightmare 2, Dark Legacy 2,
Fourth Survivor?
A: Finish Beginnings 2 and Rebirth 2 to unlock Umbrella's End 1 once Raccoon's
Destruction is fully completed, finish Raccoon's Destruction 3 with an "A" rank
for Death's Door, finish Nightmare 1 with an "A" rank for Nightmare 2, finish
all other chapters up to Dark Legacy 2 to unlock Dark Legacy 2, and finish all
other chapters to unlock Fourth Survivor.
[04]
Q: If I get an "S" rank on a chapter on Hard mode, will it unlock the Normal
mode "A" rank item along with the Hard mode "S" rank item if I haven't unlocked
the Normal mode item prior to that?
A: Yes. Simply beat Hard mode with an "S" to unlock both.
[05]
Q: What's the difference between the Easy, Normal, and Hard difficulties?
A: Enemies are tougher and they take off damage from the characters as the
difficulty rises. Green Herbs are taken away per difficulty raise also.
[06]
Q: Do cutscenes or FMVs count toward my total completion time per chapter?
What about pause time?
A: No, don't worry about skipping the cutscenes or FMVs. And no, pause time is
not counted. While writing sections of this guide, I paused the game a bunch
and still managed an "S" rank on chapters.
[07]
Q: I was wondering, what exactly is the importance of obtaining files (do they
do anything special for you?)
A: The files will increase your rank at the end of each chapter. Once all
files have been collected from a chapter then you will always receive an S-rank
on that chapter no matter what difficulty you play. So you can actually do all
of your file collecting on Easy mode and that will actually help your ranking
on harder difficulties.
The files also provide some interesting storyline both taken from and added to
the whole Resident Evil series. Some files are just taken from other games in
the series but there are some completely new files that reveal additional plot
details for the first time.
[08]
Q: What is the difference between an "S" and "A" ranking?
A: An S-rank is the highest possible rank that can be received on a stage. The
ranking system is presented like this:
S - Excellent
A - Very Good
B - Good
C - Poor
[09]
Q: How do I change difficulties on my current game file?
A: On the Scenario select, go to:
Options --> Game Setup --> Second option
The difficulties can be changed at any time while on the Scenario select
screen. The game will save the current difficulty.
[10]
Q: Can explosions hurt my character? Such as explosions from grenades, mines,
and red barrels?
A: No. You can literally have a grenade bounce off a wall, right back into a
character, and it will not take off any damage even then!
[11]
Q: Is there any difference between the selectable characters per stage?
A: The only difference is their counterattack and sometimes their handgun.
Their default starting weapon is different also, but you can change that by
selecting another. Other than that, they are the exact same.
[12]
Q: I noticed that the "Death's Door" and "Fourth Survivor" scenarios have a "1"
beside their chapter names. Does this mean that there is another chapter
associated with them (a part 2)?
A: No there is only one chapter in each of those scenarios. Capcom most likely
placed a "1" next to the chapters to keep them consistent with the other
chapters for other scenarios.
[13]
Q: How do I defeat the final zombie in the Special Stage?
A: The final zombie must be defeated with a critical headshot.
[14]
Q: What do I get for beating the Special Stage?
A: You get the thrill of beating this crazy level. There is no stamp that
symbolizes your accomplishment or ranking for the stage, you just get a single
standing ovation... that is, if you are the type of gamer that rises to perform
a standing ovation after beating challenging levels.
To sum it all up, you get absolutely nothing, zilch, nada. There is a very
slight ending sequence though. Check the Special Stage section to find out
more info. It's nothing special really.
[15]
Q: Who is the character that you play as in the Special Stage?
A: The characters has a female scream when she is hit so the person is
definitely female. It is most likely Rebecca Chambers, but some have suggested
that it may be Sherry Birkin.
[16]
Q: What gaming peripheral would you recommend for RE:UC?
A: Well, I haven't tried the Zapper, so I can't comment on it. I hear mixed
reviews about that gun. The Nyko Perfect Shot, however, works extremely well!
Headshots are much easier to get off for me now with my faithful Perfect Shot.
[17]
Q: I've only played Resident Evil 4 and none of the others. Will I still enjoy
RE:UC?
A: You'll still enjoy it, but you'll be missing out on quite a few details.
RE:UC simply summarizes most of the main plot of other RE games into a rush job
scenario per game. You'll be spoiling each game with a quick recap of the
series. In the case of Resident Evil 3, however, you won't spoil that much at
all since the RE3 scenario is so different from the actual game.
Long story short, go out and buy the original RE's (0, 1, 2, 3, CVX) before
playing RE:UC. You can get them all on Gamecube (or backward compatible with
Wii), so what are you waiting for?
[18]
Q: Which version of the original Resident Evils would you recommend out of the
many versions available for each one?
Resident Evil - Buy Resident Evil (REmake) for Gamecube for sure, but I
recommend picking up RE: Director's Cut or RE: Deadly Silence just for old
timesake and so you can appreciate REmake a bit more - see what has changed and
experience the original. The PC version is a good pickup too - it actually has
the full colorized uncut opening complete with a bloody Joseph Frost death at
the beginning! Oh, and Chris' smoking isn't covered up with a pick of him from
the opening. There's a few other uncut aspects as well (Kenneth's half-eaten
head and Chris lights up yet again during his bad ending).
Resident Evil 2 - Either the PC or Dreamcast version would be your best choice
- they're both basically the same. The Gamecube version isn't bad, but it's
hard to find in a way. The original PSX Dual Shock version is a real good
choice too. The N64 version has some nice extra files, a new password for a
comp near the end, and an added dead Hunter in a room if that sort of thing
intrigues you like it does for me.
Resident Evil 3 - Really the original PSX version is fine. The Dreamcast and
Gamecube version have a slightly better look to them but it is only minor
enhancements.
Resident Evil Code: Veronica - The Gamecube version. It's based off Biohazard
Code: Veronica Complete for Dreamcast and even has that "added Wesker scene
intro" (or demo movie) present upon startup. The PS2 version isn't as bright
as the normal Dreamcast release and it has an ugly intro that only showcases
clips from the opening FMV movie. I'm really nitpicking here, but this is my
favorite RE, so I will continue to nitpick on brighter colors and intros when
asked about it. Really the Dreamcast original Code Veronica has my favorite
intro out of all of them... okay, I'll quit now.
[19]
Q: How do you make that 0 with the slash through it for RE0? You know the "Ø"?
A: Alt + 0216 (Hold Alt, type "0216", let go of Alt)
[EI00]
===============================================================================
____ _______ __ _ _____ __ ___ ___
/__ / /__ /__ /_ _ / / __/___
/_ / / // // //_ / // / / _ // //
//__ / / / / _ / _ // /_/ / / / / _//
__/ /_/_/ / _/_/ _/ ____/_ // ___/
E X T R A R E S I D E N T E V I L I N F O R M A T I O N
===============================================================================
=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=
Here you will find a collection of some helpful web pages or sites that will
either help you gain more information for RE:UC or the rest of the Resident
Evil series.
=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=
------------ Resident Evil: Umbrella Chronicles Extra Information -------------
--> S-RANK STRATEGIES
** EgHeadFool/Hapkido's "S-Rank Guide" **
http://www.gamefaqs.com/console/wii/file/933020/51115
--> RANKING INFORMATION
** mazteryoda's "Scoring Guide" **
http://www.gamefaqs.com/console/wii/file/933020/50969
--> FILE AND ITEM TRANSCRIPTS
** TheDahn's "Archive Transcript" **
http://www.gamefaqs.com/console/wii/file/933020/51034
--> RESIDENT EVIL REVIEWER'S GUIDE
** Umbrella Chronicles Wesker's Report Images**
http://www.flickr.com/photos/capcomlost/sets/72157603211659913/
--------------------- Resident Evil Series Information ------------------------
--> GENERAL INFORMATION ON PAST RESIDENT EVIL GAMES, WESKER'S REPORT I,
WESKER'S REPORT II, FULL RESIDENT EVIL TIMELINE
** IGN RE Board Member's "Resident Evil Information Thread" **
http://boards.ign.com/resident_evil/b5234/50229573/p1/?26
------------------------- Updates for this Guide ------------------------------
--> UPDATES FOUND ON MY BLOG
http://tinyurl.com/ysshg3
Click on the update link on the right side of that page to find the latest
version along with a Weapon Stat List, File List, Item List, and Breakable Door
List.
I wouldn't expect too many more major version changes (additions) in this guide
anymore, but you never know.
-------------------------- Resident Evil Fansites -----------------------------
(these are my personal favorites - there are tons more)
--> THE HORROR IS ALIVE
www.the-horror.com
--> RESIDENT EVIL HORROR
www.rehorror.net
--> RESIDENT EVIL FAN
www.residentevilfan.com
[EE00]
===============================================================================
__ ___ _____
/__/ __/__
/_ / / / //
//__/ /___ / / _
__/____/ / (_)
E V E R Y T H I N G E L S E
===============================================================================
=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=
Basically all the extra information that no one cares to read is found below -
Copyright, Special Thanks, Version History, details about me, my contact info,
details about my Featured Guides at Cheat Happens.
To rephrase that, warnings and threats to help protect this guide from thieves,
gratitude for people that help me out, details about this guide's progress, my
boring life and "website", my question box, and of course plugs. Yeah, that
about wraps it up...
=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=
*******************************************************************************
COPYRIGHT [CO00]
*******************************************************************************
This document Copyright 2007 - 2008 Kevin Hall (Berserker)
Resident Evil: The Umbrella Chronicles Copyright 2007 Capcom Ltd.
This document is for private and personal use only. Do not try to sell this
document for profit. This is a free document and should remain free. Do not
try to reproduce this document in any way, shape, or form. Do not alter this
FAQ in any way. Use of this guide on any other web site, besides the sites
that have contacted me, or as a part of any public display is strictly
prohibited, and a violation of copyright.
If you want to use this FAQ on your site, then contact me for permission first.
This FAQ can only be found on a few sites as of now and I am keeping a list of
those sites. Contact me if you want to use it.
*******************************************************************************
SPECIAL THANKS [ST00]
*******************************************************************************
- my parents.
- SBAllen and Ceej from GameFAQs, Stephen from IGN FAQs, Chris and Peter from
Cheat Happens, Dennis from Supercheats, and the Neoseeker FAQ staff for
always accepting my guides.
- Capcom for the Resident Evil series.
- http://network-science.de/ascii/ for the ASCII art.
- http://tinyurl.com for the tiny urls.
*******************************************************************************
VERSION HISTORY [VH00]
*******************************************************************************
Version 0.5 - (December 18, 2007) - Walkthrough is basically half of the way
finished. All of the other sections are unfinished as well, but I will get to
them more strongly after finishing the walkthrough.
Version 0.6 - (December 20, 2007) - Raccoon's Destruction Chapter 1 and Chapter
2 are now up and I went through and added some formatting to the chapter info
portions before each chapter. Expect the same treatment for the boss fights in
a later update.
Version 0.6 - (December 21, 2007) - I expected to have the full third chapter
for Raccoon's Destruction finished, but Nemesis took too long to strategize.
Expect the file and items for that chapter in the next update along with the
Death's Door scenario most likely.
Version 0.6 - (December 22, 2007) - Files and items are now up in Raccoon's
Destruction 3. Death's Door chapter 1 is now up, but I'm still lacking the
files and items for it.
Version 0.6 - (December 22, 2007) - Finished up the files and items for Death's
Door. Moving on to Umbrella's End scenario.
Version 0.7 - (December 23, 2007) - Finished the entire Umbrella's End 1
chapter.
Version 0.7 - (December 24, 2007) - Finished the entire Umbrella's End 2
chapter.
Version 0.8 - (December 25, 2007) - Merry Christmas! Finished the entire
Umbrella's End 3 chapter. A few details added to Plant 42 fight and a few
creature locations were added to Rebirth 1.
Version 0.8 - (December 26, 2007) - Finished the entire Dark Legacy 1 chapter.
Changed the ASCII art for File and Item section to "Files/Items" instead of
"Items/Files". Inconsistencies bother me...
Version 0.9 - (December 27, 2007) - Dark Legacy 2 chapter is now completed.
The full walkthrough will be finished by tomorrow after I tackle Fourth
Survivor. Look on my blog to see it if you can't find the update at a gaming
site - updates are always posted there first.
Version 1.0 - (December 28, 2007) - With the addition of the Fourth Survivor
chapter, the walkthrough is now complete! The Fourth Survivor chapter is
located below Death's Door since I wanted to try to keep them grouped together
like they are in the game. The Extra section was filled out as well, though
still not complete. Expect more updates to follow - I've still got plenty to
add.
Version 1.0 - (December 29, 2007) - Beginning to add Easy Mode Green Herb
locations, Secondary Weapon locations, and note which Green Herbs are missing
from Hard Mode - up to Nightmare 1 for the moment. A few items were added here
and there mainly from destroyable doors in the earlier chapters. "S" rank
items are also being added to the beginning of each chapter as I "S" rank
through hard mode.
Version 1.0 - (December 30, 2007) - Added Easy Mode Green Herbs, Secondary
Weapon locations, and missing Green Herbs for Hard Mode to Nightmare 1,
Nightmare 2, Rebirth 1, and Rebirth 2. Proofread all of the items section.
Version 1.0 - (December 31, 2007) - Added Easy Mode Green Herbs, Secondary
Weapon locations, and missing Green Herbs for Hard Mode to Raccoon's
Destruction 1, 2, 3, Death's Door, and Fourth Survivor. Secondary Weapon
locations were added to Nightmare 2 - one of them is extremely hidden! Mansion
Incident 1 now has File 9 listed in the walkthrough.
Version 1.1 - (January 1, 2008) - Happy New Year RE fans! All Easy Mode Green
Herbs, Secondary Weapon locations, and missing Green Herbs for Hard Mode are
now listed in the Walkthrough and Items and Files section of the guide. All
Archive items are now listed in each section and I have listed them all in the
Extras section as well.
Version 1.2 - (January 2, 2008) - An FAQ (Frequently Asked Questions) section
along with an Enemies section was added.
Version 1.2 - (January 3, 2008) - FAQ and Enemies sections were proofread and I
added a few words of description below each section title.
Version 1.4 - (January 7, 2008) - A much better Intro is now up. I went ahead
and added a Characters section as well! A few questions were added to the FAQ
section and the Basics section has been beefed up/reorganized a bit. If you
want a full file list without all the items listed along with them then visit
my blog and find the link to the right.
Version 1.5 - (January 8, 2008) - Added a Weapons section below the Enemies
section.
Version 1.6 - (January 9, 2008) - A Breakable Doors section is now included up
under the File and Item list. A few minor errors were corrected here and
there.
Version 1.6 - (January 10, 2008) - Proofread up to Nightmare 1.
Version 1.6 - (January 11, 2008) - Proofread up to Death's Door. A new "Extra
Information" section was added. It's just basically a collection of links that
might help a Resident Evil fan out with UC or the rest of the series.
Version 1.6 - (January 12, 2008) - Proofread up to Umbrella's End 3.
Version 1.6 - (January 13, 2008) - Document is fully proofread and free of
(most) mistakes.
Version 1.7 - (January 14, 2008) - Along with the document being fully
proofread, I added formatting to the boss fights in the walkthrough. More
questions were added under the F.A.Q section. Also, the "Death's Door" chapter
now has an Ada quote - I know every reader was worried about that. This guide
is finished and I'm through with updates for a while! If there are any more
updates then it will probably be character pics for the Characters section or
some info about the Special Stage.
Just because I didn't want to delete it all, here is a list of everything that
I have done since I first posted this guide up until now:
===============================================================================
Here are a few aspects that have not been added yet, need work, or that I need
to remind myself of: ("X" = DONE!)
(X) The intro needs to be redone since I don't like it... (I do now :D)
(X) Secondary Weapon pickups have not been identified in some chapters.
(X) Recommended weapons are not present for all chapters.
(X) Basics section needs to be beefed up. (still feel it could be better.)
(X) Some of the enemy names need a bit of work.
(X) Only half of the chapters are described, others will come shortly.
(X) Raccoon's Destruction 1
(X) Raccoon's Destruction 2
(X) Raccoon's Destruction 3
(X) Death's Door
(X) Fourth Survivor
(X) Umbrella's End 1
(X) Umbrella's End 2
(X) Umbrella's End 3
(X) Dark Legacy 1
(X) Dark Legacy 2
(X) Files and Items section needs some major format changing and some of those
descriptions need to be beefed up a bit since they are standalone in that
section. (nah, it looks good as it is)
(X) Weapon Info.
(X) Hard Mode S-rank tips/strategies. (CANCELED, view Egheadfool's S-rank Guide
on GameFAQs. I would only be rewording his strategies basically.)
(X) Might add a characters section. (I did.)
(X) PROOFREAD - seems like I never get to this step nowadays. (but I did this
time!)
===============================================================================
Version 1.8 - (January 28, 2008) - A Special Stage section is now up under the
Breakable Doors section. Added one more question to the F.A.Q. section
involving the character from the Special Stage. Also added the url to the
Resident Evil Reviewer's Guide pics up under the Extra Info section.
*******************************************************************************
CONTACT INFO [CI00]
*******************************************************************************
I can be reached at my email address, which is > berserker_kev(at)yahoo.com <,
so please contact me if you have any questions, comments, etc. Replace the
(at) with @. I don't mind receiving emails at all. All I ask is for you to
try to make the email decent. I realize that some people do not speak perfect
English or cannot type that well, so that doesn't really matter to me, but all
that I ask is that you try to make it readable. If you found this walkthrough
helpful, an email would be most appreciated or you could sign the guestbook on
my blog.
http://berserkersblog.blogspot.com/
*******************************************************************************
ABOUT ME [AM00]
*******************************************************************************
M E E T T H E A U T H O R B E H I N D T H I S G U I D E . . .
Well, my name is Kevin. I'm 27 years old (as of March 2007) and reside in the
US (Mississippi). I've been an avid player of video games ever since I first
got an Atari 2600 back when I was 6 years old. I've tried to escape into many
other hobbies but always wind up back to square one with video games. My
favorite gaming series is Resident Evil by far, then second would be
Castlevania. Playing just about any survival horror is a major high point in
my gaming experience.
A few of my other interests include horror movies, anime, and I'm a complete
message board junkie. You can find me at Artic Nightfall (Berserker) or the
Resident Evil or Castlevania IGN message boards (berserker_kev) from time to
time. I'm also a big fan of viewing artwork, though I can't draw myself. Even
though I can't draw, I try to be a creative person through writing, and
hopefully that reflects in my guides. My dream is to be a professional
walkthrough writer or possibly get some other writing position in the gaming
industry, but until then I will continue to publish guides for free on GameFAQs
and the various other gaming sites.
For any other info about me, please see my FAQ Writer of the Month interview at
IGN:
http://faqs.ign.com/articles/637/637797p1.html
. . . A N D H O W Y O U C A N P U R S U E H I M.
-- Berserker's Blog.
My own site with game reviews, discussions of my guides (some), and random
thoughts about video games. Feel free to post up some comments on the blog. I
don't bite... well not that much... and not too viciously...
http://berserkersblog.blogspot.com/
-- My other work can be found at both IGN and GameFAQs.
http://users.ign.com/about/berserker_kev (IGN)
http://www.gamefaqs.com/features/recognition/21400.html (GameFAQs)
*******************************************************************************
CHEAT HAPPENS FEATURED GUIDES [CH00]
*******************************************************************************
This is a list of HTML guides with pics that I have done for Cheat Happens. If
you like my work in my FAQs found around the various gaming sites then you will
find that these guides are similar.
--> Lost Planet
A frozen wasteland. An alien menace. An extreme soldier. The battlefield is
set!
http://www.cheathappens.com/features/lost_planet/lp_index.asp
--> God Hand
Have Fist Will Travel!
http://www.cheathappens.com/features/god_hand/gh_index.asp
--> Dead Rising
Freelance photojournalist Frank West + a mall full of zombies + tons of
stores where anything and everything is a weapon = the scoop of a lifetime!
http://www.cheathappens.com/features/dead_rising/dr_index.asp
--> Tomb Raider: Legend
Lady Croft's next big adventure crosses multiple platforms and delivers on all!
http://www.cheathappens.com/features/tomb_raider_legend/trl_index.asp
--> Prince of Persia: The Two Thrones
"Come, and I will tell you a tale like none you have ever heard..."
http://www.cheathappens.com/features/two_thrones/poptt_index.asp
---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ----
---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ----
^^^ ^^^
| / |
| / |
| / |
| (* /*) |
-------- --------
^^ ^^
/ /
| --------------- | /
| | | | | | | | | | |/
| | | | | | | | | /
-----------------
___ __ __ __ __ __ __ __
/ __ /__/__/ _ /__/__ / / /__/__
/__// /_ / // /_ / // / //_//_ / //
/ / //__/ _ _ //__/ _ / __ //__/ _
_____/__// _/__/__// _// /__// _/
T E A R T H R O U G H T H E G A M E!
---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ----
---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ----
Kindred Fates is an open world monster battling RPG, and a love letter to the monster battle genre. Our goal is to evolve the genre, and finally bring fans what they've been asking for.
